Yamaha RX V3900 - AV Network Receiver Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: RX V3900 - AV Network Receiver

Categorie: AV-ontvangers

Type: Handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

RX-V3900

Printed in Malaysia WP55260

RX-V3900

AV R e c e i ve r

OWNER’S MANUAL

RX-V3900_U-cv.fm Page 1 Friday, August 8, 2008 3:06 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Caution-i En

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle

is intended to alert you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

1 Read these instructions.

2 Keep these instructions.

3 Heed all warnings.

4 Follow all instructions.

5 Do not use this apparatus near water.

6 Clean only with dry cloth.

7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance

with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat

registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers)

that produce heat.

9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with

one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two

blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the

third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug

does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for

replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched

particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point

where they exit from the apparatus.

11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the

manufacturer.

12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket,

or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold

with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use

caution when moving the cart/apparatus

combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when

unused for long periods of time.

14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing

is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any

way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid

has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the

apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not

operate normally, or has been dropped.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system

installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that

provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in

particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be

connected to the grounding system of the building, as

close to the point of cable entry as practical.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions

contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications

not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority,

granted by the FCC, to use the product.

2 IMPORTANT:

When connecting this product to accessories

and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables.

Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all

installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void

your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.

3NOTE:

This product has been tested and found to comply with

the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B”

digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a

reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a

residential environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not

installed and used according to the instructions found in the users

manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other

electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is

found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by

turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the

problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by

the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or

fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the

lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of

product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please

contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe

Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by

Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

CAUTION

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

Caution-ii En

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,

dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least

30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on

the back of this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,

or transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from

cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with

high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent

condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto

this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or

splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid

may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to

this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,

etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature

inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections

are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,

possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might

damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this

unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may

cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha

will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use

of this unit with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and

outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit

during a lightning storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The

cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time

(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall

outlet.

16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power

plug can be reached easily.

17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common

operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.

18 Before moving this unit, press

MASTER ON/OFF to

release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, the

main room, Zone 2 and Zone 3 and then disconnect the AC

power plug from the AC wall outlet.

19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are:

................................AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as

sunshine, fire or like.

21 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can

cause hearing loss.

22 When replacing the batteries, be sure to use batteries of the

same type. Danger of explosion may happen if batteries are

incorrectly replaced.

Caution: Read this before operating your unit.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,

it is not disconnected from the AC power source even

if you turn off this unit by

MASTER ON/OFF. In

this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small

quantity of power.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS

Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la

plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de

la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à

la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space

below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

Caution-iii En

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of

Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:

5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535

& other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a

registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and

“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and

other countries.

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from

Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

This receiver supports network connections.

“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia

Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

x.v.Color™

“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM

Satellite Radio Inc.

This product is manufactured under license from Neural Audio

Corporation and THX Ltd. YAMAHA CORPORATION hereby

grants the user a non-exclusive, non-transferable, limited right of

use to this product under U.S.A. and foreign patent, patent

pending and other technology or trademarks owned by Neural

Audio Corporation and THX Ltd. “Neural Surround”, “Neural

Audio”, “Neural” and “NRL” are trademarks and logos owned by

Neural Audio Corporation. THX is a trademark of THX Ltd.,

which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights

reserved.

the SIRIUS dog logo, channel names and logos are trademarks of

SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.

HD Radio™ Technology Manufactured Under License From

iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and

the HD Radio logo are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital

Corp.

Rhapsody and the Rhapsody logo are registered trademarks of

RealNetworks, Inc.

Circle Surround II, Dialog Clarity, TruBass, SRS and the

symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.

Circle Surround II, Dialog Clarity and TruBass technologies are

incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.

Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows Media Audio, Windows

Media Connect and Windows Media Player are either registered

trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft corporation in the United

States and/or other countries.

iPod

1 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

English

Features ................................................................... 3

Supplied accessories .................................................. 3

Getting started ........................................................ 4

Quick start guide .................................................... 5

Connections ............................................................. 9

Optimizing the speaker setting for your

listening room.................................................... 30

Playback ................................................................ 36

Basic procedure ....................................................... 36

Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT)...... 37

Selecting the multi-channel input component ......... 37

Selecting the HDMI OUT jack ................................ 37

Using your headphones............................................ 38

Muting the audio output........................................... 38

Displaying the input source information ................. 38

Using the sleep timer ............................................... 39

Sound field programs ........................................... 40

Selecting sound field programs ............................... 40

Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode............................... 46

Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 46

Using audio features ............................................. 47

Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 47

Adjusting the tonal quality....................................... 47

Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 47

Selecting the recording source................................. 47

FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 48

Overview.................................................................. 48

FM/AM tuning operations ....................................... 48

Preset FM/AM stations ............................................ 49

Using HD Radio™ features

(U.S.A. model only)........................................... 51

Selecting HD Radio™ audio programs ................... 51

Using the iTunes Tagging feature............................ 51

Displaying HD Radio™ information....................... 52

Satellite Radio tuning ................................. 53

Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ............... 53

Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 54

XM Satellite Radio operations................................. 54

Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels ...... 55

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information...... 56

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning......................... 58

Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner .................... 58

Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™

subscription ......................................................... 59

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations ...................... 59

Setting the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™

preset channels .................................................... 61

Setting the Parental Lock......................................... 62

Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™

information .......................................................... 63

Using Bluetooth™ components ........................... 64

Pairing the Bluetooth™ receiver and your

Bluetooth component .......................................... 64

Playback of the Bluetooth™ component ................. 64

Music Content menu ............................................ 65

Music Content menu operations .............................. 65

Using iPod™ ..........................................................66

iPod menu tree ......................................................... 66

Controlling iPod™................................................... 67

Using USB and network features.........................68

USB and network menu tree.................................... 68

Navigating USB and network menus ...................... 69

Using a USB storage device or a USB portable

audio player ......................................................... 69

Using a PC server or Yamaha

MCX-2000........................................................... 70

Using the Internet Radio.......................................... 71

Using the Rhapsody® service

(U.S.A. model only) ............................................ 71

Using shortcut buttons ............................................. 72

Advanced sound configurations...........................74

Selecting decoders ................................................... 74

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu .................76

GUI menu overview ................................................ 78

GUI menu operations............................................... 79

Saving and recalling the system settings

(System Memory) ............................................101

Controlling this unit by using the Web

browser (Web Control Center) ......................105

Remote control features......................................106

Controlling this unit, a TV,

or other components .......................................... 106

Customizing the remote control ............................ 108

Setting the backlight mode of the remote

control................................................................ 109

Setting remote control codes ................................. 109

Programming codes from other remote controls ... 111

Changing source names in the display window..... 112

Macro programming features ................................ 113

Clearing configurations ......................................... 115

Simplified remote control...................................... 116

Using multi-zone configuration..........................117

Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components ... 117

Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3 ................................ 119

Advanced setup....................................................121

Using the advanced setup menu ............................ 121

Troubleshooting...................................................124

Resetting the system............................................138

Operation modes of front panel controls ..........139

Glossary................................................................140

Sound field program information......................143

Parametric equalizer information .....................144

Specifications .......................................................145

Index .....................................................................147

(at the end of this manual)

Front panel................................................................i

Remote control ....................................................... ii

Sound output in each sound field program......... iii

List of remote control codes ...................................v

Contents

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERATION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

APPENDIX

2 En

By configuring the parameters in the GUI menu of this unit, you can adjust a variety of system settings suited for your

listening environment. The following is a brief description of some of the useful menus you can configure in the GUI

menu. For more detailed information, see “Graphical user interface (GUI) menu” (page 76).

Fine adjusting the speaker settings

In case speaker settings configured by automatic setup

does not match your listening environment, you can

configure them manually.

Setup → Speaker (page 87)

Specifying the muting type

In case you do not want to fully mute audio when you

receive a call while watching your favorite TV program,

you can use this menu to specify the muting level.

Setup → Vo l um e → Muting Type (page 90)

Specifying the initial volume level

By adjusting this parameter, you can automatically control

the initial volume level regardless of the recording level of

the audio source.

Setup → Vo l um e → Initial Volume (page 90)

Adjusting the dynamic range

The dynamic range is the difference between the

minimum and maximum amplitude. The higher the

dynamic range, the more accurate the sound reproduction

for bitstream signals. You can adjust the dynamic range

for speakers and headphones individually. Also, you can

use the adaptive dynamic range control feature to adjust

the dynamic range automatically in conjunction with the

volume level.

Setup → Sound → Dynamic Range (page 90)

Setup → Vo l um e → Adaptive DRC (page 89)

Adjusting the audio and video synchronization

Sometimes, depending on your video source component,

video is delayed relative to audio due to processing

problems. In this case, you need to manually adjust the

audio delay to keep it synchronized with the video. If you

connect the video source component to this unit using an

HDMI connection and your component supports the

LIPSYNC feature, you can adjust the audio/video

synchronization automatically.

Setup → Sound → Lipsync (page 92)

Changing input/output assignment

In case the initial input/output assignments do not

correspond to your needs, you can rearrange them

according to your component to be connected to this unit.

You can also edit the input name to be displayed in the

front panel or in the GUI screen as necessary.

Setup → Option → I/O Assignment (page 98)

Setup → Option → Input Rename (page 98)

Fixing the volume difference between input

sources

The sound output level may vary depending on the audio

source components connected to this unit. In this case, you

can reduce or increase the output level of each input

source using this feature.

Input Select → (input source) → (submenu) →

Volume Trim (page 85)

Setting the background video for discrete multi-

channel input

If you want to enjoy video images in combination with

discrete multi-channel audio input, configure this setting

to specify the video input source. For example, to view

DVD video images while listening to the music sources

from a multi-format player or an external decoder, set this

setting to “DVD”.

Input Select → MULTI CH → (submenu) → BGV

(page 86)

Adjusting the brightness of the front panel

display

You can make the front panel display darker or brighter by

configuring this setting.

Setup → Option → Display Set → Front Panel Display →

Dimmer (page 98)

Turning on or off the short message display

Each time you operate this unit using controls on the front

panel or remote control keys, this unit displays short

messages on the video monitor. If you want to turn off the

short message display, select “Off” in this setting (Initial

factory setting is “On”).

Setup → Option → Display Set → Short Message

(page 98)

Setting the amount of time to display GUI screen

information

You can set the amount of time to display playback

information in the GUI screen after you perform a certain

operation.

Setup → Option → Display Set → Playback Screen

(page 98)

Protecting the setup values

After you have configured the sound field program

parameters and other system settings, you can use this

feature to prevent accidental changes to those setup

values.

Setup → Option → Memory Guard (page 97)

What you can do with the GUI menu

FEATURES

3 En

INTRODUCTION

English

Built-in 7-channel power amplifier

◆

Minimum RMS output power

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8

)

Front: 140 W + 140 W

Center: 140 W

Surround: 140 W + 140 W

Surround back: 140 W + 140 W

Various input/output connectors

◆

HDMI (IN x 4, OUT x 2), Component video (IN x 3, OUT x 1), S-

video (IN x 6, OUT x 3), Composite video (IN x 6, OUT x 5),

Coaxial digital audio (IN x 3), Optical digital audio (IN x 5, OUT x

2), Analog audio (IN x 10, OUT x 3)

◆

Speaker out (7-channel), Pre out (7-channel), Subwoofer out,

Presence out, Zone 2/Zone 3 out

◆

Discrete multi-channel input (6 or 8-channel)

Sound field programs

◆

Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound fields

◆

CINEMA DSP 3D

◆

Compressed Music Enhancer mode

◆

Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆

SILENT CINEMA

Digital audio decoders

◆

Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus decoder

◆

DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio decoder

◆

Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder

◆

DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS 96/24 decoder

◆

Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder

◆

DTS NEO:6 decoder

◆

Neural-THX Surround decoder

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

◆

SRS Circle Surround II decoder (U.S.A. model only)

Radio tuners

◆

FM/AM tuning capability, 40-station preset tuning

◆

HD Radio™ digital broadcast reception capability (U.S.A. model

only)

◆

XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using XM Mini-Tuner and

Home Dock, sold separately)

◆

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning capability (using SiriusConnect

tuner, sold separately)

HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)

◆

HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or

high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio based on

HDMI version 1.3a (HDMI is licensed by HDMI Licensing, LLC.)

– Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync) information

capability

– Deep Color video signal (30/36 bit) transmission capability

– “x.v.Color” video signal transmission capability

– High refresh rate and high resolution video signals capability

– High definition digital audio format signals capability

◆

HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System) licensed

by Digital Content Protection, LLC.

◆

Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion (composite video

↔

S-video

↔

component video

→

HDMI digital video) capability

for monitor out

◆

Analog and HDMI video up-scaling: 480i(576i)

→

480p(576p)/

720p/1080i/1080p, 480p(576p)

→

720p/1080i/1080p, 720p

→

1080i/1080p, 1080i

→

720p/1080p

DOCK terminal

◆

DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as

YDS-11, sold separately) or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such

as YBA-10, sold separately)

USB and network features

◆

USB port to connect a USB storage device, USB Hard disc

drive, or USB portable audio player

◆

NETWORK port to connect a PC and Yamaha MCX-2000 or

access the Internet Radio and Rhapsody

(U.S.A. model

only) via LAN

◆

DHCP automatic or manual network configuration

◆

Web control capability of this unit by using a Web browser

Automatic speaker setup features

◆

Advanced YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) for

automatic speaker setup

◆

Multi-point measurement feature for multiple listening positions

◆

Parametric equalizer select feature

Other features

◆

192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

◆

GUI (graphic user interface) menus that allow you to optimize this

unit to suit your individual audiovisual system

◆

Music Content menu that allows you to easily navigate music content

menus of your iPod, USB component, Internet Radio, etc.

◆

PURE DIRECT mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources

◆

Adaptive dynamic range controlling capability

◆

Adaptive DSP effect level controlling capability

◆

Remote control with preset remote control codes, learning and macro

capability

◆

ZONE 2/ZONE 3 custom installation facility

◆

Zone switching capability between the main zone and

ZONE 2/ZONE 3 using ZONE CONTROLS

◆

System Memory capability for saving and recalling multiple system

parameter settings

◆

Sleep timer for each zone

Check that you received all of the following parts.

❏ Remote control

❏ Simplified remote control

❏ Batteries (4) (AAA, LR03, UM-4)

❏ Power cable (Two for Asia model)

❏ Optimizer microphone

❏ AM loop antenna

❏ Indoor FM antenna

Features

Supplied accessories

GETTING STARTED

4 En

■ Installing batteries in the remote control

1 Take off the battery compartment cover.

2 Insert the four supplied batteries

(AAA, LR03, UM-4) according to the polarity

markings (+ and –) on the inside of the

battery compartment.

3 Snap the battery compartment cover back

into place.

• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following

conditions:

– the operation range of the remote control decreases.

– the transmit indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as

these different types of batteries may have the same shape and

color.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid

touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with

clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before

installing new batteries.

• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose

of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.

• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2

minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,

the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory

is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code

and program any acquired functions that may have been

cleared.

■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models only)

Getting started

About this manual

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the

buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote

control. In case the button names differ between the front

panel and the remote control, the button name on the

remote control is given in parentheses.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and

specifications are subject to change in part as a result of

improvements, etc. In case of differences between the

manual and product, the product has priority.

•“

MASTER ON/OFF” or “

DVD” (example)

indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the

remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at

the end of this manual for the information about each

position of the parts.

Notes

Caution

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this

unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE

plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet.

Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may

cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire

hazard.

Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or

counterclockwise to the correct position using a straight

slot screwdriver.

Voltages are as follows:

........................AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

230-

240V

VOLTAGE

SELECTOR

Voltage indication

QUICK START GUIDE

5 En

INTRODUCTION

English

The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy DVD movie playback in your home theater.

In these steps, you need the following supplied

accessories.

❏ Power cable

The following items are not included in the package of this

unit.

❏ Speakers

❏ Front speaker ......................................x 2

❏ Center speaker ...................................x 1

❏ Surround speaker ...............................x 4

Select magnetically shielded speakers. The

minimum required speakers are two front speakers.

The priority of the requirement of other speakers is

as follows:

1. Two surround speakers

2. One center speaker

3. One (or two) surround back speaker(s)

❏ Active subwoofer ....................................x 1

Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA

input jack.

❏ Speaker cable ..........................................x 7

❏ Subwoofer cable .....................................x 1

Select a monaural RCA cable.

❏ DVD player ...............................................x 1

Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital

audio output jack and composite video output

jack.

❏ Video monitor...........................................x 1

Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector

equipped with a composite video input jack.

❏ Video cable ..............................................x 2

Select RCA composite video cables.

❏ Digital coaxial audio cable .....................x 1

Quick start guide

Front right

speaker

Subwoofer

Surround back

right speaker

Surround left

speaker

Front left

speaker

Surround back left

speaker

Surround right

speaker

Center

speaker

Video monitor

DVD player

Enjoy DVD playback!

Step 1: Set up your speakers

☞

P. 6

Step 2: Connect your DVD player

and other components

Step 3: Turn on the power and

start playback

☞

P. 7

☞

P. 8

Preparation: Check the items

Quick start guide

6 En

Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this

unit.

1 Place your speakers and subwoofer in the

room.

2 Connect speaker cables to each speaker.

3 Connect each speaker cable to the

corresponding speaker terminal of this unit.

1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are

unplugged from the AC wall outlets.

2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables

together to prevent short circuits.

3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other.

4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal

part of this unit.

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel

(R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.

Front speakers and center speaker

Surround and surround back speakers

4 Connect the subwoofer cable to the

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack of this unit and

the input jack of the subwoofer.

Step 1: Set up your speakers

AC IN

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

SPEAKERS

CENTERSURROUND BACK/BI-AMP PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3

FRONT SURROUND ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SINGLE

NETWORK

ANTENNA

GND

75Ω UNBAL.

VIDEO

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

REMOTE

PHONO

GND

CD TV

HDMI

COMPONENT VIDEO

AUDIO

DOCK

SIRIUS

DIGITAL INPUT

MULTI CH INPUT

PRE OUT

TRIGGER OUT

RS-232C

DIGITAL OUTPUT

ZONE OUT

SUB SUR.BACK

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

FRONT(6CH)

FRONT

SURROUND

PRESENCE

SUR.BACK/

SINGLE(SB)

ZONE 2

ZONE 3 ZONE

VIDEO

COAXIAL

BD/

HD DVD

CBL/

SAT

MD/

CD-R

DVD DVR

OPTICAL

987

321

(8CH)

DVD

OUT(REC)

IN(PLAY)

MD/CD-R

BD/HD DVD

VCR

DVR

CBL/SAT

OUT OUT

ININ

BD/HD DVD DVD CBL/SAT

MONITOR OUT

IN 1 2

OUT IN OUT

DVR

CBL/

SAT

OUT

A B C

IN1

IN3

DVD

BD/

HD DVD

IN2

IN4

SP1

SP2

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT Speaker terminals

12 3 4

To the front left

speaker

To the front right

speaker

Loosen Insert

To the center

speaker

Tighten

To the surround

back

right speaker

To the surround

left speaker

To the surround back

left speaker

To the surround right

speaker

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack

Input jack

AV receiverSubwoofer

Subwoofer cable

Quick start guide

7 En

INTRODUCTION

English

1 Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the

digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD

player and the DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL

jack of this unit.

2 Connect the video cable to the composite

video output jack of your DVD player and

DVD VIDEO jack of this unit.

3 Connect the video cable to the VIDEO

MONITOR OUT jack of this unit and the video

input jack of your video monitor.

4 Connect the supplied power cable to this unit

and then plug of the power cable and other

components into the AC wall outlet.

For details about connecting the power cable, see page 25.

■ For other connections

• Other speaker combinations ☞ P. 12

• Information on jacks and cable plugs ☞ P. 15

• Information on HDMI™ ☞ P. 16

• TV monitor or projector ☞ P. 18

• Other components ☞ P. 19

• External amplifier ☞ P. 21

• Multi-format player or external

decoder ☞ P. 22

• Yamaha iPod universal dock or

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver ☞ P. 22

•FM/AM antennas ☞ P. 24

• XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ☞ P. 53

• SiriusConnect tuner ☞ P. 58

•Network ☞ P. 23

•USB device ☞ P. 23

Step 2: Connect your DVD player

and other components

AC IN

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

SPEAKERS

CENTERSURROUND BACK/BI-AMP PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3

FRONT SURROUND ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SINGLE

NETWORK

ANTENNA

GND

75Ω UNBAL.

VIDEO

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

REMOTE

PHONO

GND

CD TV

HDMI

COMPONENT VIDEO

AUDIO

DOCK

SIRIUS

DIGITAL INPUT

MULTI CH INPUT

PRE OUT

TRIGGER OUT

RS-232C

DIGITAL OUTPUT

ZONE OUT

SUB SUR.BACK

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

FRONT(6CH)

FRONT

SURROUND

PRESENCE

SUR.BACK/

SINGLE(SB)

ZONE 2

ZONE 3 ZONE

VIDEO

COAXIAL

BD/

HD DVD

CBL/

SAT

MD/

CD-R

DVD DVR

OPTICAL

987

321

(8CH)

DVD

OUT(REC)

IN(PLAY)

MD/CD-R

BD/HD DVD

VCR

DVR

CBL/SAT

OUT OUT

ININ

BD/HD DVD DVD CBL/SAT

MONITOR OUT

IN 1 2

OUT IN OUT

DVR

CBL/

SAT

OUT

A B C

IN1

IN3

DVD

BD/

HD DVD

IN2

IN4

SP1

SP2

Make sure that this unit and the DVD

player are unplugged from the AC

wall outlets.

VIDEO MONITOR OUTDVD VIDEO

DVD DIGITAL INPUT

COAXIAL

Digital coaxial

audio output

jack

Digital coaxial audio

cable

DVD DIGITAL INPUT

COAXIAL jack

DVD player

AV receiver

Composite video

output jack

Video cable

DVD VIDEO jack

DVD player

AV receiver

Video monitor

AV receiver

Video cable

VIDEO MONITOR

OUT jack

Video input jack

Quick start guide

8 En

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press AMASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON

position on the front panel.

3 Rotate the

INPUT selector to set the input

source to “DVD”.

4 Start playback of the desired DVD on your

player.

5 Rotate

VOLUME to adjust the volume.

6 To set this unit to the standby mode, press

BMAIN ZONE ON/OFF.

For details about turning on/off this unit and the standby

mode, see page 26.

■ For other operations

• Optimizing the speaker parameters

automatically ☞ P. 30

• Basic playback operations ☞ P. 36

• Sound field programs ☞ P. 40

• Pure high-fidelity sounds ☞ P. 47

• FM/AM radio tuning ☞ P. 48

• XM Satellite Radio tuning ☞ P. 53

• SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning ☞ P. 58

• Bluetooth component playback ☞ P. 64

• iPod playback ☞ P. 66

• Playback via USB or network ☞ P. 68

Step 3: Turn on the power and start

playback

Check the type of the connected speakers.

If the speakers are 6-ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER

IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (page 26).

You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers

(page 121).

9 En

PREPARATION

English

The RS-232C terminal is a control expansion terminal for

factory use only. Consult your dealer for details.

Connections

Rear panel

AC IN

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

SPEAKERS

CENTERSURROUND BACK/BI-AMP PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3

FRONT SURROUND ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SINGLE

NETWORK

ANTENNA

GND

75Ω UNBAL.

VIDEO

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

REMOTE

PHONO

GND

CD TV

HDMI

COMPONENT VIDEO

AUD IO

DOCK

SIRIUS

DIGITAL INPUT

MULTI CH INPUT

PRE OUT

TRIGGER OUT

RS-232C

DIGITAL OUTPUT

ZONE OUT

SUB SUR.BACK

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

FRONT(6CH)

FRONT

SURROUND

PRESENCE

SUR.BACK/

SINGLE(SB)

ZONE 2

ZONE 3 ZONE

VIDEO

COAXIAL

BD/

HD DVD

CBL/

SAT

MD/

CD-R

DVD DVR

OPTICAL

987

321

(8CH)

DVD

OUT(REC)

IN(PLAY)

MD/CD-R

BD/HD DVD

VCR

DVR

CBL/SAT

OUT OUT

ININ

BD/HD DVD DVD CBL/SAT

MONITOR OUT

IN 1 2

OUT IN OUT

DVR

CBL/

SAT

OUT

A B C

IN1

IN3

DVD

BD/

HD DVD

IN2

IN4

SP1

SP2

BCA0

231456 78

Name Page

1 HDMI jacks 16

2 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks 15

3 Audio component jacks 15

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks 22, 117

4 Video component jacks 15

5 ANTENNA terminals 24

6 NETWORK port 23

7 VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models only)

8 AC IN 25

AC OUTLET(S) 25

9 DOCK terminal 22

0 XM jack (U.S.A. and Canada models only) 53

SIRIUS jack

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

A DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jacks 15

B TRIGGER OUT jacks 119

C RS-232C terminal —

D MULTI CH INPUT jacks 22

PRE OUT jacks 21

ZONE OUT jacks 117

Speaker terminals 12

Note

Name Page

10 En

Connections

The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend.

• 7.1-channel speaker layout is highly recommended for playback of the high definition digital audio sources (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD

Master Audio, etc.) with sound field programs.

• We recommend that you add the presence speakers for the effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program.

7.1-channel speaker layout

6.1-channel speaker layout

5.1-channel speaker layout

Placing speakers

SBR

SBL

60˚

30˚

SBR

SBL

80˚

30 cm (12 in) or more

60˚

30˚

80˚

60˚

30˚

80˚

11 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

■ Speaker types

Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)

The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus

effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from

the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker

from each side of the video monitor should be the same.

Center speaker (C)

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds

(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical

to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,

however, are obtained with the full system.

Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)

The surround speakers are used for effect and surround

sounds.

For 5.1-channel speaker layout, place these speakers

farther back compared with the placement in the 7.1-

channel speaker layout.

Surround back left and right speakers (SBL and

SBR) /Surround back speaker (SB)

The surround back speakers supplement the surround

speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back

transitions.

For 6.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and

right channel signals are mixed down and output at the

single surround back speaker by configuring the

“Surround Back” setting (

page 88

For 5.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and

right channel signals are output at the surround left and

right speakers by configuring the “Surround Back” setting

(

page 88

Subwoofer (SW)

The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as

the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from

any or all channels, but also for reproducing the high

fidelity sound of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel

included in bitstreams and multi-channel PCM sources.

The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because

low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better

to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it

slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall

reflections.

■ Presence left and right speakers (PL and

PR)

The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front

speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the sound

field programs (page 40). We recommend that you use the

presence speakers especially for the CINEMA DSP sound

field programs. To use the presence speakers, connect the

speakers to SP1 speaker terminals and then set

“

Front

Presence

”

“

Yes

”

(page 88).

For other speaker combinations

You can enjoy multi-channel sources with sound field

programs by using a speaker combination other than

the 7.1/6.1/5.1-channel speaker combinations.

Use the automatic setup feature (page 30) or set the

“Speaker” parameters (

page 87

). to output the surround

sounds at the connected speakers.

PRPL

1.8 m (6 ft)

0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)

1.8 m (6 ft)

12 En

Connections

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,

this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately.

• A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a

stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the

plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.

• You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, however they do not output sound simultaneously. This unit

automatically switches the presence speakers and surround back speakers depending on the input sources and the selected sound field

programs.

■ 7.1-channel speaker connection

Connecting speakers

Caution

• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (page 26).

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could

damage this unit and/or speakers.

• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the

speakers away from the monitor.

• If you are to use 6-ohm speakers, be sure to set “SPEAKER IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (page 26).

You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers (page 121).

Notes

SPEAKERS

CENTERSURROUND BACK/BI-AMP PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3

FRONT SURROUND ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SINGLE

SUB

WOOFER

SP1

SP2

Front speakers

Surround speakers

Presence speakers

(page 11) or

Zone 2/Zone 3

speakers

(page 117)

Subwoofer

Right

Center speaker

Surround back speakers

Left

Left Left

RightRight

Zone 2/Zone 3 speakers

(page 117)

13 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

■ 6.1-channel speaker connection

■ 5.1-channel speaker connection

Surround back speaker

SPEAKERS

CENTERPRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3

FRONT SURROUND ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SINGLE

SUB

WOOFER

SP1

SP2

Surround speakers

Front speakers

Presence speakers

(page 11) or

Zone 2/Zone 3 speakers

(page 117)

Subwoofer

Center speaker

Left

Right

Zone 2/Zone 3

speakers

(page 117)

SPEAKERS

CENTERSURROUND BACK/BI-AMP PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3

FRONT SURROUND ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SINGLE

SUB

WOOFER

SP1

SP2

Surround speakersFront speakers

Subwoofer

Center speaker

Left

LeftRight Right

Zone 2/Zone 3

speakers

(page 117)

Front speakers for the

bi-amplification

connections

(page 14)

Presence speakers

(page 11) or

Zone 2/Zone 3 speakers

(page 117)

14 En

Connections

■ Connecting the speaker cable

1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of

insulation from the end of each speaker

cable and then twist the exposed wires of the

cable together to prevent short circuits.

2 Loosen the knob, insert one bare wire into

the hole and then tighten the knob.

■ Connecting the banana plug

(Except U.K., Europe, Asia and Korea

models)

Tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug

into the end of the terminal.

■ Using bi-amplification connections

You can make bi-amplification connections to one speaker

system which supports bi-amplification connection as

shown below. To activate the connections, configure the

“BI-AMP” setting (page 122).

When you make the conventional connection with the speakers,

make sure that the shorting bars are put into the terminals of the

speakers appropriately. Refer to the instruction manuals of the

speakers for details.

10 mm (0.4 in)

Loosen Insert Tighten

Banana plug

Caution

Remove the shorting bars or bridges of your speakers to

separate the LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter)

crossovers.

Note

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP

FRONT

SINGLE

This unit

LeftRight

Front speakers

15 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

This unit has three types of audio jacks, three types of video jacks and HDMI jacks. You can choose the connection

method depending on the component to be connected.

■ Audio jacks

AUDIO jacks

For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left

and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the

right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.

COAXIAL jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital

audio cables.

OPTICAL jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital

audio cables.

You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the

COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals

input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are

compatible with up to 96-kHz sampling digital signals.

■ Video jacks

VIDEO jacks

For conventional composite video signals transmitted via

composite video cables.

S VIDEO jacks

For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and

chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate

wires of S-video cables.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

For component video signals, separated into the

luminance (Y) and chrominance (P

B, PR) video signals

transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.

This unit is equipped with the video conversion function.

(page 17)

Information on jacks and cable plugs

Note

COAXIAL

DIGITAL

AUDIO

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

Left and right

analog audio

cable plugs

Optical

digital

audio cable

plug

Coaxial

digital audio

cable plug

(Red)(White) (Orange)

VIDEO S VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

Composite

video cable

plug

S-video

cable plug

Component

video cable

plugs

(Yellow) (Green) (Blue) (Red)

16 En

Connections

This unit has four HDMI input jacks and two HDMI output jacks for digital audio and video signal input/output.

■ HDMI jack and cable plug

• We recommend that you use a commercially available HDMI cable

shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.

• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack

↔

DVI-D jack) to connect this

unit to other DVI components.

• You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection

(page 38).

• If you set “Mode” in “Standby Through” to “Last” or “Fix”, this

unit allows the HDMI signals input at an HDMI IN jack to pass

through this unit and output at an HDMI OUT jack (page 94).

• This unit is equipped with two HDMI OUT jacks. You can select

the active HDMI OUT jack(s) (page 37).

• This unit is equipped with the video conversion function (page 17).

• Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of

the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jacks of

this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt

playback or cause noise.

• The HDMI OUT jacks output the audio signals input at the

HDMI input jacks only.

• If you turn off the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT

jacks via a DVI connection, the connection may fail.

■ HDMI signal compatibility with this unit

Audio signals

• If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio

signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio sources

with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the following

connections:

– multi-channel analog audio input (page 22)

– DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL (or COAXIAL)

• Refer to the instruction manuals of the input source component,

and set the component appropriately.

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video and

audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD

player.

• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or

DVI components.

• To decode the audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input

source component appropriately so that the component outputs the

audio bitstream signals directly (does not decode the bitstream

signals on the component).

• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for

example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet) of

Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not play back the audio

commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD contents.

Video signals

This unit is compatible with the video signals of the

following resolutions:

– 480i/60 Hz

– 576i/50 Hz

– 480p/60 Hz

– 576p/50 Hz

– 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

– 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

– 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24Hz

Compatibility with Deep Color and x.v.Color

video signals

This unit accepts Deep Color (30 or 36-bit) and x.v.Color

video signals. To output those video signals from the

HDMI OUT jacks without any processing, set “HDMI `

HDMI” (page 94)” to “Through”.

If the video monitor is not compatible with Deep Color or

x.v.Color video signals, the video source may not be played

back correctly.

■ Default input assignment of HDMI input

jacks

Information on HDMI™

Notes

Audio signal

types

Audio signal

formats

Compatible

media

2ch Linear

PCM

2ch, 32-192 kHz,

16/20/24 bit

CD, DVD-Video,

DVD-Audio, etc.

Multi-ch

Linear PCM

8ch, 32-192 kHz,

16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, etc.

DSD 2/5.1ch,

2.8224 MHz,1 bit

SA-CD, etc.

Bitstream Dolby Digital,

DTS

DVD-Video, etc.

Bitstream (High

definition audio)

Dolby TrueHD,

Dolby Digital Plus,

DTS-HD Master

Audio, DTS-HD

High Resolution

Audio

Blu-ray Disc,

HD DVD, etc.

HDMI

HDMI cable plug

Notes

Note

HDMI input jack Assigned input source

IN1 BD/HD DVD

IN2 DVD

IN3 CBL/SAT

IN4 DVR

17 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

■ Audio signal flow

Only the HDMI input jacks support DSD, Dolby TrueHD,

Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio and DTS-HD High

Resolution Audio signal inputs.

■ Video signal flow

• Analog-to-HDMI video conversion is always possible unless

video signals are being input at the HDMI input jacks or 1080p-

resolution analog video signals are being input.

• To set the analog-to-analog video conversion or change the

other video settings, configure the “Video” parameters

(page 93).

• If different analog video signals are input concurrently, the

following priority order will be applied:

(1) COMPONENT VIDEO, (2) S VIDEO, (3) VIDEO

Audio and video signal flow

Note

DIGITAL AUDIO

(OPTICAL)

DIGITAL AUDIO

(COAXIAL)

HDMI

AUDIO

OutputInput

Analog

Digital

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

Through

OutputInput

Video

conversion

18 En

Connections

If you turn off the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT

jacks via a DVI connection, the connection may fail. In this

case, the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly.

To select the types of the audio signals output at the HDMI

OUT jacks, configure the “Audio Output” setting (page 95).

Connecting a TV monitor or projector

Note

Make sure that this unit and other

components are unplugged from the

AC wall outlets.

VIDEO

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

HDMI

COMPONENT VIDEO

AUD IO

DIGITAL INPUT

MONITOR OUT

OUT

PRPB

L R

Optical outComponent video in

Video inAudio out

S-video in

HDMI in

Recommended connections Alternative connections

HDMI in

Projector

19 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

■ Connecting audio and video components

This unit has three types of audio jacks, three types of video jacks and HDMI jacks. You can choose the connection

method depending on the component to be connected.

HDMI can transmit both digital audio and video over a single HDMI cable.

Connection example (connecting a DVD player)

Connecting other components

VIDEO

PHONO

GND

CD TV

HDMI

COMPONENT VIDEO

COAXIAL

BD/

HD DVD

CBL/

SAT

MD/

CD-R

DVD DVR

OPTICAL

987

321

DVD

OUT(REC)

IN(PLAY)

MD/CD-R

BD/HD DVD

VCR

DVR

CBL/SAT

OUT OUT

ININ

BD/HD DVD DVD CBL/SAT

DVR

CBL/

SAT

A B C

IN1

IN3

DVD

BD/

HD DVD

IN2

IN4

HDMI jacks

COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO S VIDEO

AUDIO COAXIAL OPTICAL

Video jacks

Audio jacks

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

DIGITAL INPUT

COAXIAL

DVD

OPTICAL

DVD

HDMI

DVD

IN2

L R

PRPBY

DVD player

HDMI out

Coaxial out

Component out

S-video

out

Video out

Optical out

Audio out

Recommended

connections

Alternative

connections

20 En

Connections

Jacks used for audio and video connections

Recommended connections are indicated by boldface. When connecting a recording component, you need to make

additional connections for recording (signal transmission from this unit to the recording component).

You can also use the VIDEO AUX jacks (page 24) on the front panel to connect an additional component.

Make sure that this unit and other

components are unplugged from the

AC wall outlets.

Component Signal type

Jacks to connect

On component On this unit

Blu-ray Disc or HD

DVD player

Audio/Video HDMI out HDMI IN1 (BD/HD DVD)

Audio Optical out OPTICAL (BD/HD DVD)

Audio out (analog) AUDIO (BD/HD DVD)

Video Component out COMPONENT VIDEO (BD/HD DVD)

S-video out S VIDEO (BD/HD DVD)

Video out (composite) VIDEO (BD/HD DVD)

DVD player Audio/Video HDMI out HDMI IN2 (DVD)

Audio Optical out OPTICAL (DVD)

Coaxial out COAXIAL (DVD)

Audio out (analog) AUDIO (DVD)

Video Component out COMPONENT VIDEO (DVD)

S-video out S VIDEO (DVD)

Video out (composite) VIDEO (DVD)

Set-top box Audio/Video HDMI out HDMI IN3 (CBL/SAT)

Audio Optical out OPTICAL (CBL/SAT)

Audio out (analog) AUDIO (CBL/SAT)

Video Component out COMPONENT VIDEO (CBL/SAT)

S-video out S VIDEO (CBL/SAT)

Video out (composite) VIDEO (CBL/SAT)

DVD recorder Audio/Video HDMI out HDMI IN4 (DVR)

Audio Coaxial out COAXIAL (DVR)

Audio out (analog) AUDIO (DVR IN)

Video S-video out S VIDEO (DVR IN)

Video out (composite) VIDEO (DVR IN)

Audio recording Optical in OPTICAL (DVR)

Audio in (analog) AUDIO (DVR OUT)

Video recording S-video in S VIDEO (DVR OUT)

Video in (composite) VIDEO (DVR OUT)

21 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

• Be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV if the video conversion is disabled. For example, if you

connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect other components to the VIDEO jacks.

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright

laws.

• If you connect your DVD player to both the OPTICAL and COAXIAL jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the COAXIAL

jack.

• GUI signals are not output at the DVR OUT and VCR OUT jacks and cannot be recorded.

• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default one assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT

jack, configure the “I/O Assignment” setting (page 98).

• When connecting a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge to the PHONO jack, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head

amplifier.

• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal.

■ Connecting an external amplifier

This unit has more than enough power for any home use.

However, if you want to add more power to the speaker

output or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an

external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Each PRE OUT

jack outputs the same channel signals as the

corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.

• When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not

make any connections to the SPEAKERS terminals.

• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on

the subwoofer.

[1] CENTER PRE OUT jack

Center channel output jack.

[2] FRONT PRE OUT jacks

Front channel output jacks.

[3] SURROUND PRE OUT jacks

Surround channel output jacks.

VCR Audio Audio out (analog) AUDIO (VCR IN)

Video S-video out S VIDEO (VCR IN)

Video out (composite) VIDEO (VCR IN)

Audio recording Audio in (analog) AUDIO (VCR OUT)

Video recording S-video in S VIDEO (VCR OUT)

Video in (composite) VIDEO (VCR OUT)

CD player Audio Coaxial out COAXIAL (CD)

Audio out (analog) AUDIO (CD)

MD or CD recorder Audio Audio out (analog) AUDIO (MD/CD-R IN)

Audio recording Optical in OPTICAL (MD/CD-R)

Audio in (analog) AUDIO (MD/CD-R OUT)

Turntable Audio Audio out (analog) AUDIO (PHONO)

Notes

Component Signal type

Jacks to connect

On component On this unit

Notes

PRE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND

PRESENCE

SUR.BACK/

SINGLE(SB)

[1] [2]

[5]

[3] [4]

22 En

Connections

[4] SUR.BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks

Surround back or presence channel output jacks. When

you only connect one external amplifier for the surround

back channel, connect it to the SINGLE (SB) jack.

• To output surround back channel signals at these jacks, set

“Front Presence” to “None” and “Surround Back” to any

parameter except “None” (page 88).

• To output presence channel signals at these jacks, set “Front

Presence” to “Yes” and “Surround Back” to “None” (page 88).

[5] SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack

Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier.

■ Connecting a multi-format player or an

external decoder

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks

(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R and

SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a

multi-format player, external decoder, etc. If you set

“Input Channels” to “8ch” (page 86), the analog audio

input jacks assigned as “Front Input” can be used as the

front channel input jacks.

• When you select “MULTI CH” as the input source, the digital

sound field processor is automatically disabled.

• Since this unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers, connect at

least a 5.1-channel speaker system when using this feature.

* The analog audio input jacks assigned as “Front Input” in

“MULTI CH” (page 86).

■ Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal

dock or Bluetooth wireless audio

receiver

This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear

panel that allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal

dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) or Bluetooth

wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately).

Connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth

receiver to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this

unit using its dedicated cable.

■ Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

When the components are the Yamaha products and have

the capability of the transmission of the remote control

signals, connect the REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT

jacks to the remote control input and output jack with the

monaural analog mini cable as follows.

* You can connect another set of infrared signal receiver and

Yamaha component to the REMOTE IN/OUT 2 jacks same as

the REMOTE IN/OUT 1 jacks.

Notes

MULTI CH INPUT

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

CENTER

FRONT(6CH)

SURROUND

SUR.BACK

(8CH)

TAPE

MD/

(C)

()

LRLR

Multi-format player/

External decoder

Front out (8ch)

Subwoofer out

Center out

Surround out

Front out (6ch)

Surround back

out (8ch)

DOCK

Yamaha iPod universal dock or

Bluetooth wireless audio

receiver

REMOTE

IN 1 2

OUT IN OUT

Yamaha

component

(CD or DVD

player, etc.)

Remote

control in

Remote

control out

Infrared signal

receiver or

Yamaha

component

23 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

■ Connecting to the network

To connect this unit to your network, plug one end of a network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable) into the

NETWORK port of this unit, and plug the other end into one of the LAN ports on your router that supports the DHCP

(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server function. The following diagram shows a connection example where this

unit is connected to one of the LAN ports on a 4-port router. To enjoy music files saved on your PC and Yamaha MCX-

2000, access the Internet Radio, or control this unit by using your PC, each device must be connected properly in the

network.

• You must use an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable (commercially available) to connect a network hub or router and this unit.

• If the DHCP server function on your router is disabled, you need to configure the network settings manually (page 95).

• Yamaha MCX-2000, MCX-A10 and MCX-C15 may not be for sale in some locations.

■ Connecting a USB storage device

Connect a USB memory device or USB portable audio player to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. For

information about the USB storage devices supported by this unit, see page 69.

Notes

NETWORK

LAN

WAN

Router

Modem

Yamaha MCX-2000

Internet

Yamaha MCX-C15

Yamaha MCX-A10

(with optional

speakers)

Network cable

INFO

USB

USB memory device or USB

portable audio player

24 En

Connections

Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a

game console or a video camera to this unit. To reproduce

the source signals input at these jacks, select “V-AUX” as

the input source.

Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this

unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient

signal strength.

• The types of the supplied antennas and the FM antenna terminal

of this unit are different depending on the models.

• (Asia and General models only) Be sure to set the tuner

frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area

(page 122).

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

• If you experience poor reception quality, install an outdoor

antenna. Consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or

service center about outdoor antennas.

Assembling the supplied AM loop antenna

Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the

front panel

Caution

Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other

components before making connections.

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

INFO

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MULTI ZONE

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO

PHONES

BAND

CATEGORYPRESET/TUNI NG/CH MONO

STEREO/

MODE

MEMORY

STRAIGHT

MENUREC OUT

AUDIO SELECT/

CONTROL

TONE

ENTER

ON/OFF

USB

OPTICAL

AUDIO

S VIDEO

VIDEO

Game console or

video camera

S-Video output

Video output

Audio

output

Optical output

Connecting the FM and AM

antennas

Notes

ANTENNA

GND

75Ω UNBAL.

Indoor FM

antenna

(supplied)

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum

interference, connect the antenna GND

terminal to a good earth ground. A good

earth ground is a metal stake driven into

moist earth.

AM loop

antenna

(supplied)

Outdoor AM antenna

Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 33 ft)

vinyl-covered wire extended

outdoors from a window.

25 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

(U.S.A. model)

Connecting the wire of the AM loop antenna

The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity

and you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND

terminal.

■ Connecting the AC power cable

Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC inlet after

all other connections are complete, then plug the AC

power cable into an AC wall outlet.

(Asia model only) Select one of the supplied power cables

suitable for the type of AC wall outlet in your location before

plugging this unit into the AC wall outlet.

■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)

U.K. and Australia models..................................... 1 outlet

Korea model ............................................................... None

Other models ......................................................... 2 outlets

Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected

components. Connect the power cable of your other

components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is

supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to

these outlet(s) is cut off when this unit is turned off. For

information on the maximum power or the total power

consumption of the components that can be connected to

these outlet(s), see “Specifications” (page 145).

The rated power of the component (such as a subwoofer)

connected to these outlet(s) cannot exceed the maximum power

supplied by this unit.

Press and hold

Insert

Release

Connecting the power cable

Note

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However, the stored data will be lost in case the power

cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the

power supply is cut off for more than one week.

AC IN

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

To the AC wall outlet

26 En

Connections

1 Make sure this unit is turned off.

2 Press and hold NSTRAIGHT on the front

panel and then press

MASTER ON/OFF

inward to the ON position.

This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu

appears in the front panel display.

3 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector to select

“SPEAKER IMP.”.

4 Press

STRAIGHT repeatedly to select

“6Ω MIN”.

5 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector to select

“LANGUAGE”.

6 Press

STRAIGHT to select desired

language setting for the GUI screen in the

video monitor.

Choices: ENGLISH (English), JAPANESE,

(Japanese), FRENCH (French), GERMAN

(German), SPANISH (Spanish), RUSSIAN (Russian)

• For details about the display language, see “Language”

(page 123)

• You can also select the display language with the GUI menu

(page 100).

7 Press

MASTER ON/OFF to release it

outward to the OFF position to save the new

setting and turn off this unit.

The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this

unit.

■ Turning on this unit

Press

MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel

inward to the ON position.

When you turn on this unit by pressing

MASTER ON/

OFF, the main zone is turned on.

■ Turning off this unit

Press

MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel

again to release it outward to the OFF position.

■ Set the main zone to the standby mode

Press

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF

(or

STANDBY

■ Turning on the main zone from the

standby mode

Press

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or

POWER).

• Basically, we recommend that you use the standby mode to turn

off this unit. In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small

amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the

remote control.

• BMAIN ZONE ON/OFF, DSTANDBY and EPOWER are

operational only when AMASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward

to the ON position.

• When you turn on this unit, there will be a delay for a few

seconds before this unit can reproduce sound.

Setting the speaker impedance

and GUI language

Caution

If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER

IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” as follows BEFORE using this

unit. You can also use 4 ohm speakers as the front

speakers (page 121).

Notes

Note

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

MASTER

While holding

down

Turning this unit on and off

If there are some problems...

• First, turn off and then turn on this unit again.

• If problems persist, initialize the parameters of this

unit (page 138).

27 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

a CSII indicator (U.S.A. model only)

Lights up when the SRS Circle Surround II decoder is

active (page 74).

b neural indicator

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Lights up when the Neural-THX Surround decoder is

active (page 74).

c Headphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected (page 38).

d Input source indicators

The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently

selected input source.

• The XM and SIRIUS indicators are only applicable to the

U.S.A. and Canada models.

• The NET indicator also lights up when “Network Standby”

(page 96) is set to “On” and this unit is in the standby mode.

e Input signal indicators

The respective indicator lights up when this unit is

reproducing DSD (Direct Stream Digital), PCM (Pulse

Code Modulation), WMA (Windows Media Audio) or,

MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3) audio signals.

f Multi-information display

Shows the name of the current sound field program and

other information when adjusting or changing settings.

g HDMI indicator

IN indicator

Lights up when the signal of the selected input source

is input at one of the HDMI input jacks (page 16).

OUT 1/OUT 2 indicator

The respective indicator lights up when the HDMI

signal is output at the HDMI OUT jacks. (page 16).

h ENHANCER indicator

Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is

turned on (page 45).

i YPAO indicator

Lights up when you run the automatic setup and when the

speaker settings configured by the automatic setup are

used without any modifications (page 30).

j PRESET indicator

Lights up while this unit is in the preset tuning mode.

k DSP indicators

The respective indicator lights up when any of the sound

field programs are selected.

SILENT CINEMA indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected and a

sound field program is selected (page 45).

CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound

field program (page 40).

3D indicator

Lights up when the CINEMA DSP 3D mode is turned

on (page 46).

VIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see

page 45).

l ADAPTIVE DRC indicator

Lights up when the adaptive dynamic range control

feature is turned on (page 89).

m Decoder indicators

The respective indicator lights up when any of the

decoders of this unit function.

Front panel display

VOLUME

TUNED STEREO

AUTO MEMORY

CATEGORY ALL

HOLD

ZONE2

SLEEP

ZONE3

USB

NET

MASTER AUDIO

MATRIX

DISCRETE

SILENT

CINEMA

YPAO PRESET

ENHANCER

VIRTUAL ADAPTIVE DRC

DIGITAL PLUS

TRUE HD

PL x

DOCK V-AUX VCR DVR CBL/SAT DVD BD/HD DVD MD/CD-R TV CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER

TAG

XM SIRIUS

L C R

SL LFE SR

SBL SB SBR

neural

DSD

PCM

WMA

MP3

OUT 1 OUT 2

YPAO PRESET

VOLUME

TUNED STEREO

AUTO MEMORY

CATEGORY ALL

HOLD

ZONE2

SLEEP

ZONE3

TAG

L C R

SL LFE SR

SBL SB SBR

MASTER AUDIO

MATRIX

DISCRETE

SILENT

CINEMA

ENHANCER

VIRTUAL ADAPTIVE DRC

DIGITAL PLUS

TRUE HD

PL x

OUT 1 OUT 2

ca d

Notes

28 En

Connections

n Tuner indicators

Light up when this unit is in the FM, AM, XM Satellite

Radio, or SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning mode.

The HD and TAG indicators are only applicable to the U.S.A.

model and used when this unit is tuned into the HD Radio

reception band.

o Menu browsing indicator

Lights up if any items exist under the current item during

menu browsing for iPod, etc.

p SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on (page 39).

q VOLUME level indicator

• Indicates the current volume level.

• Flashes while the mute function is on (page 38).

r Input channel and speaker indicators

Input channel indicators

• Indicate the channel components of the current

digital input signal.

• Light up or flash according to the settings of the

speakers when this unit is in the automatic setup

procedure (page 30).

Presence speaker indicators

Light up according to setting for “Front Presence”

(page 88) in “Configuration” when this unit is in the

auto setup procedure (page 30) or the speaker level

setting procedure in the “Level” (page 89).

s ZONE2/ZONE3 indicators

Lights up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned on

(page 119).

The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on this unit during operation.

6LIGHT

Lights up the remote control buttons and the display

window (4).

Display window (4)

[1] ID1/ID2 indicator

Indicates the currently selected remote control ID

(page 121).

[2] Transmit indicator

Appears while the remote control is sending infrared

signals.

[3] Zone indicators

Indicates the currently controlling zone (page 119).

[4] Information display

Shows the name of the selected input source that you

can control.

Infrared window (1)

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

Note

L C R

SL LFE SR

SBL SB SBR

Presence speaker indicators

Input channel indicators

Using the remote control

30 30

Approximately 6 m (20 ft)

Remote control sensor

MAIN

ZONE 2

ID 2ID 1

ZONE 3

[1] [2]

[3] [4]

29 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

Operation mode selector (F)

The function of some buttons depends on the operation

mode selector position.

AMP

Operates the amplifier function of this unit.

SOURCE

Operates the component selected with an input

selector button (page 107).

Operates the TV (page 106).

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following

conditions:

– places of high humidity, such as near a bath

– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove

– places of extremely low temperatures

– dusty places

• To set the remote control codes for other components, see

page 109.

When you want to use the controls behind the front panel

door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of

the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these

controls.

Notes

Opening and closing the front

panel door

30 En

This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid

troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied

optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening

environment.

This unit is equipped with various automatic setup features. You can select the automatic setup features according to your

preference.

Quick automatic setup (page 30)

Use this feature to carry out the automatic setup without using the GUI screen.

Basic automatic setup (page 31)

Use this feature to optimize the setup of this unit for one listening position. You can also select the parameters to be

optimized by the automatic setup.

Advanced automatic setup (page 33)

Use this feature to optimize the setup of this unit for multiple listening positions. You can also select the parameters to be

optimized by the automatic setup.

Make sure of the following check points before

starting the automatic setup operations.

❏ Speakers are connected appropriately.

❏ Headphones are disconnected from this unit.

❏ This unit is turned on.

❏ The connected subwoofer is turned on and the

volume level is set to about half way (or slightly

less).

❏ The crossover frequency controls of the

connected subwoofer is set to the maximum.

❏ The room is sufficiently quiet.

❏ Set the operation mode selector on the remote

control to FAMP.

• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output

during the automatic setup procedure.

• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as

possible while the automatic setup procedure is in progress. If

there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be

satisfactory.

Use this feature to carry out the automatic setup without

using the GUI screen.

1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

The following screen appears in the front panel

display.

“View GUI Menu” appears if the GUI menu screen is

turned on. In this case, press IMENU to turn off the GUI

menu screen or follow “Basic automatic setup” (page 31).

2 Place the optimizer microphone at your

normal listening position on a flat level

surface with the omni-directional

microphone heading upward.

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

Before starting the automatic

setup

Notes

VOLUME

MIN

MAX

MIN MAX

CROSSOVER

HIGH CUT

Controls of a subwoofer (example)

Quick automatic setup

Note

INFO

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MULTI ZONE

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDI O

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO

PHONES

BAND

CATEGORYPRESET/TUNING/CH MONO

STEREO/

MODE

MEMORY

STRAIGHT

MENUREC OUT

AUDIO SELECT/

CONTROL

TONE

ENTER

USB

Omni-directional

microphone

AUTO SETUP

ENTER TO START

31 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

PREPARATION

English

It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the

optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears

would be when you are seated in your listening position.

You can use the attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the

optimizer microphone to the tripod (etc.).

3 Press 9ENTER to start the measurement.

This unit starts to count down from 10 seconds.

• To start the measurement immediately, press 9ENTER

again.

• To cancel the automatic setup and return to the previous

screen, press 0RETURN.

Loud test tones are output from each speaker during

the measurement. Once all items are measured,

“COMPLETED” appears.

If an error or warning message appears, see “Automatic

setup” (page 136).

4 Disconnect the optimizer microphone to

complete the automatic setup.

You can check the results of the measurements by using

the GUI screen (page 34).

Use this feature to optimize the setup of this unit this unit

for one listening position. You can also select the

parameters to be optimized in the automatic setup.

1 Turn on the video monitor and then follow

steps 1 and 2 in “Quick automatic setup”

(page 30).

2 Press IMENU on the remote control.

The following screen (GUI menu) appears in the

video monitor.

3 To select the parameters to be optimized,

press 9k to select “Setup Menu” and then

press 9h.

When you do not need to select the parameters to be

optimized, skip to step 6.

If you do not select the parameters to be optimized, this

unit will optimize the parameters you selected last time.

All the parameters are selected by the initial factory

settings.

4 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the

parameter and then press 9ENTER to

check or uncheck the box.

Check the boxes for the parameters to be optimized.

Before proceeding next operation

Once you perform the next operation, this unit starts the

automatic setup procedure in 10 seconds. During the

automatic setup procedure, do not perform any operation on

this unit. For more accurate measurements, we recommended

that you get out of the room or move to the wall where

speakers are not around during the measurement. It takes

approximately 3 minutes.

Note

Optimizer microphone

COMPLETED

PLS UNPLUG MIC

ERROR: E-01

PRESS ENTER

Basic automatic setup

Parameter Descriptions

Multi Measure

(Multiple point

measurement)

You can optimize the setup of this unit for

multiple listening positions. For details, see

“Advanced automatic setup” (page 33). In

the basic automatic setup, leave this setting

to the default.

Wiring

(Speaker wiring)

This unit checks and adjusts which speakers

are connected and the polarity of each

speaker.

Information

Setup Menu

Start

NOTICE

Loud test tones are

output.

Please keep quiet

or leave the room.

Start:ENTER

32 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

5 If you have finished the settings, press 9l

to return to the previous menu level and then

press 9n to select “Start”.

6 Press 9ENTER to start the measurement.

This unit starts to count down from 10 seconds.

• To start the measurement immediately, press 9ENTER

again.

• To cancel the automatic setup and return to the previous

screen, press 0RETURN.

Loud test tones are output from each speaker during

the measurement. Once all items are measured,

“Measurement Completed Successful” appears.

If an error or warning message appears, see “Error and

warning messages” (page 32).

7 Press 9ENTER to exit from the “Result”

screen.

• To view the measurement results in detail, press 9h.

Press 9k / n repeatedly to toggle between parameters

(page 35). Press 9l to return to the “Result” screen.

• To retry the measurement from step 4, press 9k.

8 Press 9l to save the measurement results

or 9h to discard them.

9 Press IMENU to turn off the GUI menu and

disconnect the optimizer microphone.

■ Error and warning messages

If an error or warning message appears during the

automatic setup procedure, carry out one of the following

operations. For details on each message, see “Automatic

setup” (page 113).

• To view the details on the error and warning messages,

press 9h. Press 9k / n to display the previous/next

page (if available). Press 9l to return to the previous

menu level.

• To return to the GUI menu, press 9l.

• To retry the measurement, press 9k.

• To ignore the message and continue the process, press

9n.

Some operations cannot be performed depending on the type of

error (or warning).

Distance

(Speaker distance)

This unit checks and adjusts the distance of

each speaker from the listening position and

adjusts the timing of each channel.

Size

(Speaker size)

This unit checks and adjusts the frequency

response of each speaker and sets the

appropriate low-frequency crossover for

each channel.

Equalizing

(Speaker

equalizing)

Parametric equalizer adjusts the level of the

specified frequency bands. This unit

automatically selects the crucial frequency

bands for the listening room and adjusts the

level of the selected frequency bands to

create a cohesive sound field in the room.

Level

(Speaker level)

This unit checks and adjusts the volume

level of each speaker.

Before proceeding next operation

Once you perform the next operation, this unit starts the

automatic setup procedure in 10 seconds. During the

automatic setup procedure, do not perform any operation on

this unit. For more accurate measurements, we recommended

that you get out of the room or move to the wall where

speakers are not around during the measurement. It takes

approximately 3 minutes.

Note

Parameter Descriptions

[ ]

Equalizing

Level

Result

Measurement Completed

Sucessful

Detail:

Exit:ENTER

Note

Pre Check

Main Check

Wiring

Retry

Exit Detail

E09:User Cancel

33 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

PREPARATION

English

Use this feature to optimize the setup of this unit for

multiple listening positions. You can also select the

parameters to be optimized by the automatic setup.

1 Turn on the video monitor and then connect

the optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER

MIC jack on the front panel.

2 Place the optimizer microphone at the first

listening position.

The following illustration shows how to place the

optimizer microphone in order to optimize the setup

of this unit for seven listening positions for example.

/2/3/4/5/6/7: Listening positions

3 Press IMENU on the remote control.

The GUI menu appears in the video monitor.

4 Press 9k to select “Setup Menu” and then

press 9h.

5 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Multi

Measure” and then press 9h.

6 Press 9k / n repeatedly to set the number of

listening positions and press 9l.

Choices: 1 (default), 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8

7 To select the parameters to be optimized,

press 9k / n to select the parameter and

then press 9ENTER to check or uncheck

the box.

When you do not need to select the parameters to be

optimized, skip to step 8.

If you do not select the parameters to be optimized, this

unit will optimize the parameters you selected last time.

All the parameters are selected by the initial factory

settings.

8 Press 9l to return to the previous menu

level and then press 9n to select “Start”.

9 Press 9ENTER to start the measurement.

This unit starts to count down from 10 seconds.

• To start the measurement immediately, press 9ENTER

again.

• To cancel the automatic setup and return to the previous

screen, press 0RETURN.

Loud test tones are output from each speaker during

the measurement. Once all items for the first listening

position are measured, the following message

appears.

Advanced automatic setup

1 7

2 6

43 5

Information

Setup Menu

Start

Multi Measure 1

Wiring

Distance

Before proceeding next operation

Once you perform the next operation, this unit starts the

automatic setup procedure in 10 seconds. During the

automatic setup procedure, do not perform any operation on

this unit. For more accurate measurements, we recommended

that you get out of the room or move to the wall where

speakers are not around during the measurement.

Information

Setup Menu

Start

Multi Measure 7

Wiring

Distance

[ ]

Pre Check

Main Check

Wiring

Distance

Put the microphone at

2nd listening position

Next:ENTER

Skip:

34 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

If an error or warning message appears, see “Error and

warning messages” (page 32).

10 Move the optimizer microphone to the

second listening position and then press

9ENTER to start the measurement.

To skip the measurements at the remaining listening

positions, press 9n.

11 Repeat step 10 until the measurement at all

listening positions are made.

If you have made the measurement at all listening

positions or skipped the measurement at the

remaining listening positions, “Measurement

Completed Successful” appears.

12 Follow steps 7 to 9 in “Basic automatic

setup” (page 31) to view the measurement

results and turn off the GUI menu.

Use this feature to review the result of the automatic setup.

You can also reload the automatic setup parameters in case

you are not satisfied with the speaker setup and sound

adjustments you have configured manually.

If you reload the automatic setup parameters, the settings you

have configured manually are cleared. To save the settings

before reloading the automatic setup parameters, see “System

Memory” (page 101).

1 Set the operation mode selector to FAMP

and then press IMENU.

The GUI menu appears in the video monitor.

If the menu directory other than “Top Menu” (page 79) is

displayed, press and hold IMENU to display the top GUI

menu.

2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Setup”

and then press 9h.

3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Auto

Setup” and then press 9h.

4 Press 9k to select “Information” and then

press 9h.

5 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the

parameter of which you want to check the

setting.

Note

Reviewing and reloading the

automatic setup parameters

Note

35 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

PREPARATION

English

The results of the measurement that are the causes of the

warning message(s) appear in yellow or pink.

• “–––” appears when no speaker is connected to the

corresponding speaker channel or this unit does not measure the

corresponding speaker channel yet.

• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your

listening environment, run the automatic setup again to

recalibrate your system.

• The distances displayed in the “Distance” results may be longer

than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your

subwoofer or external amplifiers if you connect them.

• In the “Equalizing” results, different values may be set for the

same band to provide finer adjustments.

6 To reload the displayed parameter, press

9ENTER.

7 Press IMENU to turn off the GUI menu.

• You can also set the parametric equalizer type with “PEQ

Select” (page 91).

• You can set the phase of the connected subwoofer with “Phase”

(page 88).

Parameter Descriptions

Multi Measure

(Multiple point

measurement)

Displays the number of listening position

actually measured.

Wiring

(Speaker wiring)

Displays the polarity of each connected

speaker.

– “NRM” appears when the polarity of the

connected speaker is normal.

– “REV” appears when the polarity of the

connected speaker is reversed.

– “DET” appears when this unit detects the

subwoofer is connected.

– “–––” appears when no speaker is

connected to the corresponding speaker

channel.

Distance

(Speaker

distance)

Displays the speaker distance from the

listening position. Press 9h repeatedly to

switch the unit to display the value of the

each speaker distance.

Size

(Speaker size)

Displays the size of the connected speakers

and the bass cross over frequency (“Cross”).

– “LRG” appears when the connected

speaker has the ability to reproduce the

low-frequency signals effectively.

– “SML” appears when the connected

speaker does not have the ability to

reproduce the low-frequency signals

effectively.

Equalizing

(Speaker

equalizing)

Displays the result of the adjustment of the

frequency responses of each connected

speaker. You can switch the parametric

equalizer type that appears in the result

display by pressing 9h repeatedly in the

“Equalizing” result display. To apply the

result that is displayed in the display, press

9ENTER.

Choices: Natural, Flat, Front

– Select “Natural” to average out the

frequency response of all speakers with

higher frequencies being less

emphasized. Recommended if the “Flat”

setting sounds a little harsh.

– Select “Flat” to average the frequency

response of all speakers. Recommended

if all of your speakers are of similar

quality.

– Select “Front” to adjust the frequency

response of each speaker in accordance

with the sound of your front speakers.

Recommended if your front speakers are

of much higher quality than your other

speakers.

Level

(Speaker level)

Displays the result of the adjustment of each

connected speaker output level. You can

display the result of the adjustment of the

speaker level for each parametric equalizer

type (see above) by pressing 9h

repeatedly. Select “Through” to display the

result when this unit does not use the

parametric equalizer.

Notes

36 En

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

• If you connect two video monitors to the HDMI OUT

jacks of this unit, press RHDMI OUT repeatedly to select

the active video monitor(s). See page 37 for details.

• You can operate this unit by using the graphical user

interface (GUI) screen (page 76).

• You can configure the display settings with “Video”

(page 93) and “Display Set” (page 98).

2 Rotate the

INPUT selector (or press one

of the input selector buttons (3))

The name of the selected input source appears for a

few seconds.

3 Start playback on the selected source

component or select a broadcast station.

• Refer to the instruction manuals for the source

component.

• FM/AM radio tuning (page 48)

• XM Satellite Radio tuning (page 53)

• SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning (page 58)

• Bluetooth component playback (page 64)

• iPod playback (page 66)

• Playback via USB or network (page 68)

Rotate

VOLUME

(or press

VOLUME +/–

)

to adjust the volume to the desired output

level.

To adjust the level of each speaker, see page 47.

5 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector (or press

one of the sound field program selector

buttons (Q) repeatedly) to select the desired

sound field program.

For details about sound field program, see page 40.

To switch the information (current input source, current

sound field program, etc) displayed in the front panel

display, press KINFO (or set the operation mode selector

to FAMP and then press CINFO) repeatedly.

Playback

Caution

Extreme caution should be exercised when you play

back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD

encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player,

you will only hear some unwanted noise that may

damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player

supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound

output level of your CD player before you play back a

CD encoded in DTS.

To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio

connection, set “Decoder Mode” in “Input Select” to “DTS”

before the playback (page 85).

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

AMP.

Basic procedure

DOCK V-AUX VCR DVR CBL/SAT DVD BD/HD DVD MD/CD-R TV CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER XM SIRIUS

DVD

USB

NET

Selected input source

Available input sources

Movie

Sci-Fi

Selected sound field program

Selected sound field program category

37 En

Playback

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Use this feature (audio input jack select) to switch the

input jack assigned to an input source when more than one

jacks are assigned to an input source.

1 Rotate the

INPUT selector (or press one

of the input selector buttons (3)) to select

the desired input source.

Press

AUDIO SELECT

and then rotate

PROGRAM

selector (or set the operation

mode to

FAMP

and then press

FAUDIO

SEL

repeatedly) to select the desired audio

input jack select setting.

You can configure the default audio input jack select setting

with “Audio Select” (page 85).

This feature is not available if no digital input jack is assigned

to the selected input source in “I/O Assignment” (page 98).

“HDMI” is available only when an HDMI input jack is

assigned.

Use this feature to select the component connected to the

MULTI CH INPUT jacks (page 22) as the input source.

Rotate the

INPUT selector on the front panel

to select “MULTI CH” (or press

MULTI).

You can configure the multi channel input settings with

“MULTI CH” (page 85).

Sound field programs cannot be selected when “MULTI CH” is

selected as the input source.

Use this feature to select the HDMI OUT jack(s) to output

the input signals.

Set the operation mode selector to

AMP and

then press RHDMI OUT on the remote control

repeatedly to select the desired setting.

The HDMI output setting changes as follows.

You can select the HDMI OUT jack at which HDMI control

signals are output with “Control Monitor” (page 95).

Selecting audio input jacks

(AUDIO SELECT)

AUTO

Automatically selects input signals in the

following order:

(1) HDMI

(2) Digital signals

(3) Analog signals

HDMI

Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI

signals are not input, no sound is output.

COAX/OPT

Automatically selects input signals in the

following order:

(1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL jack.

(2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL jack.

When no signals are input, no sound is output.

ANALOG

Selects only analog signals. If no analog

signals are input, no sound is output.

Note

DOCK V-AUX VCR DVR CBL/SAT DVD BD/HD DVD MD/CD-R TV CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER XM SIRIUS

A.SEL: AUTO

USB

NET

Selected audio input jack

select setting

Available input sources

Selecting the multi-channel input

component

Note

Selecting the HDMI OUT jack

OUT 1+2

Outputs the signals at both the HDMI OUT 1

and HDMI OUT 2 jacks simultaneously.

OUT 1

Outputs the signals at the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

OUT 2

Outputs the signals at the HDMI OUT 2 jack.

OFF

Does not output any signals at the HDMI OUT

1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks. Select this setting

when you do not use the video monitor

connected to one of the HDMI OUT jacks.

OUT1+2 OUT1

OUT2OFF

38 En

Playback

Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo

analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on

the front panel.

When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA

mode activates automatically (page 45).

• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the

speaker terminals.

• All digital multi-channel audio signals are mixed down to the

left and right headphone channels.

• When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, only the

signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT FRONT jacks are

output.

Press

MUTE on the remote control to mute the

audio output. Press

MUTE again to resume

the audio output.

• The VOLUME level indicator flashes while the mute function is

on.

• You can configure the muting level with “Muting Type”

(page 90).

You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,

bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.

1 Set the operation mode selector to FAMP

and then press 8STATUS on the remote

control.

The input source information screen appears in the

GUI screen.

2 Press 9l / h to toggle between the audio

and video information.

3 Press 8STATUS on the remote control

again to exit from the input source

information screen.

■ Audio information

• “–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding

information.

• Some high definition audio bitstream contents may not include

the discrete surround back left and right channel signals but are

encoded at the bitrate of 192 kHz.

• Even if you make settings to output bitstreams directly, some

players convert the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus

bitstreams to the Dolby Digital bitstreams, while converting the

DTS-HD Master Audio or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

bitstreams to the DTS bitstreams.

Using your headphones

Notes

Muting the audio output

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

INFO

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MULTI ZONE

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO

PHONES

BAND

CATEGORYPRESET/TUNING/CH MONO

STEREO/

MODE

MEMORY

STRAIGHT

MENUREC OUT

AUDIO SELECT/

CONTROL

TONE

ENTER

ON/OFF

USB

Displaying the input source

information

Format Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a

digital signal, it automatically switches to

analog input.

Sampling The number of samples per second taken from

a continuous signal to make a discrete signal.

Channel The number of source channels in the input

signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a

multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front

channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is

displayed as “3/2/0.1”.

Bitrate The number of bits passing a given point per

second.

Dialogue The dialogue normalization level preset to the

current input bitstream signal.

Flag1/Flag2 Flag data encoded in the bitstream, or PCM

signals that cue this unit to automatically

switch decoders.

Notes

39 En

Playback

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ Video information

HDMI error message

Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the

standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep

timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit

is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also

automatically turns off any external components

connected to the AC OUTLET(S) (page 25).

Set the operation mode selector to FAMP and

then press CSLEEP on the remote control

repeatedly to set the amount of time.

The sleep timer setting changes as shown below.

Once the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up

in the front panel display, and the display returns to the

selected sound field program.

To cancel the sleep timer

Set the operation mode selector to FAMP and then press

CSLEEP on the remote control repeatedly to select

“SLEEP OFF”.

If you set the main zone to the standby mode, the sleep timer is

automatically canceled.

HDMI signal Type of the source video signals and

the video signals output at the HDMI

OUT jacks of this unit.

HDMI Resolution Resolution of the input signal (analog

or HDMI) and the output signal

(HDMI).

Analog Resolution Resolution of the source video signals

and the analog video signals output at

the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT

jacks of this unit.

HDMI Error Error message for HDMI sources or

connected HDMI devices.

Device Over The number of the connected HDMI

components is over the limit.

HDCP Error

(HDMI Message)

HDCP authentication failed.

Out Of Resolution Out of resolution. The connected

monitor is not compatible with the

resolution of the input video signal.

Using the sleep timer

120min. 90min.

60min.30min.OFF

40 En

This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from

almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing

(DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.

The Yamaha CINEMA DSP sound field programs are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Surround, Dolby TrueHD and

DTS-HD Master Audio sources.

Rotate the

PROGRAM selector (or set the

operation mode selector to FAMP and then

press one of the sound field selector buttons (Q)

repeatedly).

The name of the selected sound field program appears in

the front panel display and in the short message display.

• You can select the desired sound field program and setting the

parameters by using the GUI menu (page 80).

• Available sound field parameters and the created sound field

differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this

unit.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last sound field program used with the corresponding input

source.

• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component

connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the

input source (page 37) or when this unit is in the PURE

DIRECT mode (page 47).

• When you play back DTS 96/24 sources with any sound field

program, this unit applies the selected program without

activating the DTS 96/24 decoder.

• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz are sampled down to

48 kHz or lower and then sound field programs are applied.

Sound field programs

Selecting sound field programs

Notes

41 En

Sound field programs

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ For audio music sources

For audio music sources, we also recommend using the PURE DIRECT mode (page 47), STRAIGHT mode (page 46), or surround

decode mode (page 74).

CLASSICAL

Descriptions of the characteristics of the sound field programs

Following indexes indicates the characteristics and trends of each sound field program.

Size of sound field space (Size)

Indicates the size of the sound field to be generated. If the

value for this item is small, the sound is that of a small

space, while if the value is large, the sound is that of a vast

space.

Vertical/horizontal balance (V/H balance)

Indicates the balance of the vertical (height) and horizontal

directions for the sound field to be generated. If this item is

more in the horizontal direction, the sound is that of a

space with strong reflections from the walls, while if it is

more in the vertical direction, the sound is that of a space

with strong reflections from the ceiling.

Front/rear balance (F/R balance)

A CINEMA DSP sound field processing expressing

whether the effect is stronger towards the front or rear.

When the effect is stronger towards the front, the listener

senses a feeling of openness and depth towards the screen,

while when the effect is stronger towards the rear, the

listener gets a sense of envelopment and movement. Suits

basically all types of contents for programs with a good

front/rear balance, and is effective when selected

appropriately for programs in which the balance is more

towards either the front or rear.

Sound field atmosphere (Atmosphere)

The sound field to be generated is evaluated according to

whether it is nearer to one or the other of the following;

Simple: Sounds that fade straight-forwardly, with a light,

gentle impression, depending on the program. This suits

almost all contents relatively well, but provides little

brilliance or powerfulness.

Complex: Sounds transform in complex ways as they fade

out, with a rich, brilliant impression, depending on the

program.

This is extremely effective for the right contents, but is

suited for a smaller range of contents.

The sound field to be generated is evaluated according to

whether it is nearer to one or the other of the following;

Calm: An overall composed, moderate effect, stressing the

overall quality of the atmosphere without aiming at any

extreme effects. This suits almost all contents relatively

well, but provides little showiness or powerfulness.

Powerful: Designed with specific contents in mind

(expressing vast spaces, feverish excitement, etc.). This is

extremely effective for the right contents, but is suited for a

smaller range of contents.

Hall in Munich

This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500

seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as

normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful

reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The

listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna

This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall

with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and

ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all

around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound.

The characteristics of the sound field programs may differ depending on the settings of the listening room, etc.

Note

Small Large

Vertical Horizontal

Front Rear

Simple Complex

Calm Powerful

CLASSICAL

Size

V/H balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Simple

Large

Horizontal

Complex

Size

V/H balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Simple

Large

Horizontal

Complex

42 En

Sound field programs

LIVE/CLUB

Hall in Amsterdam

The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2200 around the circle

stage. Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels

freely.

Church in Freiburg

Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church

has a pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow

shape and the high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time

and limited initial reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation

rather than the sound itself reproduces the atmosphere of the

church.

Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling

like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations

that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music.

Village Vanguard

The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with

the low ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the

stage located in the corner.

Warehouse Loft

The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off

the concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy.

Cellar Club

This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey

atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound

as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage.

The Roxy Theatre

This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles,

with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the

center left of the hall.

The Bottom Line

This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, that was

a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people

to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant

sound.

Size

V/H balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Simple

Large

Horizontal

Complex

Size

V/H balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Simple

Large

Horizontal

Complex

Size

V/H balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Simple

Large

Horizontal

Complex

LIVE/CLUB

Size

V/H balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Simple

Large

Horizontal

Complex

Size

V/H balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Simple

Large

Horizontal

Complex

Size

V/H balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Simple

Large

Horizontal

Complex

Size

V/H balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Simple

Large

Horizontal

Complex

Size

V/H balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Simple

Large

Horizontal

Complex

43 En

Sound field programs

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ For various sources

ENTERTAIN

■ For game programs

ENTERTAIN

■ For visual sources of music

ENTERTAIN

Sports

This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts

and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports

broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are

positioned clearly on the center while the atmosphere of the

stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the listeners with a

feeling of presence in the stadium.

Action Game

This sound field is suitable for action games such as car racing and

FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range

per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with

a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while

maintaining a clear sense of directions.

Roleplaying Game

This sound field is suitable for role-playing and adventure games.

It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field

design used with “Action Game” to represent the depth and spatial

feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround

effects in the movie scenes in the game.

Music Video

This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live

performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge

oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that

emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of

rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that

reproduces the space of a big live hall.

Recital/Opera

This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum

level and emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices.

“Recital/Opera” offers the reverberations of an orchestra box in

front of the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic

positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround

sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall

effects are used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The

listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of opera

entertainment.

ENTERTAIN

Size

V/H balance

F/R balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Front

Calm

Large

Horizontal

Rear

Powerful

ENTERTAIN

Size

V/H balance

F/R balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Front

Calm

Large

Horizontal

Rear

Powerful

Size

V/H balance

F/R balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Front

Calm

Large

Horizontal

Rear

Powerful

ENTERTAIN

Size

V/H balance

F/R balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Front

Calm

Large

Horizontal

Rear

Powerful

Size

V/H balance

F/R balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Front

Calm

Large

Horizontal

Rear

Powerful

44 En

Sound field programs

■ For movie sources

You can select the desired decoder (page 74) used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”).

MOVIE

Standard

This program create a sound field emphasizing the surrounding

feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of

multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been

designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which

the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the

left, right and rear.

Spectacle

This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale

movie productions. It reproduces a broad theater sound field

matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an

excellent dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound.

Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound

design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring

movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created

virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog,

sound effects and background music.

Adventure

This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design

of action and adventure movies. The sound field restrains

reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space

expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also

restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio

channels and the clarity of the sound.

Drama

This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide

range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and

comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum

spatial feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music

softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a

way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of

viewing.

Mono Movie

This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources

such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie

theater. The program produces the optimum expansion and

reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space

with a certain sound depth.

MOVIE

Size

V/H balance

F/R balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Front

Calm

Large

Horizontal

Rear

Powerful

Size

V/H balance

F/R balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Front

Calm

Large

Horizontal

Rear

Powerful

Size

V/H balance

F/R balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Front

Calm

Large

Horizontal

Rear

Powerful

Size

V/H balance

F/R balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Front

Calm

Large

Horizontal

Rear

Powerful

Size

V/H balance

F/R balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Front

Calm

Large

Horizontal

Rear

Powerful

Size

V/H balance

F/R balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Front

Calm

Large

Horizontal

Rear

Powerful

45 En

Sound field programs

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ Stereo playback

STEREO

■ For compression artifacts

(Compressed Music Enhancer mode)

ENHANCER

■ Surround decoder mode

SUR. DECODE

■ Using sound field programs without

surround speakers

(Virtual CINEMA DSP)

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA

DSP sound field programs without surround speakers. It

creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound

field.

When you set “Surround” to “None” (page 87), Virtual

CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you

select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (page 40).

Virtual CINEMA DSP does not activate in the following cases:

– “MULTI CH“ is selected as the input source (page 37).

– headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

– the unit is in the “7ch Stereo” mode (page 45).

■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and

sound field programs with headphones

(SILENT CINEMA)

SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel

music or movie sound through ordinary headphones.

SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you

connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening

to CINEMA DSP sound field programs (page 40). When

activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the

front panel display.

SILENT CINEMA does not activate in the following cases:

– “MULTI CH“ is selected as the input source (page 37).

– the unit is in the “2ch Stereo” (page 45), STRAIGHT

(page 46) or “PURE DIRECT” (page 47) mode.

2ch Stereo

Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2

channels.

7ch Stereo

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you

play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the

source to 2 channels, and then output the sound from all

speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal

for background music at parties, etc.

Straight Enhancer

Use this program to improve the sound enhancer nearest to the

original depth and width of the 2-channel or multi-channel

compression artifacts.

7ch Enhancer

Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-

channel stereo.

Surround Decoder

Use this program to play back sources with using the desired

surround decoders (page 74).

STEREO

ENHANCER

SUR. DECOD

Note

46 En

Sound field programs

CINEMA DSP 3D mode creates the intensive and

accurate stereoscopic sound field in the listening room.

You can activate and deactivate the CINEMA DSP 3D

mode.

Press

3D DSP repeatedly to turn on or off the

CINEMA DSP 3D mode.

While this unit is in the CINEMA DSP 3D mode, the 3D

indicator lights up.

CINEMA DSP 3D does not activate (“3D:--“ appears) in the

following cases:

– the “Front Presence” setting is set to “None” (page 88).

– no CINEMA DSP is selected.

– headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

When this unit is in the STRAIGHT mode, 2-channel

stereo sources are output from only the front left and right

speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into

the appropriate channels without any additional effect

processing.

Press

STRAIGHT (or

STRAIGHT) to select

“STRAIGHT”.

The names of the audio signal format of the input source

and the active decoder appear in the front panel display.

To deactivate the STRAIGHT mode

Press NSTRAIGHT (or TSTRAIGHT) again or select

another sound field program (page 40).

Before performing the following operation, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

AMP.

Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode

Note

Before performing the following operation, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

AMP.

Enjoying unprocessed input

sources

47 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Use the PURE DIRECT mode to enjoy the pure fidelity

sound of the selected source. When the PURE DIRECT

mode is activated, this unit plays back the selected source

with the least circuitry.

Press LPURE DIRECT (or

PURE DIRECT)

to turn on or off the PURE DIRECT mode.

The

PURE DIRECT button on the front panel lights up

and the front panel display automatically turns off while

this unit is in the PURE DIRECT mode.

• The following operations are not possible when this unit is in

the PURE DIRECT mode:

– switching the sound field program

– displaying the GUI menu

• The PURE DIRECT mode is automatically canceled whenever

this unit is turned off.

To make this unit output video signals during the PURE

DIRECT mode, configure the “Pure Direct” setting (page 93).

Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for

the front L/R and center speaker channels and the

subwoofer channel.

1 Press

TONE CONTROL on the front

panel repeatedly to select the high-frequency

response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency

response (BASS).

2 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector to adjust

the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or

the low-frequency response (BASS).

Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the

low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of

the surround speakers may not match that of the front L/R and

center speakers and the subwoofer.

• TONE CONTROL is not effective when the PURE DIRECT

mode is activated, or when “MULTI CH“ is selected as the input

source.

You can adjust the output level of each speaker while

listening to a music source. This is also possible when

playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

This operation will override the level adjustments made in the

automatic setup (page 30) and “Level” (page 89).

1 Press

LEVEL and then 9k / n repeatedly

to select the speaker you want to adjust.

The available speaker channels differ depending on the speaker settings.

2 Press 9l / h on the remote control to

adjust the speaker output level.

Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

Use this feature to select a source component from which

you want to record.

1 Press and hold

REC OUT until “REC

OUT” appears in the front panel display.

2 Rotate

PROGRAM to select the source

component.

To record the input source currently selected, select “SOURCE”.

Using audio features

Before performing the following operation, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

AMP.

Enjoying pure hi-fi sound

Notes

Adjusting the tonal quality

Notes

Before performing the following operation, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

AMP.

Adjusting the speaker level

Note

Display Adjusted speaker

FRONT L

Front left speaker

FRONT R

Front right speaker

CENTER

Center speaker

SUR.L

Surround left speaker

SUR.R

Surround right speaker

SB L

Surround back left speaker

SB R

Surround back right speaker

FP L

Presence left speaker

FP R

Presence right speaker

SWFR

Subwoofer

Selecting the recording source

48 En

You can use two tuning modes to tune into the desired

FM/AM station:

Frequency tuning mode

You can search or specify the frequency of the desired

FM/AM station automatically or manually (see “FM/AM

tuning operations” on this page).

Preset tuning mode

You can preset the desired FM/AM station in advance, and

then recall the station by specifying the preset group and

number (see “Recalling a preset station” on page 50).

Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best

reception.

1 Press JBAND (or 8BAND) to select the

desired reception band.

2 If the PRESET indicator in the front panel

lights up, press HSEARCH MODE (or

ISRCH MODE) to turn it off.

3 To search the station automatically, press

and hold FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

press 9PRESET/CH k / n) for about 2

seconds. To search the station manually,

press FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h

repeatedly.

• To tune into a higher frequency, press Fh (or

9k).

• To tune into a lower frequency, press Fl (or

9n).

If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,

search the station manually or enter the frequency directly

(page 48).

• When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED

indicator lights up.

• To switch the information (current input source, current

sound field program, etc) displayed in the front panel

display, press KINFO (or set the operation mode to

FAMP and then press CINFO) repeatedly.

• To switch between stereo or monaural FM reception, press

ISTEREO/MONO (or OAUDIO).

• (U.S.A. model only)

If this unit is tuned into an HD Radio station (page 51), the

HD indicator lights up in the front panel display.

■ Direct frequency tuning

Use this feature tune into the desired station directly by

entering the frequency.

1 Follow steps 1 and 2 in “FM/AM tuning

operations” (page 48) to select the desired

reception band.

2 Enter the frequency of the desired station by

pressing the numeric buttons (B).

Example: To tune into 103.7 MHz

If the entered frequency is out of the range of the FM/AM

tuning, “WRONG STATION!” appears in the front panel

display.

FM/AM tuning

Overview

Note

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE and then

press 3TUNER.

FM/AM tuning operations

FM 88.9MHz

PRESET turns off

Note

1 0 3

49 En

FM/AM tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Use this feature to store up to 40 stations FM/AM stations

(A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset

station groups). Preset the desired stations to this unit by

using the automatic or manual station preset.

■ Automatic station preset

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up

to 40 FM stations with strong signals in order.

(U.S.A. model only)

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up

to 40 AM HD Radio, FM HD Radio, and analog FM radio

stations with strong signals.

(U.S.A. model only)

1 Press JBAND (or 8BAND) to select the

desired reception band.

This unit searches the stations in the selected band

and then another band.

2 Press and hold JBAND (or 8BAND) for

more than 3 seconds.

The MEMORY indicator flashes and “AUTO

MEMORY” appears in the front panel display. After

approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts

from the current frequency and proceeds toward

higher frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the

MEMORY indicator disappears.

• To specify the preset group and number from which this unit

stores stations, press FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

9CAT./A-E l / h and 9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly

after you perform step 2.

• To cancel the automatic station preset, press JBAND (or

8BAND) again.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is

cleared when you store a new station under the same preset

station number.

• If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),

automatic preset tuning automatically stops after searching for

all the available stations.

• (U.S.A. model only)

When this unit stores the FM HD Radio stations with this

feature, this unit stores only the main audio program of the

stations (HD1). When you want to store the sub-audio programs

of the FM HD Radio stations, preset the stations manually.

■ Manual station preset

Use this feature to store the FM or AM stations manually.

(U.S.A. model only)

You can store the analog FM/AM radio stations and FM/

AM HD Radio stations manually, and you can also store

the sub-audio programs of FM HD Radio station.

1 Tune into a station.

See page 48 for tuning instructions.

(U.S.A. model only)

To store a sub-audio program of the HD Radio station

(HD2 to HD8), press APRG SELECT b / a

repeatedly to select the desired audio program (page 51).

2 Press GMEMORY (or 0MEMORY).

The PRESET indicator lights up in the front panel

and this unit automatically selects an empty preset

number.

• To store the selected station under an empty preset number

automatically, press and hold GMEMORY (or

0MEMORY) for more than 2 seconds instead of step 2.

In this case, the following steps are unnecessary.

• To cancel the manual station preset, press GMEMORY

(or 0MEMORY) again.

3 To select the preset group and number (A1 to

E8), press FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h

(or 9CAT./A-E l / h and 9PRESET/CH k /

n) repeatedly.

• To select a higher preset station group and number,

press Fh (or 9k).

• To select a lower preset station group and number,

press Fl (or 9n).

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE and then

press 3TUNER.

Preset FM/AM stations

Notes

MEMORY

A1 FM 88.9MHz

AUTO MEMORY

Flashes

PRESET

MEMORY A1

FM 88.9MHz

Lights up

PRESET

MEMORY C2

FM 88.9MHz

Preset station group and number

50 En

FM/AM tuning

• You can also select a preset number (1 to 8) by pressing

the numeric buttons (B).

• If you select a preset number being used (“*” appears next

to the preset number), the current preset station will be

overwritten.

4 Press EENTER (or 9ENTER).

The preset station is set and the PRESET indicator

disappears.

The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with

the station frequency.

■ Recalling a preset station

(U.S.A. model only)

You can search for preset HD Radio stations by specifying a

keyword (station name) with “Station Search” (page 86).

1 If the PRESET indicator in the front panel

turns off, press HSEARCH MODE (or

ISRCH MODE) to turn it on.

You cannot enter the preset tuning mode if no preset station is

set in advance.

2 Press FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to select

the desired preset station group and number

(A1 to E8).

• Empty preset numbers are skipped.

• You can also select a preset station group (A to E) by pressing

9CAT./A-E l / h and number (1 to 8) by pressing the

numeric buttons (B),

• (U.S.A. model only)

When you recall one of the sub-audio program (HD2 to HD8)

of an FM HD Radio station, it takes a few seconds for this unit

to recall the desired program. While this unit recalls the sub-

audio program, this unit outputs the sound of the analog service

of the station.

• (U.S.A. model only)

If the selected sub-audio program is currently not available, this

unit is tuned into the main audio program, and if the main audio

program is also not available, this unit is tuned into the analog

service.

■ Clearing preset stations

You can clear the assignments of preset stations.

1 Select the preset station you want to clear.

For details, see “Recalling a preset station” (page 50).

2 Press and hold HSEARCH MODE (or

ISRCH MODE) until “CLEAR?” appears in

the front panel display.

3 Press EENTER (or 9ENTER) to clear the

preset station.

To cancel the operation, press HSEARCH MODE (or

ISRCH MODE) again.

Note

PRESET

A FM 88.9MHz

Lights up

PRESET

A5 FM 89.5MHz

Preset station group and number

Notes

A1 CLEAR?[ENT]

FM 88.9MHz

51 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

HD Radio technology is a new technology that enables FM and AM radio stations to broadcast programs digitally.

Digital broadcasting provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and reception as well as new data services.

Furthermore, supplemental program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio programs multicast on a

single FM HD Radio channel. For further information on HD Radio technology, visit “http://www.ibiquity.com/”.

This unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM

stereo quality AM broadcasts. In addition, this unit can receive both audio and data (such as song titles, artist names,

program types, and comments) from supplemental program services (HD1 to HD8).

• The tuning method for HD Radio stations are same as analog FM/AM radio stations; however, you cannot tune into a hybrid HD Radio

station while this unit is in the monaural tuning mode (page 48).

• This unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital HD Radio station signals. However, this unit may not automatically receive

all-digital FM station signals and the automatic tuning operation may stop. In this case, enter the frequency of the desired all-digital

FM HD Radio station directly by using the numeric buttons (A) (page 48).

Use this feature to select one of the 8 HD Radio audio

programs (HD1 to HD8) when the unit is in the tuner

mode. Each audio program contains data programs.

When the selected FM HD Radio station provides some

audio programs, currently selected audio program number

appears in the front panel display as follows.

Press 0PRG SELECT b / a on the remote

control repeatedly to toggle between HD Radio

audio programs.

You can also select the desired HD Radio audio program by

pressing the numeric key. While this unit is in the automatic or

manual tuning mode, press a numeric button (1-8) (A) and then

MENT.

• Only 1 HD Radio audio program (HD1) is available for AM

broadcasts, while up to 8 audio programs (HD1 to HD8) are

available for FM broadcasts. The audio programs from HD2 to

HD8 can be selected only when they contain data programs.

• When reception for an audio program ceases, the

HD indicator

disappears from the front panel display and HD1 is

automatically selected after approximately 20 seconds.

• Some audio programs may not contain data programs

depending on the broadcasting station and the time period.

• For the best reception, adjust the orientation of the antenna so

that “ ” or “ ” is displayed.

This unit is equipped with the iTunes Tagging feature that

enables HD Radio listeners to “tag” songs for subsequent

preview and purchase on iTunes. For details on the iTunes

Tagging feature, visit “http://www.ibiquity.com/”.

1 Tune into an HD Radio station and select HD

Radio audio program (if available).

If the selected station supports the iTunes Tagging

feature, the TAG indicator lights up in the front panel

display and “TAG” appears in the GUI screen.

2 While a song you want to tag is being played

back, press ATAG.

The song is tagged and “TAG OK” appears in the

front panel display and GUI screen.

Using HD Radio™ features (U.S.A. model only)

Notes

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE and then

press 3TUNER.

Selecting HD Radio™ audio

programs

Notes

FM 88.9MHz1

WXYZ-FM <1/3>

Audio program

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE and then

press 3TUNER.

Using the iTunes Tagging feature

TAG

FM 88.9MHz1

WXYZ-FM <1/3>

Lights up

52 En

Using HD Radio™ features (U.S.A. model only)

• “Not Available’ appears in the front panel display and GUI

screen if tagging is not available.

• If a status message or an error message appears in the front

panel display or in the GUI screen, see “iTunes Tagging”

(page 129)

• This unit transmits the iTunes Tagging information to the

iPod if an iPod that supports iTunes Tagging feature is

stationed in the Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-11,

sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this

unit. Otherwise, this unit stores the information in the

internal memory and will transmit it next time your iPod is

stationed.

Use this feature to display the HD Radio information in

the front panel display or in the GUI screen.

• You can configure the display settings with “Display Set”

(page 98).

• To hold or release the displayed information, set the operation

mode selector to FSOURCE and then press 9ENTER.

While it is held, the HOLD indicator flashes in the front panel.

■ Front panel display

Press KINFO (or CINFO) repeatedly to toggle

between the following HD Radio information

displays.

Back to “STATION INFO”

■ GUI screen

Press KDISPLAY on the remote control to turn

on or off the information display.

The following information is displayed in the GUI screen.

[1] Preset station group and number, frequency,

station name

[2] Program category

[3] Artist name

[4] Song title

[5] Album title

[6] Antenna reception level

[7] Stereo/mono

[8] “TAG” (only when tagging is available)

[9] Audio program number (currently selected/

total)

Notes

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to FAMP.

Displaying HD Radio™ information

STATION INFO

Station information such as station name, audio

program (only when multiple audio programs are

available) and frequency

CATEGORY INFO

Program category

SONG INFO

Artist name, song title

ALBUM INFO

Album title

TAG INFO

The number of iTunes Tagging information files stored

in the internal memory, iTunes Tagging message

ANTENNA INFO

Antenna reception level

DSP PROG. INFO

Sound field program

INPUT INFO

Input source

A1 FM 88.9MHZ 1 STEREO

WXYZ-FM HD<1/2> [TAG]

: Classic Rock

: Frankie Zipper

: Road to India

: Made-to-order

Play Information Hold:ENTER

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[1]

[7]

[6]

[8]

[9]

53 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news, talk and

entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior digital audio from coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from classical to hip

hop, XM has something for every music fan.

The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.

■ Enjoying XM HD Surround content

This unit is equipped with the Neural-THX and Neural-THX Music decoders that play back the XM HD surround sound

content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience (page 74).

Connect XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home

Dock (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of

this unit. For details, see the operating instructions

provided with the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock.

To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals,

the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock must be placed at or near a

southerly facing window with no obstacles in the path to the

sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors. Use the “ANTENNA

INFO” information in the front panel or in the GUI screen

(page 56) to check the antenna reception level and adjust the

orientation of the antenna.

• If “CHECK ANTENNA” or “CHECK XM TUNER” appears in

the front panel display, the connection and setting of the

antenna, XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, or XM Mini-Tuner may

not be correct.

• If “UPGRADE XM TUNER” appears in the front panel display,

the connected XM Mini-Tuner is incompatible with this unit.

Satellite Radio tuning

XM Satellite Radio online information

For U.S. customers: http://www.xmradio.com/

For Canadian customers: http://www.xmradio.ca/

Note

XM READY

legal disclaimer

XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock required (each sold separately) to receive XM

service. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any

technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System. Installation costs and other fees

and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent

explicit language are indicated with an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800-XMRADIO

(U.S. residents) and 1-877-GETXMSR (Canadian residents). XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States and

Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock

XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock

(sold separately)

Notes

54 En

XM® Satellite Radio tuning

Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock,

inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM Mini-

Tuner Home Dock to your XM Ready

home audio

system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to

subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There

are three places to find your eight character XM Radio ID:

On the XM Mini-Tuner, on the XM Mini-Tuner package,

and on XM Channel 0. Record the XM Radio ID in the

following eight squares for reference.

The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”.

Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at

http://activate.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-

967-2346). Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in Canada

online at https://activate.xmradio.ca/ or call 1-877-GET-XMSR

(1-877-438-9677). You will need a major credit card. XM will

send a signal from the satellites to activate the full channel

lineup. Activation normally takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during

peak busy periods you may need to keep your XM Ready home

audio system on for up to an hour. When you can access the full

lineup on your XM Ready home audio system you are done.

1 Rotate the CINPUT selector (or press

3XM) to select “XM” as the input source.

The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in

the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio

information (such as channel number, channel name,

category, artist name, or song title) for the currently

selected channel appears in the front panel display.

When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit

automatically recalls the previously selected channel.

• The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the

analog AUDIO OUT jacks.

• If a status message or an error message appears in the front

panel display or in the GUI screen, see “XM Satellite

Radio” (page 130)

2 Search for a channel by using one of the XM

Satellite Radio search modes.

• To select a channel from the all channel list, see

“All Channel Search mode” (page 54).

• To select a channel by category, see “Category

Search mode” (page 54).

• To select a channel from the preset channels, see

“Preset Search mode” (page 55).

• To select the desired channel directly by entering

the channel number, see “Direct number access

mode” (page 55).

• You can use the Neural Surround decoder to enjoy the XM HD

surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in

multi-channels (page 74).

• You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (page 55).

• You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front

panel display or in the GUI screen (page 56).

■ All Channel Search mode

1 Press HSEARCH MODE (or ISRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “ALL CH

SEARCH”.

2 Press FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search

for a channel within all channels.

You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding

FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 9PRESET/CH k / n).

■ Category Search mode

1 Press HSEARCH MODE (or ISRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”.

2 Press JCATEGORY (or 9A-E/CAT. l / h)

repeatedly to change the channel category.

3 Press FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search

for a channel within the selected channel

category.

You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding

FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 9PRESET/CH k / n).

Activating XM Satellite Radio

Note

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE.

XM Satellite Radio operations

Notes

DOCK V-AUX VCR DVR CBL/SAT DVD BD/HD DVD MD/CD-R TV CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER XM SIRIUS

001 Preview

USB

NET

Lights up

55 En

XM® Satellite Radio tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ Preset Search mode

Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search

mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For

details, see “Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset

channels” (page 55).

1 Press HSEARCH MODE (or ISRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “PRESET

SEARCH”.

2 Press JCATEGORY (or 9A-E/CAT. l / h)

repeatedly to change the preset channel

group (A to E).

3 Press FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to change

the preset channel number (1 to 8).

You can also select the preset channel number directly by

pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) (B).

■ Direct number access mode

1 Press ISRCH MODE on the remote control

repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or

“CAT SEARCH”.

2 Press the numeric buttons (B) to enter the

desired three-digit channel number.

For example, to enter the number 123, press the

numeric buttons (B) as shown below.

• To display the XM Radio ID number in the front panel display,

select channel “0”.

• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the

numeric buttons (

) on the remote control and then press

NENT to confirm the input number.

• Instead of pressing NENT to tune into the channel

immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms

the entered channel number.

• Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons (

) or NENT

cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure.

You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite

Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in

each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall

any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel

group and number as described in “Preset Search mode”

(page 55).

1 Search for a channel you want to set as a

preset channel by using one of the XM

Satellite Radio search modes.

For details, see “XM Satellite Radio operations”

(page 54).

2 Press GMEMORY (or 0MEMORY).

The PRESET indicator lights up in the front panel

and this unit automatically selects an empty preset

number.

• To store the selected channel under an empty preset

number automatically, press and hold GMEMORY (or

0MEMORY) for more than 2 seconds instead of step 2.

In this case, the following steps are unnecessary.

• To cancel the preset operation, press GMEMORY (or

0MEMORY) again.

3 To select the preset channel group and

number (A1 to E8), press FPRESET/

TUNING/CH l / h (or 9CAT./A-E l / h

and 9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly.

• To select a higher preset channel group and

number, press Fh (or 9k).

• To select a lower preset channel group and number,

press Fl (or 9n).

1 2 3

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE and then

press 3XM.

Setting the XM Satellite Radio

preset channels

043 XMU

Channel number

PRESET

MEMORY A1

043 XMU

Lights up

56 En

XM® Satellite Radio tuning

• You can also select a preset number (1 to 8) by pressing

the numeric buttons (B).

• If you select a preset number being used (“*” appears next

to the preset number), the current preset channel will be

overwritten.

4 Press EENTER (or 9ENTER).

The preset channel is set and the PRESET indicator

disappears.

■ Clearing preset channels

You can clear the assignments of preset XM Satellite

Radio channels.

1 Select the preset XM Satellite Radio channel

to clear.

For details, see “Preset Search mode” (page 55).

2 Press and hold HSEARCH MODE (or

ISRCH MODE) until “CLEAR?” appears in

the front panel display.

3 Press EENTER (or 9ENTER) to clear the

preset channel.

To cancel the operation, press HSEARCH MODE

(or ISRCH MODE).

Use this feature to display the XM Satellite Radio

information in the front panel display or in the GUI

screen.

• You can configure the display settings with “Display Set”

(page 98).

• You can hold or release the displayed information by pressing

9ENTER. While it is held, the HOLD indicator flashes in the

front panel.

• If a status message or an error message appears in the front

panel display or GUI screen, see “XM Satellite Radio”

(page 130).

• The current XM Satellite Radio reception level appears on the

top of the XM Satellite Radio information screen. For the best

reception, adjust the orientation of the antenna of Home Dock

so that “ ” or “ ” is displayed here. “ ” is displayed if

the antenna cannot receive the signals correctly. In this case,

adjust the orientation of the antenna (page 53).

■ Front panel display

Press KINFO (or CINFO) repeatedly to toggle

between the following XM Satellite Radio

information display modes.

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to FAMP.

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information

Notes

CATEGORY INFO

Channel category, channel number, channel name

SONG INFO

Artist name, song title, channel number, channel name

ANTENNA INFO

Antenna reception level, channel number, channel name

DSP PROG. INFO

Sound field program

INPUT INFO

Input source, channel number, channel name

57 En

XM® Satellite Radio tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Back to “CATEGORY INFO”

• If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that

cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be

displayed with a space.

• When the antenna of the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock cannot

receive the signals, “NO SIGNAL” appears in the front panel

display.

■ GUI screen

Press KDISPLAY on the remote control to turn

on or off the information display.

The following information is displayed in the GUI screen.

[1] Search mode (page 54)

[2] Channel number, channel name

[3] Channel category

[4] Artist name

[5] Song title

[6] Antenna reception level

Play Information Hold:ENTER

043 : XMU

:Rock

: Cold Play

: Speed of sound

Category Search

[1]

[2]

[4]

[3]

[5]

[6]

58 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio provides over 130 channels of exclusive entertainment and 100% commercial-free music. Only

SIRIUS has more than 65 original music channels, from today’s hits to R&B, oldies, and classical masterpieces. From

authentic country and real bluegrass to cool jazz, hot latin, reggae, rock and many more. Best of all, it’s all 100%

commercial-free.

SIRIUS also has more than 55 channels of world-class sports, news and entertainment. Included as part of your

subscription, you get up to 16 NFL games a week, up to 40 NBA games a week and up to 40 NHL games a week. (Games

are broadcast during their respective seasons.)

Coupled with great sports news from ESPN, the SIRIUS sports offering is unrivaled. And don't forget a host of other

great news and entertainment, like NPR, CNBC, Fox News, Radio Disney and E! Entertainment Radio. For more

information, visit http://www.sirius.com/.

Connect the SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) to the

SIRIUS jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see

the operating instructions provided with the SiriusConnect

tuner.

• To ensure optimal reception of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

signals, the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner must be placed

at or near a window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. The

orientation of the antenna for the best reception differs

depending on the area. Refer to the instruction manuals

supplied with the SiriusConnect tuner for the installation of the

antenna.You can mount it indoors or outdoors.

• Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information in the front panel or in

the GUI screen (page 63) to check the antenna reception level

and adjust the orientation of the antenna.

• You need to connect the SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall

outlet.

• If “CHECK SR TUNER” or “ANTENNA ERROR” appears in

the front panel display, the connection of the SiriusConnect

tuner or antenna is incorrect. In such cases, check the

connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and the antenna.

• If “NOT SUPPORTED” appears in the front panel display, this

unit does not support the connected SiriusConnect tuner.

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

SIRIUS Satellite Radio

legal disclaimer

SIRIUS is available in the U.S.A. for subscribers with addresses in the continental U.S.A. and is available in Canada for subscribers

with a Canadian address. To Get SIRIUS Satellite Radio a subscription and compatible tuner and antenna are required and sold

separately. Visit sirius.com for the most complete and up-to-date channel lineup and information.

“SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo and related marks are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.

Connecting the SiriusConnect™

tuner

SIRIUS

Notes

59 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Before using the SIRIUS Satellite Radio feature, you need

to activate your SIRIUS Satellite Radio subscription. To

activate the subscription you need the Sirius ID which is

uniquely assigned to the SiriusConnect tuner. Sirius ID is

12-digit number and it appears on the package of the

SiriusConnect tuner, on the label of the SiriusConnect

tuner, and when you tune into the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

channel “0” (see below).

■ Displaying the Sirius ID of your

SiriusConnect tuner

1 Set the operation mode selector on the

remote control to FSOURCE and then press

3SIRIUS.

2 Press B0 and then NENT to display the

Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner.

“000 Sirius IDxxxxxxxxxxxx” (“xxxxxxxxxxxx”

indicates the 12-digit Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect

tuner) appears in the front panel display.

Write the Sirius ID below.

3 Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to activate

your subscription.

Status messages appear in the front panel display or GUI screen

during the activation. For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio”

(page 131). Once the activation is finished, “SUB UPDATED”

appears.

1 Rotate the CINPUT selector (or press

3SIRIUS) to select “SIRIUS” as the input

source.

The cursor on the left of the SIRIUS indicator lights

up in the front panel display and the SIRIUS Satellite

Radio information (such as channel number, channel

name, category, artist name, or song title) for the

currently selected channel appears in the front panel

display.

When you select “SIRIUS” as the input source, this unit

automatically recalls the previously selected channel.

• The SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the

analog AUDIO OUT jacks.

• When you have not activated your subscription yet, you

can only select channel “184” or “000”.

• If a status message or an error message appears in the front

panel display or in the GUI screen, see “SIRIUS Satellite

Radio” (page 131).

2 Search for a channel by using one of the

SIRIUS Satellite Radio search modes.

• To select a channel from the all channel list, see

“All Channel Search mode” (page 60).

• To select a channel by category, see “Category

Search mode” (page 60).

• To select a channel from the preset channels, see

“Preset Search mode” (page 60).

• To select the desired channel directly by entering

the channel number, see “Direct number access

mode” (page 60).

• If you tune into a channel that you do not subscribe, “CALL

888-539-SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE” appears in the front panel

display.

• You can set the SIRIUS Satellite Radio preset channels

(page 61).

• You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information in the

front panel display or in the GUI screen (page 63).

Activating SIRIUS Satellite

Radio™ subscription

SIRIUS Satellite Radio online information

Contact for activation

URL: https//activate.siriusradio.com/

Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)

ID:

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE.

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™

operations

Notes

DOCK V-AUX VCR DVR CBL/SAT DVD BD/HD DVD MD/CD-R TV CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER XM SIRIUS

USB

NET

184 SIRIUS Wea

Lights up

60 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

■ All Channel Search mode

1 Press HSEARCH MODE (or ISRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “ALL CH

SEARCH”.

2 Press FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search

for a channel within all channels.

• You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding

PRESET/TUNING/CH

(or

PRESET/CH

• You can skip channels to the previous or next category by

pressing JCATEGORY (or 9A-E/CAT. l / h).

■ Category Search mode

1 Press HSEARCH MODE (or ISRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”.

2 Press JCATEGORY (or 9A-E/CAT. l / h)

repeatedly to change the channel category.

3 Press FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search

for a channel within the selected channel

category.

You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding

FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 9PRESET/CH k / n).

This unit skips the channels when this unit is in the All Channel

Search mode or Category Search mode in the following cases (it

is not malfunction of this unit):

– the channel is locked (page 62).

– the channel is out of service.

– you do not subscribe to the channel.

■ Preset Search mode

Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search

mode, you must preset SIRIUS channels. For details, see

“Setting the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ preset channels”

(page 61).

1 Press HSEARCH MODE (or ISRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “PRESET

SEARCH”.

2 Press JCATEGORY (or 9A-E/CAT. l / h)

repeatedly to change the preset channel

group (A to E).

3 Press FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to change

the preset channel number (1 to 8).

You can also select the preset channel number directly by

pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) (B).

■ Direct number access mode

1 Press ISRCH MODE on the remote control

repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or

“CAT SEARCH”.

2 Press the numeric buttons (

) to enter the

desired three-digit channel number.

For example, to enter the number 123, press the

numeric buttons (

) as shown below.

• To display the Sirius ID number displayed in the front panel

display, select channel “0”.

• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the

numeric buttons (

) on the remote control and then press

NENT to confirm the input number.

• Instead of pressing NENT to tune into the channel

immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms

the entered channel number.

• If no button is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a

one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms

the entered channel number.

• If the selected channel is locked, “PIN:____” appears in the

front panel display. Enter the four-digit Parental Lock code

number by using the numeric buttons (

) or press NENT to

cancel (page 62).

Note

1 2 3

61 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can use this feature to store up to 40 SIRIUS Satellite

Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in

each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall

any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel

group and number as described in “Preset Search mode”

(page 60).

1 Search for a channel you want to set as a

preset channel by using one of the SIRIUS

Satellite Radio search modes.

For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio™

operations” (page 59).

2 Press GMEMORY (or 0MEMORY).

The PRESET indicator lights up in the front panel

and this unit automatically selects an empty preset

number.

• To store the selected channel under an empty preset

number automatically, press and hold GMEMORY (or

0MEMORY) for more than 2 seconds instead of step 2.

In this case, the following steps are unnecessary.

• To cancel the preset operation, press GMEMORY (or

0MEMORY) again.

3 To select the preset channel group and

number (A1 to E8), press FPRESET/

TUNING/CH l / h (or 9CAT./A-E l / h

and 9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly.

• To select a higher preset channel group and

number, press Fh (or 9k).

• To select a lower preset channel group and number,

press Fl (or 9n).

• You can also select a preset number (1 to 8) by pressing

the numeric buttons (B).

• If you select a preset number being used (“*” appears next

to the preset number), the current preset channel will be

overwritten.

4 Press EENTER (or 9ENTER).

The preset channel is set and the PRESET indicator

disappears.

■ Clearing preset channels

You can clear the assignments of preset SIRIUS Satellite

Radio channels.

1 Select the preset SIRIUS Satellite Radio

channel to clear.

For details, see “Preset Search mode” (page 60).

2 Press and hold HSEARCH MODE (or

ISRCH MODE) until “CLEAR?” appears in

the front panel display.

3 Press EENTER (or 9ENTER) to clear the

preset channel.

To cancel the operation, press HSEARCH MODE

(or ISRCH MODE).

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE and then

press 3SIRIUS.

Setting the SIRIUS Satellite

Radio™ preset channels

001 SIRIUS Hit

Channel number

PRESET

MEMORY A1

001 SIRIUS HIT

Lights up

62 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

You can use the Parental Lock feature to limit the access

to the desired SIRIUS Satellite channels. This unit

automatically skips the locked channels when this unit is

in the All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode

and you search a channel by pressing FPRESET/

TUNING/CH l / h (or 9PRESET/CH k / n).

■ Setting the code number and the locking

channels

Use this feature to set the Parental Lock code number

(PIN) and select the channels to be locked.

1 Set the operation mode selector to FAMP

on the remote control and then press

IMENU to display the GUI menu.

If the menu directory other than “Top Menu” (page 79) is

displayed, press and hold IMENU to display the top GUI

menu.

2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Input

Select” and then press 9h.

3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the SIRIUS

Satellite Radio icon and then press

0SUBMENU.

4 Press 9n to select “Parental Lock” and then

9ENTER.

The following screen appears.

If the Parental Lock code number is already set, “PIN ----”

appears instead of “NEW PIN 0000”.

5 Use 9k / n / l / h to enter the desired 4-

digit code number.

• To select a number, press 9k / n.

• To move the digit position, press 9l / h.

If the Parental Lock code number is already set, enter it.

6 Press 9ENTER to confirm the code number.

The SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list screen

appears.

7 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired

channel category and then press 9ENTER.

The SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list

screen appears.

In the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list screen, this unit

outputs the sound of the selected channel even if the

channel is locked.

8 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the

channel you want to lock and then press

9ENTER.

Check mark appears before the locked channel.

When you select the locked channel and press 9ENTER,

this unit unlocks the selected channel.

9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 to lock or unlock

another channel.

To switch between the category list screen and channel list

screen, press 9k/n/l/h to select “CAT” or “CHAN”

and then press 9ENTER.

10 Press 9k / n / l / h to select “EXIT” and

then press 9ENTER.

11 Press IMENU to turn off the GUI menu.

This unit is tuned into the last channel you select in

the “Parental Lock” screen. If the channel is locked,

this unit is tuned into “184 SIRIUS Weather &

Emergency” or “000 Sirius ID”.

• If you forget or want to change the Parental lock code number,

use “SIRIUS PIN” (page 122) to reset the Parental Lock code

number.

• Selecting “ALL” in “INITIALIZE” (page 122) will cancel all

parental locks.

■ Tuning into the locked channels

You can tune into the locked channels by the Direct

number access mode or preset tuning mode. When you

tune into the locked channel, following message appears

in the front panel display. Enter the code number you set

for the Parental Lock feature by using the numeric buttons

(

) or press NENT to cancel the tuning.

Setting the Parental Lock

Parental Lock

NEW PIN

0 0 0 0

Apply:ENTEWR

Note

63 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

If the entered code number is incorrect, “Wrong” appears in the

front panel display and this unit is tuned into the previously

selected channel.

Use this feature to display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

information in the front panel display or in the GUI

screen.

• You can configure the display settings with “Display Set”

(page 98).

• You can hold or release the displayed information by pressing

9ENTER. While it is held, the HOLD indicator flashes in the

front panel.

If a status message or an error message appears in the front

panel display or GUI screen, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio”

(page 131).

■ Front panel display

Press KINFO (or CINFO) repeatedly to toggle

between the following SIRIUS Satellite Radio

information display modes.

Back to “CATEGORY INFO”

• If the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information contains a character

that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be

displayed with a space.

• When the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner cannot receive the

signals, “ACQUIRING” appears in the front panel display.

• When an information is unavailable, “––––” appears.

■ GUI screen

Press KDISPLAY on the remote control to turn

on or off the information display.

The following information is displayed in the GUI screen.

[1] Search mode (page 59)

[2] Channel number/name

[3] Channel category

[4] Artist name

[5] Song title

[6] Composer name

[7] Antenna reception level

Note

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to FAMP.

Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite

Radio™ information

Note

CATEGORY INFO

Channel category, channel number, channel name

SONG INFO

Artist name, song title, channel number, channel name

COMPOSER INFO

Composer name, channel number, channel name

ANTENNA INFO

018 LOCKED

PIN:

____

Channel number

Antenna reception level, channel number, channel name

DSP PROG. INFO

Sound field program

INPUT INFO

Input source, channel number, channel name

Play Information Hold:ENTER

008 :Big ’80s

:Pop

: Sanumemo

: Road to India

: Frankie Zipper

ALL CHANNEL SEARCH

[1]

[2]

[4]

[3]

[6]

[7]

[5]

64 En

You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of

this unit and enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without

wiring between this unit and the Bluetooth component. You need to perform “pairing” the connected Bluetooth receiver

and your Bluetooth component in advance.

For details about status messages displayed in the front panel display and in the GUI screen, see “Bluetooth” (page 135).

This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Bluetooth profile.

Pairing must be performed when using a Bluetooth

component with the Bluetooth receiver connected to this

unit for the first time or if the pairing data has been

deleted. “Pairing” refers to the operation of registering a

Bluetooth component for Bluetooth communications.

• You need the pairing operation only for the first time when you

use the Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth receiver.

• Pairing requires operations on this unit and on the other

component with which Bluetooth communications are to be

established. If necessary, refer to the other component’s

operating instructions.

There are two pairing methods: pairing by using “Pairing”

in the GUI menu and quick pairing.

■ Pairing by using the GUI menu

Use this feature to perform pairing with the GUI screen.

For details, see “Pairing” (page 86).

■ Quick pairing

1 Rotate the CINPUT selector (or set the

operation mode selector to FSOURCE and

then press 3DOCK) to select “DOCK” as

the input source.

2 Turn on your Bluetooth component and then

set the Bluetooth component to the pairing

mode.

For details about how to operate the Bluetooth

component, refer to the manual for it.

3 Press and hold EENTER (or 9ENTER)

until “Searching” appears in the front panel

display.

While the Bluetooth receiver is in the pairing mode,

DOCK indicator flashes in the front panel display.

To cancel the pairing, press

ENTER

(or

ENTER

) again.

4 Check that the Bluetooth component detects

the Bluetooth receiver.

If the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth

receiver, “YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in

the Bluetooth device list.

5 Select the Bluetooth receiver in the

Bluetooth device list and then enter the pass

key “0000” on the Bluetooth component.

When the pairing procedure is successful,

“Completed” appears in the front panel display.

The Yamaha Bluetooth receiver can be paired with up to eight

Bluetooth components. When pairing is conducted successfully

with a ninth component and the pairing data is registered, the

pairing data for the least recently used other component is cleared.

1 Rotate the CINPUT selector (or set the

operation mode selector to FSOURCE and

then press 3DOCK) to select “DOCK” as

the input source.

2 Start playback of your Bluetooth component.

When the connected Bluetooth receiver detects the

Bluetooth component, “BT Connected” appears in

the front panel display.

• When you press 9ENTER on the remote control, the

connected Bluetooth receiver searches and connect to the last

connected Bluetooth component. If the Bluetooth receiver

cannot find the Bluetooth component, “Not found” appears in

the front panel display.

• To disconnect the Bluetooth receiver from the Bluetooth

component, press 9ENTER.

Using Bluetooth™ components

Note

Pairing the Bluetooth™ receiver

and your Bluetooth component

To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the

pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully

understand all the instructions before starting.

Note

Playback of the Bluetooth™

component

65 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

In “Music Content” menu of the GUI menu, you can browse the music contents of iPod, USB component, PC/

MusicCAST, Internet radio, and Rhapsody

(U.S.A. model only). You can also use the playback control feature or

configure the playback style setting for the selected sub input source.

1 Set the operation mode selector to FAMP

on the remote control and then press

IMENU to display the GUI menu.

If the menu directory other than “Top Menu” (page 79) is

displayed, press and hold IMENU to display the top GUI

menu.

2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Music

Content” and then press 9h.

3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired

sub input source and then press 9ENTER.

The menu of the selected sub input source appears in

the GUI screen. The following screen shows the iPod

menu for example.

If the selected sub input source is not available, “Not Available”

appears.

4 Navigate the menu of the selected sub input

source.

For details about the menu items and operation

procedure for each sub input source, see the

following pages.

• iPod (page 66)

• USB (page 68)

• PC/MCX (page 68)

• NET RADIO (page 68)

• Rhapsody (page 68)

5 Press IMENU to turn off the GUI menu.

Music Content menu

Music Content menu operations

Note

iPod

USB

PC/MCX

NET RADIO

Select:ENTER

1 / 4

Music

Videos

Settings

"Simple Remote Mode"

66 En

Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the

DOCK terminal of this unit (page 22), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You can

also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to enhance the sound quality of the compression artifacts

(such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (page 45).

• This unit supports iPod touch, iPod (Click Wheel, including iPod classic), iPod nano and iPod mini.

• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.

• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model of your Yamaha iPod universal dock. The following description is

based on using YDS-11.

• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod Connected” appears in the front panel display.

• For details about status messages displayed in the front panel display and in the GUI screen, see “iPod” (page 135).

• You can select whether or not this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod when this unit is in the standby mode by configuring

the “Standby Charge” setting (page 99).

The following diagram shows the construction of the iPod menu. For information on how to display the iPod menu, see

“Music Content menu operations” (page 65).

* “Videos” does not appear unless your iPod and Yamaha iPod universal dock support the video browsing feature.

Also, the folder structure under “Videos” varies depending on the video contents stored on your iPod.

Using iPod™

Notes

iPod menu tree

Note

Music

Videos *

Settings

“Simple Remote

Mode”

Playlists

Artists

Albums

Songs

Genres

Composers

Repeat

Shuffle

playlists

artist list

album list

song list

genre list

composer list

song list

album list

song list

artist list

album list

song list

album list

song list

iPod

67 En

Using iPod™

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You control your iPod with the following remote control

buttons.

■ GUI menu operation

To navigate the iPod menu using the GUI screen, set the

operation mode selector to FAMP.

You can control your iPod by using the zone OSD. However, the

design and available functions may be different from the iPod

menu displayed in the GUI screen in the main zone.

■ Playback control operation

To operate your iPod using the following remote control

buttons, set the operation mode selector to FSOURCE

and then press 3DOCK.

■ Playback style settings

To change the following playback style settings, select

“Settings” in the iPod menu.

Repeat (Repeat)

Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a

sequence of songs.

Choices: Off, One, All

• Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature.

• Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.

• Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of

songs.

Shuffle (Shuffle)

Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in

random order.

Choices: Off, Songs, Albums

• Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature.

• Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random

order.

• Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in

random order.

• To toggle between setting parameters, press 9ENTER

repeatedly.

• When “Repeat” is set to “One” or “All”, “ ” or “ ” appears

in the GUI screen.

• When “Shuffle” is on, “ ” appears in the GUI screen.

■ Simple Remote Mode

If you select “Simple Remote Mode” in the iPod menu,

this unit turns off the GUI screen and allows you to

operate your iPod with the remote control of this unit or

controls on your iPod.

You can also select the Simple Remote Mode by holding down

KDISPLAY for 3 seconds when the operation mode selector is

set to FAMP.

■ Play information screen

[1] Album art (if available)

[2] Track number/total tracks

[3] Elapsed time

[4] (playback), (pausing), (search

forward) or

(search backward)

[5] Shuffle and repeat icons

[6] Artist name, album title, song title

[7] Progress bar

[8] Remaining time

[9] Submenu icon

Submenu items

Play Control (Playback control)

Select the desired playback control item and then press (or

press and hold) 9ENTER to control your iPod.

Play Style (Playback style)

Select the desired playback style setting and then press

9ENTER repeatedly to toggle between setting

parameters. For details on the playback style settings, see

“Playback style settings” (page 67).

Controlling iPod™

Button Function

9 ENTER Subsequent menu/Play

k Menu up

n Menu down

l Previous menu

h Subsequent menu

0 SUBMENU Turns on/off the submenu when the play

information screen is displayed

I MENU Turns on/off the GUI menu when the play

information screen is not displayed

K DISPLAY Turns on/off the play information screen

Note

Button Function

A ll Search backward (Press and hold)

Search forward

(Press and hold)

a Skip forward

b Skip backward

s Stop

e Pause

p Play

Frankie Zipper

Made-to-order

Road to India

1/12

0:51 -7:44

Play Information SUBMENU

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

68 En

This unit is equipped with USB and network features that allow you to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3, MPEG-4

AAC, and WMA files saved on your USB storage device, USB portable audio player, PC and Yamaha MCX-2000 or

access the Internet Radio. You can also access the Rhapsody

streaming service (U.S.A. model only).

• Yamaha MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations.

• For further details about networking, refer to the operation manuals supplied with your network devices. Also refer to technical

reference books, if needed.

• Some WAV, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, and WMA files may not be playable or may be noisy when played.

For details about status messages displayed in the front panel display and in the GUI screen, see “USB and Network” (page 133).

The following diagram shows the construction of the USB, PC/MCX, NET RADIO and Rhapsody menus. For

information on how to display these menus, see “Music Content menu operations” (page 65).

*1The directory hierarchy of the USB menu varies depending on the folder structure of the connected USB component.

*2Only the available PC servers and MCX-2000 are displayed.

*3The folder structure under the location list varies depending on your region.

*4The account setup screen appears if you have not entered your account information yet. For details, see “Account setup for

Rhapsody

” (page 71).

*5You can search contents by keyword.

*6You can search contents by category provided by Rhapsody

Using USB and network features

Notes

USB and network menu tree

Notes

USB

PC/MCX

NET RADIO

Rhapsody

folder list

file list

PC server list

MusicCAST

Bookmarks

Locations

Genres

New Stations

Popular stations

Podcasts

Help

My Library

Rhapsody Music Guide

Rhapsody

Channels

station list

location list

genre list

station list

Podcast list

help item list

Artists

Albums

Tracks

Playlists

Channels

station list

Podcast list

artist list

album list

track list

playlists

channel list

genre list

album list

track list

channel list

track list

69 En

Using USB and network features

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can navigate the USB and network menus with the

following remote control buttons.

■ GUI menu operation

To navigate the USB and network menus using the GUI

screen, set the operation mode selector to FAMP.

You can navigate the USB and network menus by using the

zone OSD. However, the design and available functions may be

different from the menus displayed in the GUI screen in the

main zone.

■ Playback control operation

To operate your USB or network component using the

following remote control buttons, set the operation mode

selector to FSOURCE and then press 3USB/NET.

• Some button operations do not work depending on the selected

sub input source.

• (U.S.A. model only)

Ae and Ab do not work during Rhapsody channel

playback. Aa works up to 30 times every 3 hours.

■ Play information screen

The following screen shows the play information screen

displayed for USB content playback for example.

Available information and functions vary depending on

the selected sub input source.

[1] Artist name, album title, song title

[2] Elapsed time

[3] (playback)

[4] Shuffle and repeat icons

[5] Submenu icon

Submenu items

Play Control (Playback control)

Select the desired playback control item and then press (or

press and hold) 9ENTER to control the playback.

Play Style (Playback style)

Select the desired playback style setting and then press

9ENTER repeatedly to toggle between setting

parameters. For details on the playback style settings, see

“Playback style settings” (page 67).

To turn on the shuffle feature, set “Shuffle” to “On”.

Use this feature to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3,

WMA and MPEG-4 AAC files saved on your USB storage

device or USB portable audio player connected to the

USB port on the front panel of this unit.

• This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT 16 or

FAT 32 format) or USB MTP devices.

• Only the first partition is displayed in the GUI menu. You

cannot select files in other partitions.

• Up to 8 levels of directory hierarchy and 500 music files per

directory are recognized.

• Some devices may not work properly even if they meet the

requirements.

• Some WAV, MP3, WMA and MPEG-4 AAC files may not be

playable or may be noisy when played.

• When you connect your USB storage device or USB portable

audio player, there may be an about 10 seconds delay.

Navigating USB and network

menus

Button Function

9 ENTER Subsequent menu/Play

k Menu up

n Menu down

l Previous menu

h Subsequent menu

0 SUBMENU Turns on/off the submenu when any submenu

items are available (submenu icon appears on

the bottom right corner of the GUI menu

screen)

I MENU Turns on/off the GUI menu when the play

information screen is not displayed

K DISPLAY Turns on/off the play information screen

Note

Button Function

A a Skip forward (except “NET RADIO”)

b Skip backward (except “NET RADIO”)

s Stop

e Pause/Play (“Rhapsody” only)

p Play (Menu browse mode)

Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)

Notes

Using a USB storage device or a

USB portable audio player

Notes

Frankie Zipper

Made-to-order

Road to India

0:51

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

Play Information SUBMENU

70 En

Using USB and network features

Use this feature to enjoy music files saved on your PC or

Yamaha MCX-2000. MCX-2000 is a music server that

enhances the concept of Yamaha exclusive MusicCAST, a

digital music delivery method over a personal network.

1 Install Windows Media Player 11 on your PC,

or register this unit on your Yamaha MCX-

2000.

• Refer to “Installing Windows Media Player 11 on

your PC” and “Registering this unit on the Yamaha

MCX-2000” (page 70).

• This procedure is needed only for the first time.

• (PC only) You may need to make some settings of

Windows Media Player 11 to start the contents

sharing. Refer to the attached documents of

Windows Media Player 11.

2 Turn on your PC or MCX-2000.

3 Select “PC/MCX” in the “Music Contens”

menu and then select the desired server or

“MusicCAST” to begin playback.

• Yamaha MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations.

• You can connect this unit to up to 15 PC servers and 1 MCX-

2000, and each server must be connected to the same subnet as

this unit.

• Some WAV, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, and WMA files on your PC

may not be playable or may be noisy when played.

• (MCX-2000 only) Files marked with an asterisk (*) have not

been converted to MP3 format. You cannot play back such files

immediately unless you set the “Receive PCM Stream” setting

of this unit to “ON” on MCX-2000. For details, refer to the

instruction manual of MCX-2000.

■ Installing Windows Media Player 11 on

your PC

With Windows Media Player 11, you can play back the

audio files on your PC. For details refer to the documents

of Windows Media Player 11.

You can also play back the audio files on your PC with

Windows Media Connect 2.0 installed.

1 Install Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.

You can download the installer of Windows Media

Player 11 from the Microsoft website, or use the

upgrade function of the installed Microsoft Windows

Media Player.

2 Turn on your PC and then share a folder on

the PC.

The shared folder is added to the PC server list in the

top “PC/MCX” menu screen.

• If the operating system (OS) of your PC is Windows Vista,

Windows Media Player 11 is pre-installed (except some

products).

• Some security software installed on your PC (anti-virus

software, firewall software, etc.) may block the access of this

unit to your PC. In such cases, configure the security software

appropriately.

■ Registering this unit on the Yamaha

MCX-2000

You must register this unit on your Yamaha MCX-2000 so

that this unit can be recognized by your Yamaha MCX-

2000. For details, refer to the operation manual supplied

with your Yamaha MCX-2000.

1 Turn off this unit.

2 Set your Yamaha MCX-2000 to the “Auto

Config” mode.

3 Turn on this unit.

• “MusicCAST” appears in the top “PC/MCX”

menu screen.

• if the client ID for this unit appears in the OSD of

your Yamaha MCX-2000 (shown as “CL-

XXXXX”), the automatic configuration is

complete.

• The latter part of the client ID for this unit is same as the last 5

digits of the MAC address of this unit.

• To clear the registered client ID of this unit, use the “Manual

Config” mode of your Yamaha MCX-2000 (refer to the

instruction manual of MCX-2000) and then select

“NETWORK” in “ADVANCED SETUP” on this unit

(page 122).

• The client control functions of MusicCAST over this unit other

than “View Play Info”, “Receive PCM Stream” and “Edit Client

title” are not available. Avoid using these functions as it will

stop the playback on this unit.

Using a PC server or Yamaha

MCX-2000

Notes

71 En

Using USB and network features

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Use this feature to listen to Internet Radio stations. This

unit uses the vTuner Internet Radio station database

service particularly customized for this unit, providing

over 2000 radio station database. Further, you can store

your favorite stations with bookmarks.

• This service may be discontinued without notice.

• Some Internet Radio stations may not be played.

• To listen to the Internet Radio, connect this unit to your network

(page 23).

• A narrowband Internet connection (i.e. 56K modem, ISDN) will

not provide satisfactory results, and a broadband connection is

strongly recommended (i.e. a cable modem, an xDSL modem,

etc.). For detailed information, consult with your ISP.

• “Podcast” is a type of the Internet Radio service, and there are a

number of Podcast services available on the Internet. The

Podcast is not a continuous service. That is, this unit stops

playback when an episode of the Podcast ends.

• Some security devices (such as firewall) may block the access

of this unit to Internet Radio stations. In such cases, configure

the security settings appropriately.

■ Storing your favorite Internet Radio

stations with bookmarks

Use this feature to select your favorite Internet Radio

stations quickly.

Set the operation mode to FSOURCE and then

press and hold

TITLE while the selected

Internet Radio station service is being broadcast.

The stored Internet Radio station is added to the

“Bookmarks” list (page 68).

• To remove the stored station from the list, select the station

under “Bookmarks” and then press and hold 8TITLE.

• You can also register your favorite Internet Radio stations to this

unit by accessing the following website with the web browser

on your PC. To use this feature, you need the MAC address of

this unit as the ID number and your e-mail address to create

your personal account. Use “Information” in the “Network”

menu to display the MAC address of this unit (page 96). For

details, refer to the help information on the website.

URL: http://yradio.vtuner.com/

The Rhapsody

service is the power behind the

Rhapsody

Media Player (the Rhapsody

player software

that you can download to your computer). Rhapsody

service supplies the music, keeps My Library up to date,

provides you with Rhapsody

channels, the Playlist

Central online community, and manages your downloads.

Your software connects to Rhapsody

service through the

internet. Because your account information and

Rhapsody

content are on servers instead of any

individual computer, your music is infinitely portable.

Much of what you see in the Display area comes from

Rhapsody

service. What you can do with Rhapsody

service depends on your subscription. You can use

Rhapsody

service for free, or get even more from a paid

membership. The Rhapsody

service also brings you

Rhapsody

Online, a streamlined, internet version of

Rhapsody

that you can access from almost anywhere.

Just sign in to your Rhapsody

account to start letting the

Rhapsody

service work for you.

For more information, http://www.rhapsody-free.com/.

■ Account setup for Rhapsody

When you select “Rhapsody” as a sub input source for the

first time, the account setup screen appears in the

“Rhapsody” menu screen. Follow the procedure below to

set up your account for the Rhapsody

service.

1 Press 9l / h to select “Formal

registration” or “Trial registration” and then

press 9ENTER.

If you select “Trial registration”, the URL for the content of the

trial service appears. If you proceed, press 9l / h to select

“OK” and then press 9ENTER to enter the Rhapsody menu.

2 Press 9l / h to select “OK” and then press

9ENTER.

3 Use 9k / n / l / h and 9ENTER to input

your user name (up to 64 characters), select

“OK” and then press 9ENTER.

4 Press 9l / h to select “OK” and then press

9ENTER.

Using the Internet Radio

Notes

Using the Rhapsody

service

(U.S.A. model only)

Prohibition

You may not modify, reproduce, reverse-engineer or create

derivative works based upon the software or any portion

thereof.

72 En

Using USB and network features

5 Use 9k / n / l / h and 9ENTER to input

your password (up to 64 characters), select

“OK” and then press 9ENTER.

“Please wait...” appears and then top “Rhapsody”

menu screen appears.

If registration failed, the error message appears. In this case,

start all over again.

■ Editing/deleting your account or

checking trial information

1 In the top “Rhapsody” menu screen, press

0SUBMENU.

The submenu screen appears.

2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Upgrade

account”, “Remove account” or “Show trial

info” and then press 9ENTER.

• If you selected “Upgrade account”, follow steps 2

to 5 in “Account setup for Rhapsody

”.

• If you selected “Remove account”, press 9l / h

to select “OK” and then press 9ENTER to delete

your account.

• If you selected “Show trial info”, check the trial

information and then press 9ENTER.

“Show trial info” appears only when you are using the trial

service.

■ Searching contents by keyword

Use this feature to search Rhapsody

music contents by

artist, album name, or track name.

1 In the top “Rhapsody” menu screen, press

9k / n to select “Search” and then press

9h.

2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the

category you want to search and then press

9ENTER.

3 Use 9k / n / l / h and 9ENTER to input

the desired keyword, select “OK” and then

press 9ENTER.

The list of the contents that match the specified

keyword is displayed.

“No match data” appears if no content matches the specified

keyword.

■ Submenu items in the “Rhapsody” menu

In the “Rhapsody” menu, the following submenu items are

also available in addition to “Play Control” and “Play

Style” (page 69).

Add to My Library

Select this item to add the track or album currently

selected to “My Library”.

Add Album to My Library

Select this item to add the album currently selected to “My

Library”.

Remove from My Library

Select this item to remove the track or album currently

selected from “My Library”.

Play

Select this item to start playback of the item currently

selected.

Available submenu items vary depending on the screen where

you press 0SUBMENU.

Use this feature to access the desired music sources (WAV,

MP3 and WMA files on the connected PC, MCX-2000 or

USB storage devices, Internet Radio Stations, and

Rhapsody

music contents) directly. You can preset 8

items for each sub input source.

■ Assigning the items to the numeric

button (1-8) (B)

1 Select a desired content you want to assign

to a numeric button (1-8) (B), and then play

back the content.

2 Press

MEMORY (or

MEMORY).

The PRESET indicator lights up in the front panel

and this unit automatically selects an empty preset

number.

Note

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE and then

press 3USB/NET.

Using shortcut buttons

PRESET

MEMORY 1

SONG

Lights up

73 En

Using USB and network features

BASIC

OPERATION

English

• To store the selected content under an empty preset number

automatically, press and hold GMEMORY (or 0MEMORY)

for more than 2 seconds instead of step 2. In this case, the

following steps are unnecessary.

• To cancel the preset, press GMEMORY (or 0MEMORY)

again.

• When you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the memory preset mode is automatically canceled.

In this case, start over from step 2.

3 Press a numeric button (1-8) (B) that you

want to assign.

If you select a preset number being used (“*” appears next to

the preset number), the current preset number will be

overwritten.

4 Press EENTER (or 9ENTER).

The preset content is set and the PRESET indicator

disappears.

■ Select an item by using numeric buttons

(1-8) (B)

Press one of the numeric button (1-8) (B) to

which the desired item is assigned to select the

item as the input source.

This unit starts the playback of the source assigned to

the selected numeric button.

• “Empty Memory!” appears in the front panel display and

the short message display when you press the numeric

button (1-8) (B) to which no items are assigned.

• This unit does not recall the correct item assigned to the

selected numeric button (1-8) (B) in the following cases:

– the connected USB device is incorrect.

– the PC or MCX-2000 which stores the selected item is

turned off or disconnected from the network.

– the selected Internet Radio station or Rhapsody

service

is temporary unavailable or out of service.

– the directory of the selected item has been changed.

This unit stores the relative position of the preset items in a

directory or playlist, and does not recall the correct item

by using numeric buttons (1-8) (B) if you add or delete

music files to or from the same directory or playlist as the

preset items. In such cases, preset the desired item to the

numeric buttons (1-8) (B) again.

We recommend the following methods:

USB storage devices

Create eight directories which contain the desired items in a

directory beside the directory which contains all music files,

and then preset the top item of each directory to the numeric

buttons (1-8) (B). When you change the items which are

preset to the numeric buttons (1-8) (B), replace the items in

the directory to the desired items without deleting the

directory.

PC server/MCX-2000

Create eight playlists which contain the desired items, and

then preset the top item of each playlist to the numeric

buttons (1-8) (B). When you change the items which are

preset to the numeric buttons (1-8) (B), replace the

registered items in the playlist with the desired items

without deleting the playlist.

Notes

PRESET

MEMORY 7

SONG

Preset number

74 En

■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel

sources (surround decode mode)

Use this feature to play back sources with selected

decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multi-

channels.

Set the operation mode selector to

AMP and

then press

SUR. DECODE repeatedly on the

remote control to select the surround decode

mode.

You can select desired surround decoder modes depending

on the type of source you are playing and your personal

preference.

You can change the decoder parameter settings in “Stereo/

Surround” (page 80).

■ Decoder descriptions

When you select the surround decode mode for the multi-

channel digital sources, this unit automatically selects the

corresponding decoder for each source.

■ Selecting decoders used with MOVIE

sound field programs

You can select one of the following decoder types for use

with the MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono

Movie”). For details about the MOVIE sound field

programs, see “For movie sources” (page 44). For details

on how to select the decoder type, see “Sound field

parameter descriptions” (page 81).

Choices: PLIIx Movie (PLII Movie), Neo:6 Cinema

Advanced sound configurations

Selecting decoders

Pro Logic

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.

PLIIx Movie

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie

sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when

“Surround Back” (page 88) is set to “None” or using headphones.

PLIIx Music

PLII Music

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music

sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when

“Surround Back” (page 88) is set to “None” or using headphones.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music

sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround

Back” (page 88) is set to “None” or using headphones.

Decoder description

Name of the

decoder

(Decoder Type)

PLIIx Music

PLII Music

PLIIx Game

PLII Game

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game

sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when

“Surround Back” (page 88) is set to “None” or using headphones.

Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie sources.

Neo:6 Music

DTS processing for music sources.

CSII Cinema

(U.S.A. model only)

SRS Circle Surround II processing for movie sources.

CSII Music

(U.S.A. model only)

SRS Circle Surround II processing for music sources.

NRL-THX

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Neural-THX Surround processing for any sources. The

Neural-THX Surround decoder is especially suitable for the

XM HD Surround program of XM Satellite Radio.

NRL-THX Music

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Neural-THX Surround processing for music sources. The

Neural-THX Surround decoder is especially suitable for the

XM HD Surround music program of XM Satellite Radio.

75 En

Advanced sound configurations

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Selecting decoders for multi-channel

sources

If you connected surround back speakers, use this feature

to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel

sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX,

DTS-ES, or Neural-THX decoders.

Set the operation mode selector to FAMP and

then press MEXTD SUR. on the remote control

repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1-

channel playback.

Use this feature to activate the desired decoder manually when

this unit cannot detect the signal flag encoded to the input

sources correctly.

• The available decoders vary depending on the setting of the

speakers and the input sources.

• 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible in the following cases:

– when “Surround” (page 87) or “Surround Back” (page 88) is

set to “None”.

– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks is being played.

– when the source being played does not contain surround left

and right channel signals.

– when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.

– when this unit is in the stereo playback, 7ch Enhancer

(page 45) or PURE DIRECT (page 47) mode.

– when “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” (page 122).

• If “EXTD Surround” is set to “Auto” (page 99), the decoder

mode is automatically set to “AUTO” every time this unit is

turned off.

• “Neural-THX” is only available on the U.S.A. and Canada

models.

Choice Functions

AUTO

Activates the optimum decoder to play back

signals in 6.1/7.1 channels when this unit

recognizes a signal flag being input.

Decoders

(PLIIx Movie,

PLIIx Music,

EX/ES,

Neural-THX)

Use this feature to activate the desired decoders

for the playback of multi-channel sources

manually.

OFF

Does not use any decoders to create 6.1/7.1

channels.

Notes

76 En

■ GUI menu tree

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

Stereo/Surround

(page 80)

Input Select

(page 85)

Music Content

(page 87)

Setup

SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

XM (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

TUNER

MULTI CH

PHONO

MD/CD-R

BD/HD DVD

DVD

CBL/SAT

DVR

VCR

VIDEO AUX

DOCK*

USB

PC/MCX

NET RADIO

Rhapsody (U.S.A. model only)

iPod

USB

PC/MCX

NET RADIO

Rhapsody (U.S.A. model only)

Front

Center

Surround

Surround Back

Front Presence

Subwoofer

Speaker

Headphone

Speaker

Headphone

Control

Bass

Treble

Auto Bypass

Mode

Auto

Manual

Configuration

Distance

Level

Test Tone

Adaptive DRC

Adaptive DSP Level

Max Volume

Initial Volume

Muting Type

LFE Level

Dynamic Range

Parametric EQ

Tone Control

Lipsync

Pure Direct

Channel Mute

Auto Setup

(page 30)

Speaker

(page 87)

Vo l u m e

(page 89)

Sound

(page 90)

Phase

Bass Out

77 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

* “iPod” appears when an iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK terminal. “Bluetooth” appears

when a Yamaha Bluetooth receiver is connected to the DOCK terminal.

Note

Video (page 93)

HDMI (page 94)

System Memory

(page 101)

Network

(page 95)

Multi Zone

(page 96)

Option

(page 97)

Analog ` Analog

Analog ` HDMI

HDMI ` HDMI

Processing

Standby Through

Audio Output

Control Monitor

Monitor Info.

Main

Zone2

Zone3

Configuration

Network Standby

Information

Zone SP Assign

Zone2 Set

Zone3 Set

Zone OSD

Zone Rename

Memory Guard

I/O Assignment

Input Rename

Display Set

iPod

Initial Set

Trigger Output

Resolution

Aspect

Prog. Re-Processing

Mode

Input

Output

HDMI OUT1

HDMI OUT2

Main Load

Main Save

Main Rename

Zone2 Load

Zone2 Save

Zone2 Rename

Zone3 Load

Zone3 Save

Zone3 Rename

Zone2 Volume

Zone2 Max Vol.

Zone2 Initial Vol.

Zone2 Balance

Zone2 Tone Control

Zone2 Muting Type

Zone3 Volume

Zone3 Max Vol.

Zone3 Initial Vol.

Zone3 Balance

Zone3 Tone Control

Zone3 Muting Type

Main

Zone2

Zone3

Front Panel Display

Short Message

Playback Screen

Position

Wall Paper

Standby Charge

Audio Select

Decoder Mode

EXTD Surround

Trigger1

Trigger2

Dimmer

Scroll

Language (page 100)

78 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

This unit features a sophisticated graphical user interface (GUI) menu that helps you to control the amplifier function of

this unit. With the GUI menu, you can view the information of the signals being input and the status of this unit.

• Refer to “GUI menu tree” (page 76) for the complete menu structure.

• Refer to “GUI menu operations” (page 79) for details about the basic operations in the GUI menu.

■ Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu)

Use this feature to select the sound field programs and customize the program parameter settings (page 80).

■ Input Select (Input select menu)

Use this feature to select the input source and customize the parameters of each input source (page 85).

■ Music Content (Music content menu)

Use this feature to browse the music contents of iPod, USB component, PC/MusicCAST, Internet radio, and Rhapsody

(U.S.A. model only) (page 87).

■ Setup (Setup menu)

Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.

Auto Setup (Automatic setup menu)

Use this feature to run the automatic setup and specify which speaker parameters to be adjusted (page 30).

Speaker (Speaker menu)

See page 87 for details.

Volume (Volume menu)

See page 89 for details.

Sound (Sound menu)

See page 90 for details.

Video (Video menu)

See page 93 for details.

HDMI (HDMI menu)

See page 94 for details.

System Memory (System memory menu)

See page 101 for details.

Network (Network menu)

See page 95 for details.

Multi Zone (Multi-zone menu)

See page 96 for details.

Option (Option menu)

See page 97 for details.

■ Language (Display language menu)

Use this feature to select the language that appears in the front panel display or in the GUI menu of this unit (page 100).

GUI menu overview

Input Select

Music Content

Setup

Language

Stereo/Surround

Sound

Video

HDMI

System Memory

Network

79 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

This unit features a sophisticated graphical user interface (GUI) menu that helps you to control the amplifier function of

this unit. With the GUI menu, you can view the information of the signals being input and the status of this unit. You can

also set up this unit using the GUI menu.

■ Items in the GUI menu

■ Remote control operation

Set the operation mode selector to FAMP when you operate

the GUI menu using the remote control.

If you simply press IMENU, the menu directory displayed

before you turned off the GUI menu appears. To display the top

GUI menu (Top Menu), press and hold IMENU.

■ Front panel control operation

GUI menu operations

DVD

Top Menu -40.0dB

qPLIIx Movie Sci-Fi

Decoder

Sound field

program

area

Input

source

item

Menu directory Volume level

Input Select

Music Content

Setup

Language

Stereo/Surround

Sound

Video

HDMI

System Memory

Network

DVD

Input Select -40.0dB

qPLIIx Movie Sci-Fi

MD/CD-R

BD/HD DVD

DVD

CBL/SAT

DVR

Input Select

[ENTER]

Submenu

icon

SUBMENU

Button Function

9k / n

Selects the item in the current menu level.

Selects the currently selected menu item and

moves to the next menu level.

Returns to the previous menu level.

9ENTER

Selects the currently selected menu item and

moves to the next menu level.

0SUBMENU

Turns on or off the submenu. (The submenu

icon appears when any submenu items exist

under the menu currently selected.)

IMENU

Turns on or off the GUI menu. Press and

hold IMENU to display the top GUI menu

(Top Menu).

Note

Control Function

DMENU

Turns on of off the GUI menu.

Selects the currently selected menu item and

moves to the next menu level.

Returns to the previous menu level.

EENTER

Selects the currently selected menu item and

moves to the next menu level.

MPROGRAM

Selects the item in the current menu level.

80 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory

settings. Although you do not have to change the initial

factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to

better suit the input source or your listening room.

To customize the program parameter settings, press

0SUBMENU to turn on the submenu after you select the

desired program.

■ Basic configuration of sound field

programs

Each sound field program has some parameters defining

the characteristics of the program. To customize the

selected sound field program, adjust “DSP Level” and/or

“Dialogue Lift” first, and then try other parameters.

Adjusting the effect sound level of the sound

field programs (DSP Level)

Sound field programs add effect sounds (DSP effect

sounds) to the original source sound to create sound field

in the listening room. Use the “DSP Level” parameter to

adjust the level of the effect sounds.

Adjust “DSP Level” as follows:

Increase the value of “DSP Level” when

• the effect sound of the selected sound field

program is too weak.

• you cannot recognize any difference between the

sound field programs.

Decrease the value of “DSP Level” when

• the sound is vague.

• you feel that the additional sound effect is

excessive.

Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB

Adjusting the vertical dialogue position

(Dialogue Lift)

Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the

dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is

at the center of the video monitor screen.

If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video

monitor screen, increase the value of “Dialogue Lift”.

Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

“0” (initial setting) is the lowest position, and “5” is the

highest position.

• “Dialogue Lift” is available when “Front Presence” is set to

“Yes” (page 88) and headphones are not connected.

• You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial

dialogue position.

Stereo/Surround

The DSP effect

sound level is low

The DSP effect sound

level is high

Notes

The ideal

dialogue

position

Move up to the ideal dialogue position

81 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Sound field parameter descriptions

You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your

listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.

Sound field parameter Features

Decode Type

Decoder type. Select the decoder used with the selected sound field program. The decoder parameters for

“Surround Decoder” vary depending on the selected decoder type. See page 84 for details.

Init. Delay

Sur. Init.Delay

SB. Init. Delay

Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field initial delay. Changes the apparent size of the

sound field by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The

smaller the value, the smaller the sound field seems to the listener.

When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the corresponding room

size parameters likewise.

Control range: 1 to 99 ms (Init. Delay)

1 to 49 ms (Sur. Init. Delay and SB Init. Delay)

Room Size

Sur. Room Size

SB. Room Size

Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the sound field.

The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around

a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent

reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the

virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room.

When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the corresponding initial

delay parameters likewise.

Control range: 0.1 to 2.0

Source sound

Early

reflections

Time

Delay

Sound source

Reflection face

Level

Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms

Level

Time Time Time

Source sound

Early

reflections

Small value = 0.1

Large value = 2.0

Sound source

82 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

Liveness

Sur. Liveness

SB. Liveness

Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by

changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much

faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A

room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective

surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the

“liveness” of the room.

Control range: 0 to 10

Rev. Time

Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay

by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range.

Set a longer reverberation time to get more sustaining reverberation sound, and set a shorter time to get

articulate sound.

Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s

Sound field parameter Features

Source sound

Level

Dead

Live

Time

Time Time

Small reflected

sound

Large reflected

sound

Small value = 0 Large value = 10

Reverberation

ReverberationSource sound

Rev. Time

Rev. Time Rev. Time

Sound source

Short

reverberation

Long

reverberation

Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s

Early reflections

60 dB 60 dB 60 dB

83 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Stereo program parameter descriptions

Rev. Delay

Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning

of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later

reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.

Control range: 0 to 250 ms

Rev. Level

Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the

reverberation becomes.

Control range: 0 to 100%

Sound field parameter Features

Direct

(“2ch Stereo” only)

2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo sound

when playing 2-channel analog sources.

Choices: Auto, Off

• Select “Auto” to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only when “BASS” and

“TREBLE” are set to “BYPASS” (page 47).

• Select “Off” not to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry when “BASS” and

“TREBLE” are set to “BYPASS”.

• When multi-channel signals are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and

right speakers.

• The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are redirected to the subwoofer in the

following cases:

– “Bass Out” is set to “Front + SWFR” (page 88).

– “Front” is set to “Small” (page 87) and “Bass Out” is set to “SWFR” (page 88).

Center Level

Surround L Level

Surround R Level

Sur.Back L Level

Sur.Back R Level

F.PRNS L Level

F.PRNS R Level

(“7ch Stereo” only)

7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence right levels.

Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode. The available parameters differ

depending on the speaker settings.

Control range: 0 to 100%

Sound field parameter Features

(dB)

Level

Source sound

Reverberation

Rev. Time

Rev. Delay

Time

60 dB

Source sound

Level

Rev. Level

Time

84 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

■ Compressed Music Enhancer mode parameter descriptions

■ Decoder parameter descriptions

■ Initialize (Parameter initialization)

Use this feature to initialize the parameter of the selected sound field program.

Choices: No, Yes

• Select “Yes” and then press 9ENTER to set the program parameters to the factory default settings.

• Select “No” (or press 9l) to cancel the program parameter initialization.

Use “DSP PARAM” of “INITIALIZE” in “Advanced setup” to initialize the parameters of all sound field programs (page 122).

The Compressed Music

Enhancer mode

Features

Level

(“Straight Enhancer” and

“7ch Enhancer” only)

Straight enhancer or 7-channel enhancer effect level. Select “High” or “Low” to adjust the effect for the high-

frequency.

Choices: High, Low

Decoder parameter Features

Panorama

(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII

Music” only)

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well

as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.

Choices: Off, On

Center Width

(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII

Music” only)

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely

towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center

channel output towards the front left and right speakers.

Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to

7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)

Initial setting: 3

Dimension

(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII

Music” only)

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front or

towards the rear.

Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)

Initial setting: STD (standard)

Center Image

(“Neo:6 Music” only)

DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel

to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.

Control range: 0.0 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) to

1.0 (center channel sound output only from the center speaker)

Initial setting: 0.3

FOCUS

(“CSII Cinema” and “CSII

Music” only)

SRS Circle Surround II Cinema and SRS Circle Surround II Music focus. Adjusts the clearness of a sound

image by elevating the perception of the sound image to compensate for non-optimally placed speakers from

a lower location. A larger value makes speakers sound as if they are positioned at ear level.

Control range: 0 (lower location) to 8 (higher location)

TruBass

(“CSII Cinema” and “CSII

Music” only)

SRS Circle Surround II Cinema and SRS Circle Surround II Music TruBass. Adjusts the lower register by

producing the perception of improved low frequency performance. A larger value improves bass even without

a subwoofer and provides deeper, richer bass in the presence of a subwoofer.

Control range: 0 (standard low-frequency performance) to 8 (enhanced low-frequency performance)

85 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Use this menu to adjust the parameters of each input

source.

To customize the input source settings, press 0 SUBMENU to

turn on the submenu after you select the input source.

■ Audio Select (Audio input jack selection)

Use this feature to select the type of the input jack you

want to use.

• You can also select the audio input jack by pressing DAUDIO

SELECT (or OAUDIO SEL) (page 37).

• You can set the default audio input jack select of this unit by

using “Audio Select” in “Initial Set” (page 99).

This feature is not available if no digital input jack is assigned

to the selected input source in “I/O Assignment” (page 98).

“HDMI” is available only when an HDMI input jack is

assigned.

■ Decoder Mode (Decoder mode)

Use this feature to switch the decoder mode.

“Decoder Mode” is available only when the digital audio input

jacks (HDMI, OPTICAL and/or COAXIAL) are assigned to the

selected input source.

■ Volume Trim (Volume trimming)

Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at

each input source. This feature is useful if you want to

balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden

changes in volume when switching between input sources.

Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB

Initial setting: 0.0 dB

This parameter also affects the signals output at the ZONE OUT

jacks.

Input Select

Input source Parameter

SIRIUS SATELLITE

RADIO

(U.S.A. and Canada

models only)

Volume Trim

Parental Lock

(U.S.A. and Canada

models only)

iPod

USB

PC/MCX

NET RADIO

Rhapsody

(U.S.A. model only)

Volume Trim

TUNER Volume Trim

Station Search (U.S.A. model

only)

MULTI CH Volume Trim

Multi CH Assign

BGV

PHONO

MD/CD-R

BD/HD DVD

DVD

CBL/SAT

DVR

VCR

VIDEO AUX

Audio Select

Decoder Mode

Volume Trim

Bluetooth Volume Trim

Pairing

Connect

Choice Functions

Auto

Automatically selects input signals in the

following order:

(1) HDMI

(2) Digital signals

(3) Analog signals

HDMI

Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI

signals are not input, no sound is output.

Coax/Opt

Automatically selects input signals in the

following order:

(1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL

jack.

(2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL

jack.

When no signals are input, no sound is

output.

Analog

Selects only analog signals. If no analog

signals are input, no sound is output.

Note

Choice Functions

Auto

Automatically detects digital audio signal

input types and selects the appropriate

decoder.

DTS

Activates the DTS decoder when digital

audio signals are input.

Note

86 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

■ Parental Lock

(SIRIUS Satellite Radio parental lock)

Use this feature to set the code number for locking the

desired SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels. Refer to “Setting

the Parental Lock” (page 62) for details.

■ Station Search (Station search)

(U.S.A. model only)

You can search for preset HD Radio stations by specifying

a keyword (station name).

1 Press 9k / n / l / h to select a character or

function and then press 9ENTER to

confirm the selection.

Repeat step 1 until you input a keyword you want to

use.

2 Press 9k / n / l / h to select “OK” and then

press 9ENTER.

The search result is displayed.

If your keyword does not match the any station, “Not

Found” appears. Press 9l to return to the previous

screen.

3 Press 9k / n to select the preset HD Radio

station you want to listen to and then press

9ENTER.

■ Multi CH Assign

(Multi channel assignment)

Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input

into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a

source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks.

Input Channels (Input channels)

Use this setting to select the number of channels input

from an external decoder (page 22).

Depending on the settings of the zone configuration, no sound

is output at the surround back speakers even if you set “Input

Channels” to “8ch”. In this case, select “6ch” and set the audio

output setting of the source component to 6 channels.

Front Input

(Front channel input jacks)

If you selected “8ch” in “Input Channels”, you can select

analog jacks at which front left and right channel signals

from an external decoder will be input.

Choices: CD, TV, MD/CD-R, BD/HD DVD, DVD,

CBL/SAT, DVR, VCR, VIDEO AUX

If you have renamed an input source in “Input Rename”

(page 98), the name of the input source appears in the choices of

this parameter.

■ BGV (Back ground video)

Use this feature to select the video source played in the

background of the sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks.

If you have renamed an input source in “Input Rename”

(page 98), the name of the input source appears in the choices of

this parameter.

■ Pairing (Bluetooth pairing)

Use this feature to start pairing the connected Yamaha

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold

separately) with your Bluetooth component. For details

about the pairing, refer to “Pairing the Bluetooth™

receiver and your Bluetooth component” (page 64).

1 Press 9ENTER to start pairing.

The connected Bluetooth receiver starts searching

Bluetooth components.

2 Check that the Bluetooth component detects

the Bluetooth receiver.

For details, refer to the instruction manual of the

Bluetooth component.

3 Select the Bluetooth receiver in the

Bluetooth device list and then enter the pass

key “0000” on the Bluetooth component.

Once this unit completes the pairing successfully,

“Completed” appears.

Choice Description

6ch

Select “6ch” the connected component

outputs discrete 6-channel audio signals.

8ch

Select “8ch” the connected component

outputs discrete 8-channel audio signals.

Also set “Front Input” (see below) to the

analog audio jacks at which the front left

and right channel signals output from the

connected component are input.

Note

Choice Functions

BD/HD DVD,

DVD, CBL/SAT,

DVR, VCR,

VIDEO AUX

Selects the corresponding input source as the

background video source.

Off

Does not play the video source in the

background.

Note

To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the

pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully

understand all the instructions before starting.

87 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

4 Press 9l to return to the previous menu

level.

If the connected Bluetooth receiver cannot find any

Bluetooth components, “Not found” appears.

■ Connect (Bluetooth connection)

Use this feature to establish a connection between the

Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-

10, sold separately) and your Bluetooth component.

Pairing must be performed when using a Bluetooth component

with the Bluetooth receiver connected to this unit for the first

time of if the pairing data has been deleted.

Press 9ENTER to establish a connection.

The connected Bluetooth receiver starts searching

Bluetooth components. Once the connection is established

successfully, “BT Connected” appears.

If the connected Bluetooth receiver cannot find any Bluetooth

components, “Not found” appears.

To terminate the connection, press 9ENTER again.

Use this feature to browse the music contents of iPod,

USB component, PC/MusicCAST, Internet radio and

Rhapsody

(U.S.A. model only). See the following pages

for details.

• iPod (page 66)

•USB (page68)

• PC/MCX (page 68)

• NET RADIO (page 68)

• Rhapsody (page 68)

Use this feature to manually adjust the basic speaker

settings. Most of the “Speaker” parameters are set

automatically when you run the automatic setup.

• Set “Test Tone” to “On” to output the test tone for the

“Configuration”, “Distance” and “Level” settings.

• If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the

crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or

slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum.

■ Configuration (Speaker configurations)

Front (Front speakers)

When “Bass Out” is set to “Front” (page 88), you can select

only “Large” in “Front”. If the value of “Front” is set to other

than “Large” in advance, this unit change the value to “Large”

automatically.

Center (Center speaker)

Surround (Surround left/right speakers)

Note

Music Content

Setup (Speaker)

Measure for the speaker size

The woofer section of a speaker is

– 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large

– smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small

Choice Descriptions

Large

Select this setting when the front speakers

are large.

Small

Select this setting when the front speakers

are small.

Note

Choice Descriptions

Large

Select this setting when the center speaker is

large.

Small

Select this setting when the center speaker is

small.

None

Select this setting when you do not use the

center speaker. The center channel signals

are directed to the front left and right

speakers.

Choice Descriptions

Large

Select this setting when the surround

speakers are large.

Small

Select this setting when the surround

speakers are small.

None

Select this setting when you do not use the

surround speakers. This unit is set to the

Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (page 45), and

“Surround Back” is automatically set to

“None”.

88 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

Surround Back

(Surround back left/right speakers)

If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to

the SUR.BACK SINGLE jack, and configure the “Surround

Back L” settings under “Distance” and “Level”.

Cross Over (Cross over)

Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of the

speaker(s) that is set to “Small”. All frequencies below the

selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to the

speakers set to “Large” in “Configuration”.

Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,

120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz

Front Presence (Front presence speakers)

Use this feature if you want to use the front presence

speakers connected to this unit.

Subwoofer (Subwoofer)

Phase (Subwoofer phase)

Use this feature to switch the phase of your

subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear.

Bass Out (Bass out)

Use this feature to select the speakers that output the

LFE (low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency

signals.

LFE signals output

Low-frequency signals output

■ Distance (Speaker distance)

Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each

speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.

Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the

main listening position. However, this is not possible in most

home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be

applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds will

arrive at the listening position at the same time.

Unit (Unit)

Selects the unit for displaying the values of “Distance”

parameter.

Initial setting: Feet (U.S.A. and Canada models)

Meter (Other models)

Choice Descriptions

Large x1

Select this setting when the single surround

back speaker is large.

Small x1

Select this setting when the single surround

back speaker is small.

Small x2

Select this setting when the surround back

left and right speakers are small.

Large x2

Select this setting when the surround back

left and right speakers are Large.

None

Select this setting when you do not use the

surround back speakers. The surround back

channel signals are directed to the surround

left and right speakers.

Note

Choice Descriptions

Yes

Select this setting when you use the front

presence speakers.

None

Select this setting when you do not use the

front presence speakers.

Choice Functions

Normal

Does not change the phase of your subwoofer.

Reverse

Sets the phase of the subwoofer to reverse.

Choice

Subwoofer and speakers

Subwoofers

Front

speakers

Other

speakers

Front +

SWFR

Output No output No output

SWFR

Output No output No output

Front

No output Output No output

Choice

Subwoofer and speakers

Subwoofers

Front

speakers

Other

speakers

Front +

SWFR

*1 Output(s) the low-frequency signals of the front

channels and other speakers set to “Small”.

*2 Always output the low-frequency signals of the front

channels.

*3 Output the low-frequency signals if the speakers are set

to “Large”.

SWFR

*4 Outputs the low-frequency signals of the speakers set to

“Small”.

*3 *3

Front

No output *1 *3

Choice Functions

Meter (m)

Adjusts speaker distances in meters.

Feet (ft)

Adjusts speaker distances in feet.

89 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Speaker distances

Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)

Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)

Control step: 0.05 m (0.2 ft)

The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting

of the speakers.

■ Level (Speaker level)

Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels

between the front left or surround left speakers and each

speaker selected in “Configuration” (page 87).

Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

Initial setting: 0.0 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

If you use a handheld sound pressure level meter, hold at arm’s

length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening

position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW,

calibrate each speaker to 75 dB.

The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting

of the speakers.

Use this menu to manually adjust the various volume

settings.

Adaptive DRC (Adaptive dynamic range control)

Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range in

conjunction with the volume level. This feature is useful

when you are listening at lower volumes or at night. When

“Adaptive DRC” is set to “Auto”, this unit controls the

dynamic range as follows:

– If the VOLUME setting is low: the dynamic range is

narrow

– If the VOLUME setting is high: the dynamic range

is wide

• You can also adjust the dynamic range of the bitstream signal

sources by using “Dynamic Range” in “Sound” (page 90).

• This function is also useful for listening with your headphones.

The adaptive dynamic range control feature does not function

when this unit is in the PURE DIRECT mode (page 47).

Adaptive DSP Level (Adaptive DSP effect level)

Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the DSP

effect level (page 80) automatically in conjunction with

the volume level.

Even if you set “Adaptive DSP Level” to “Auto”, this unit does

not change but fine-tunes the specified value of “DSP Level”

(page 80).

Distance Adjusted speaker

Front L

Front left speaker

Front R

Front right speaker

Center

Center speaker

Surround L

Surround left speaker

Surround R

Surround right speaker

Surround Back L

Surround back left speaker

Surround Back R

Surround back right speaker

Front Presence L

Front presence left speaker

Front Presence R

Front presence right speaker

Subwoofer

Note

Level Adjusted speaker

Front L

Front left speaker

Front R

Front right speaker

Center

Center speaker

Surround L

Surround left speaker

Surround R

Surround right speaker

Surround Back L

Surround back left speaker

Surround Back R

Surround back right speaker

Front Presence L

Front presence left speaker

Front Presence R

Front presence right speaker

Subwoofer

Note

Setup (Volume)

Choice Functions

Auto

Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.

Off

Does not adjust the dynamic range

automatically.

Note

Choice Functions

Auto

Adjusts the DSP effect level in conjunction

with the volume level.

Off

Does not adjust the DSP effect level

automatically.

Note

Input level

Output level

Input level

Auto

Off

Auto

Off

VOLUME: low VOLUME: high

90 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

Max Volume (Maximum volume)

Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the main

zone. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected loud

sound by mistake. For example, the original volume range is

–80.0 dB to +16.5 dB. However, when “Max Volume” is set

to –5.0 dB, the volume range becomes –80.0 dB to –5.0 dB.

Control range: –30.0 dB to +15.0 dB, +16.5 dB

Control step: 5.0 dB

Initial Volume (Initial volume)

Use this feature to set the volume level of the main zone

when the power of this unit is turned on.

Choices: Off, Mute, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

• When this unit is in the auto setup procedure, the volume level

is automatically set to 0 dB regardless of the current “Max

Volume” setting.

• The “Max Volume” setting takes priority over the initial volume

setting.

Muting Type (Muting type)

Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function

reduces the output volume (page 38).

Use this menu to adjust the sound parameters.

■ LFE Level (Low-frequency effect level)

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the

LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the

capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE

channel carries low-frequency special effects which are

only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only

when this unit decodes bitstream signals.

Control range: –20.0 to 0.0 dB

Control step: 1.0 dB

Speaker (Speaker low-frequency effect level)

Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.

Headphone

(Headphone low-frequency effect level)

Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.

Depending on the settings of “Bass Out” (page 88), some

signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT

jacks.

■ Dynamic Range (Dynamic range)

Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range

compression to be applied to your speakers or

headphones. This setting is effective only when the unit is

decoding bitstream signals.

Speaker (Speaker dynamic range)

Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the speakers.

Headphone (Headphone dynamic range)

Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the

headphones.

■ Parametric EQ (Parametric equalizer)

Use this feature to adjust the parametric equalizer of each

speaker.

PEQ Data Copy (Parametric equalizer data copy)

Use this feature to copy the result data of the automatic

setup to the manual configuration area. You can select the

parametric equalizer type applied to the copied result data

of the automatic setup. See page 35 for the descriptions of

each parametric equalizer type.

Notes

Choice Functions

Full

Mutes all the audio output.

–20dB

Reduces the current volume by 20 dB.

–40dB

Reduces the current volume by 40 dB.

Setup (Sound)

Note

Choice Functions

MAX

Preserves the greatest amount of dynamic

range.

STD

Adjusts the dynamic range to medium.

When this unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD

signals, the dynamic range control is always

active regardless of the instruction of the

input source signals.

MIN/AUTO

• MIN: Adjusts the dynamic range to

narrow when this unit is decoding

bitstream signals (except Dolby TrueHD).

• AUTO: Adjusts the dynamic range

according to the instruction of the input

source signals when this unit is decoding

Dolby TrueHD signals.

Choice Descriptions

Flat h Manual

Copies the result of the automatic setup that

the “Flat” type parametric equalizer is

applied to.

Front h Manual

Manual Copies the result of the automatic

setup that the “Front” type parametric

equalizer is applied to.

Natural

Manual

Copies the result of the automatic setup that

the “Natural” type parametric equalizer is

applied to.

91 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

PEQ Select (Parametric equalizer type select)

Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer type that

applied to the results of the automatic setup. page 35 for

the descriptions of each parametric equalizer type.

• When you carry out the automatic setup, this unit automatically

set “PEQ Select” to “Natural”.

• “Level” settings (page 89) also change corresponding to the

setting of “PEQ Select”.

• This unit does not change the configurations of “Manual” even

if you perform the automatic setup.

Manual parametric equalizer configuration of

each speaker

Use this feature to adjust the tonal quality of each speaker.

You can copy the results of the automatic setup for the

base of the manual configuration by using “PEQ Data

Copy”. Set “PEQ Select” to “Manual” in advance.

1 Press

k / n / l / h to select “Test Tone” or

the speaker you want to adjust.

Test Tone

Use this feature to select whether to turn on or off the

test tone output while you are adjusting the tonal

quality of each speaker.

2 Press

h to access the settings window.

3 Press

k / n / l / h to select “PARAM” and

then press

ENTER repeatedly to select a

parameter from “Band” (band), “Freq.”

(frequency) or “Q” (Q factor).

You can adjust “Gain” (gain) with any parameter.

4 Press

n to select “EDIT” and press

ENTER to access the edit window.

For more information on the parametric equalizer and

each parameter, see page 144.

The parameter selected in “PARAM” is highlighted.

•Press

l / h to adjust the parameter.

•Press

k / n to adjust the “Gain”.

•Press

ENTER to exit the edit window.

• When you select “Band” in step 3, you can use this menu

as a graphic equalizer.

• “Band #5”, “Band #6”, and “Band #7” can adjust the

frequencies of above 500 Hz.

• When you select “Subwoofer” in step 1 and “Band” in

step 3, you can adjust “Band #1”, “Band #2”, “Band #3”

and “Band #4” only. In this case, “Band #1”, “Band #2”,

“Band #3” and “Band #4” adjust the frequencies of below

200 Hz.

Choice Descriptions

Manual Applies the manually configured parametric

equalizer in “Setup”.

Flat

Applies the “Flat” type parametric equalizer.

Front

Applies the “Front” type parametric

equalizer.

Natural

Applies the “Natural” type parametric

equalizer.

Through

Does not use the parametric equalizer.

Notes

Choice Adjusted speaker

Front L

Front left speaker

Front R

Front right speaker

Center

Center speaker

Surround L

Surround left speaker

Surround R

Surround right speaker

Surround Back L

Surround back left speaker

Surround Back R

Surround back right speaker

Front Presence L

Front presence left speaker

Front Presence R

Front presence right speaker

Subwoofer

Choice Functions

Outputs the test tone.

Off

Does not output the test tone.

PEQ Data Copy

PEQ Select

Front L

Front R

Center

PARAM RESET

EDIT EXIT

Band / Gain

PEQ Data Copy

PEQ Select

Front L

Front R

Center

Band #1

Gain 0.0dB

Freq 62.5Hz

Q1.000

Exit:ENTER

92 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you are satisfied

with the results.

If you want to reset all “Parametric EQ” parameter settings

for the selected speaker, select “RESET” and press

9ENTER.

6 Select “EXIT” and press

ENTER to exit

from the settings window.

■ Tone Control (Tone control)

Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble

output to your speakers or headphones.

Tone Control is not effective when:

– the PURE DIRECT mode (page 47) is selected.

– MULTI CH is selected as the input source.

Control (Control mode)

“Speaker” and “Headphone” adjustments are stored

independently. The adjustments for “Speaker” affects the front

left/right, center, presence left/right speaker channels and

Subwoofer channel.

Bass (Bass control)

Use this feature to adjust low-frequencies output to your

speakers or headphones.

Choices: 125 Hz, 350 Hz, 500 Hz

Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB

Initial setting: 0.0 dB

Treble (Treble control)

Use this feature to adjust high-frequencies output to your

speakers or headphones.

Choices: 2.5 kHz, 3.5 kHz, 8.0 kHz

Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB

Initial setting: 0.0 dB

Auto Bypass (Auto bypass)

Use this feature to select whether the audio output

bypasses the tone control circuitry when “Treble” and

“Bass” are set to 0 dB.

■ Lipsync

(Audio and video synchronization)

Mode (HDMI automatic lip sync mode)

If the video monitor is connected to the HDMI OUT jack

of this unit and compatible with the automatic audio and

video synchronization function (automatic lip sync), this

unit adjusts the audio and video synchronization

automatically. Use this feature to activate or deactivate the

automatic lip sync.

When “HDMI OUT SEL” is set to “OUT 1+2” and video

monitors are connected to both the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI

OUT 2 jacks, the automatic lip sync function does not work

even if “Auto” is selected.

Auto (Automatic audio delay adjustment)

Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the audio and

video synchronization when you set “Mode” to “Auto”.

Control range: 0 to 240 ms

Control step: 1 ms

“Offset” indicates the difference between the value of the audio

delay that this unit sets automatically and the value of the audio

delay that you set in “Mode”. This unit stores the value of

“Offset” and applies the value to other automatic lip sync

compatible video monitors.

Manual (Manual audio delay adjustment)

Use this feature to adjust the delay of the sound output

manually to synchronize audio with video images when

you set “Mode” to “Manual”.

Control range: 0 to 240 ms

Control step: 1 ms

Note

Choice Functions

Speaker

Adjust the bass/treble balance of your speakers.

Headphone

Adjust the bass/treble balance of your

headphones.

Choice Functions

Auto

Automatically bypasses the tone control

circuitry to provide the purest signal possible

when “Treble” and “Bass” are set to 0 dB.

Off

Does not bypass the tone control circuitry.

Choice Descriptions

Auto

Select this setting if the connected video

monitor is compatible with the automatic lip

sync. Use “Auto” to fine adjust the audio and

video synchronization.

Manual

Select this setting if the video monitor is not

compatible with the automatic lip sync or you

do not want to use the automatic lip sync. Use

“Manual” to adjust the audio and video

synchronization.

Note

93 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Pure Direct (Pure Direct)

Use this feature to select whether this unit outputs the

video signals when this unit is in the PURE DIRECT

mode.

You cannot use the GUI menu while this unit is in the PURE

DIRECT mode even if “Pure Direct” is set to “Audio + Video”.

■ Channel Mute (Channel mute)

Use this feature to mute specific speaker channels.

Mode (Mode)

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the “Channel

Mute” setting for each speaker.

Each speaker settings

Select whether this unit mutes each speaker channel when

you set “Mode” to “Enable”.

Use this menu to adjust the video parameters.

You can reset the all parameters in “Video” to the initial factory

settings by using “VIDEO” of “INITIALIZE” in “ADVANCED

SETUP” (page 122).

■ Analog ` Analog (Analog-to-analog

video conversion)

Use this feature to enable or disable the video conversion

among the analog video jacks (VIDEO, S VIDEO, and

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks).

• Analog-to-HDMI video conversion is always possible unless

video signals are being input at the HDMI input jacks or 1080p-

resolution analog video signals are being input.

• This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line

video signals interchangeably.

• 480p-, 576p-, 1080i- and 720p-resolution video signals cannot

be output at the S VIDEO and VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.

• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR

OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the

same type of video connections between each component.

• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are

converted into component video signals, the picture quality may

suffer depending on your VCR.

• Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video

jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such

cases, set “Analog ` Analog” to “Through”.

■ Analog ` HDMI (Analog-to-HDMI video

signal processing)

Use this feature to select whether this unit processes the

analog-to-HDMI video signals (input at VIDEO,

S VIDEO, or COMPONENT VIDEO input jacks and

output at HDMI OUT jacks).

Choice Functions

Audio

Does not output video signals.

Audio + Video

Outputs video signals. For the better sound

quality, this unit only activates the limited video

features.

Note

Choice Functions

Disable

Deactivates the “Channel Mute” function.

Enable

Activates the “Channel Mute” function.

Channel Mute Speaker channel

Front L

Front left

Front R

Front right

Center

Surround L

Surround left

Surround R

Surround right

Surround Back L

Surround back left

Surround Back R

Surround back right

Front Presence L

Front presence left speaker

Front Presence R

Front presence right speaker

Subwoofer

Choice Functions

Mute On

Mutes the selected speaker channel.

Mute Off

Does not mute the selected speaker channel.

Setup (Video)

Choice Functions

Through

Disables the video conversion among the analog

video jacks.

Conversion

Enables the video conversion among the analog

video jacks.

Notes

Choice Functions

Through

Select this setting when you do not want this

unit to process the analog-to-HDMI video

signals.

Processing

Select this setting when you want this unit to

apply the video processing configured in

“Processing” to the analog-to-HDMI video

signals.

94 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

■ HDMI ` HDMI (HDMI-to-HDMI video

signal processing)

Use this feature to select whether this unit processes the

HDMI-to-HDMI video signals (input at HDMI input jacks

and output at HDMI OUT jacks).

■ Processing

(HDMI video signal processing)

Use this feature to configure the resolution, aspect, and

progressive re-processing settings for the video signals

output at the HDMI OUT jacks.

This feature is available only when “Analog ` HDMI” or

“HDMI ` HDMI” is set to “Processing”.

Resolution (HDMI video signal resolution)

Use this feature to enable or disable the upscaling of the

analog-to-HDMI video signals and/or HDMI-to-HDMI

video signals.

This unit up-scales the video signals as follows:

• 480i(576i) → 480p(576p)/720p/1080i/1080p

• 480p(576p) → 720p/1080i/1080p

• 720p → 1080i/1080p

• 1080i → 720p/1080p

Aspect (HDMI aspect ratio)

Use this feature to select whether this unit converts the

aspect ratio of the analog-to-HDMI video signals and/or

HDMI-to-HDMI video signals.

• If the aspect ratio of the input video source is other than 4:3, this

unit automatically ignores the setting of “Aspect”.

• When “Aspect” is set to “Smart Zoom”, the video images of the

edge of the video monitor are rather stretched.

Prog. Re-Processing (Progressive re-processing)

Use this feature to enable or disable the progressive re-

processing of the analog-to-HDMI video signals and/or

HDMI-to-HDMI video signals.

This setting is effective only for video signals of which

resolution is 480p(576p), 720p, or 1080p.

Use this feature to set the HDMI functions or check the

information about the video monitors connected to the

HDMI OUT jacks.

■ Standby Through (Standby through)

Mode (Standby through mode)

Use this feature whether this unit allows the HDMI signals

input at the HDMI IN jacks to pass thorough this unit

when this unit is in the standby mode. You can also

designate an HDMI IN jack and HDMI OUT jack(s) that

accept the signals when “Mode” is set to “Fix” and this

unit is in the standby mode.

When “Mode” is set to “Last” or “Fix”, the amount of power

consumption in the standby mode increases.

Choice Functions

Through

Select this setting when you do not want this

unit to process the HDMI-to-HDMI video

signals.

Processing

Select this setting when you want this unit to

apply the video processing configured in

“Processing” to the HDMI-to-HDMI video

signals.

Note

Choice Functions

Through

Does not up-scale any video signals.

480p (or

576p), 1080i,

720p, 1080p

Up-scales video signals to 480p or 576p, 1080i,

720p, or 1080p of resolution.

Choice Functions

Through

Does not make any adjustments to the aspect

ratio for the HDMI video signal sources.

16:9 Normal

Displays video images with the aspect ratio of

4:3 on your video monitor with the aspect ratio

of 16:9. Black stripes appear on the right and

left sides as a result.

Smart Zoom Fits video images with the aspect ratio of 4:3

to your video monitor with the aspect ratio of

16:9.

Notes

Choice Functions

Off

Disables the progressive re-processing of the

HDMI video signals.

Enables the progressive re-processing of the

HDMI video signals.

Note

Setup (HDMI)

Choice Functions

Off

Disables the HDMI standby through feature.

HDMI signals do not pass through this unit if

this unit is in the standby mode.

Last

HDMI signals pass through this unit (only from

the HDMI IN jack to the HDMI OUT jack(s)

used when this unit is set to the standby mode)

even when this unit is in the standby mode.

Fix

HDMI signals pass through this unit (from the

HDMI IN jack specified in “Input” to the HDMI

OUT jack(s) specified in “Output”) even when

this unit is in the standby mode.

Note

95 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Input (HDMI IN jack select)

Use this feature to select an HDMI IN jack that accepts

HDMI signals when this unit is in the standby mode.

This setting is available only when “Mode” is set to “Fix”.

Output (HDMI OUT jack select)

Use this feature to select HDMI OUT jack(s) that output

HDMI signals when this unit is in the standby mode.

This setting is available only when “Mode” is set to “Fix”.

■ Audio Output (HDMI audio output)

Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI

audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component

connected to the HDMI OUT jacks on the rear panel of

this unit.

If “Audio Output” is set to “TV” or “Amp + TV”, available

audio signals vary depending on the specification of the

connected video monitor.

■ Control Monitor (Control monitor)

Use this feature to select the HDMI OUT jack at which

HDMI control signals are output.

■ Monitor Info. (Monitor information)

Use this feature to check the information (interface and

frequency for each video resolution) about the video

monitors connected to the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT

2 jacks of this unit.

Press 9h repeatedly to toggle between “OUT1” (information

about the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack )

and “OUT2” (information about the video monitor connected to

the HDMI OUT 2 jack ).

Use this menu to adjust the network parameters.

In case you changed your network configuration, you may

need to reconfigure the network settings.

You can reset the all parameters in “Network” to the initial

factory settings by using “NETWORK” of “INITIALIZE” in

“ADVANCED SETUP” (page 122).

■ Configuration (Network configurations)

Use this feature to view the network parameters (IP

address, etc.) or to change them manually.

DHCP (DHCP setting)

Use this feature to select whether this unit can obtain the

network parameters (IP address, subnet mask, default

gateway, primary DNS server and secondary DNS server)

from the DHCP server of the connected network.

IP Address (IP address)

Use this parameter to specify an IP address assigned to

this unit. This value must not duplicate the one used for

other devices in the target network.

Subnet Mask (Subnet mask)

Use this parameter to specify the subnet mask value

assigned to this unit.

For most of the cases, the subnet mask value can be set as

“255.255.255.0”.

Default Gateway (Default gateway)

Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the default

gateway.

Note

Choice HDMI IN jack

IN1

HDMI IN1 (BD/HD DVD) jack

IN2

HDMI IN2 (DVD) jack

IN3

HDMI IN3 (CBL/SAT) jack

IN4

HDMI IN4 (DVR) jack

Note

Choice HDMI IN jack

OUT1 + 2

HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks

OUT1

HDMI OUT 1 jack

OUT2

HDMI OUT 2 jack

Choice Functions

Amp

Outputs HDMI audio signals at the speakers

connected to this unit.

Outputs HDMI audio signals at the speakers of

the TV connected to this unit.

Amp + TV

Outputs HDMI audio signals at the speakers

connected to this unit and speakers of the TV

connected to this unit.

Choice Functions

HDMI OUT1

Outputs HDMI control signals at the HDMI

OUT 1 jack.

HDMI OUT2

Outputs HDMI control signals at the HDMI

OUT 2 jack.

Setup (Network)

Note

Choice Descriptions

Select this setting when this unit can obtain the

network parameters from the DHCP server of

the connected network.

Off

Select this setting when you set the network

parameters manually.

96 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

DNS Server (P) (Primary DNS server)

DNS Server (S) (Secondary DNS server)

Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the primary

and secondary DNS (Domain Name System) servers.

If you have only one DNS address, enter the DNS address in

“DNS Server (P)”. If you have two or more DNS addresses,

enter one of them in “DNS Server (P)” and another in “DNS

Server (S)”.

■ Network Standby (Network standby)

Use this feature to select whether this unit accepts the

commands via LAN network when this unit is in the

standby mode.

When “Network Standby” is set to “On”, the amount of power

consumption in the standby mode increases.

■ Information (Network information)

Use this feature to display the network system

information.

MAC Address

(MAC (Media Access Control) address)

This information displays the MAC address that is

assigned to this unit.

Status (Network status)

This information displays the current link status of the

network.

Display status: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, No Link,

Full Duplex, Half Duplex

“No Link” appears when network connection is not made.

System (System ID)

This information displays the system ID that is assigned to

this unit.

Use this menu to set the functions of the multi-zone

configuration.

■ Zone SP Assign

(Zone speaker assignment)

Use this feature to assign the speaker terminals for Zone 2

and Zone 3.

1 Press 9k / n to select the speaker terminal

and then press 9l / h repeatedly to select

the desired zone of which you want to use

the speakers.

M : Main zone

2 : Zone 2

3 : Zone 3

2 Press 9k / n to select “OK” and then press

ENTER to confirm the setting.

To return to the previous menu level without change,

select “CANCEL” in step 2.

■ Zone2 Set/Zone3 Set

(Zone 2/Zone 3 settings)

Zone2 Volume/Zone3 Volume

(Zone 2/Zone 3 volume)

Use this menu to select whether this unit controls the

volume level of the audio signals output at the ZONE

OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks.

Note

Choice Descriptions

Off

Does not accept the operations via LAN

network when this unit is in the standby mode.

Accepts the operations via LAN network when

this unit is in the standby mode.

Note

Setup (Multi Zone)

Choice Descriptions

Fixed

Select this setting when you want to control the

volume level of the selected zone on the external

amplifier. This unit fixes the ZONE OUT

(ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) volume level to a standard

line level.

Variable

Select this setting when you want to control the

volume level of the selected zone on this unit.

You can adjust the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2 or

ZONE 3) volume level simultaneously with

VOLUME +/– on the remote control.

Zone SP Assign

Zone2 Set

Zone3 Set

SP1

SP2

M2 3

Zone :

SP Terminal :

–23

CANCELOK

97 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

When “Zone2 Volume” or “Zone3 Volume” is set to “Fixed”,

you cannot select the following parameters:

– Zone2 Max Vol./Zone3 Max Vol.

– Zone2 Initial Vol./Zone3 Initial Vol.

Zone2 Max Vol./Zone3 Max Vol.

(Zone 2/Zone 3 Maximum volume setting)

Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the

Zone 2 or Zone 3.

Control range: –30.0 dB to +15 .0 dB, +16.5 dB

Control step: 5.0 dB

The “Zone2 Max Vol.” or “Zone3 Max Vol.” setting takes

priority over the “Zone2 Initial Vol.” or “Zone3 Initial Vol.”

setting.

Zone2 Initial Vol./Zone3 Initial Vol.

(Zone 2/Zone 3 initial volume setting)

Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone

3 when the power of each zone is turned on.

Control range: Off, Mute, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

The “Zone2 Max Vol.” or “Zone3 Max Vol.” setting takes

priority over the “Zone2 Initial Vol.” or “Zone3 Initial Vol.”

setting.

Zone2 Balance/Zone3 Balance

(Zone 2/Zone 3 balance)

Use this feature to adjust the balance of the volume of the

left and right channels in each zone.

Choices: L10 to L1, 0, R1 to R10

Zone2 Tone Control/Zone3 Tone Control

(Zone 2/Zone 3 tone control)

Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble

output to the selected zone.

Choices: Bass (Bass control), Treble (Treble control)

Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

Initial setting: 0.0 dB

Zone2 Muting Type/Zone3 Muting Type

(Zone 2/Zone 3 muting type)

Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function

reduces the output volume of the selected zone.

■ Zone OSD (Zone on-screen display)

Use this feature to display the operational status of Zone 2

and Zone 3 on the Zone 2 video monitor connected to the

ZONE VIDEO jacks on the rear panel of this unit.

■ Zone Rename (Zone Rename)

Main/Zone2/Zone3

(Main/ Zone 2/ Zone 3 rename)

Use this feature to edit the name of the selected zone.

1 Press 9 k / n / l / h to select a character or

function and then press 9ENTER to

confirm the selection.

Repeat step 1 until you input a name you want to use.

2 Press 9 k / n / l / h to select “OK” and then

press 9ENTER.

• To reset the name, select “RESET” and then press

9ENTER.

• To cancel the operation without change, select

“CANCEL” and then press 9ENTER.

This menu adjusts the optional system settings.

■ Memory Guard (Memory guard)

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to sound

field program parameter values and other system settings.

When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, “ ” appears on the left

side of the name of a parameter being protected.

Note

Choice Functions

Full

Mutes all the audio output.

–20dB

Reduces the current volume by 20 dB.

–40dB

Reduces the current volume by 40 dB.

Choice Functions

Off

Turns off the zone on-screen display feature.

Zone2

Displays the operational status of Zone 2 only.

All

Displays the operational status of Zone 2 and

Zone 3.

Setup (Option)

Choice Functions

Off

Turns off the “Memory Guard” feature.

Protects the following parameters:

– sound field program parameters

– GUI menu parameters

– speaker levels settings

98 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

■ I/O Assignment

(Input/output assignment)

Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according

to the component to be used if the initial settings of this

unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the

parameter to reassign the respective jacks and effectively

connect more components.

Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select

the corresponding component by using the CINPUT

selector (or the input selector buttons (3)).

Example: Assigning the CD DIGITAL INPUT

COAXIAL jack to “MD/CD-R”.

1 Press 9ENTER to display the “I/O

Assignment” screen.

2 Press 9k / n /l / h to select the cell in row

“MD/CD-R”, column “Coax In” and then

press 9ENTER.

3 Press 9l / h to select “1” and then press

9ENTER.

Select “None” to clear the existing assignment.

To return to the previous screen without change, press

9k.

4 Press 9k / n /l / h to select “EXIT” and

then press 9ENTER.

You cannot select a specific item more than once for the

same type of jack.

■ Input Rename (Input rename)

Use this feature to change the name of the input source

that appears in the GUI screen and in the front panel

display.

1 Press 9k / n /l / h to select a character or

function and then press 9ENTER to

confirm the selection.

Repeat step 1 until you input a name you want to use.

2 Press 9k / n /l / h to select “OK” and then

press 9ENTER.

• To reset the name, select “RESET” and then press

9ENTER.

• To cancel the operation without change, select

“CANCEL” and then press 9ENTER.

■ Display Set (Display settings)

Front Panel Display (Front panel display setting)

Dimmer (Dimmer)

Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel

display.

Control range: –4 to 0

Scroll (Front panel display message scroll)

Use this feature to set the front panel display message

scroll pattern.

Short Message (Short message display)

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the short message

display displayed in the GUI screen in the main zone.

The short message display (except some status messages) does

not appear when the component video signals with 720p, 1080i

or 1080p resolutions are input.

Playback Screen (Playback screen display time)

Use this feature to set the playback screen display time.

This setting is applied to the GUI screen in the main zone and

OSD in Zone 2 or Zone 3.

IN 1

IN 2

PHONO

MD/CD-R

BD/HD DVD

DVD

Coax

Opt

Out

Comp

HDMI

EXIT

Choice Functions

Continue

Continuous mode.

Select this to display the operation status in the

front panel display in a continuous manner.

Once

Scroll-once mode.

Select this to display the operation status in the

front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric

characters after scrolling all characters once.

Choice Functions

Activates the short message display function.

Off

Deactivates the short message display function.

Note

Choice Functions

Always

Displays the menu unceasingly during an

operation.

10sec

Turns off the menu 10 seconds after you

perform a certain operation.

30sec

Turns off the menu 30 seconds after you

perform a certain operation.

99 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Position (GUI screen position)

Use this feature to adjust the vertical and horizontal

position of the GUI screen.

Control range: –5 (downward/left) to +5 (upward/right)

Wall Paper (Wall paper)

Use this feature to display the wall paper or gray

background in your video monitor when there is no video

signal being input.

■ iPod (iPod settings)

Standby Charge

(iPod charge on the standby mode)

Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the

battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the

standby mode.

■ Initial Set (Initial settings)

Audio Select (Default audio input jack select)

Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack

select setting (page 37) for the input sources connected to

the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of

this unit.

Decoder Mode (Default decoder mode)

Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode

(page 74) for the input sources when you turn on the

power of this unit.

EXTD Surround (Default extended surround

decoder mode setting)

Use this feature to designate the extended surround

decoder mode (page 75) for the input sources connected to

the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of

this unit.

Button Moving direction of the GUI display

9 k

9 n

Down

9 h

Right

9 l

Left

Choice Functions

None

Does not display any background in your video

monitor.

Piano

Displays a background image (the photograph

of a piano) in your monitor when there is no

video signal being input.

Horn

Displays a background image (the photograph

of a horn) in your monitor when there is no

video signal being input.

Electric Guitar

Displays a background image (the photograph

of an electric guitar) in your monitor when there

is no video signal being input.

Gray

Display a gray background in your monitor

when there is no video signal being input.

Choice Functions

Auto

Charges the battery of the stationed iPod when

this unit is turned on and in the standby mode.

Off

Charges the battery of the stationed iPod only

when this unit is turned on.

Choice Functions

Auto

Automatically detects the type of audio input

signals and selects the appropriate audio input

jack select setting.

Last

Automatically selects the last audio input jack

select setting used for the connected input

source.

Choice Functions

Auto

Automatically detects the type of input signals

and select the appropriate decoder mode setting.

Last

Automatically selects the last decoder mode

setting used for the connected input source.

Choice Functions

Auto

Automatically detects the input digital audio

signals and activates the appropriate decoder.

Last

Selects the last selected extended surround

decoder mode.

100 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

■ Trigger Output (Trigger output)

Use this feature to select the functions of each TRIGGER

OUT jack of this unit.

Trigger Mode (Trigger mode)

Target Zone (Target zone)

This setting is not available when “Trigger Mode” is set to

“Manual”.

Input Level (Input level)

Select the input source and then set the input level applied

to the selected input source.

This setting is available only when “Trigger Mode” is set to

“Source”.

Manual Test (Manual test)

This setting is available only when “Trigger Mode” is set to

“Manual”.

Use this feature to select the language of the menu items

and messages.

Choices:

English (English), (Japanese),

Français (French), Deutsch (German),

Español (Spanish), Русский (Russian)

You can also select the display language with the

“LANGUAGE” parameter in “ADVANCED SETUP”

(page 123).

··· The selected language is displayed.

— ··· The selected language is not displayed. The menu

items and messages are displayed in English.

Choice Function

Trigger1

Sets the functions for the TRIGGER OUT 1

jack.

Trigger2

Sets the functions for the TRIGGER OUT 2

jack.

Choice Descriptions

Power

Select this setting to send the voltage signals at

the selected TRIGGER OUT jack while the

selected zone is turned on.

Source

Select this setting to send the voltage signals at

the selected TRIGGER OUT jack while the

selected input source is selected.

Manual

Select this setting to send the voltage signals

manually.

Note

Choice Target zone

Main

Main zone

Zone2

Zone 2

Zone3

Zone 3

All

Main zone, Zone 2, and Zone 3

Note

Choice Descriptions

High

Sends the voltage when the input source is

selected.

Low

Stops sending the voltage when the input source

is selected.

Note

Choice Functions

High

Sends the voltage signals.

Low

Stops sending the voltage signals.

Language

Language GUI menu

Front panel

display

Zone OSD

Русский

(Russian)

—

(Japanese)

——

Other

languages

101 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Use this feature to save and recall up to six of your favorite

setting for the main zone. You can also save up to four of

your favorite settings for Zone 2 or Zone 3.

■ Saving by the

SYSTEM MEMORY

buttons

You can save the system settings stored in “Memory1” to

“Memory4” by pressing the corresponding

SYSTEM

MEMORY buttons.

Press and hold one of the 7SYSTEM MEMORY

buttons on the remote control for 4 seconds.

“Memory1 SAVE” (example) appears in the front panel

display, and then this unit saves the current system setting

to the corresponding memory number.

• If system settings are already stored in the selected memory

number, this unit overwrites the old settings.

• To save the system settings for Zone 2 or Zone 3, press

HZONE on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired

zone and then press and hold one of the 7SYSTEM

MEMORY buttons for 4 seconds. To save the system settings

for the selected zone, the zone should be turned on.

• This unit saves the parameters in the groups you select by using

the GUI menu when you save the parameters by using the

7SYSTEM MEMORY buttons.

■ Saving by the GUI menu operation

You can save the current system settings stored in

“Memory1” to “Memory6” by using the “System

Memory” menu in the GUI menu.

1 Set the operation mode selector on the

remote control to FAMP and then press

IMENU.

If the menu directory other than “Top Menu” (page 79) is

displayed, press and hold IMENU to display the top GUI

menu.

2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Setup”

and then press 9h.

3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “System

Memory” and then press 9h.

4 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired

zone and then press 9h.

5 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “xxx Save”

and then press 9h.

“xxx” indicates the zone you selected in step 4.

6 Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select the

desired memory number and then press

9ENTER.

The list of the parameter groups to be saved appears.

Available parameter groups vary depending on the

selected zone.

• If system settings are already stored in the selected memory

number, this unit overwrites the old settings.

• To load the system settings with the 7SYSTEM MEMORY

button operation, use one of “Memory1” to “Memory4”.

7 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the

parameter group and then press 9ENTER

to check or uncheck the box.

Check the boxes for the parameter groups to be saved.

For details on parameters to be saved, see

“Parameters to be saved” (page 102).

8 Press 9k / n / l / h repeatedly to select

“SAVE” and then press 9ENTER to save

the current system settings to the selected

memory number.

To cancel the operation, select “CANCEL” and then press

9ENTER.

9 Press IMENU to turn off the GUI menu.

Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)

Saving the system settings

SYSTEM MEMORY

Main Save

Input/HDMI Out

Audio

Volume

SP Config

Video/Display Set

Others

SAVE

CANEL

102 En

Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)

■ Renaming the stored settings

1 Follow steps 1 to 4 in “Saving by the GUI

menu operation” (page 101).

2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “xxx

Rename” and then press 9h.

“xxx” indicates the zone you selected in step 1.

3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired

memory number and then press 9h.

4 Press 9k / n / l / h to select a character or

function and then press 9ENTER to

confirm the selection.

Repeat step 4 until you input a name you want to use.

5 Press 9k / n / l / h to select “OK” and then

press 9ENTER.

• To reset the name, select “RESET” and then press 9ENTER.

• To cancel the operation without change, select “CANCEL” and

then press 9ENTER.

6 Press IMENU to turn off the GUI menu.

If you change the language setting (page 100 or 123), names of

the memory settings will be automatically reset.

■ Parameters to be saved

The parameter groups indicated in bold are selected by

default.

Main zone parameters

Zone 2 and Zone 3 parameters

Note

Group Parameters Page

Input/HDMI

Out

Audio Select

Decoder Mode

Input source 36

HDMI OUT SEL

Audio Stereo/Surround

PURE DIRECT on/off 47

EXTD SUR. setting 75

Adaptive DRC

Adaptive DSP Level

LFE Level

Dynamic Range

Tone Control

Pure Direct

CINEMA DSP 3D mode on/off 46

Vo l u m e Vo l u m e l eve l

SP Config Parametric EQ

Configuration

Distance

Level

Information (Auto Setup)

Setup Menu (Auto Setup)

Video/

Display Set

Analog ` Analog

Analog ` HDMI

HDMI ` HDMI

Processing

Short Message

Playback Screen

Position

Wall Paper

Others Lipsync

Front Panel Display

Audio Output

Parameter Descriptions Page

Input

Input source

120

Vo l u m e

Volume level

120

Tone Control

Tone control settings

120

Group Parameters Page

103 En

Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

If you load the system settings, the settings currently configured

are overwritten. If you do not want to erase the current settings,

save the settings using the System Memory feature in advance.

■ Loading by the

SYSTEM MEMORY

buttons

You can recall the system settings stored in “Memory1” to

“Memory4” by pressing the corresponding 7SYSTEM

MEMORY buttons.

1 Press one of the 7SYSTEM MEMORY

buttons on the remote control to select the

desired memory number.

“Memory1 LOAD” (example) appears in the front

panel display.

“Empty” appears in the menu screen if no system settings

are stored in the selected memory number.

2 Press the selected

SYSTEM MEMORY

button once more to confirm the selection.

This unit loads the settings stored in the selected

memory number.

■ Loading by the GUI menu operation

1 Follow steps 1 to 4 in “Saving by the GUI

menu operation” (page 101).

2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “xxx Load”

and then press 9h.

“xxx” indicates the zone you selected in step 1.

3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired

memory number and then press 9h.

If the memory number you selected is empty, “Memory

Empty” appears.

4 Press

ENTER to load the settings stored

in the selected memory number.

To cancel the operation and return to the previous menu

level, press 9l.

5 Press

MENU to turn off the GUI menu.

■ Example 1: Comparing the results of the

automatic setup and manual setup

This unit is equipped with three types of parametric

equalizer settings (page 91), and you can also make your

customized configuration of the sound settings of this unit

by using the “Speaker” parameters (page 87). To compare

the results of the automatic setup or your manual

configuration, use the 7SYSTEM MEMORY buttons.

Saving each setting

1 Perform the automatic setup (page 30).

2 Press and hold

SYSTEM MEMORY 1 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the results of the automatic setup

(PEQ Select: Natural) to “Memory1”.

3 Set “PEQ Select” to “Front” (page 91).

4 Press and hold

SYSTEM MEMORY 2 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the results of the automatic setup

(PEQ Select: Front) to “Memory2”.

5 Configure the parameters of “Speaker”

(page 87) and parametric equalizer

configuration of each speaker manually

(page 91).

6 Press and hold

SYSTEM MEMORY 3 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the settings configured manually to

“Memory3”.

Loading the system settings

Note

SYSTEM MEMORY

Using examples

SYSTEM MEMORY

SYSTEM MEMORY 1

Results of the automatic setup

(PEQ Select: Natural)

SYSTEM MEMORY 2

Results of the automatic setup

(PEQ Select: Front)

SYSTEM MEMORY 3

Settings configured manually

104 En

Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)

■ Example 2: Switching the settings for

different room environments

The tonal characteristics of the listening room may vary

depending on the situations of the room (for example,

whether the curtains are open or closed), and the settings

of this unit should be arranged for each situation of the

room. You can switch between the settings of this unit

easily by using 7SYSTEM MEMORY buttons.

Saving each setting

1 Close the curtains of the listening room and

then perform the automatic setup (page 30).

2 Press and hold

SYSTEM MEMORY 1 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the settings for the current room

situation (i.e. the curtains are closed) to “Memory1”.

3 Open the curtains of the listening room and

the perform the automatic setup.

4 Press and hold

SYSTEM MEMORY 2 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the current room situation (i.e. the

curtains are open) to “Memory2”.

SYSTEM MEMORY

SYSTEM MEMORY 1

The settings when the curtains of the

listening room are closed

SYSTEM MEMORY 2

The settings when the curtains of

the listening room are open

105 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

You can operate this unit by using a Web browser. You can select the input source and sound field program, browse the

iPod or USB/network contents, select the preset items, and adjust the parameters of this unit by using the graphical user

interface (Web Control Center) that appears in the Web browser. Check the IP address of this unit by using “IP Address”

in “Network” menu (page 95) in advance, and then enter the IP address to the Web browser to access this unit to control

it.

• To use this feature, this unit and your PC must be connected properly in the network (page 23).

• We recommend that you use Windows Internet Explorer 6 or 7 that is installed on Windows XP or Windows Vista PC to access this

unit.

• You can select whether this unit accepts the controls by using the Web browser when this unit is in the standby mode (page 96).

• You can register the MAC address of the PCs you want to use to control this unit and limit the PCs that can control this unit by using

the Web browser. You can select that this unit allows the access to this unit by the PCs whose MAC addresses are registered to this unit

or allows the access by any PCs by using “MAC FILTER” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (page 122)

Controlling this unit by using the Web browser (Web Control Center)

Power on/offSelecting the input source

Controlling USB/

Network features

And many other features...Adjusting the system parameters

Web browser

Control

106 En

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha

and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code

for each input source (page 109).

■ Controlling this unit

Set the operation mode selector to

AMP to control this

unit.

*1 These buttons always control this unit regardless of the

operation mode selector position.

*2 These buttons control this unit only when the component

operation mode selector is set to

AMP.

■ Controlling a TV

Set the operation mode selector to

TV to control your

TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate

remote control code for the TV operation mode in advance

(page 109).

If no code has been set for the TV operation mode, the remote

control operates the component that is set to the TV control area

(page 109).

*1 2TV POWER can always turn on or off the power of the TV

regardless of the operation mode selector position.

*2 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode

selector is set to

TV. For details, see the “TV” column on

page 107.

*3 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode

selector is set to

TV or

SOURCE.

Remote control features

Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components

Notes

ZONE

SETUP ID

MACRO

MODE

DVD CD

V-A UX DOCKMULTI

PHONO

POWER

TV DVR VCR

SIRIUSTUNER

HD DVD

CD-R

USB

NET

CBL

SAT

SRCH MODE

BAND

TITLE

STATUS

MEMORY

SUBMENU

RETURN

PLAY INFO

DISPLAY

MUTE

SYSTEM MEMORY

3D DSP

STANDBY

POWER

SELECT

VOLUME

PRESET/CH

ENTER

CAT.

A-E

PRG SELECTTAG

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

ENT

AUDIO SEL

AUDIO

SLEEP

MUTE

INPUT

9 0

HDMI OUT

LEVEL

TV CH

INFO

TV VOL

EXTD SUR.

REC

AMP

SOURCE

Set to AMP

Notes

Remote control Functions

TV VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level.

TV CH +/– Changes the TV channel.

TV MUTE Mutes the audio output.

TV INPUT Changes the input source.

ZONE

SETUP ID

MACRO

MODE

DVD CD

V-A UX DOCKMULTI

PHONO

POWER

TV DVR VCR

SIRIUSTUNER

HD DVD

CD-R

USB

NET

CBL

SAT

SRCH MODE

BAND

TITLE

STATUS

MEMORY

SUBMENU

RETURN

PLAY INFO

DISPLAY

MUTE

SYSTEM MEMORY

3D DSP

STANDBY

POWER

SELECT

VOLUME

PRESET/CH

ENTER

CAT.

A-E

PRG SELECTTAG

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

ENT

AUDIO SEL

AUDIO

SLEEP

MUTE

INPUT

9 0

HDMI OUT

LEVEL

TV CH

INFO

TV VOL

EXTD SUR.

REC

AMP

SOURCE

Set to TV

107 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Controlling other components

Set the operation mode selector to FSOURCE to control

other components selected with the input selector buttons

(3). You must set the appropriate remote control code for

each input source in advance (page 109). The following

table shows the function of each control button used to

control other components assigned to each input selector

button (3). Be advised that some buttons may not

correctly operate the selected component.

The remote control has 16 modes (input areas) to control

components so that the remote control can operate up to 16

different components.

*1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a power button.

*2 These buttons operate your video recorder (DVD recorder, etc.) only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR

(page 109).

*3 These functions are used for selecting HD Radio audio programs (U.S.A. model only).

SRCH MODE

BAND

TITLE

STATUS

MEMORY

SUBMENU

RETURN

PLAY INFO

DISPLAY

MUTE

3D DSP

VOLUME

PRESET/CH

ENTER

CAT.

A-E

PRG SELECTTAG

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

ENT

AUDIO SEL

AUDIO

SLEEP

MUTE

INPUT

9 0

HDMI OUT

LEVEL

TV CH

INFO

TV VOL

EXTD SUR.

REC

ZONE

SETUP ID

MACRO

MODE

DVD CD

V-A UX DOCKMULTI

PHONO

POWER

TV DVR VCR

SIRIUSTUNER

HD DVD

CD-R

USB

NET

CBL

SAT

MENUTITLE

STATUS

SYSTEM MEMORY

STANDBY

POWER

SELECT

VOLUME

PRESET/CH

AMP

SOURCE

[

]

[2]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[10]

[3]

Set to SOURCE

Blu-ray Disc/

HD DVD

player/

recorder

DVD player LD player

DVD

recorder/

Digital

video

recorder

VCR TV

Cable TV/

Satellite

tuner

CD player

recorder/

recorder

Tape deck Tuner

[1] AV P O W E R

Power

DVR power

Power

[2] TITLE,

BAND

Title Title Title Title Band

[3] PRESET/

CH k

Menu up Menu up Menu up Channel up Menu up Channel up Menu up

PRESET/

CH n

Menu down Menu down Menu down

Channel

down

Menu down

Channel

down

Menu down

CAT. A-E

Menu left Menu left Menu left Menu left Menu left

CAT. A-E

Menu right Menu right Menu right Menu right

Direction

A/B

Menu right

ENTER Menu enter Menu enter Menu enter Menu enter Menu enter

[4] RETURN,

MEMORY

Return Return Return Return Memory

[5] REC Record

(recorder)

Disc skip Record Record

DVR record

Disc skip Record Record

e Pause Pause Pause Pause Pause

DVR pause

Pause Pause Pause

p Play Play Play Play Play

DVR play

Play Play Play

s Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop

DVR stop

Stop Stop Stop

backward

DVR search

backward

DVR search

backward

forward

DVR search

forward

DVR search

forward

Skip

backward

Skip

backward

Skip

backward

Skip

backward

Skip

backward

DVR skip

backward

DVR skip

backward

Skip

backward

Skip

backward

Direction A

Audio

program

down

a Skip forward

Skip

forward

Skip

forward

Skip

forward

Skip

forward

DVR skip

forward

DVR skip

forward

Skip

forward

Skip

forward

Direction B

Audio

program up

[6] 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

[7] MENU,

SRCH

MODE

Menu Menu Menu Menu

mode

[8] DISPLAY Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display

[9] ENT

Index Index

Chapter/

time

Index Enter Enter Enter Index Index Enter

[10] AUDIO Audio Audio Audio Audio

Notes

108 En

Remote control features

■ Selecting a component to be controlled

You can select a component to be controlled

independently of the input source selected with the input

selector buttons (3).

Press

SELECT l / h repeatedly to select the

desired component.

The name of the component to be controlled appears in the

display window (4) on the remote control.

■ Controlling optional components

(Option mode)

“OPTN1” and “OPTN2” are optional component control

areas that can be programmed with remote control

functions independently from any input source. These

areas are useful for programming commands that are to be

used only as a part of a macro function or for components

that do not have a valid remote control code.

To select the option mode, press

SELECT l /

h repeatedly until “OPTN1” or “OPTN2” appears

in the display window (4) on the remote control.

You cannot set a remote control code for the optional areas. See

page 111 to program buttons operated within this component

control area.

Use the setup mode of the remote control to customize the

remote control.

1 Press GSETUP on the remote control using

a ballpoint pen or similar object.

“SETUP” appears in the display window on the

remote control.

2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired

setup mode.

3 After the configurations, press GSETUP

again to exit from the setup menu.

If you do not complete each of the operations within 30

seconds, this unit automatically exits from the setup menu.

Note

DVD

OPTN1 OPTN2

Customizing the remote control

Setup

mode

Descriptions

Page

SETUP

Top setup mode menu.

—

LEARN

Learning mode. Use this feature to program

codes from other remote controls.

111

P-SET

Preset mode. Use this feature to change the

remote control code of each control area.

109

RNAME

Renaming mode.Use this feature to change

the name of each control area.

112

MACRO

Macro programming mode.Use this feature

to set the macro program.

113

CLEAR

Clearing mode. Use this feature to clear the

configurations of this unit.

115

ERASE

Erase mode. Use this feature to erase the

learned functions of each button.

115

EX-IR

Extended IR code mode. This feature is for

the authorized custom installers only.

—

LIGHT

Backlight mode. Use this feature to set the

light up mode of the remote control.

109

Note

109 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

1 Press GSETUP on the remote control using

a ballpoint pen or similar object.

“SETUP” appears in the display window (4) on the

remote control.

2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “LIGHT”

and then press 9ENTER.

“LIGHT” and the current “LIGHT” setting appears in

the display window (4) alternately.

3 Press 9k / n to select the desired setting

and then press 9ENTER.

4 Press GSETUP again to exit from the setup

mode.

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for

each input area. For a complete list of available remote

control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at

the end of this manual.

The following table shows the default component

(Library: component category) and the remote control

code for each control area.

Remote control code default settings

You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if

a Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above.

In this case, try setting another Yamaha remote control code.

1 Check the remote control code for your

component in advance.

For a complete list of available remote control codes,

see “List of remote control codes” at the end of this

manual.

2 Set the operation mode selector on the

remote control to FSOURCE.

If you want to set the remote control code for “TV”,

set the operation mode selector to FTV.

Setting the backlight mode of the

remote control

Choice Descriptions

Lights up the backlight when a button is

pressed.

OFF

Lights up the backlight only when

6LIGHT is pressed.

LIGHT

Setting remote control codes

Control

area

Library

(component

category)

Manufacturer

Default

code

MULTI DVD Yamaha 04306

V-AUX — — —

PHONO — — —

DOCK SOURCE Yamaha 00012

HD DVD

BD Yamaha 04706

DVD DVD Yamaha 04306

CD CD Yamaha 01205

CD-R

CD-R Yamaha 01405

CBL

SAT

———

TV — — —

DVR DVR Yamaha 00707

VCR — — —

TUNER SOURCE Yamaha 00012

XM SOURCE Yamaha 00012

SIRIUS SOURCE Yamaha 00012

USB

NET

SOURCE Yamaha 00012

Note

110 En

Remote control features

3 Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“SETUP” appears in the display window (4) on the

remote control.

4 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “P-SET”

and then press 9ENTER.

The remote control enters the preset mode. “P-SET”

and name of the currently selected control area

appears in the display window (4) alternately.

5 Press an input selector button (3) or

5SELECT l / h repeatedly to select the

control area you want to customize.

If you selected “TV” in step 2, skip this step.

6 Press 9ENTER.

The current code setting appears.

7 Press the numeric buttons (B) to enter the

five-digit remote control code for your

component.

8 Press 9ENTER to set the number.

“OK” appears in the display window (4) if setting

was successful.

“NG” appears in the display window (4) if the

setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from

step 5.

If you continuously want to set up another code for

another control area, repeat steps 5 through 8.

9 Press

SETUP again to exit from the setup

menu.

10 Press

AV POWER or

p to confirm

whether you can control your component

using the remote control.

• If operation is not possible and the manufacturer of your

component has more than one code, try each of them until you

find the correct one.

• If you set “00012” as the remote control code of the selected

control area, you can operate the currently selected internal

source (DOCK, TUNER, XM, SIRIUS, or USB/NET).

• “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) on the remote

control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,

or when you press more than one button simultaneously.

• The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes

for commercially available audio and video components

(including Yamaha components). If operation is not possible

with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote

control function using the learning feature (page 111) or use the

remote control supplied with the component.

• Functions programmed using the learning mode take priority

over remote control code functions.

SETUP

P-SET

DVD

04306

Notes

111 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

You can program remote control codes from other remote

controls. Use the learning feature if you want to program

functions not included in the basic operations covered by

the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control

code is not available. You can program the function of

other remote control to the buttons in the highlighted areas

in the following illustration. The buttons can be

programmed independently for each control area.

• The remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote

control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn

most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program

some special signals or extremely long transmissions.

• You cannot program the desired remote control code even if you

select the buttons in the highlighted area in the above

illustration depending on the selected control area and the

assigned library.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

FSOURCE and then press an input selector

button (3) to select the desired control area.

If you want to program the remote control code for

“TV”, set the operation mode selector to FTV.

Make sure that the operation mode selector is set to

SOURCE or FTV. When you set the operation mode

selector to FAMP and program a remote control codes

from other remote controls, the programmed key cannot

operate the amplifier function of this unit.

2 Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“SETUP” appears in the display window (4).

3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “LEARN”

and then press 9ENTER.

4 Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm (2

to 4 in) apart from the other remote control

on a flat surface so that their infrared

transmitters are aimed at each other and

then press 9ENTER.

“L–KEY” appears in the display window (4).

5 Press the button for which you want to

program the new function.

“START” appears in the display window (4).

6 Press and hold the button you want to

program on the other remote control until

“OK” appears in the display window (4).

“NG” appears in the display window (4) if learning

was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.

When you want to program another function, repeat steps

4 througn 6.

Programming codes from other

remote controls

Notes

Note

ZONE

SETUP ID

MACRO

MODE

DVD CD

V-AU X DOCKMULTI

PHONO

POWER

TV DVR VCR

SIRIUSTUNER

HD DVD

CD-R

USB

NET

CBL

SAT

SRCH MODE

BAND

TITLE

STATUS

MEMORY

SUBMENU

RETURN

PLAY INFO

DISPLAY

MUTE

SYSTEM MEMORY

STANDBY

POWER

SELECT

VOLUME

PRESET/CH

ENTER

CAT.

A-E

REC

AMP

SOURCE

SRCH MODE

BAND

TITLE

STATUS

MEMORY

SUBMENU

RETURN

PLAY INFO

DISPLAY

MUTE

3D DSP

VOLUME

PRESET/CH

ENTER

CAT.

A-E

PRG SELECTTAG

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

ENT

AUDIO SEL

AUDI O

SLEEP

MUTE

INPUT

9 0

HDMI OUT

LEVEL

TV CH

INFO

TV VOL

EXTD SUR.

REC

Set to

SOURCE

ZONE

SETUP ID

MACRO

MODE

DVD CD

V-A UX DOCKMULTI

PHONO

POWER

TV DV R VCR

SIRIUSTUNER

HD DVD

CD-R

USB

NET

CBL

SAT

SRCH MODE

BAND

TITLE

STATUS

SUBMENU

RETURN

PLAY INFO

DISPLAY

SYSTEM MEMORY

STANDBY

POWER

SELECT

VOLUME

PRESET/CH

ENTER

CAT.

A-E

AMP

SOURCE

5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)

Other remote control

ZONE

SETUP ID

MACRO

MODE

DVD CD

V-A UX DOCKMULTI

PHONO

POWER

TV DV R VCR

SIRIUSTUNER

HD DVD

CD-R

USB

NET

CBL

SAT

SRCH MODE

BAND

TITLE

STATUS

SUBMENU

RETURN

PLAY INFO

DISPLAY

SYSTEM MEMORY

STANDBY

POWER

SELECT

VOLU ME

PRESET/CH

ENTER

CAT.

A-E

AMP

SOURCE

ZONE

SETUP ID

MACRO

MODE

DVD CD

V-A UX DOCKMULTI

PHONO

POWER

TV DV R VCR

SIRIUSTUNER

HD DVD

CD-R

USB

NET

CBL

SAT

SRCH MODE

BAND

TITLE

STATUS

SYSTEM MEMORY

STANDBY

POWER

SELECT

VOLU ME

PRESET/CH

AMP

SOURCE

Other remote control

112 En

Remote control features

7 Press

SETUP again to exit from the setup

menu.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) on the remote

control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,

or when you press more than one button simultaneously.

• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions.

However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may

appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this

case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room

for further learning (page 115).

• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:

– when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other

components are weak.

– when the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.

– when the function to be programmed is continuous or

uncommon.

You can change the name of the control area (input

source) that appears in the display window (4) on the

remote control.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

FSOURCE and then press an input selector

button (3) to select the desired control area.

2 Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“SETUP” appears in the display window.

3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “RNAME”

and then press 9ENTER.

4 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select 3-letter

name or 5-letterd name you want to edit and

then press 9ENTER.

Each control area has both 3-letter name and 5-letter

name. You can rename the 3-letter name and 5-letter

name independently.

5 Edit the name of the control area.

To locate the position to edit , press 9l / h.

To select a character, press 9k / n.

Press 9k to change the character in the following order,

or press 9n to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a to z, 0 to

9, space, symbols (–, +, /, :).

6 Press 9ENTER to set the new name.

“OK” appears in the display window (4) on the

remote control if renaming was successful.

When you want to rename the another control area, press

the input selector button (3) or 5SELECT l / h

repeatedly to select the desired control area and then press

9ENTER and then carry out the operations of steps 4

through 6.

7 Press

SETUP again to exit from the setup

menu.

“ERROR” appears in the display window (4) on the remote

control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,

or when you press more than one button simultaneously.

Notes

Changing source names in the

display window

BD BD/HD

3-letter name 5-letter name

Note

BD/HD

113 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

The macro programming feature makes it possible to

perform a series of operations with the press of a single

button. For example, when you want to play a CD,

normally you would turn on the components, select the

CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The

macro programming feature lets you perform all of these

operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The

buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with

macro programs. You can also program your own macros

(page 114).

■ Recalling programmed macro-

operations

1 Press HMACRO on the remote control.

2 Press the desired macro button.

“M:the 3-letter name of the selected control area” (for

example, “M:DVD”) appears in the display window

(4), and this unit transmits the programmed

functions. When you press DSTANDBY or

EPOWER, “M:STB” or “M:PWR” appears in the

display window (4), and this unit transmits the

programmed functions.

3 Press HMACRO again to exit from the

macro-operation mode.

• While the remote control is running a macro program (the

transmission indicator flashes), it does not accept any other

operation.

• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro

is operating until the macro operation is complete.

• If you do not complete each of the operations within 30

seconds, this unit automatically exits from the macro-operation

mode.

■ Default macro functions

*1 Set the appropriate remote control code for TV in advance

(page 109).

*2 This unit plays the last received station or selected contents

before the unit was set in the standby mode.

Macro programming features

Notes

ZONE

SETUP ID

MACRO

MODE

DVD CD

V-A UX DOCKMULTI

PHONO

POWER

TV DVR VCR

SIRIUSTUNER

HD DVD

CD-R

USB

NET

CBL

SAT

SYSTEM MEMORY

STANDBY

POWER

SELECT

AMP

SOURCE

MACRO

Macro buttons

MACRO

Pressing

macro

button

To automatically transmit these

signals in order

First Second

—

STANDBY STANDBY

POWER

(*1)

MULTI MULTI

V-AUX V-AUX

PHONO PHONO

DOCK DOCK

HD DVD

DVD DVD

CD CD

CD-R

CBL

SAT

CBL

SAT

TV TV

DVR DVR

VCR VCR

TUNER TUNER

(*2)

SIRIUS

(*2)

SIRIUS

USB

NET

(*2)

USB

NET

114 En

Remote control features

■ Programming macro operations

You can program your own macro to transmit several

remote control commands in sequence at the press of a

button. Be sure to set up remote control codes or perform

learning operations before programming the macro.

• The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is

programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again

when the programmed macro is cleared.

• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default

macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents.

• We do not recommend that you program continuous operations

(for example, volume control) in a macro.

1 Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“SETUP” appears in the display window (4).

2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “MACRO”

and then press 9ENTER.

3 Press the desired macro button you want to

assign the macro program to and then press

9ENTER.

“M:the three-letter name of the selected macro

button” (for example, “M:DVD”) and the name of the

currently selected control area appears in the display

window (4) alternately.

When you press DSTANDBY or EPOWER,

“M:STB” or “M:PWR” and the name of the currently

selected control area appears in the display window

(4) alternately.

4 Press the buttons for the functions you want

to include in the macro operation in

sequence.

Example

Set the input source to DVD

→ Turn on the DVD

player

→ Turn on the video monitor

Step 1 (“MCR1”): Press DVD.

Step 2 (“MCR2”): Press AV POWER.

Step 3 (“MCR3”): Press TV POWER.

•

To change the selected input area, press

SELECT

Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step,

whereas

SELECT

only changes the selected input area.

• The position of the operation mode selector (AMP/TV/

SOURCE) affects the assigned function. When the

operation mode selector is set to FAMP or FTV, the

input source selectors do not function.

5 Press HMACRO to confirm the program.

You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you

have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote

control automatically exits from the macro

programming mode.

6 Press GSETUP again to exit from the setup

menu.

“ERROR” appears in the display window (4) if you press

more than one button simultaneously.

Notes

Note

Indicates the number of macro

steps entered

Flashes alternately so you can set the

next step

(Selected macro button)

(Selected control area)

MCR 1

M:DVD

DVD

DVD CD

V-AUX DOCKMULTI

PHONO

POWER

TV DVR VCR

SIRIUSTUNER

HD DVD

CD-R

USB

NET

CBL

SAT

STANDBY

POWER

115 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

You can clear all changes made in each function set, such

as learned functions, macros, renamed control area names

and setup remote control ID.

■ Clearing function sets

1 Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“SETUP” appears in the display window (4).

2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “CLEAR”

and then press 9ENTER.

3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired

clear mode.

4 Press and hold 9ENTER for about 3

seconds.

When the clearing is successful, “OK” appears in the

display window (4).

• “NG” appears in the display window (4) if clearing was

unsuccessful.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) if you press a

button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more

than one button simultaneously.

5 Press GSETUP again to exit from the setup

mode.

■ Clearing a learned function

1 Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“SETUP” appears in the display window (4).

2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “ERASE”

and then press 9ENTER.

3 Set the operation mode selector to

SOURCE and then press an input selector

button (3).

If you want to erase the function learned in the AMP

or TV control area, set the operation mode selector to

AMP or

TV.

4 Press 9ENTER.

“E-KEY” appears in the display window (4).

5 Press and hold the button you want to clear

for about 3 seconds.

If clearing is successful, “OK” appears in the display

window (4).

• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat

step 3 through 5.

• Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the

factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have

set remote control codes).

6 Press GSETUP again to exit from the setup

menu.

• “NG” appears in the display window (4) on the remote control

if clearing was unsuccessful.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) if you press

more than one button simultaneously.

Clearing configurations

Clear mode Descriptions

L:DVD (etc.)

(L:Three-digit name of the selected control area)

Clears all learned functions the respective

control area. You can change the control area to

be cleared by pressing the desired input selector

button (3) or 5SELECT l / h repeatedly.

L:AMP

Sets all learned functions for controlling the

amplifier functions to the initial factory settings.

Set the operation mode selector to FAMP to

select this clear mode.

L:TV

Clears all learned functions for TV control area.

Set the operation mode selector to FTV to

select this clear mode.

L:ALL

Clears all learned functions.

M:DVD (etc.)

(M:Name of the selected macro button) Clears

the macro programmed for the selected macro

button (page 114). The assigned macro to the

selected macro button reverts to the initial

factory macro. Press the desired macro button if

you want to change the macro button you want to

clear the programmed functions of.

M:ALL

Clears all programmed macros. The assigned

macro to the selected macro button reverts to the

initial factory macro.

RNAME

Set all the name of the control areas to the

default settings.

FCTRY

Set all settings of the remote control to the initial

factory settings.

Notes

116 En

Remote control features

Use the supplied simplified remote control to make basic controls of this unit.

■ Setting the controlling zone of the

simplified remote control

Use this feature to set the controlling zone (page 119) and

remote control ID (page 121) of the simplified remote

control.

Setting the remote control ID

• ID1: Press and hold l (left cursor) and 1 for 3

seconds.

• ID2: Press and hold l (left cursor) and 2 for 3

seconds.

Setting the controlling zone

• Main zone: Press and hold h (right cursor) and 1 for 3

seconds.

• Zone 2: Press and hold h (right cursor) and 2 for 3

seconds.

• Zone 3: Press and hold h (right cursor) and 3 for 3

seconds.

■ Replacing the battery in the simplified

remote control

Change the battery when the operation range of the

simplified remote control decreases.

• Insert the battery according to the polarity markings

(+ and –).

• If the batteries run out, immediately remove them from the

simplified remote control to prevent an explosion or acid leak.

• If a battery starts leaking, dispose of it immediately. Be careful

not to let the leaking battery acid touch your skin or clothing.

• Before inserting new batteries, wipe the compartment clean.

• Dispose of batteries according to your regional regulations.

Simplified remote control

INPUT

MUTE

SYSTEM MEMORY

41 32

POWERSTANDBY

STATUS MENU

ENTER

SUBMENU

RETURN DISPLAY

VOLUME

STANDBY

Sets the selected zone to the

standby mode.

☞ P. 26, 119

SYSTEM MEMORY

Save or recall the system

settings.

☞ P. 101

INPUTl / h

Select the input source.

☞ P. 36

POWER

Turn on the power.

☞ P. 26, 119

VOLUME +/–

Adjust the volume level.

☞ P. 36

MUTE

Mutes the audio output.

☞ P. 38

Remove the insulation sheet before using the remote

control.

These buttons function as

well as the following

identical buttons on the

main remote control (when

the operation selector mode

is set to FAMP).

8STATUS

9k / n / l / h

9ENTER

0RETURN, SUBMENU

IMENU

KDISPLAY

Notes

Use a straight

pin to remove

the cover.

Replace the

battery with a

new CR2025

battery.

Close the

cover.

117 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The multi-zone configuration feature enables you to set this

unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main zone, second zone (Zone 2) and third zone (Zone 3). You can control

this unit from the second or third zone using the supplied remote control.

You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit:

• An infrared signal receiver in the second zone and/or third zone.

• An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control via the

infrared signal receiver in the second zone and/or third zone to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone.

• An amplifier and speakers in the second zone and/or third zone.

• A video monitor for the second room.

• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with

your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the Zone 2 and Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements.

• Some Yamaha models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to

use an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 Yamaha components can be connected as shown below.

■ Using external amplifiers

To use an external amplifier in the second zone and/or third zone, connect the external amplifier to ZONE OUT jacks

with analog audio cables

• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT use the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.

• Adjust the the second zone and/or third zone volume by using the amplifier in each zone when “Zone2 Volume” or “Zone3 Volume” is

set to “Fixed” (page 96).

Using multi-zone configuration

Only analog signals are sent to the second and third zones. Any source you want to listen to in the second zone and

third zone must be connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.

Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components

Notes

OUTOUT

REMOTE

OUT

REMOTE

This unit

Yamaha

component

Yamaha

component

Infrared signal

receiver

MAIN

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

Infrared signal

emitter

DVD player etc.

Amplifier

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Amplifier

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Second zone

(Zone 2)

Third zone

(Zone 3)

Main zone

This unit

From the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2) jacks

From the ZONE OUT (ZONE 3) jacks

To the REMOTE IN jack

To the REMOTE IN jackFrom the REMOTE OUT jack

Analog audio signals only

118 En

Using multi-zone configuration

■ Using the internal amplifiers of this unit

If you want to use one internal amplifier (SP1 or SP2) of this unit

Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals.

If you want to use two internal amplifiers (SP1 and SP2) of this unit

Connect the Zone 2 and Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 and SP2 speaker terminals.

■ Connecting zone video monitors

Connect the video monitor(s) in Zone 2 and/or Zone 3 to the ZONE VIDEO jacks. If you connect the multiple zone video

monitors to ZONE VIDEO jacks, the video monitors play back the same source simultaneously.

Important safety notice

The speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than

one loudspeaker per channel.

Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low

impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.

Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This

information is found on the back panel of your Receiver.

PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SP1

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SP2

Speakers

(Zone 3)

This unit

Speakers

(Zone 2)

ZONE

VIDEO

This unit

Source

component

Video In Video In

Video monitor

(Zone2)

Video monitor

(Zone3)

119 En

Using multi-zone configuration

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Using TRIGGER OUT jacks for Zone 2 and Zone 3

This unit is equipped with two TRIGGER OUT jacks. You can turn on and off the component corresponding to the

selection of the input source of the desired zone or turning on and off the desired zone by configuring the “Trigger

Output” settings (page 100).

You can select the zone you want to control by using the

control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control.

■ Basic operation

Front panel operations

1 Press

ZONE 2 or

ZONE 3 on the front

panel to individually turn on or off Zone 2 or

Zone 3.

2 Press

ZONE CONTROLS on the front

panel repeatedly to select the zone you want

to control.

Each time you press

ZONE CONTROLS, the

front panel display changes as shown below, and the

indicator for the currently selected zone flashes for

approximately 10 seconds. However, no indicator

flashes when the main zone is selected.

ZONE2

Controls the Zone 2 amplifier or tuner functions.

ZONE3

Controls the Zone 3 amplifier or tuner functions.

You must complete this step within 10 seconds while the

selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise,

the currently selected zone mode is automatically

canceled.

3 Perform the desired operation in the selected

zone (page 120).

To turn off the desired zone, press OZONE 2 or

OZONE 3 again.

Remote control operations

1 Press

ZONE repeatedly to select the zone

you want to control.

“MAIN”, “ZONE 2”, or “ZONE 3” indicator appears

in the display window (4) on the remote control.

2 Press EPOWER to turn on the selected

zone.

3 Perform the desired operation in the selected

zone (page 120).

To turn off the desired zone, press DSTANDBY.

TRIGGER OUT

Power amplifier (etc.)

Zone 2 (etc.)

Trigger in

This unit

Trigger in

Projector (etc.) in the

main zone

After the connections, turn on this unit and set the

speaker terminal assignments with “Zone SP Assign”

(page 96).

Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3

ZONE2

ZONE3

No indicator flashes

when the main zone is selected.

MAIN

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

(Zone 2) (Zone 3) (Main zone)

120 En

Using multi-zone configuration

■ Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or

Zone 3

Rotate the CINPUT selector (or set the

operation mode selector to FAMP and then

press one of the input selector buttons (3)).

• Select “TUNER” as the input source to use the FM/AM

tuning features (page 48) in the selected zone.

• Select “XM” as the input source to use the XM

Satellite Radio features (page 53) in the selected zone.

• Select “SIRIUS” as the input source to use the SIRIUS

Satellite Radio features (page 58) in the selected zone.

• Select “DOCK” as the input source to use the iPod

features (page 66) or Bluetooth features (page 64) in

the selected zone.

• Select “USB/NET” as the input source to use the USB

features (page 69) or network features (page 69) in the

selected zone.

The input sources are shared across all zones.

■ Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or

Zone 3

Rotate

VOLUME (or press

VOLUME +/–) .

Press

MUTE on the remote control to mute the sound output

to the selected zone.

When you use the external amplifiers in Zone 2 or Zone 3,

VOLUME +/– can be used only when “Zone2 Volume” or

“Zone3 Volume” is set to “Variable” (page 96).

■ Adjusting the front speaker balance of

Zone 2 or Zone 3

Press DTONE CONTROL repeatedly to select

“BALANCE” and then rotate the MPROGRAM

selector for adjustment.

■ Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or

Zone 3

Press DTONE CONTROL repeatedly to select

the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the

low-frequency response (BASS) and then rotate

the MPROGRAM selector for adjustment.

Control range: -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

■ Setting the sleep timer for Zone 2 or

Zone 3

Use this feature to turn of the desired zone after a certain

amount of time.

Set the operation mode to FAMP and then press

CSLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time.

The sleep timer setting changes as shown below.

■ Using the zone OSD

You can display the FM/AM radio, XM Satellite Radio

(U.S.A. and Canada models only), or HD Radio

information (U.S.A. model only) in the video monitor

connected to the ZONE VIDEO jacks. You can also

browse music contents (such as iPod contents) by using

the zone OSD.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

FSOURCE and then press the desired input

selector button (3).

2 Press KDISPLAY to display the menu

screen on the zone OSD.

3 Use 9k / n / l / h and 9ENTER to

navigate the menu on the zone OSD.

• The menu displayed in the zone OSD appears in English

even if Japanese or Russian is selected.

• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the

front panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those

characters are replaced with underscores “_”.

• You can select the zone(s) of which the operational status

is displayed (page 97).

• You can operate the zone OSD in the same way as GUI

operations.

Note

Notes

120min. 90min.

60min.30min.OFF

121 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional

operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each

parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.

• Only

MASTER ON/OFF,

STRAIGHT and the

PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup

menu.

• All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu.

• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.

1 Press

MASTER ON/OFF on the front

panel to release it outward to the OFF

position to turn off this unit.

2 Press and hold

STRAIGHT and then

press

MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON

position to turn on this unit.

This unit turns on, and “ADVANCED SETUP”

appears in the front panel display.

3 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector to select

the parameter you want to adjust.

4 Press

STRAIGHT repeatedly to change

the selected parameter setting.

5 Press

MASTER ON/OFF to release it

outward to the OFF position to save the new

setting and turn off this unit.

The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this

unit.

■ Speaker impedance SPEAKER IMP.

Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit

so that it matches that of your speakers.

■ Remote sensor REMOTE SENSOR

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the signal-

receiving capability of the remote control sensor on the

front panel of this unit.

We recommend setting the parameter to “ON” in most cases.

■ Wake on RS-232C access

RS232C STANDBY

Use this feature to set this unit to transmit data via the RS-

232C interface when this unit is in the standby mode.

Initial setting:

[U.S.A. and Canada models]: YES

[Other models]: NO

■ Remote control ID setting

REMOTE CON AMP

Use this feature to set the remote control ID of this unit for

remote control recognition.

Setting remote control ID

Use this feature to set the remote control ID. This feature

is useful when you control multiple Yamaha AV receiver

or amplifier with using the remote control.

Advanced setup

Notes

Using the advanced setup menu

Choice Descriptions

8ΩMIN

Select this setting to set the speaker impedance to

8 Ω. The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω

or higher.

6ΩMIN

Select this setting to set the speaker impedance to

6 Ω. The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω

or higher (front speakers only: 4 Ω or higher).

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

MASTER

While holding

down

Choice Descriptions

Select this setting if you want to activate the

signal-receiving capability of the remote control

sensor.

OFF

Select this setting if you want to deactivate the

signal-receiving capability of the remote control

sensor.

Note

Choice Functions

YES

Select this setting to set this unit to transmit data

via the RS-232C interface.

Select this setting to set this unit not to transmit

data via the RS-232C interface.

Choice Descriptions

ID1

Select this setting when the ID of the remote

control is set to “ID1”

ID2

Select this setting when the ID of the remote

control is set to “ID2”

122 En

Advanced setup

Press GID repeatedly using a ballpoint pen or

similar object on the remote control to select the

desired remote control ID.

Each time you press GID, the remote control ID indicator

changes as shown below.

To set the remote control ID of the simplified remote control,

see page 116 for details.

■ SIRIUS Satellite Radio Parental Lock

code number reset

SIRIUS PIN

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Use this feature to set the code number for the SIRIUS

Satellite Radio Parental Lock feature to the initial factory

setting.

■ Tuner frequency step TUNER FRQ STEP

(Asia and General models only)

Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according

to the frequency spacing in your area.

■ Bi-amplifier mode BI-AMP

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the bi-amplifier

function.

When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, the SURROUND BACK

terminals cannot be used to connect surround back speakers in

that the terminals are already used for the bi-amplifier

connection (page 14).

■ Recovery and backup of the system

settings

RECOV./BACKUP

Use this feature to save and restore the settings of this unit.

• This unit does not save the FM/AM preset stations, preset USB/

network items, and system memory settings.

• If no settings are saved, you cannot select “RECOVERY”.

■ Parameter initialization INITIALIZE

Use this feature to reset the parameters of this unit to the

initial factory settings. You can select the category of

parameters to be initialized.

To initialize the parameters of each sound field program, use

“Initialize” in “Stereo/Surround” (page 84).

■ MAC address filter MAC FILTER

Use this feature to filter the access to this unit via LAN to

control this unit by the MAC address of the accessing PC

(page 105).

You can register the MAC address that is allowed to access

when “MAC FILTER” is set to “ON” by using the Web browser

(page 105).

Choice Descriptions

RESET

Sets the code number to the initial factory setting.

CANCEL

Cancels the reset of the code number.

Choice Descriptions

AM10/

FM100

Select this setting for North, Central and South

America.

AM9/FM50

Select this setting for all other countries.

Choice Descriptions

Select this setting if you want to activate the bi-

amplifier function.

OFF

Select this setting if you want to deactivate the bi-

amplifier function.

Note

ID1

ID2

Choice Descriptions

RECOVERY

Restoring the saved setting of this unit.

BACKUP

Saves the current settings of this unit.

CANCEL

Cancels the recovery or backup of the settings of

this unit.

Notes

Choice Descriptions

DSP

PARAM

Select this setting to initialize all the parameters of

the sound field parameters (page 80).

VIDEO

Select this setting to initialize all the parameters in

“Video” and “Display Set” (except “Short

Message” and “Playback Screen”).

NETWORK

Select this setting to initialize all the parameters in

“Network” and MusicCAST information stored in

this unit.

ALL

Select this setting to initialize all the parameters of

this unit.

CANCEL

Select this setting to cancel the initialization

procedure.

Choice Descriptions

Only allows to accept the access from the PC

whose MAC address is registered to this unit.

OFF

Allows to accept the access from any PC.

123 En

Advanced setup

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ TV format TV FORMAT

Use this feature to set the color encoding format of your

television.

Choices: NTSC, PAL

Initial setting:

[U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models]: NTSC

[Other models]: PAL

This setting is applied to the video monitor in the main zone,

Zone 2 and Zone 3.

■ HDMI monitor check MONITOR CHECK

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the monitor check

function of this unit.

■ Language LANGUAGE

Use this feature to select the language of your choice that

appears in the GUI (graphical user interface) menu, OSD

display in the zone monitor and the messages that appear

in the front panel display.

Choices: ENGLISH (English), JAPANESE (Japanese),

FRENCH (French), GERMAN (German),

SPANISH (Spanish), RUSSIAN (Russian)

You can also select the display language with the GUI menu

(page 100).

··· The selected language is displayed.

— ··· The selected language is not displayed. The menu

items and messages are displayed in English.

■ Firmware update FIRM UPDATE

Use this feature to update the firmware of this unit. For

details on how to update the firmware, refer to information

supplied with updates.

To start updating the firmware, rotate the MPROGRAM

selector to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and then press

DMENU.

• Do not use this feature unless you need to update the firmware.

• Be sure to read information supplied with updates before

performing firmware updates.

■ Firmware version VERSION

Use this feature to check the version of the firmware

currently installed on this unit.

Choice Descriptions

YES

This unit receives the information of the available

video signal resolutions from the video monitor

connected via HDMI and you can only select the

resolutions supported by the video monitor in

“Resolution” (page 94).

SKIP

You can select any resolution in “Resolution”

(page 94).

LANGUAGE GUI menu

Front panel

display

Zone OSD

RUSSIAN

—

JAPANESE

——

Other

languages

Choice Descriptions

USB

Updates the firmware of this unit using a USB

memory.

NETWORK

Updates the firmware of this unit via network.

Notes

TROUBLESHOOTING

124 En

Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below

or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center.

■ General

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

This unit fails to turn

on or enters the

standby mode soon

after the power is

turned on.

The power cable is not connected or the

plug is not completely inserted.

Connect the power cable firmly.

—

The speaker impedance setting is

incorrect.

Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.

The protection circuitry has been

activated.

Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this

unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire

for each connection does not touch anything other

than its respective connection.

This unit has been exposed to a strong

external electric shock (such as lightning

or strong static electricity).

Turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, plug it

back in after 30 seconds and then use it normally.

—

No sound. Incorrect input or output cable

connections.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

18-24

Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”,

“COAX/OPT” or “ANALOG”.

Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO”.

Audio input jack select is set to

“ANALOG” while the input source

component outputs digital audio signals.

Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO” or

“COAX/OPT”.

No appropriate input source has been

selected.

Select an appropriate input source with the

INPUT

selector (or the input selector buttons (

) ).

36, 37

Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.

The volume is turned down or muted. Turn up the volume.

—

Signals this unit cannot reproduce are

being input from a source component,

such as a CD-ROM.

Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this

unit.

—

The HDMI components connected to this

unit do not support the HDCP copy

protection standards.

Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP

copy protection standards.

125 En

Troubleshooting

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

No picture. Your video monitor is connected to one of

the analog video output jacks of this unit

and the picture is input at different types

of video jacks.

Set “Analog ` Analog” to “Conversion” or connect

your source components in the same way as you

connect your video monitor to this unit.

1080p-resolution analog video signals are

only output at the COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR OUT jacks.

Connect your video monitor to the COMPONENT

VIDEO MONITOR jacks.

480p-, 576p-, 1080i- and 720p-resolution

video signals cannot be output at the S

VIDEO and VIDEO MONITOR OUT

jacks.

Connect your video monitor to the HDMI OUT or

COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.

—

This unit outputs the video signals not

supported by the video monitor connected

to the HDMI OUT jack.

Select “VIDEO” in “INITIALIZE” to reset the video

parameters.

122

Set “MONITOR CHECK” to “YES”.

123

PURE DIRECT mode is active. Turn off the PURE DIRECT mode.

Set “Pure Direct” to “Audio + Video”.

Non-standard video signals are input.

Short message

displays do not

appear on the video

monitor.

“Short Message” is set to “Off”. Set “Short Message” to “On”.

The sound suddenly

goes off.

The protection circuitry has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct.

26, 121

Check that the speaker wires are not touching each

other and then turn this unit back on.

—

The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again.

—

Sound is heard from

the speaker on one

side only.

Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

The speaker level settings are incorrect. Adjust “Level” settings.

Only the center

speaker outputs

substantial sound.

When playing a monaural source with a

CINEMA DSP program, the source signal

is directed to the center channel, and the

front and surround speakers output effect

sounds.

No sound is heard

from the center

speaker.

“Center” in “Configuration” is set to

“None”.

Set “Center” to “Small” or “Large”.

No sound is heard

from the presence

speakers.

This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode.

Press

STRAIGHT to turn off the “STRAIGHT”

mode.

You are using a source or program

combination that does not output sound

from all channels.

Try another sound field program.

No sound is heard

from the surround

speakers.

“Surround” in “Configuration” is set to

“None”.

Set “Surround” to “Small” or “Large”.

This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode

and a monaural source is being played

back.

Press

STRAIGHT to turn off the “STRAIGHT”

mode.

The surround speakers are connected to

the SURROUND BACK speaker

terminals.

Connect the surround speakers to the SURROUND

speaker terminals.

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

126 En

Troubleshooting

No sound is heard

from the subwoofer.

“Bass Out” in “Configuration” is set to

“Front” when a Dolby Digital or DTS

signal is being played.

Set “Bass Out” to “SWFR” or “Front + SWFR”.

“Bass Out” in “Configuration” is set to

“SWFR” or “Front” when a 2-channel

source is being played.

Set “Bass Out” to “Front + SWFR”.

The source does not contain low-

frequency signals.

No sound is heard

from the surround

back speakers.

“Surround Back” in “Configuration” is set

to “None”.

Check whether “Surround” is set to “Small” or

“Large” and configure “Surround Back” properly.

87, 88

While this unit is in the CINEMA DSP 3D

mode, no sound is output at the surround

back speakers.

The audio input

sources cannot be

played in the desired

digital audio signal

format (Desired input

source indicator or

decoder indicator in

the front panel

display does not light

up).

The connected component is not set to

output the desired digital audio signals.

Make an appropriate setting following the operating

instructions for your component.

—

Audio input jack select is set to

“ANALOG”.

Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO”.

A humming sound is

heard.

Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

—

No connection from the turntable to the

GND terminal.

Connect the grounding cable of the turntable to the

GND terminal of this unit.

The volume level is

low while a record is

being played.

The record is being played on a turntable

with an MC cartridge.

Connect your turntable to this unit through an MC-

head amplifier.

The volume level

cannot be increased,

or the sound is

distorted.

The component connected to the AUDIO

OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned

off.

Turn on the power of the component.

—

A source cannot be

recorded by the

recording component.

The audio source connected to the MULTI

CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be

recorded.

A given input source is not output at the

same output channel (e.g. DVR IN to

DVR OUT).

Connect the recording component to another channel

that is not being used for connecting the source

component.

You are trying to record a DTS source.

(DTS signal is a digital bitstream.

Attempting to record the DTS bitstream

digitally will result in noise being

recorded.)

Make a setting so that the analog signal will be output

from your DTS-compatible player and then connect

the DTS-compatible player to the AUDIO IN jacks

while the recording component is connected to the

analog AUDIO OUT (DVR, VCR or MD/CD-R)

jacks.

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

127 En

Troubleshooting

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

An audio source

cannot be recorded by

the digital recording

component connected

to the DIGITAL

OUTPUT jacks.

The audio source component is not

connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks.

Connect the audio source component to the DIGITAL

INPUT jacks.

Some components cannot records Dolby

Digital or DTS sources.

You are trying to record an audio source

input at the DOCK terminal by the digital

recording component connected to the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.

Connect the recording component to the analog

AUDIO OUT (DVR, VCR or MD/CD-R) jacks.

(U.S.A. model only)

HD Radio signals are not output at the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks

Connect the recording component to the analog

AUDIO OUT (DVR, VCR or MD/CD-R) jacks.

An audio source

cannot be recorded by

the analog recording

component connected

to the analog AUDIO

OUT (DVR, VCR or MD/

CD-R) jacks.

The audio source component is not

connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks.

Connect the audio source component to the AUDIO

IN jacks.

XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS Satellite

Radio signals are not output at the analog

AUDIO OUT (DVR, VCR or MD/CD-R)

jacks.

Recorded materials

sound differently.

The settings made on this unit (such as

tonal quality, volume level and sound field

programs) do not affect recorded material.

The sound field

parameters and some

other settings of this

unit cannot be

changed.

“Memory Guard” is set to “On”. Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”.

This unit does not

operate properly.

The internal microcomputer has been

frozen by an external electric shock (such

as lightning or excessive static electricity)

or by a power supply with low voltage.

Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet

and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.

—

“CHECK SP WIRES”

appears in the front

panel display.

Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.

There is noise

interference from

digital or radio

frequency equipment.

This unit is too close to the digital or high-

frequency equipment.

Move this unit further away from such equipment.

—

The picture is

disturbed.

The video source uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent dubbing.

This unit suddenly

enters the standby

mode.

The internal temperature becomes too

high and the overheat protection circuitry

has been activated.

Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then

turn it back on.

—

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

128 En

Troubleshooting

■ HDMI

■ Tuner (FM/AM)

■ HD Radio (U.S.A. model only)

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

No picture or sound. The number of the connected HDMI

components is over the limit.

Reduce the number of the connected HDMI

components.

—

HDCP authentication failed. Check that the connected HDMI components support

the HDCP copy protection standards.

—

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

FM stereo reception is

noisy.

The characteristics of FM stereo

broadcasts may cause this problem

when the transmitter is too far away or

the antenna input is poor.

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

There is distortion, and

clear reception cannot

be obtained even with a

good FM antenna.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate

multi-path interference.

—

The desired station

cannot be tuned into

with the automatic

tuning method.

The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

Previously preset

stations can no longer

be tuned into.

This unit has been disconnected for a

long period.

Preset the stations again.

The desired station

cannot be tuned into

with the automatic

tuning method.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections

and orient it for the best reception.

Use the manual tuning method.

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

Supplied AM loop antenna is not

connected.

Connect the AM loop antenna correctly even

if you use an outdoor antenna.

Noises can result from lightning,

fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats

and other electrical equipment.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.

This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to

eliminate all noise.

There are buzzing and

whining noises.

A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set.

—

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

This unit cannot

receive the HD Radio

signals of the

selected radio

station.

The radio station provides analog FM/

AM radio service only.

Select other radio stations that provides the HD

Radio service.

The signal is too weak. Adjust the antenna position.

—

Use a high-quality FM/AM antenna.

—

This unit cannot

select other audio

programs than the

main program.

The radio station provides an audio

program only.

HD Radio information

does not appear.

The radio station does not provide the

information.

129 En

Troubleshooting

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ iTunes Tagging (U.S.A. model only)

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

Insufficient Data Tag data is not saved because of invalid

data.

The HD Radio station currently selected does not

support the iTunes Tagging feature.

—

Tag already saved Tag data for the same content has been

already saved.

Tag storage full

Connect iPod

Tag data cannot be stored because the

internal memory of this unit is full.

Station your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock

connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit.

iPod full

Tags cannot be

stored

Tag data cannot be stored on your iPod

because the HDD space of your iPod is

full.

Delete unnecessary data from your iPod to make

room and try again.

—

Transferring Failed Tag data cannot be transferred to your

iPod.

Check if the Yamaha iPod universal dock is

connected to the DOCK terminal properly. Re-

station your iPod and try again.

130 En

Troubleshooting

■ XM Satellite Radio

If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel

display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

CHECK XM TUNER The XM Mini-Tuner is not installed in

the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the

XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock is not

connected to this unit.

Confirm the XM Mini-Tuner is fully seated in the

dock and check the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock

cable is connected to this unit.

CHECK ANTENNA The XM antenna is not connected to the

XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the XM

antenna cable has become damaged.

Check that the XM antenna is securely connected to

the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock and check the

antenna cable for damage. Replace the XM antenna

if the cable is damaged.

LOADING The XM Mini-Tuner is acquiring audio or

program information from the XM

satellite signal. This message can also

occur in weak XM signal conditions.

Note that this unit may not respond to

some operations while this message is

displayed.

This message should disappear in a few seconds in

good signal conditions. If you see this message often,

reposition the XM antenna to get better signal

reception. Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information

in the front panel display or “XM Information”

screen in the video monitor to check the antenna

reception level.

NO SIGNAL The XM Mini-Tuner is not receiving the

XM satellite signal. Something may be

blocking the XM antenna’s view of the

satellites or the antenna is not properly

aimed.

Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the

XM antenna to get better signal reception. Use the

“ANTENNA INFO” information in the front panel

display or “XM Information” screen in the video

monitor to check the antenna reception level. See

instructions supplied with the XM Mini-Tuner and

Dock for antenna installation information.

CH OFF AIR The XM channel you selected is not

currently broadcasting.

Check back at a later time; in the meantime, select

another channel.

—

CH UNAUTH You may be attempting to tune to an XM

channel that is blocked or that you cannot

receive with your XM subscription

package.

Consult the latest channel guide at

http://www.xmradio.com/ (US residents) and

http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian residents) for the

current list of channels. For information on receiving

this channel, visit http://www.xmradio.com/ (US

residents) and http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian

residents) or contact XM Satellite Radio at

1-800-967-2346 (US residents) and 1-877-438-9677

(Canadian residents).

CH UNAVAIL The selected channel is not available. The

channel may have been reassigned to a

different channel number. This message

may occur initially with a new XM Mini-

Tuner or an XM Mini-Tuner that has not

received XM’s signal for an extended

period.

Consult the latest channel guide at

http://www.xmradio.com/ (US residents) and

http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian residents) for the

current list of channels. For cases of a new XM Mini-

Tuner or an XM Mini-Tuner that has not received

XM’s signal for an extended period, allow the XM

Mini-Tuner to receive the XM satellite signal for at

least 5 minutes and then try to select the channel

again.

—

UPGRADE XM

TUNER

The connected XM Mini-Tuner is

incompatible with this unit.

Use the XM Mini-Tuner compatible with the XM

Rev 4x.

—

- - - - No artist name or song title is available

for this selection.

No action required. —

131 En

Troubleshooting

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ SIRIUS Satellite Radio

If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel

display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

ANTENNA ERROR The antenna is not connected to the

SiriusConnect tuner properly.

Check the connection of the antenna and

SiriusConnect tuner.

CHECK SR TUNER The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected

to the SIRIUS jack of this unit correctly.

Check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and

this unit.

The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected

to the AC wall outlet.

Connect the power cable of the SiriusConnect tuner

to the AC wall outlet.

NOT SUPPORTED This unit does not support the connected

SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner.

Connect the SiriusConnect tuner that this unit

supports.

ACQUIRING The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the antenna of the

SiriusConnect tuner. Use the “ANTENNA INFO”

information in the front panel display or “SIRIUS

Information” screen in the video monitor to check

the antenna reception level.

UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the

channel list.

Wait until the updating is complete. —

The period of the subscription is end. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to renew the

subscription.

F/W UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the

firmware.

Wait until the updating is complete. —

CALL SIRIUS

(CALL 888-539-

SIRIUS TO

SUBSCRIBE)

The selected channel is not subscribed. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to subscribe the

selected channel.

URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/

Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)

Select another channel.

SUB UPDATED The subscription information is updated.

INVALID The selected channel is currently out of

service.

Select another channel.

Not Available The operation you made is not available.

132 En

Troubleshooting

■ Remote control

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The remote control

does not work or

function properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum

range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-

axis from the front panel.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

Reposition this unit.

—

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.

The batteries do not last long and get

quickly exhausted.

Using alkaline batteries is strongly recommended.

—

Set the backlight mode to “OFF”.

109

The operation mode selector is set

incorrectly.

Set the operation mode selector correctly. When

operating this unit, set it to the

AMP position.

When operating the component selected by the input

selector button, set it to the

SOURCE position.

When operating the TV set in the

TV area, set it to

the

TV position.

—

The control zone setting is incorrect. Select the zone you want to control.

119

The remote control code is not correctly

set.

Set the remote control code correctly using

“List of remote control codes” at the end of this

manual.

109

Try setting another code of the same manufacturer

using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this

manual.

109

The remote control ID of the remote

control and this unit do not match.

Match the remote control ID of this unit and the

remote control.

116, 121

Even if the remote control code is

correctly set, there are some models that

do not respond to the remote control.

Program the necessary functions independently into

the programmable buttons using the Learn feature.

111

The remote control

does not learn new

functions.

The batteries of this remote control and/or

the other remote control are too weak.

Replace the batteries.

The distance between the two remote

controls is too much or too little.

Place the remote controls at the proper distance.

111

The signal coding or modulation of the

other remote control is not compatible

with this remote control.

Learning is not possible.

—

Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for

the new functions.

115

133 En

Troubleshooting

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ USB and Network

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

“No Device” is

displayed even when

a USB device is

present.

This unit recognized the USB storage

device as an illegal device.

Turn this unit off then on again.

The music files and

directories in the USB

device cannot be

viewed.

The music files and directories are placed

in locations other than the FAT area.

Place music files and directories in the FAT area.

—

You are attempting to browse directory

hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory

with more than 500 files.

Modify the data structure on your USB device.

—

The PC server/MCX-

2000/Internet Radio

does not function

properly.

The IP address is not set properly. Set the DHCP server function of the router to ON.

Alternately, perform manual configuration according

to the current operating environment.

The network cable is not connected. Connect it properly.

The music in the PC

server cannot be

played back.

The PC does not have Windows Media

Player 11 or Windows Media Connect 2.0

installed in it.

Install Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media

Connect 2.0 in the PC.

—

The music is recorded in a format that

cannot be played on this unit. This unit

cannot play music formats other than

WMA, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, and WAV

(PCM format). Also note that it cannot

play certain music files even if these are

recorded in the WMA, MP3, MPEG-4

AAC, or WAV format.

Play music recorded in a format that this unit is

compatible with.

—

The MusicCAST

server cannot be

connected.

You are attempting to connect to MCX-

1000. The MusicCAST server that can be

connected by this unit is MCX-2000.

Use MCX-2000 or the PC server.

—

Auto Configuration is not executed. Set your Yamaha MCX-2000 to the “Auto Config”

mode.

The Internet Radio

cannot be played.

The firewall of the network device is

activated. The Internet Radio can be

played only when it passes through the

port designated by each radio station. The

port number is variable depending on

radio station.

Check the firewall setting of the network device.

—

Connection to the Internet is

disconnected.

Check the configuration of the network device, and

then contact the network connection provider.

—

This unit does not

recall the correct item

by using numeric

buttons (1-8).

The connected USB device is incorrect. Connect the USB device that stores the preset item.

The directory that stores the selected item

is changed.

Preset the desired item to the numeric button (1-8)

again.

This unit does not

recall the selected

item by using numeric

buttons (1-8).

The USB device is not connected

correctly.

Connect the USB device properly.

The PC or MCX-2000 that stores the

selected item is turned off.

Turn on the PC or MCX-2000.

—

The selected Internet Radio station is

temporary unavailable or out of service.

Try again when the selected Internet Radio is

providing the service.

Preset other Internet Radio stations.

134 En

Troubleshooting

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

Please wait

(Starting Server)

This unit is in the middle of waking up

MCX-2000 that has been set to the

standby mode.

Wait for approximately 20 seconds.

—

Connect error

There is a problem with the signal path

from your network to this unit.

Check the connection between this unit and the LAN

port on your router or hub.

Make sure your router is properly connected and

turned on. Also, make sure your modem is properly

connected and turned on when you are attempting to

listen to Internet Radio.

Disconnected

Your USB storage device or USB portable

audio player has been disconnected from

the USB port of this unit.

Check the connection between this unit and your

USB storage device or USB portable audio player.

—

The PC server or MCX-2000 previously

connected to this unit no longer exists.

Connect this unit to the available PC server or MCX-

2000.

No Device There is a problem with the signal path

from your USB storage device or USB

portable audio player to this unit.

Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB storage

device or USB portable audio player to the USB port

of this unit.

Try resetting your USB storage device or USB

portable audio player.

—

Access error

This unit cannot access your USB storage

device or USB portable audio player.

Try another USB storage device or USB portable

audio player.

—

There is a problem with the signal path

from your USB storage device or USB

portable audio player to this unit.

Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB storage

device or USB portable audio player to the USB port

of this unit.

Try resetting your USB storage device or USB

portable audio player.

—

Unable to play

This unit cannot play back the songs

currently stored on your PC.

Make sure Windows Media Player 11 or Windows

Media Connect 2.0 is installed on your PC.

—

Check that the songs currently stored on your PC are

playable (MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC, and WAV).

—

Store some other playable music files (MP3, WMA,

MPEG-4 AAC, and WAV) on your PC.

—

The network may be overloaded with

heavy traffic, and playback is interrupted.

Try preparing a network exclusively for use with this

unit to separate it from general network traffic.

—

List updated

The list of the contents stored on your PC

server or MCX-2000 has been updated.

Bookmark ON

The desired Internet Radio station has

been added to the “Bookmarks” list.

Bookmark OFF

The stored Internet Radio station has been

removed from the “Bookmarks” list.

Empty Memory!

No items are assigned to the selected

numeric button.

Assign the desired item to the numeric button.

Not found!

This unit cannot find the assigned item for

the selected numeric button.

Connect the USB device that stores the preset item.

—

Turn on the PC or MCX-2000.

—

Try again when the selected Internet Radio is

providing the service.

Preset the desired item to the numeric button (1-8) again.

USB Overloaded

Over current passes through the connected

USB device.

Turn off this unit and then disconnect the USB

device. If the message appears when you connect the

USB device again, this unit may not compatible with

the USB device.

—

135 En

Troubleshooting

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ iPod

In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the panel display or in the GUI screen, check the connection of

your iPod (page 22).

■ Bluetooth

Note

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

Loading... This unit is in the middle of recognizing

the connection with your iPod.

This unit is in the middle of acquiring

song lists from your iPod.

Connect error There is a problem with the signal path

from your iPod to this unit.

Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod

universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.

Try resetting your iPod.

—

Unknown iPod The iPod being used is not supported by

this unit.

This unit supports iPod touch, iPod (Click Wheel,

including iPod classic), iPod nano and iPod mini.

—

iPod Connected Your iPod is properly stationed in a

Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as

YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the

DOCK terminal of this unit, and the

connection between your iPod and this

unit is complete.

iPod Disconnected Your iPod was removed from a Yamaha

iPod universal dock (such as YDS-11,

sold separately) connected to the DOCK

terminal of this unit.

Station your iPod back in a Yamaha iPod universal

dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) connected to

the DOCK terminal of this unit.

Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs

currently stored on your iPod.

Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod

are playable.

—

Store some other playable music files on your iPod.

—

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

Searching... The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver

and the Bluetooth component is in the

middle of the pairing.

The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver

and the Bluetooth component is in the

middle of establishing the connection.

Completed The pairing is completed.

Canceled The pairing is canceled.

BT Connected The connection between the Yamaha

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such

as YBA-10, sold separately) and the

Bluetooth component is established.

BT Disconnected The Bluetooth component is

disconnected from the Yamaha Bluetooth

wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10,

sold separately).

136 En

Troubleshooting

■ Automatic setup

Before automatic setup

During automatic setup

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

Unplug Phones! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones.

—

Select Setup Item! No check items are selected as the

measurement items.

Select the desired check items. 31

Memory Guard! The parameters of this unit are protected. Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”. 97

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

E01:No Front SP Front L/R channel signals are not detected. Check the front L/R speaker connections. 12

E02:No Sur. SP A surround channel signal is not detected. Check the surround speaker connections. 12

E03:No PRNS SP A presence channel signal is not detected. Check the presence speaker connections. 12

E04:SBR→SBL Only right surround back channel signal is

detected.

Connect the surround back speaker to the

SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) speaker

terminal if you only have one surround

back speaker.

E05:Noisy Background noise is too loud. Perform the automatic setup in a quiet

environment.

—

Turn off noisy electric equipment like air

conditioners or move them away from the

optimizer microphone.

—

E06:Check Sur. Surround back speakers are connected,

though surround L/R speakers are not.

Connect surround speakers when you use

surround back speakers.

E07:No MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged

during the “automatic setup” procedure.

Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

E08:No Signal The optimizer microphone does not detect

test tones.

Check the microphone setting. 30

Check the speaker connections and

placement.

The optimizer microphone or OPTIMIZER

MIC jack may be defective. Contact the

nearest Yamaha dealer or service center.

—

E09:User Cancel The “automatic setup” procedure was

cancelled due to user activity.

Perform the automatic setup again. 30

E10:Internal Err. An internal error occurred. Perform the automatic setup again. 30

137 En

Troubleshooting

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

After automatic setup

• If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run perform the automatic setup again.

• If warning message “W2” or “W3” appears, the adjustments are made, however the adjustment may not be optimal.

• Depending on the speakers, warning message “W1” may appears even if the speaker connections are correct.

• If error message “E10” occurs repeatedly, contact a qualified Yamaha service center.

Warning message Cause Remedy

See

page

W1:Out of Phase Speaker polarity is not correct. This

message may appear depending on the

speakers even when the speakers are

connected correctly.

Check the speaker connections for proper

polarity (+ or –).

W2:Over Distance The distance between the speaker and the

listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).

Bring the speaker closer to the listening

position.

—

W3:Level Error The difference of volume level among

speakers is excessive.

Readjust the speaker installation so that all

speakers are set in locations with similar

conditions.

—

Check the speaker connections. 12

Use speakers of similar quality.

—

Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. 30

W4:SP Mismatch The result of “Wiring” checked by the

automatic setup is different from the

settings manually configured in

“Configuration”.

Manually configure the speaker settings in

“Configuration”.

“Wiring” has not been checked. Manually configure the speaker settings in

“Configuration”.

Notes

RESETTING THE SYSTEM

138 En

Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings.

• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “GUI menu” parameters.

• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.

To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press

MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to

release it outward to the OFF position.

1 Press

MASTER ON/OFF on the front

panel to release it outward to the OFF

position to turn off this unit.

2 Press and hold

STRAIGHT and then

press

MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON

position to turn on this unit.

This unit turns on, and “ADVANCED SETUP”

appears in the front panel display.

3 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector to select

“INITIALIZE”.

4 Press

STRAIGHT repeatedly to select

“ALL”.

Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure

without making any changes.

5 Press

MASTER ON/OFF to release it

outward to the OFF position to confirm your

selection and turn off this unit.

Resetting the system

Notes

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

MASTER

While holding

down

INITIALIZE

CANCEL

INITIALIZE

ALL

OPERATION MODES OF FRONT PANEL CONTROLS

139 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

If you perform a mode trigger operation using the front panel controls, this unit enters the following mode. In each mode,

you can use the front panel controls as shown below. If no operation is performed for five seconds in each mode, this unit

automatically returns to the default mode.

Available operations in each mode

* In the BT pairing mode, this unit searches for Bluetooth components to be paired. This mode is available only when “DOCK” is

selected as an input source and a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) is connected to the

DOCK terminal of this unit.

Operation modes of front panel controls

Mode trigger button Mode to enter

—

Default mode

Press DAUDIO SELECT/REC OUT

Audio select mode

Press and hold DAUDIO SELECT/REC

OUT

Rec out mode

Press DMENU

GUI menu mode

Press DTONE CONTROL

Sound adjust mode

Press and hold EENTER

BT pairing mode

Mode

DAUDIO

SELECT/REC

OUT

DMENU

DTONE

CONTROL

EENTER

MPROGRAM

selector

Default

to Audio select mode to GUI menu mode

to Sound adjust

mode

—

Select a sound field

programs (page 40)

Audio select

to default mode to GUI menu mode

to Sound adjust

mode

—

Select an audio input

jack (page 37)

Rec out

to Audio select mode to GUI menu mode

to Sound adjust

mode

—

Select a recording

source (page 47)

GUI menu

to Audio select mode to default mode —

Confirm the

selection in the GUI

menu (page 79)

Menu up/down

Sound adjust

to Audio select mode to GUI menu mode

Select a parameter

for adjustment

(page 47)

—

Adjust parameters

(page 47)

BT pairing*

to Audio select mode

(the pairing process

continues)

to GUI menu mode

(the pairing process

continues)

—

to default mode (the

pairing process

continues)

Select a sound field

program

Note

GLOSSARY

140 En

■ Audio and video synchronization

(lip sync)

Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical

term that involves both a problem and a capability of maintaining

audio and video signals synchronized during post-production and

transmission. Whereas the audio and video latency requires

complex end-user adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an

automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows devices

to perform this synchronization automatically and accurately

without user interaction.

■ Bi-amplification connection

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker.

One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker

while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter

section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a

restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each

amplifier with a much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely

to influence the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the

speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high pass

filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes frequencies below a

cutoff and rejects frequencies above the cutoff frequency.

Likewise, the HPF passes frequencies above its cutoff.

■ Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal is

separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the P

B and PR

signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more

faithfully with this system because each of these signals is

independent. The component signal is also called the “color

difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted

from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is

required in order to output component signals.

■ Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, the video signal is

composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color,

brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a

video component transmits these three elements combined.

■ Deep Color

Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays,

up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI

specification. This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other

displays go from millions of colors to billions of colors and

eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions

and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast ratio

can represent many times more shades of gray between black and

white. Also Deep Color increases the number of available colors

within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space.

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you

completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front

channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels,

Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an

additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low

Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is

counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the

surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and

surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby

Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum

volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise

sound orientation generated using digital sound processing

provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism.

With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-

channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.

■ Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from

5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that

derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording.

For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie

sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this

additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and

realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over” and

“fly-around” effects.

■ Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed

for high-definition programming and media including HD

broadcasts, HD DVD, and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory

audio standard for HD DVD and as an optional audio standard for

Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with

discrete channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps,

Dolby Digital Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels

simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for

the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future,

Dolby Digital Plus also remains fully compatible with the

existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate Dolby

Digital.

■ Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast

numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new

technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left

and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right

channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro

Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music

mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and

“Game mode” for game sources.

■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multi-

channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There

are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources,

“Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only)

and “Game mode” for game sources.

Glossary

141 En

Glossary

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to

reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and

right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural),

and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The

surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency

range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes

and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The

Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital

signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume

on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and

directionality.

■ Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology

developed for high-definition disc-based media including HD

DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio standard

for HD DVD and as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc,

this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the

studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience.

Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up

to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.

Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc

players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby TrueHD

also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel

audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby

Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range

control.

■ DSD

Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on

digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD,

signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency

sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and

oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence

with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high

sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that

offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs.

■ DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for

multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-

compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz

sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24”

refers to 24-bit word length.

DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24

master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-motion

video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on

DVD video.

■ DTS Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound track, and

is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the

world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you

can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of

DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces

practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, front left

and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1

(subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit

incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel

reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing

5.1-channel format.

■ DTS Express

DTS Express is an advanced audio technology for the optional

feature on Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD, which offers high-quality,

low bit rate audio optimized for network streaming, and Internet

applications. DTS Express is used for the Secondary Audio

feature of Blu-ray Disc or the Sub Audio feature of HD DVD.

These features deliver audio commentaries (for example, the

additional commentaries made by the director of a film) on

demand by the users via the Internet, etc. DTS Express signals are

mixed down with the main audio stream on the player

component, and the component sends the mixed audio stream to

the AV receivers/amplifiers via digital coaxial, digital optical, or

analog connections.

■ DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an high resolution audio

technology developed for high-definition disc-based media

including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional

audio standard for both HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc, this

technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from

the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience.

Supporting bitrates up to 3.0 Mbps for HD DVD and 6.0 Mbps

for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up

to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.

Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc

players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD High

Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing

multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital

Surround.

■ DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology

developed for high-definition disc-based media including HD

DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio standard

for both HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers

sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a

high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to

18.0 Mbps for HD DVD and up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc,

DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of

24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version

1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/

amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD Master Audio also remains

fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems

that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.

■ HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first

industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video

interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a

set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a

digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-

definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a

single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and

supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to

accommodate future enhancements and requirements.

When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital

Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video

interface that meets the security requirements of content

providers and system operators. For further information on

HDMI, visit the HDMI website at

“http://www.hdmi.org/”.

142 En

Glossary

■ LFE 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency

range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is

counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range

compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels

in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.

■ MP3

One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It

employs the irreversible compression method, which achieves a

high compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible

part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the

data quantity by about 1/11 (128 kbps) while maintaining a

similar audio quality to music CD.

■ MPEG-4 AAC

An MPEG-4 audio standard. As it allows compression of data at a

bit rate lower than that of MPEG-2 AAC, it is used among others

for mobile telephones, portable audio players and other low-

capacity devices requiring high sound quality.

In addition to the above types of devices, MPEG-4 AAC is also

used to distribute contents on the Internet, and as such is

supported by computers, media servers and many other devices.

■ Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6- channel

playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the

full-range channels with higher separation just like digital

discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music

mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.

■ Neural-THX Surround

“Neural-THX” Surround is taking surround sound to the next

level. This revolutionary new technology delivers the rich

envelopment and discrete image detail of surround sound in a

format that is fully compatible with stereo. Neural-THX Surround

reduces the bandwidth needed for broadcasters to deliver true,

multi-channel surround presentations, and enables 7.1-channel

support for gaming and movies. By unmasking the audio details,

typically lost by other playback systems, audiences will

experience the deep ambience and subtle details of movies, music

and games. And with this technology being used by sound

designers during content creation, as well as embedded into

playback devices, Neural-THX Surround promises a listening

experience that is true to the original mix. Neural-THX Surround

has been chosen as the official surround sound broadcast format

for XM Satellite Radio’s “XM HD Surround”, as well as other

leading FM/HD radio stations worldwide. For additional

information, please visit http://www.neuralsurround.com/.

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio

signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any

compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and

DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the

size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for

“Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses

and then modulated for recording.

■ Sampling frequency and number of

quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the

signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency,

while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into

a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range

of rates that can be played back is determined based on the

sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound

level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In

principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range

of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number

of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be

reproduced.

■ SRS CS II (SRS Circle Surround II™)

SRS CS II (SRS Circle Surround II) is a high-performance

6.1 channel matrix surround sound decoding system. It is the

next-generation of the original SRS Circle Surround technology,

incorporating powerful industry-first features including the dialog

clarity enhancement technology and added cinema-like bass to

the front channels and subwoofer.

■ S-video signal

With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally

transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y

signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance

through the S-video cable. Using the

S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and

allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images.

■ WAV

Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of

recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. It

does not specify the compression (coding) method so a desired

compression method can be used with it. By default, it is

compatible with the PCM method (no compression) and some

compression methods including the ADPCM method.

■ WMA

An audio compression method developed by Microsoft

Corporation. It employs the irreversible compression method,

which achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data

of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of

compressing the data quantity by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while

maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD.

■ “x.v.Color”

A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a

more extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression

of colors that could not be expressed before. While remaining

compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color”

expands the color space and can thus produce more vivid, natural

images. It is particularly effective for still pictures and computer

graphics.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION

143 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ Elements of a sound field

What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument

are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In

addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable

us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size

and shape of the room in which we are sitting.

There are two distinct types of sound reflections that

combine to make up the sound field in addition to the

direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s

instrument.

Early reflections

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms

to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one

surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling).

Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.

Reverberations

These are caused by reflections from more than one

surface (for example, from the walls, and/or the ceiling) so

numerous that they merge together to form a continuous

sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the

clarity of the direct sound.

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent

reverberations taken together help us to determine the

subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this

information that the digital sound field processor

reproduces in order to create sound fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and

subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you

would be able to create your own listening environment.

The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a

concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any

size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is

exactly what Yamaha has done with the digital sound field

processor.

■ CINEMA DSP

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were

originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect

is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for

acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room

size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can

differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in

the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured

data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP provides the audiovisual

experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your

own home by using the Yamaha original sound field

technology combined with various digital audio systems.

■ CINEMA DSP 3D

The actually measured sound field data contain the

information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA

DSP 3D feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate

height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate

and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening

room.

■ SILENT CINEMA

Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect

DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for

headphones have been set for each sound field so that

accurate representations of all the sound field programs

can be enjoyed on headphones.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm

that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects

even without any surround speakers by using virtual

surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual

CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that

does not include a center speaker.

■ Compressed Music Enhancer

The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit

enhances your listening experience by regenerating the

missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result,

flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency

fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-

frequency bass is compensated, providing improved

performance of the overall sound system.

Sound field program information

PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION

144 En

This unit employs Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic

Optimizer (YPAO) technology to optimize the frequency

characteristics of its parametric equalizer to match your

listening environment. YPAO uses a combination of the

following three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor)

to provide highly precise adjustment of the frequency

characteristics.

■ Frequency

This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave

increments between 32 Hz and 16 kHz.

■ Gain

This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB

between –20 and +6 dB.

■ Q factor

The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as

the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the

values 0.5 and 10.

YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your

listening requirements using a combination of the above

three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each

equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit

has 7 equalizer bands for each channel.

The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise

adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2).

This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as

in Figure 1).

Figure 1

Figure 2

Parametric equalizer information

Gain

Frequency

Original frequency

characteristic

Band 1

Frequency

characteristic after

correction

Gain

Frequency

Band 1

Band 2

Frequency

characteristic after

correction

Original frequency

characteristic

SPECIFICATIONS

145 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,

Surround back

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 140 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

[U.S.A., Canada, General, Asia, China, Korea, and Australia models]

Front L/R 8/6/4/2 Ω ....................................... 170/205/265/345 W

• Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA)

[Asia, General, China and Korea models]

1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................ 185 W

• Maximum Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ....................................................... 200 W

• Dynamic Headroom

8 Ω .................................................................................... 0.84 dB

• IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]

Front L/R 1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 145 W

• Damping Factor (IHF)

Front L/R 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................ 150 or more

• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance

PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ

CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ

MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ

• Maximum Input Voltage

PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ................................ 60 mV or more

CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.4 V or more

• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance

OUT (REC) ........................................................... 200 mV/900 Ω

PRE OUT ................................................................... 1.0 V/500 Ω

SUBWOOFER .......................................................... 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUT ............................................. 1.0 V/1.4 kΩ

• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance

CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 Ω) ............................... 150 mV/100 Ω

• Frequency Response

CD to Front L/R, Pure Direct .......... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB

• RIAA Equalization Deviation

PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .......................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

PHONO to OUT (REC)

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ......................................... 0.02% or less

CD, etc. to Front L/R

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 70 W, 8 Ω) ............................... 0.04% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R

[Australia, U.K. and Europe models] .................... 81 dB or more

[Other models] ....................................................... 86 dB or more

CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R .......................... 100 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more

CD, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R .... 60 dB/45 dB or more

• Tone Control (Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer)

BASS Boost/Cut ........................................................ ±6 dB/50 Hz

BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................ 350 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz

TREBLE Turnover Frequency .......................................... 3.5 kHz

• Zone 2/Zone 3 Tone Control

BASS Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz

BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................ 450 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/10 kHz

TREBLE Turnover Frequency .......................................... 2.0 kHz

• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back, Presence: Small)

................................................................................... 12 dB/oct.

L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ........................................................ 24 dB/oct.

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Format [MONITOR OUT] (Wall Paper)

[U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] ............ NTSC/PAL

[U.K., Europe, Australia, Asia and China models]

................................................................................... PAL/NTSC

• Video Format (Video Conversion)

..........................................................................................NTSC/PAL

• Signal Level

Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

S-video ................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 or 0.3 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)

Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)

• Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)

............................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more

• Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off)

.................................................................................... 60 dB or more

• Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT]

Component (Video Conversion Off)

............................................................. 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB

• Video Format [ZONE OUT] (Gray Back)

[U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] .................... NTSC

[U.K., Europe, Australia, Asia and China models] ................ PAL

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Asia and General models] ........ 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz

[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)

Mono/Stereo ........................................ 2.0/25 µV (17.3/39.2 dBf)

• Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ....................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)

• Selectivity (400 kHz) .............................................................. 70 dB

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo .................................................................... 0.2/0.3%

• Stereo Separation (1 kHz)

Stereo .....................................................................................42 dB

• Frequency Response

Stereo .............................................. 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB

• Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω

Specifications

146 En

Specifications

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz

[Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz

[Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz

• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[General and Asia models]

....................................... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

[China model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA

[Other models] ................................................................... 500 W

• Standby Power Consumption

[General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ...................... 0.33 W or less

[Other models] ......................................................... 0.1 W or less

• Maximum Power Consumption [General model]

6ch, 10% THD ................................................................. 1100 W

•AC Outlets

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum)

[Asia and General models]..................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)

[China model] ...................................... 2 (Total 100 W maximum)

[Australia model] ......................................... 1 (100 W maximum)

[U.K. model] ...................................... 1 (100 W/0.4 A maximum)

[Europe model] ......................... 2 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum)

• Dimensions (W x H x D) ............................. 435 x 181 x 438.5 mm

(17-1/8 x 7-1/8 x 17-1/4 in)

• Weight

[China model] .............................................. 19.0 kg (41 lbs 14 oz)

[Other models] ............................................... 17.4 kg (38 lbs 6 oz)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

(U.S.A. model only)

There is a HOT SURFACE label attached to the top surface of

this unit. This label is required to be attached to a product of

which the temperature of the top cover may rise 40°C or more

during operation (ambient temperature: 25°C).

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE

Responsible Party: Yamaha Electronics Corporation, U.S.A.

Address: 6660 Orangethorpe Avenue

Buena Park, CA 90620

Telephone: 714-522-9105

Fax: 714-670-0108

Type of Equipment: AV Receiver

Model Name: RX-V3900

• This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

• Operation is subject to the following conditions:

– This device may not cause harmful interference.

– This device must accept any interference received including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

See the “Troubleshooting” section at the end of this manual if

interference to radio reception is suspected.

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your

equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or

distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is

often undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group

recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

147 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ Numerics

2ch Stereo, sound field program .......... 45

3D indicator ......................................... 27

5.1-channel speaker connection ........... 13

5.1-channel speaker layout .................. 10

6.1-channel speaker connection ........... 13

6.1-channel speaker layout .................. 10

7.1-channel speaker connection ........... 12

7.1-channel speaker layout .................. 10

7ch Enhancer, sound field program ..... 45

7ch Stereo, sound field program .......... 45

■ A

AC OUTLET(S) .................................. 25

AC power cable connection ................. 25

Action Game, sound field program ...... 43

Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio

subscription ...................................... 59

Activating XM Satellite Radio ............ 54

ADAPTIVE DRC indicator ................. 27

Adaptive DRC, GUI menu ................... 89

Adaptive DSP effect level,

GUI menu ........................................ 89

Adaptive DSP Level, GUI menu ......... 89

Adaptive dynamic range control,

GUI menu ........................................ 89

Advanced automatic setup ................... 33

Advanced setup .................................. 121

Advanced sound configuration ............ 74

Adventure, sound field program .......... 44

All Channel Search mode,

Sirius Satellite Radio ....................... 60

All Channel Search mode,

XM Radio ........................................ 54

AM antenna connection ....................... 24

AM tuner, toubleshooting .................. 128

AM tuning ............................................ 48

AM tuning operation ............................ 48

AMP, operation mode selector ............ 29

Analog ` Analog, GUI menu ............... 93

Analog ` HDMI, GUI menu ................ 93

Analog Resolution,

input video information ................... 39

Analog-to-analog video conversion,

GUI menu ........................................ 93

ANTENNA terminals ............................ 9

Aspect, GUI menu ............................... 94

Audio and video synchronization,

GUI menu ........................................ 92

Audio input jack selection ................... 37

Audio input jack selection,

GUI menu ........................................ 85

AUDIO jacks ....................................... 15

Audio jacks .......................................... 15

Audio Output, GUI menu .................... 95

AUDIO SELECT ................................. 37

Audio Select, GUI menu ................ 85, 99

Audio signal flow ................................. 17

Audio signals, HDMI ........................... 16

Auto Bypass, GUI menu ...................... 92

Automatic audio delay adjustment,

GUI menu .........................................92

Automatic setup, toubleshooting ........136

Automatic station preset,

FM/AM tuning .................................49

■ B

Back ground video, GUI menu ............86

Banana plug connection .......................14

Bass Out, GUI menu ............................88

Bass, GUI menu ...................................92

BGV, GUI menu ..................................86

BI-AMP, advanced setup ...................122

Bi-amplification connections ...............14

Bi-amplifier mode, advanced setup ....122

Bitrate, input audio information ...........38

Bluetooth component playback ............64

Bluetooth connection, GUI menu ........87

Bluetooth pairing, GUI menu ...............86

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver

connection ........................................22

Bluetooth, troubleshooting .................135

Blu-ray Disc player connection ............20

■ C

Category Search mode,

Sirius Satellite Radio ........................60

Category Search mode, XM Radio ......54

CD player connection ...........................21

CD recorder connection .......................21

Cellar Club, sound field program .........42

Center Image, decoder parameter ........84

CENTER jack .......................................22

Center Level, sound field parameter .... 83

CENTER PRE OUT jack .....................21

Center speaker ......................................11

Center speaker, GUI menu ...................87

Center Width, decoder parameter ........84

Center, GUI menu ................................87

Chamber, sound field program .............42

Channel Mute, GUI menu ....................93

Channel, input audio information ........38

Church in Freiburg,

sound field program .........................42

CINEMA DSP 3D mode ......................46

CINEMA DSP indicator ......................27

CLASSICAL, sound field program ......41

Clearing configurations,

remote control ................................115

Clearing preset channel,

Sirius Satellite Radio ........................61

Clearing preset channels, XM Radio ...56

Clearing preset stations,

FM/AM tuning .................................50

COAXIAL jacks ...................................15

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ..............15

Compressed Music Enhancer mode .....45

Configuration, GUI menu ..............87, 95

Connect, GUI menu .............................87

Connecting AC power cable ................25

Connecting AM antenna ...................... 24

Connecting banana plug ...................... 14

Connecting Bluetooth receiver ............ 22

Connecting Blu-ray Disc player .......... 20

Connecting CD player ......................... 21

Connecting CD recorder ...................... 21

Connecting DVD player ...................... 20

Connecting DVD recorder ................... 20

Connecting FM antenna ...................... 24

Connecting HD DVD player ............... 20

Connecting iPod universal dock .......... 22

Connecting MD recorder ..................... 21

Connecting power cable ...................... 25

Connecting projector ........................... 18

Connecting set-top box ........................ 20

Connecting SiriusConnect tuner .......... 58

Connecting speaker cable .................... 14

Connecting speakers ............................ 12

Connecting turntable ........................... 21

Connecting TV monitor ....................... 18

Connecting VCR ................................. 21

Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home

Dock ................................................ 53

Connecting YBA-10 ............................ 22

Connecting YDS-11 ............................ 22

Connecting Zone 2/3 components ..... 117

Connections ........................................... 9

Control Monitor, GUI menu ................ 95

Control, GUI menu .............................. 92

Controlling iPod .................................. 67

Controlling other components,

remote control ............................... 107

Controlling TV, remote control ......... 106

Controlling Zone 2/3 ......................... 119

Cross Over, GUI menu ........................ 88

CSII Cinema, decoder ......................... 74

CSII indicator ...................................... 27

CSII Music, decoder ............................ 74

■ D

Decoder descriptions ........................... 74

Decoder indicators ............................... 27

Decoder Mode, GUI menu ............ 85, 99

Decoder selection ................................ 74

Decoder Type,

sound field parameter ...................... 81

Default Gateway, GUI menu ............... 95

Device Over, HDMI error message ..... 39

DHCP, GUI menu ............................... 95

Dialogue Lift, sound field parameter ... 80

Dialogue, input audio information ...... 38

DIGITAL INPUT jacks ......................... 9

DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks ..................... 9

Dimension, decoder parameter ............ 84

Dimmer, GUI menu ............................. 98

Direct frequency tuning,

FM/AM tuning ................................ 48

Direct number access mode,

Sirius Satellite Radio ....................... 60

Index

148 En

Direct number access mode,

XM Radio ........................................ 55

Direct, sound field parameter ............... 83

Display information,

Sirius Satellite Radio ....................... 63

Display language setting ...................... 26

Display Set, GUI menu ........................ 98

Display settings, GUI menu ................. 98

Display window, remote control .......... 28

Displaying information, HD Radio ...... 52

Displaying information, XM radio ...... 56

Displaying input source information

38, 40

Distance, automatic setup .................... 32

Distance, GUI menu ............................ 88

DNS Server (P), GUI menu ................. 96

DNS Server (S), GUI menu ................. 96

Drama, sound field program ................ 44

DSP indicators ..................................... 27

DSP Level, sound field parameter ....... 80

DVD player connection ....................... 20

DVD recorder connection .................... 20

Dynamic Range, GUI menu ................. 90

■ E

Effect sound level,

sound field parameter ...................... 80

ENHANCER indicator ........................ 27

ENHANCER, sound field program ..... 45

ENTERTAIN, sound field program ..... 43

Equalizing, automatic setup ................. 32

EXTD Surround, GUI menu ................ 99

External amplifier connection .............. 21

■ F

F.PRNS L Level,

sound field parameter ...................... 83

F.PRNS R Level,

sound field parameter ...................... 83

FIRM UPDATE, advanced setup ...... 123

Flag1/Flag2,

input audio information ................... 38

FM antenna connection ........................ 24

FM tuner, toubleshooting ................... 128

FM tuning ............................................ 48

FM tuning operation ............................ 48

FOCUS, decoder parameter ................. 84

Format, input audio information .......... 38

Front channel output jacks. .................. 21

Front Input, GUI menu ........................ 86

FRONT L/R jacks ................................ 22

Front left and right channels input

jacks, GUI menu .............................. 86

Front left/right speaker ......................... 11

Front panel display message scroll,

GUI menu ........................................ 98

Front panel door ................................... 29

FRONT PRE OUT jacks ...................... 21

Front presence speakers, GUI menu .... 88

Front Presence, GUI menu ................... 88

Front speakers, GUI menu ................... 87

Front, GUI menu .................................. 87

■ G

GUI menu operation .............................79

GUI menu tree ......................................76

GUI screen position, GUI menu ..........99

■ H

Hall in Amsterdam,

sound field program .........................42

Hall in Munich, sound field program ... 41

Hall in Vienna, sound field program ....41

HD DVD player connection ................. 20

HD Radio ............................................. 51

HD Radio, toubleshooting ..................128

HDCP Error, HDMI error message ......39

HDMI ` HDMI, GUI menu .................94

HDMI aspect ratio, GUI menu ............. 94

HDMI automatic lip sync mode,

GUI mode ........................................92

HDMI cable plug .................................16

HDMI error message ............................ 39

HDMI Error,

input video information ................... 39

HDMI IN jack select, GUI menu .........95

HDMI indicator ....................................27

HDMI information ...............................16

HDMI jack ........................................... 16

HDMI monitor check,

advanced setup ...............................123

HDMI OUT jack select, GUI menu .....95

HDMI OUT jack selection ...................37

HDMI Resolution,

input video information ................... 39

HDMI signal ........................................16

HDMI signal,

input video information ................... 39

HDMI video signal processing,

GUI menu ........................................94

HDMI video signal resolution,

GUI menu ........................................94

HDMI, GUI menu ................................ 94

HDMI, troubleshooting ...................... 128

Headphones indicator ........................... 27

Headphones using ................................ 38

■ I

I/O Assignment, GUI menu .................98

ID1/ID2 indicator, remote control .......28

INFORMATION ................................ 144

Information display, HD Radio ............ 52

Information display, remote control ..... 28

Information display, XM radio ............56

Infrared window, remote control ......... 28

Init. Delay, sound field parameter ........81

Initial Set, GUI menu ...........................99

Initial Volume, GUI menu ...................90

INITIALIZE, advanced setup ............122

Input channel indicators ....................... 28

Input Channels, GUI menu ..................86

Input Level, GUI menu ......................100

Input Rename, GUI menu .................... 98

Input Select, GUI menu .......................85

Input signal indicators .......................... 27

Input source indicators .........................27

Input source information display ...38, 40

Input/output assignment, GUI menu ....98

IP Address, GUI menu .........................95

iPod charge on the standby mode,

GUI menu .........................................99

iPod menu tree ......................................66

iPod playback .......................................66

iPod universal dock connection ............22

iPod, GUI menu ....................................99

iPod, troubleshooting ..........................135

iTunes tagging, HD radio .....................51

iTunes Tagging, toubleshooting .........129

■ L

LANGUAGE, advanced setup ...........123

Language, advanced setup ..................123

Language, GUI menu .........................100

Level, automatic setup ..........................32

Level, GUI menu ..................................89

Level, music enhancer parameter .........84

LFE Level, GUI menu ..........................90

Lipsync, GUI menu ..............................92

LIVE/CLUB, sound field program .......42

Liveness, sound field parameter ...........82

Loading system settings .....................103

Loading the system settings ...............103

Low-frequency effect level,

GUI menu .........................................90

■ M

MAC address filter, advanced setup ...122

MAC Address, GUI menu ....................96

MAC FILTER, advanced setup ..........122

Macro programming, remote control .113

Manual audio delay adjustment,

GUI menu .........................................92

Manual station preset,

FM/AM tuning .................................49

Manual Test, GUI menu .....................100

Max Volume, GUI menu ......................90

MCX-2000 content playback ...............70

MD recorder connection .......................21

Media Access Control) address,

GUI menu .........................................96

Menu browsing indicator ......................28

Menu tree, iPod ....................................66

Menu tree, network ...............................68

Menu tree, USB ....................................68

MONITOR CHECK,

advanced setup ...............................123

Monitor Info., GUI menu .....................95

Monitor information, GUI menu ..........95

Mono Movie, sound field program .......44

MOVIE, sound field program ..............44

Multi CH Assign, GUI menu ...............86

MULTI CH INPUT jacks .......................9

Multi channel assignment,

GUI menu .........................................86

Multi Measure, automatic setup ...........31

Multi Zone, GUI menu .........................96

Multi-channel input component

selection ............................................37

Multi-channel sources with

headphones .......................................45

Index

149 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

Multiple point measurement,

automatic setup ................................ 31

Multi-zone configuration ................... 117

Music Content menu ............................ 65

Music Content, GUI menu ................... 87

Music Video, sound field program ...... 43

Muting audio output ............................. 38

Muting Type, GUI menu ..................... 90

■ N

Neo:6 Cinema, decoder ........................ 74

Neo:6 Music, decoder .......................... 74

Network connection ............................. 23

Network Standby, GUI menu .............. 96

Network, GUI menu ............................ 95

Network, toubleshooting .................... 133

neural indicator .................................... 27

NRL-THX Music, decoder .................. 74

NRL-THX, decoder ............................. 74

■ O

Operation mode selector,

remote control .................................. 29

OPTICAL jacks ................................... 15

Optimizing speaker setting .................. 30

Option, GUI menu ............................... 97

Out Of Resolution,

HDMI error message ....................... 39

■ P

Pairing with Bluetooth component ...... 64

Pairing, GUI menu ............................... 86

Panorama, decoder parameter .............. 84

Parameter initialization,

advanced setup ............................... 122

Parametric EQ, GUI menu ................... 90

Parametric equalizer data copy,

GUI menu ........................................ 90

Parametric equalizer information ....... 144

Parametric equalizer type select,

GUI menu ........................................ 91

Parametric equalizer, GUI menu ......... 90

Parental Lock, GUI menu .................... 86

Parental Lock, Sirius Satellite Radio ... 62

PC server content playback .................. 70

PEQ Data Copy, GUI menu ................. 90

PEQ Select, GUI menu ........................ 91

PHONES jack ...................................... 38

Placing speakers ................................... 10

Play information screen,

iPod playback .................................. 67

Play information screen,

USB content ..................................... 69

Playback screen display time,

GUI menu ........................................ 98

Playback Screen, GUI menu ................ 98

Playback style, iPod ............................. 67

Playback, Bluetooth component .......... 64

PLII Game, decoder ............................. 74

PLII Movie, decoder ............................ 74

PLII Music, decoder ............................ 74

PLIIx Game, decoder ........................... 74

PLIIx Movie, decoder .......................... 74

PLIIx Music, decoder .......................... 74

Position, GUI menu ..............................99

Power cable connection ........................25

PRE OUT jacks ......................................9

Presence left / right speaker .................11

Presence speaker indicators ..................28

Preset channel clear, XM Radio ...........56

Preset channel setting,

Sirius Satellite Radio ........................61

Preset channel setting, XM Radio ........55

PRESET indicator ................................27

Preset Search mode,

Sirius Satellite Radio ........................60

Preset Search mode, XM Radio ...........55

Preset stations, FM/AM tuner ..............49

Primary DNS server, GUI menu ..........96

Pro Logic, decoder ...............................74

Processing, GUI menu .........................94

Prog. Re-Processing, GUI menu ..........94

Program selection, HD Radio ..............51

Programming other remote controls ...111

Progressive re-processing,

GUI menu .........................................94

Projector connection .............................18

PURE DIRECT mode ..........................47

Pure Direct, GUI menu ........................93

Pure hi-fi sound listening .....................47

■ R

Rear panel ...............................................9

Recalling a preset station,

FM/AM tuning .................................50

Recital/Opera, sound field program .....43

RECOV./BACKUP, advanced setup .122

Recovery and backup of the system

settings,

advanced setup ...............................122

Reloading automatic setup

parameter ..........................................34

REMOTE CON AMP,

advanced setup ...............................121

Remote control ...................................106

Remote control code setting ...............109

Remote control customization ............108

Remote control ID setting,

advanced setup ...............................121

Remote control using ...........................28

Remote control, installing batteries ........4

Remote control, troubleshooting ........132

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks ......................22

REMOTE SENSOR,

advanced setup ...............................121

Remote sensor, advanced setup ..........121

Repeat, iPod playback style .................67

Resetting system .................................138

Resolution, GUI menu .........................94

Rev. Delay, sound field parameter .......83

Rev. Level, sound field parameter .......83

Rev. Time, sound field parameter ........82

Reviewing automatic setup

parameter ..........................................34

Rhapsody® service ..............................71

Roleplaying Game,

sound field program .........................43

Room Size, sound field parameter .......81

RS-232C STANDBY,

advanced setup .............................. 121

■ S

S VIDEO jacks .................................... 15

Sampling, input audio information ...... 38

Saving system settings ....................... 101

SB. Init. Delay,

sound field parameter ...................... 81

SB. Liveness, sound field parameter ... 82

SB. Room Size,

sound field parameter ...................... 81

Sci-Fi, sound field program ................. 44

Scroll, GUI menu ................................. 98

Secondary DNS server, GUI menu ..... 96

Selecting audio input jacks .................. 37

Selecting decoder ................................. 74

Selecting multi-channel input

component ....................................... 37

Setting preset channels, XM Radio ..... 55

Setting remote control ID,

remote control ID setting ............... 121

Set-top box connection ........................ 20

Setup, GUI menu ................................. 87

Short Message, GUI menu .................. 98

Shortcut button,

Network content playback ............... 72

Shortcut button,

USB content playback ..................... 72

Shuffle, iPod playback style ................ 67

Signal flow ........................................... 17

SIGNAL INFO .............................. 38, 40

SILENT CINEMA ............................... 45

SILENT CINEMA indicator ............... 27

Simple Remote Mode,

iPod playback .................................. 67

Simplified remote control .................. 116

Sirius ID diaplay .................................. 59

SIRIUS PIN, advanced setup ............ 122

SIRIUS Satellite Radio operation ........ 59

SIRIUS Satellite Radio Parental Lock

code number reset,

advanced setup .............................. 122

SIRIUS Satellite Radio parental lock,

GUI menu ........................................ 86

SIRIUS Satellite Radio subscription

activation ......................................... 59

SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning ............. 58

SIRIUS Satellite Radio,

troubleshooting .............................. 131

SiriusConnect tuner connection ........... 58

Size, automatic setup ........................... 32

SLEEP indicator .................................. 28

Sleep timer ........................................... 39

Sound field parameter .......................... 81

Sound field program information ...... 143

Sound field programs .......................... 40

Sound field programs with

headphones ...................................... 45

Sound field programs without

surround speaker ............................. 45

Sound, GUI menu ................................ 90

Source name change,

remote control ............................... 112

Index

150 En

SOURCE, operation mode selector ..... 29

Speaker cable connection ..................... 14

Speaker configurations, GUI menu ..... 87

Speaker connection .............................. 12

Speaker distance, automatic setup ....... 32

Speaker distance, GUI menu ............... 88

Speaker equalizing, automatic setup .... 32

SPEAKER IMP., advanced setup ...... 121

Speaker impedance setting ................... 26

Speaker impedance, advanced setup

... 121

Speaker level adjustment ..................... 47

Speaker level, automatic setup ............. 32

Speaker level, GUI menu ..................... 89

Speaker placement ............................... 10

Speaker setting oprimization ............... 30

Speaker size, automatic setup .............. 32

Speaker terminals ................................... 9

Speaker wiring, automatic setup .......... 31

Speaker, GUI menu .............................. 87

Specifications ..................................... 145

Spectacle, sound field program ............ 44

Sports, sound field program ................. 43

Standard, sound field program ............. 44

Standby Charge, GUI menu ................. 99

Standby mode ...................................... 26

Standby Through, GUI menu ............... 94

Station Search, GUI menu ................... 86

Status, GUI menu ................................. 96

Stereo playback .................................... 45

STEREO, sound field program ............ 45

Stereo/Surround, GUI menu ................ 80

Straight Enhancer,

sound field program ......................... 45

STRAIGHT mode ................................ 46

Subnet Mask, GUI menu ..................... 95

Subwoofer ............................................ 11

SUBWOOFER jack ............................. 22

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack ............ 22

Subwoofer, GUI menu ......................... 88

Supplied accessories .............................. 3

SUR. DECODE,

sound field program ......................... 45

Sur. Init.Delay,

sound field parameter ...................... 81

Sur. Liveness, sound field parameter ... 82

Sur. Room Size,

sound field parameter ...................... 81

Sur.Back L Level,

sound field parameter ...................... 83

Sur.Back R Level,

sound field parameter ...................... 83

SUR.BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT

jacks ................................................. 22

Surround back left/right speaker .......... 11

Surround back left/right speakers,

GUI menu ........................................ 88

Surround back speaker ......................... 11

Surround Back, GUI menu .................. 88

Surround Decode,

sound field program ......................... 45

Surround decoder mode ....................... 45

Surround L Level,

sound field parameter ...................... 83

SURROUND L/R jacks ....................... 22

Surround left / right speaker ................. 11

Surround left/right speakers,

GUI menu ........................................87

SURROUND PRE OUT jacks ............. 21

Surround R Level,

sound field parameter ....................... 83

Surround, GUI menu ............................87

System ID, GUI menu .......................... 96

System Memory ................................. 101

System reset ....................................... 138

System settings ................................... 101

System, GUI menu ............................... 96

■ T

Target Zone, GUI menu ..................... 100

The Bottom Line,

sound field program .........................42

The Roxy Theatre,

sound field program .........................42

Tonal quality adjustment ...................... 47

Tone Control, GUI menu ..................... 92

Treble, GUI menu ................................92

Trigger Mode, GUI menu ..................100

Trigger Output, GUI menu .................100

Troubleshooting .................................124

TruBass, decoder parameter .................84

Tuner frequency step,

advanced setup ...............................122

TUNER FRQ STEP,

advanced setup ...............................122

Tuner indicators ...................................28

Turning off ........................................... 26

Turning on ............................................ 26

Turntable connection ............................ 21

TV FORMAT, advanced setup ..........123

TV format, advanced setup ................123

TV monitor connection ........................ 18

TV, operation mode selector ................29

■ U

Unit, GUI menu ....................................88

Unprocessed input source listening ......46

USB content playback ..........................68

USB device that can be used ................ 69

USB storage device connection ...........23

USB, toubleshooting .......................... 133

■ V

VCR connection ...................................21

VERSION, advanced setup ................123

Vertical dialogue position,

sound field parameter ....................... 80

VIDEO AUX jacks .............................. 24

Video conversion for analog-to-analog,

GUI menu ........................................93

VIDEO jacks ........................................15

Video jacks ...........................................15

Video signal flow ................................. 17

Video signals, HDMI ........................... 16

Video, GUI menu ................................. 93

Village Vanguard,

sound field program .........................42

Virtual CINEMA DSP .........................45

VIRTUAL indicator ............................. 27

VOLTAGE SELECTOR ........................4

VOLUME level indicator .....................28

Volume Trim, GUI menu .....................85

Volume, GUI menu ..............................89

■ W

Wake on RS-232C access,

advanced setup ...............................121

Wall Paper, GUI menu .........................99

Warehouse Loft,

sound field program .........................42

Web browser controlling ....................105

Web Control Center ............................105

Wiring, automatic setup .......................31

■ X

XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock

connection ........................................53

XM Satellite Radio activation ..............54

XM Satellite Radio operations .............54

XM Satellite Radio tuning ....................53

XM Satellite Radio,

troubleshooting ...............................130

■ Y

YBA-10 connection ..............................22

YDS-11 connection ..............................22

YPAO ...................................................30

YPAO indicator ....................................27

■ Z

Zone 2/3 component connection ........117

Zone 2/3 control .................................119

Zone indicators, remote control ............28

Zone on-screen display, GUI menu ......97

Zone OSD, GUI menu ..........................97

ZONE OUT jacks ...................................9

Zone Rename, GUI menu .....................97

Zone SP Assign, GUI menu .................96

Zone speaker assignment,

GUI menu .........................................96

Zone2 Balance, GUI menu ...................97

Zone2 Initial Vol., GUI menu ..............97

Zone2 Max Vol., GUI menu ................97

Zone2 Muting Type, GUI menu ...........97

Zone2 Set, GUI menu ...........................96

Zone2 Volume, GUI menu ...................96

ZONE2/ZONE3 indicators ...................28

Zone3 Balance, GUI menu ...................97

Zone3 Initial Vol., GUI menu ..............97

Zone3 Max Vol., GUI menu ................97

Zone3 Muting Type, GUI menu ...........97

Zone3 Set, GUI menu ...........................96

Zone3 Tone Control, GUI menu ..........97

Zone3 Volume, GUI menu ...................96

“AMASTER ON/OFF” or

“3DVD” (example) indicates the

name of the parts on the front panel

or the remote control. Refer to the

attached sheet or the pages at the

end of this manual for the

information about each position of

the parts.

■ Front panel

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

INFO

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MULTI ZONE

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDI O

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO

PHONES

BAND

CATEGORYPRESET/TUNING/CH MONO

STEREO/

MODE

MEMORY

STRAIGHT

MENUREC OUT

AUDIO SELECT/

CONTROL

TONE

ENTER

ON/OFF

USB

INFO

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MULTI ZONE

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO

PHONES

BAND

CATEGORYPRESET/TUNING/CH MONO

STEREO/

MODE

MEMORY

STRAIGHT

MENUREC OUT

AUDIO SELECT/

CONTROL

TONE

ENTER

USB

CBLA

OMN

KJHFEDGI

APPENDIX

■ Remote control

ZONE

SETUP ID

MACRO

MODE

DVD CD

V-AUX DOCKMULTI

PHONO

POWER

TV DVR VCR

SIRIUSTUNER

HD DVD

CD-R

USB

NET

CBL

SAT

SRCH MODE

BAND

TITLE

STATUS

MEMORY

SUBMENU

RETURN

PLAY INFO

DISPLAY

MUTE

SYSTEM MEMORY

3D DSP

STANDBY

POWER

SELECT

VOLUME

PRESET/CH

ENTER

CAT.

A-E

PRG SELECTTAG

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

ENT

AUDIO SEL

AUDIO

SLEEP

MUTE

INPUT

9 0

HDMI OUT

LEVEL

TV CH

INFO

TV VOL

EXTD SUR.

REC

AMP

SOURCE

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

HDMI OUT

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

SR t

iii

Sound output in each sound field program

*1 / / / : OFF

*2 / / / : ON or discrete 6.1/7.1-channel audio signals are input.

Front left speaker Surround left speaker Surround back right speaker

Center speaker Surround right speaker Presence left speaker

Front right speaker Surround back left speaker Presence right speaker

Speaker from which sound is being output

Speaker from which no sound is being output

SBR

C SR PL

SBL

Speaker settings

7-channel 5-channel

SBRSBL

SL SR

SBRSBL

SL SR

SBRSBL

SL SR

SBRSBL

SL SR

Speaker settings

7-channel 5-channel

SBRSBL

SL SR

SBRSBL

SL SR

SBRSBL

SL SR

SBRSBL

SL SR

PL x

neural

PL x

neural

Program 3D

Input audio source

2-channel

(monaural)

2-channel (stereo)

5.1-channel*

6.1/7.1-channel*

CLASSICAL

Hall in Munich

Hall in Vienna

Hall in Amsterdam

Church in Freiburg

Chamber

LIVE/CLUB

Village Vanguard

Warehouse Loft

Cellar Club

The Roxy Theatre

The Bottom Line

1122

OFF

1124

APPENDIX

ENTERTAINMENT

Sports

Action Game

Roleplaying Game

Music Video

Recital/Opera

MOVIE

Standard

Spectacle

Sci-Fi

Adventure

Drama

2222

OFF

7424

MOVIE

Mono Movie

2222

OFF

3224

STEREO

2ch Stereo

––

5555

STEREO

7ch Stereo

MUSIC ENHANCER

7ch Enhancer

––

4444

SUR.DECODE

Surround Decoder

(Pro Logic)

(PLII Movie)

(PLII Game)

––

6774

SUR.DECODE

Surround Decoder

(PLII Music)

––

8774

SUR.DECODE

Surround Decoder

(PLIIx Movie)

(PLIIx Game)

(Neo:6 Cinema)

(CSII Cinema)

(NRL-THX)

––

6474

SUR.DECODE

Surround Decoder

(PLIIx Music)

(Neo:6 Music)

(CSII Music)

(NRL-THX Music)

––

8474

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

MUSIC ENHANCER

Straight Enhancer

––

5574

Program 3D

Input audio source

2-channel

(monaural)

2-channel (stereo)

5.1-channel*

6.1/7.1-channel*

List of remote control codes

ACURA 00101

ADDISON 01201, 01601,

08401

ADMIRAL 01301, 02201,

05801

ADVENT 09601

AGB 06801

AIKO 01201

AKAI 00101, 00301,

02901, 04601,

06801, 08901,

10501

AKURA 03701

ALBA 00101, 00401,

04801, 08501

AMERICA ACTION

02701

AMPRO 09401

AMSTRAD 00101, 00401,

02501, 04801,

05101, 05301,

06801

ANAM 00101, 02701,

03401

ANAM NATIONAL

03401, 08301

ANITECH 00101

AOC 00101, 00301,

00901, 01201,

01301, 01601,

02601, 02701,

05601

APEX DIGITAL09301, 09701,

09901

ASA 01401

AUDIOSONIC 00401, 01701

AWA 00101

BANG & OLUFSEN

07201

BASIC 00101

BAUR 00401, 04601,

06701

BAYSONIC 02701

BEAUMARK 02601

BEKO 04701, 06201,

09001, 09101

BELL & HOWELL

02001

BEON 00401

BLAUPUNKT 02801

BLUE SKY 08501, 11401

BONDSTEC 03301

BRADFORD 02701

BRANDT 01701, 04201

BROKSONIC 03101, 05801

BUSH 00101, 00101,

00401, 04801,

04901, 08501,

11401

BYDESIGN 14301, 14401,

14501, 14601

CANDLE 00301

CARNIVALE 00301

CARVER 00801, 02401

CASCADE 00101

CATHAY 00401

CCE 00401

CELEBRITY 00001

CELERA 09701

CENTURION 00401

CGE 03301

CHANGHONG 09701

CHING TAI 00101, 01201

CHUN YUN 00001, 00101,

01201, 02701

CHUNG HSIN 00701, 01601,

02701

CIMLINE 00101

CINERAL 01201, 05601

CITIZEN 00301, 00901,

01201

CLARION 02701

CLARIVOX 00401

CLATRONIC 03301, 04701

CONDOR 04101, 04701

CONRAC 10301

CONTEC 00101, 02701

CRAIG 02701

CROSLEY 00801

CROWN 00101, 00401,

02701, 04701,

05201

CTC 03301

CURTIS MATHES

00301, 00501,

00801, 00901,

01301, 01801,

02001, 02301,

05601, 08901,

11801, 12201

CXC 02701

DAEWOO 00101, 00301,

00401, 01201,

01601, 02001,

02401, 02601,

02701, 04901,

05601, 07901,

08201, 13101

DANSAI 00401

DAYTON 00101

DE GRAAF 02901, 06901

DECCA 00401, 06801

DENON 01801

DIGATRON 00401

DIXI 00101, 00401

DUMONT 00201

DWIN 09201, 10101

ECE 00401

ELBE 03501

ELECTROBAND

00001

ELIN 00401, 06901

ELITE 04101

ELTA 00101

EMERSON 02001, 02601,

02701, 03101,

04601, 05801,

07901

ENVISION 00301, 10601

EPSON 11001

ERRES 00401

ETHER 00101, 00301

ETRON 00101

EUROPHON 06801

FERGUSON 00401, 01001,

01701, 03201,

03801, 04201,

07101

FIDELITY 04601

FINLANDIA 02901, 04401

FINLUX 00401, 01401,

01501, 04401,

06801

FIRSTAR 00101, 03101

FIRSTLINE 00101, 03301,

08501

FISHER 01401, 02001,

02901, 04701

FLINT 05701

FORMENTI 00401, 04101

FORTRESS 01301

FRONTECH 02201, 03301,

03701

FUJITSU 08701, 10401

FUNAI 02501, 02701,

03701

FUTURETECH 02701

GATEWAY 13301, 13401

GE 00301, 00501,

00601, 01201,

02601, 02701,

05601, 07101,

11801, 12201,

12601

GEC 00401, 06801

GELOSO 00101

GENEXXA 02201

GIBRALTER 00201, 00301

GOLDSTAR 00301, 00401,

01701, 02001,

02601, 05001

GOODMANS 00401, 04801,

04901, 08201

GOREMJE 04701

GRADIENTE 00701, 02401

GRAETZ 02201, 04601

GRANADA 00401, 02901,

04301, 06801

GRANDIN 07701

GRUNDIG 00401, 02801,

06301, 07001,

07401

GRUNPY 02701

HALLMARK 02601

HANKOOK 00301, 02601,

02701

HANSEATIC 00401, 04101,

04601, 05201,

07001

HANTAREX 06801

HARMAN/KARDON

00801

HARVARD 02701

HAVERMY 01301

HCM 00101, 05101

HELLO KITTY 05601

HINARI 00101, 00401

HISAWA 05701

HITACHI 00101, 00301,

01201, 01501,

01701, 01801,

02201, 02601,

03001, 04501,

06101, 06901,

07301, 11701,

12101

HUA TUN 00101

HUANYU 04901

HYPSON 00401, 03701

ICE 03701, 04801

IMPERIAL 03301, 04701,

05201

INDIANA 00401

INFINITY 00801

INGELEN 02201

INNO HIT 06801

INNOVA 00401

INTEQ 00201

INTERFUNK 00401, 02201,

03301, 04601,

06701

INTERVISION 00401, 03701,

05001

ITS 04801

ITT 02201, 04601,

06901

JBL 00801

JCB 00001

JEAN 00101, 00601,

01201, 02101,

03101

JENSEN 09601

JVC 00701, 04801,

05801, 08401,

08701

KAISUI 00101

KAPSCH 02201

KARCHER 07701

KATHREIN 07001

KEC 02701

KENDO 00401

KENWOOD 00301

KNEISSEL 03501, 05401

KOLIN 00701, 01601,

02701

KORPEL 00401

KOYODA 00101

KTV 00301, 02701

L&S ELECTRONIC

10301

LEYCO 00401, 03701

LG 00301, 00401,

00901, 01601,

02601, 09001

LIESENK & TTER

00401

LOEWE 06701

LUXOR 04501, 04601

LXI 00501, 00801,

02001, 02101,

02601

M ELECTRONIC

00101, 00401,

01401, 01501,

01701, 02201,

03801, 04401,

04901, 06001

MAGNADYNE 03301, 06801

MAGNAFON 06801

MAGNAVOX 00301, 00801,

12001, 12601

MANESTH 03701, 04101

MARANTZ 00301, 00401,

00801, 07001

MARK 00401

MATSUI 00101, 00401,

02901, 04801,

06301, 06801

MATSUSHITA 03401, 08301

MEDIATOR 00401

APPENDIX

MEDION 08501, 10301,

11401

MEGATRON 01801, 02601

MEMOREX 00101, 01901,

02001, 02601,

03401, 05801,

11401

METZ 05501

MGA 00301, 01901,

02601

MICROMAXX 10301

MICROSTAR 10301

MIDLAND 00201, 00501,

00601

MINERVA 06301

MINOKA 05101

MITSUBISHI 00301, 01301,

01601, 01901,

02001, 02601,

02701, 03101,

03401, 06701,

11201, 11901

MIVAR 03901, 04001,

06801, 07601

MOTOROLA 01301

MTC 00301, 00901,

06701

MULTITECH 00101, 02701

MYRYAD 07001

NAD 02101, 02601,

04601, 11301

NEC 00101, 00301,

00601, 02001,

02101, 02401,

02601, 05701,

06501, 13201

NECKERMANN

00401, 07001

NEI 00401

NETSAT 00401

NEWAVE 00101, 01201,

01301, 02601

NIKKAI 00401, 03701

NIKKO 00301, 01201,

02601

NOKIA 04601, 05901,

06001, 06901,

08101

NORCENT 09301, 10801

NORDMENDE 01701, 03801,

07101

NTC 01201

OCEANIC 02201, 04601

ONWA 02701, 05301

OPTIMUS 02001, 02301,

03401, 08301

OPTONICA 01301

ORION 00401, 03101,

04101, 05801,

06801

OSAKI 03701, 05101

OTTO VERSAND

00401, 04101,

06701, 07001

PALLADIUM 04701, 05201

PANAMA 03701

PANASONIC 00401, 00601,

00801, 02201,

03401, 08301,

12401

PATHE CINEMA

03201, 04101

PAUSA 00101

PENNEY 00301, 00501,

00601, 00901,

02101, 02601,

12201

PERDIO 04101

PHILCO 00301, 00401,

00801, 01801,

02601, 02701,

03301, 05801,

13101

PHILIPS 00001, 00301,

00401, 00601,

00801, 01201,

01601, 02601,

04901, 07001,

08801, 12601

PHONOLA 00401

PILOT 00301

PIONEER 01701, 02201,

02301, 03801,

08601, 09501,

11301

PORTLAND 01201

PRANDONI-PRINCE

06801

PRIMA 09601

PRISM 00601

PROFEX 00101, 04601

PROSCAN 00501

PROTECH 00101, 00401,

03301, 03701,

05201, 08501

PROTON 00101, 00301,

02601

PULSAR 00201

QUASAR 00601, 03401,

08301

QUELLE 00401, 01401,

04601, 06701

RADIOLA 00401

RADIOMARELLI

06801

RADIOSHACK 00301, 00501,

02001, 02601,

02701

RCA 00001, 00301,

00501, 01101,

01201, 02601,

08601, 11501,

11801, 13901,

12201, 12501,

12601, 12801

REALISTIC 00301, 02001,

02601, 02701

REDIFFUSION 04601

REOC 09001

REVOX 00401

REX 02201, 03501,

03701

RFT 05201

R-LINE 00401

ROADSTAR 00101, 03701,

05201

RUNCO 00201, 00301,

06501, 07501

SABA 01701, 02201,

03801, 04201

SACCS 03201

SAGEM 07701

SAISHO 00101, 03701,

06801

SALORA 02201, 04601,

06901

SAMBERS 06801

SAMPO 00101, 00301,

01201, 01301,

02001, 02501,

02601, 08301,

13301

SAMSUNG 00101, 00301,

00401, 00901,

01101, 01201,

02001, 02601,

03701, 04701,

07001, 07401,

07801, 08901,

09801, 10501,

10701

SANSEI 05601

SANSUI 05801

SANYO 01401, 02001,

02701, 02901,

04301, 10201

SBR 00401

SCHAUB LORENZ

04601

SCHNEIDER 00401, 03301,

04801, 08501

SCOTCH 02601

SCOTT 02601, 02701,

03101

SEARS 00501, 00801,

02001, 02101,

02501, 02601

SEG 03701, 08501

SEI 06801

SELECO 02201, 03501

SEMIVOX 02701

SEMP 02101

SHARP 00301, 01301,

08301

SHEN YING 00101, 01201

SHENG CHIA 00101, 01301,

03101

SIAREM 06801

SIEMENS 00401, 02801

SINUDYNE 06801

SKANTIC 04501

SKY 00401

SKYGIANT 02701

SKYWORTH 00401

SOLAVOX 02201

SONITRON 02901

SONOKO 00101, 00401

SONOLOR 02201, 02901

SONTEC 00401

SONY 00001, 08301,

11101, 11601,

12701, 12901

SOUNDESIGN 02601, 02701

SOUNDWAVE 00401, 05201

SOWA 00601, 00901,

01201, 02101,

02601

SQUAREVIEW 02501

SSS 02701

STANDARD 00101

STARLITE 02701

STERN 02201, 03501

SUPREME 00001

SYLVANIA 00301, 00801,

02501

SYMPHONIC 02501, 02701

SYNCO 00001, 00901,

01201, 01301,

02601, 05601

SYSLINE 00401

T + A 05501

TACICO 00101, 01201,

02601

TAI YI 00101

TANDY 01301, 02201

TASHIKO 01201, 08301

TATUNG 00101, 00401,

00601, 00801,

00901, 02001,

02101, 06801

TCM 10301

TEAC 00101, 00401,

03701, 05101,

05201, 05701,

08501, 11401

TEC 03301

TECHNEMA 04101

TECHNICS 00601, 03401,

08301

TECHWOOD 00601

TECO 00101, 00601,

01201, 01301,

02601, 03701,

08401

TEKNIKA 00801, 00901,

01201, 01901,

02701

TELEFUNKEN 01701, 03601,

04201, 08001,

08901

TELEMEISTER04101

TELETECH 00101

TENSAI 04101

TERA 00301

THOMSON 01701, 03801,

07101, 08001,

12501

THORN 00401, 01401,

04601, 06701

TMK 02601

TNCI 00201

TOSHIBA 00901, 02001,

02101, 06601,

07801, 08301,

10901, 12101,

12301, 13001,

13201

TRIUMPH 06801

TUNTEX 00101, 00301,

01201

TVS 05801

UHER 04101

UNIVERSUM 00401, 01401,

01501, 03701,

04401, 04701,

06401

VECTOR RESEARCH

00301

VESTEL 00401

VICTOR 00701, 03401,

08301, 08401

VIDEOSAT 03301

VIDIKRON 00801

VIDTECH 02601

VIEWSONIC 13301

VISION 04101

VOXSON 02201

WALTHAM 04501

WARDS 00301, 00801,

02601, 11301

WATSON 00401, 04101

WAYCON 02101

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

00401, 04101,

05801, 07901

vii

YAMAHA 00301, 01801,

08301, 10001,

11001, 13501,

13601, 13701,

13801, 14001,

14101, 14201

YAPSHE 03401

YOKO 00401, 03701

ZENITH 00201, 01201,

02601, 05801

VCR

ADMIRAL 01102

ADVENTURA 00002

AIKO 02102

AIWA 00002, 00402,

02202, 02602,

02702

AKAI 00602, 02302

AKIBA 01402

ALBA 01402, 02102,

02302, 02702

AMERICA ACTION

02102

AMERICAN HIGH

00302

AMSTRAD 00002

ANAM 00402, 01902,

02002, 02102,

02902

ANAM NATIONAL

01902, 04502

ANITECH 01402

ASA 00402, 01502

ASHA 02002

ASUKA 00402

AUDIOVOX 00402, 02102

BAIRD 00002, 00602,

01602

BASIC LINE 01402, 02102

BEAUMARK 02002

BELL & HOWELL

01602

BLAUPUNKT 01902

BRANDT 02402

BRANDT ELECTRONIC

00602

BROKSONIC 01702, 02602,

04402

BUSH 01402, 02102,

02702

CALIX 00402

CANON 00302

CARVER 01502

CCE 01402, 02102

CGE 00002

CIMLINE 01402

CINERAL 02102

CITIZEN 00402, 02102,

04302

COLT 01402

COMBITECH 02702

CRAIG 00402, 01002,

01402, 02002

CROWN 01402, 02102

CURTIS MATHES

00302, 00602,

01202, 03702

CYBERNEX 02002

CYRUS 01502

DAEWOO 00902, 01602,

02102, 03402,

04302

DANSAI 01402

DE GRAAF 00702

DECCA 00002, 01502

DENON 00702

DUAL 00602

DUMONT 00002, 01502,

01602

DYNATECH 00002

ELCATECH 01402

ELECTROHOME

00402

ELECTROPHONIC

00402

EMEREX 00102

EMERSON 00002, 00302,

00402, 00802,

00902, 01702,

02002, 02102,

04302, 04402

ESC 02002, 02102

FERGUSON 00602, 02402

FIDELITY 00002

FINLANDIA 01502, 01602

FINLUX 00002, 00702,

01502, 01602

FIRSTLINE 00402, 00802,

00902, 01402

FISHER 01002, 01602

FUJI 00202, 00302

FUJITSU 00002, 00902

FUNAI 00002

GARRARD 00002

GE 00302, 01202,

02002, 03502,

03702, 03802

GEC 01502

GENERAL 00902

GO VIDEO 02802

GOLDHAND 01402

GOLDSTAR 00402, 01802,

02902, 04202

GOODMANS 00002, 00402,

01402, 02102

GRADIENTE 00002

GRAETZ 00602, 01602,

02002

GRANADA 01502, 01602

GRANDIN 00002, 00402,

01402

GRUNDIG 01402, 01502,

01902, 02502

HANSEATIC 00402

HARLEY DAVIDSON

00002

HARMAN/KARDON

01502

HARWOOD 01402

HCM 01402

HINARI 01402, 02002,

02702

HI-Q 01002

HITACHI 00002, 00402,

00602, 00702,

02002

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS

00702

HYPSON 01402

IMPERIAL 00002

INTERFUNK 01502

ITT 00602, 01602,

02002

ITV 00402, 02102

JENSEN 00602

JVC 00602, 00902,

01302

KAISUI 01402

KEC 00402, 02102

KENWOOD 00602, 01302

KLH 01402

KODAK 00302, 00402

KOLIN 00602, 00802

KORPEL 01402

LENCO 02102

LEYCO 01402

LG 00402, 00702,

00902, 02902

LLOYD’S 00002

LOEWE 00402, 01502,

04502

LOGIK 01402, 02002

LUXOR 00802, 01102,

01602

LXI 00402

M ELECTRONIC

00002

MAGNASONIC04302

MAGNAVOX 00002, 00302,

00502, 01502

MAGNIN 02002

MANESTH 00902, 01402

MARANTZ 00302, 01502

MARTA 00402

MATSUI 02602, 02702

MATSUSHITA 00302

MEDION 02602

MEI 00302

MEMOREX 00002, 00302,

00402, 00502,

01002, 01102,

01602, 02002,

02202, 02602,

04202

MEMPHIS 01402

METZ 00402, 02502,

04502

MGA 00802, 02002

MGN TECHNOLOGY

02002

MINOLTA 00702

MITSUBISHI 00602, 00802,

01302, 01502,

03502

MOTOROLA 00302, 01102

MTC 00002, 02002

MULTITECH 00002, 01402

MURPHY 00002

MYRYAD 01502

NAD 01602

NATIONAL 01902

NEC 00302, 00402,

00602, 01102,

01302, 01602

NECKERMANN

01502

NESCO 01402

NEWAVE 00402

NIKKO 00402

NOBLEX 02002

NOKIA 00602, 01602,

02002

NORDMENDE 00602, 02402

OCEANIC 00002, 00602

OKANO 02302, 02602

OLYMPUS 00302, 01902

OPTIMUS 00402, 01102,

01602, 02802

ORION 01702, 02602,

02702, 04402

OSAKI 00002, 00402,

01402

OTTO VERSAND

01502

PALLADIUM 00402, 00602,

01402

PANASONIC 00302, 01802,

01902, 03102,

03702, 04502

PATHE MARCONI

00602

PENNEY 00302, 00402,

00702, 02002,

03702, 04202

PENTAX 00702

PERDIO 00002

PHILCO 00302

PHILIPS 00302, 01502,

03202, 03902,

04002

PHONOLA 01502

PILOT 00402

PIONEER 00702, 01302,

01502

POLK AUDIO 01502

PROFITRONIC 02002

PROLINE 00002

PROSCAN 01202, 03802

PROTEC 01402

PULSAR 00502

PYE 01502

QUASAR 00302, 03702

QUELLE 01502

RADIOLA 01502

RADIOSHACK 00002

RADIX 00402

RANDEX 00402

RCA 00302, 00702,

01202, 02002,

03502, 03702,

03802

REALISTIC 00002, 00302,

00402, 01002,

01102, 01602

REOC 02602

REPLAYTV 03002, 03102

REX 00602

ROADSTAR 00402, 01402,

02002, 02102

RUNCO 00502

SABA 00602, 02402

SALORA 00802

SAMPO 00402, 01102

SAMSUNG 00902, 02002,

02802

SANKY 00502, 01102

SANSUI 00002, 00602,

01302, 04402

SANYO 01002, 01602,

02002

SAVILLE 02702

SBR 01502

SCHAUB LORENZ

00002, 00602,

01602

SCHNEIDER 00002, 01402,

01502

SCOTT 00802, 00902,

01702

SEARS 00002, 00302,

00402, 00702,

01002, 01602,

04202

SEG 02002

SEI 01502

SELECO 00602

SEMP 00902

viii

APPENDIX

SHARP 01102, 03502

SHINTOM 01402, 01602

SIEMENS 00402, 01502,

01602

SILVA 00402

SINGER 00902, 01402

SINUDYNE 01502

SONIC BLUE 03002, 03102

SONTEC 00402

SONY 00002, 00102,

00202, 00302,

03302, 04102

STS 00702

SUNKAI 02602

SUNSTAR 00002

SUNTRONIC 00002

SYLVANIA 00002, 00302,

00802, 01502

SYMPHONIC 00002

TANDY 00002, 01602

TASHIKO 00002, 00402

TATUNG 00002, 00602,

00902, 01302,

01502

TEAC 00002, 00602,

02102, 02202,

03402

TECHNICS 00302, 01902

TECO 00302, 00402,

00602, 01102

TEKNIKA 00002, 00302,

00402

TELEAVIA 00602

TELEFUNKEN 00602, 02402

TENOSAL 01402

TENSAI 00002

THOMAS 00002

THOMSON 00602, 01202,

01302, 02402

THORN 00602, 01602

TIVO 03202, 03302

TMK 02002

TOSHIBA 00602, 00802,

00902, 01302,

01502, 03602

TOTEVISION 00402, 02002

UHER 02002

UNITECH 02002

UNIVERSUM 00002, 00402,

01502, 02002

VECTOR 00902

VICTOR 00602, 01302

VIDEO CONCEPTS

00902

VIDEOMAGIC 00402

VIDEOSONIC 02002

VILLAIN 00002

WARDS 00002, 00302,

00702, 01002,

01102, 01202,

01402, 01502,

02002

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

01402

XR-1000 00002, 00302,

01402

YAMAHA 00602

YAMISHI 01402

YOKAN 01402

YOKO 02002

ZENITH 00002, 00202,

00502, 04402

CABLE

ABC 00103, 00203

AMERICAST 02003

BELL SOUTH 02003

BIRMINGHAM CABLE

COMMUNICATIONS

00803

BRITISH TELECOM

00103

DAERYUNG 00203, 01403,

01903

DIRECTOR 01303

FILMNET 01203

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

00103, 00803,

01303, 01703

GOLDSTAR 00503

HAMLIN 00303, 00703

JERROLD 00103, 00803,

01303, 01703

LG 00503

MEMOREX 00003

MNET 01203

MOTOROLA 00803, 01303,

01703, 02303

NOOS 01803

PACE 00603, 02203

PANASONIC 00003, 00203,

00403

PARAGON 00003

PHILIPS 01003, 01103

PIONEER 00503, 01603,

01903

PULSAR 00003

PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX

00103

QUASAR 00003

RCA 02403, 02503

REGAL 00703, 00903

RUNCO 00003

SAGEM 01803

SAMSUNG 00003, 00503

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

00203, 01403,

01903

SONY 02103

STARCOM 00103

SUPERCABLE 00803

TELE+1 01203

TORX 00103

TOSHIBA 00003

TRANS PX 00803

TS 00103

UNITED CABLE

00103

ZENITH 00003, 01503,

02003

SATELLITE TUNER

@SAT 06404

ABSAT 00104

ALBA 01404

ALPHASTAR 02504

AMSTRAD 03004

ASTON 00304, 05004

ASTRO 00604

ATSAT 06404

AVALON 01304

BLAUPUNKT 00604

BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING

03004, 05204

CANAL DIGITAL

03104

CANAL SATELLITE

03104

CANAL+ 03104

CHAPARRAL 00804

CITYCOM 05304

CONNEXIONS 01304

CROSSDIGITAL

04604

CYRUS 00704

DAERYUNG 01304

DAEWOO 06304

D-BOX 02104, 04904

DIGENIUS 01104

DIRECTV 00904, 01204,

01504, 01704,

02204, 02304,

02804, 04104,

04604, 05104,

06904

DISH NETWORK SYSTEM

02604, 03704

DISHPRO 02604, 03704

DISTRATEL 00004

DMT 04004

DNT 00704, 01304

DREAM MULTIMEDIA

05804

ECHOSTAR 00504, 01304,

01604, 02604,

03104, 03604,

03704, 04304

ENGEL 03804

EXPRESSVU 02604

FINLUX 01404

FOXTEL 07004, 07104,

07204, 07304,

07404

FRACARRO 03604

FTE 03404

FUBA 01304

GALAXIS 03404, 04704

GE 01504

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

03504

GOI 02604

GOLD BOX 03104

GRUNDIG 00604, 03004

HIRSCHMANN00604, 01304

HITACHI 01404, 02804

HTS 02604

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM

02304, 05104,

06904

HUMAX 03404, 05304

INVIDEO 03604

JVC 02604

KATHREIN 00104, 00604,

00704, 01004,

01804, 05604

KREISELMEYER

00604

LABGEAR 06304

LOGIX 03804

LORENZEN 01104

MAGNAVOX 02004, 02204

MANHATTAN 01404, 03804,

04204

MARANTZ 00704

MEDIASAT 03104

MEMOREX 02204

METRONIC 00004

MITSUBISHI 02304

MOTOROLA 03504

MYRYAD 00704

NEXT LEVEL 03504

NOKIA 01404, 02104,

02404, 04904,

05704, 06804

OCTALTV 03704

ORBITECH 04504

PACE 01404, 03004,

05204, 06604

PANASONIC 00904, 01904,

03004, 06504

PANDA 01404

PAYSAT 02204

PHILIPS 00204, 00704,

01404, 02004,

02204, 02304,

03104, 04104,

05104, 06904

PIONEER 03104

PROMAX 01404

PROSCAN 01204, 01504

RADIOLA 00704

RADIOSHACK 03504

RADIX 01304

RCA 00404, 01204,

01504, 03204

RFT 00704

SABRE 01404

SAGEM 02904, 04804,

05904

SAMSUNG 03804, 04604,

06004, 06204

SAT CONTROL06404

SATSTATION 04204

SCHWAIGER 04704

SEEMANN 01304

SIEMENS 00604

SKY 03004, 03304,

05204

SM ELECTRONIC

05404

SONY 01704, 03004,

06704

STAR CHOICE 03504

STRONG 06404

TANTEC 01404

TECHNISAT 04404, 04504

TELESTAR 04504

THOMSON 01404, 03104,

03904, 06104

TOPFIELD 05504

TOSHIBA 02304, 02704,

06904

TPS 02904, 05904

ULTIMATETV 01204, 01704

UNIDEN 02004, 02204

UNIVERSUM 00604

VENTANA 00704

WISI 00604, 01304,

01404

XSAT 00104

ZEHNDER 04004

ZENITH 03304

CD PLAYER

AIWA 00605

ARCAM 00605

AUDIO RESEARCH

00605

AUDIO TON 00605

AUDIOLAB 00605

AUDIOMECA 00605

CAIRN 00605

CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS

00205

CARVER 00605, 00805

CYRUS 00605

DENON 01005

DKK 00005

DMX ELECTRONICS

00605

DYNAMIC BASS

00805

EMERSON 00905

FISHER 00805

GENEXXA 00305, 00905

GOODMANS 00905

GRUNDIG 00605

HARMAN/KARDON

00605, 00705

HITACHI 00305

JVC 00505

KENWOOD 00105, 00405

KRELL 00605

LINN 00605

LXI 00905

MAGNAVOX 00605, 00905

MARANTZ 00205, 00605

MATSUI 00605

MCS 00205

MEMOREX 00905

MERIDIAN 00605

MICROMEGA 00605

MIRO 00005

MISSION 00605

MYRYAD 00605

NAD 00005

NAIM 00605

NSM 00605

OPTIMUS 00005, 00305,

00405, 00805,

00905

PANASONIC 00205

PHILIPS 00605

PIONEER 00305, 00905

POLK AUDIO 00605

PROTON 00605

QED 00605

QUAD 00605

QUASAR 00205

RCA 00305, 00805,

00905

REALISTIC 00805

REVOX 00605

ROTEL 00605

SAE 00605

SANSUI 00605, 00905

SANYO 00805

SCOTT 00905

SEARS 00905

SHARP 00405

SIMAUDIO 00605

SONIC FRONTIERS

00605

SONY 00005

SYMPHONIC 00905

TAG MCLAREN

00605

TANDY 00305

TECHNICS 00205

THORENS 00605

THULE 00605

UNIVERSUM 00605

VICTOR 00505

WARDS 00605

YAMAHA 01105, 01205

CD RECORDER

KENWOOD 01305

MARANTZ 01305

PHILIPS 01305

YAMAHA 01405

BLU-RAY/DVD PLAYER

ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS

02806

ALBA 02606

AMSTRAD 02306

APEX DIGITAL02106, 02606,

03006, 03506,

03606, 03706,

04106

BLAUPINKT 02606

BLUE PARADE01006

BUSH 02306

CENTREX 02106

CLATRONIC 03406

CYBERHOME 02406

DAEWOO 03206, 03306

DANSAI 03206

DECCA 03206

DENON 00006

DIAMOND 03106

DIGITREX 02106

DVD2000 00206

EMERSON 01206

ENTERPRISE 01206

FISHER 02006

GE 00306, 02606

GO VIDEO 02506

GOLDSTAR 02906, 04906

GRADIENTE 01806

GREENHILL 02606

GRUNDIG 00706

HITACHI 01106, 01507,

01906

HITEKER 02106

JVC 00906, 01306

KENWOOD 00006, 00606

KLH 02606

KOSS 01806

LG 02906

LIMIT 03106

MAGNAVOX 00106, 02206

MARANTZ 00706

MEMOREX 03806

MICO 02706

MICROSOFT 00306

MINTEK 02606

MITSUBISHI 00206

MUSTEK 02806

NESA 02606

ONKYO 00106, 04806

ORITRON 01806

PALSONIC 02106

PANASONIC 00006, 00007,

00107, 00207,

01606, 04206,

05006

PHILIPS 00106, 00706,

00807, 01706,

03906, 05206

PIONEER 00406, 00407,

00507, 00607,

01006, 01506,

01606, 05306

POLK AUDIO 00706

PROSCAN 00306

QWESTAR 01806

RCA 00306, 01006,

02606, 04806

ROTEL 01306

SAMSUNG 01106, 04506

SANYO 02006

SHARP 01207, 01307,

01406

SHERWOOD 03206

SHINSONIC 00506

SLIM ART 03306

SM ELECTRONIC

02806

SONY 00506, 00907,

01007, 01107,

04006, 05106

SYLVANIA 02206

TATUNG 03206

TEAC 01006, 02606

TECHNICS 00006

THETA DIGITAL

01006

THOMSON 00306

TOSHIBA 00106, 00307,

04606, 04806,

05406

URBAN CONCEPTS

00106

VICTOR 01407

XBOX 00306

YAMAHA 00006, 00706,

00707, 00806,

04306, 04406,

04706

ZENITH 00106, 01206,

02906

ZEUS 03306

LD PLAYER

CARVER 00108

DENON 00008

MARANTZ 00108

MITSUBISHI 00008

NAD 00008

NAGSMI 00008

OPTIMUS 00008

PHILIPS 00108

PIONEER 00008

SALORA 00108

SONY 00208

TELEFUNKEN 00008

YAMAHA 00308

MD RECORDER

KENWOOD 00109

ONKYO 00309

SHARP 00209

SONY 00009

YAMAHA 00409, 00509,

00609

RECEIVER (TUNER)

ADC 00710

AIWA 00410, 01210,

03610, 03910,

04410

ALCO 03810

ANAM 04310

APEX DIGITAL01810

AUDIOLAB 01510

AUDIOTRONIC01510

AUDIOVOX 03810

BOSE 01610

CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS

03310

CAPETRONIC 00710

CARVER 01210, 01510

CENTREX 01810

DENON 03210

FERGUSON 00710

FINE ARTS 01510

GRUNDIG 01510

HARMAN/KARDON

00210, 02610

INTEGRA 00310, 02510

JBL 00210, 02710

JVC 00110, 00710,

03410, 04110

KENWOOD 01010, 03010

KLH 03810, 04010

MAGNAVOX 00710, 01210,

01510, 02110

MARANTZ 00010, 01210,

01510, 02410

MCS 00010

MICROMEGA 01510

MUSICMAGIC 01210

MYRYAD 01510

NAD 00610

NORCENT 03710

ONKYO 00310, 00810,

02510

OPTIMUS 00710, 00910

PANASONIC 00010, 02310,

04210, 04710

PHILIPS 01210, 01510,

01910, 02010,

02110, 02210,

02410

PIONEER 00710, 00910,

03510

POLK AUDIO 02410

PROSCAN 01710

QUASAR 00010

RCA 00710, 00910,

01710, 03810,

04310

SABA 00710

SANSUI 01210

SCHNEIDER 00710

SONY 00410, 01110,

01310, 04510,

04610

STEREOPHONICS

00910

SUNFIRE 03010

TEAC 03810

TECHNICS 00010, 02810,

02910, 04210

TELEFUNKEN 00710

THOMSON 01710

THORENS 01510

UHER 00710

VENTURER 03810

VICTOR 00110

WARDS 00410

YAMAHA 00510, 01410,

03110, 04810,

05510, 05610,

05710, 05810,

05910, 06010

YAMAHA (iPOD)

05310

YAMAHA (NET)

05410

YAMAHA (TUNER ID1)

04910

YAMAHA (TUNER ID2)

05010

YAMAHA (XM ID1)

05110

YAMAHA (XM ID2)

05210

APPENDIX

TAPE DECK

AIWA 00111

CARVER 00111

GRUNDIG 00111

HARMAN/KARDON

00111

MAGNAVOX 00111

MARANTZ 00111

MYRYAD 00111

OPTIMUS 00011

PHILIPS 00111

PIONEER 00011

POLK AUDIO 00111

RCA 00011

REVOX 00111

SANSUI 00111

SONY 00211

THORENS 00111

WARDS 00011

YAMAHA 00311, 00411

Information about software

This product uses the following software.

For information (copyright, etc) about each software, read the original sentences stated below.

■ About The Independent JPEG Group's JPEG

software

The Independent JPEG Group's JPEG software

README for release 6b of 27-Mar-1998

This distribution contains the sixth public release of the Independent JPEG Group's free

JPEG software. You are welcome to redistribute this software and to use it for any

purpose, subject to the conditions under LEGAL ISSUES, below.

Serious users of this software (particularly those incorporating it into larger programs)

should contact IJG at jpeg[email protected] to be added to our electronic mailing list.

Mailing list members are notified of updates and have a chance to participate in

technical discussions, etc.

This software is the work of Tom Lane, Philip Gladstone, Jim Boucher, Lee Crocker,

Julian Minguillon, Luis Ortiz, George Phillips, Davide Rossi, Guido Vollbeding, Ge'

Weijers, and other members of the Independent JPEG Group.

IJG is not affiliated with the official ISO JPEG standards committee.

DOCUMENTATION ROADMAP

This file contains the following sections:

OVERVIEW General description of JPEG and the IJG software.

LEGAL ISSUES Copyright, lack of warranty, terms of distribution.

REFERENCES Where to learn more about JPEG.

ARCHIVE LOCATIONS Where to find newer versions of this software.

RELATED SOFTWARE Other stuff you should get.

FILE FORMAT WARS Software *not* to get.

TO DO Plans for future IJG releases.

Other documentation files in the distribution are:

User documentation:

install.doc How to configure and install the IJG software.

usage.doc Usage instructions for cjpeg, djpeg, jpegtran, rdjpgcom,

and wrjpgcom.

*.1 Unix-style man pages for programs (same info as

usage.doc).

wizard.doc Advanced usage instructions for JPEG wizards only.

change.log Version-to-version change highlights.

Programmer and internal documentation:

libjpeg.doc How to use the JPEG library in your own programs.

example.c Sample code for calling the JPEG library.

structure.doc Overview of the JPEG library's internal structure.

filelist.doc Road map of IJG files.

coderules.doc Coding style rules --- please read if you contribute code.

Please read at least the files install.doc and usage.doc. Useful information can also be

found in the JPEG FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) article. See ARCHIVE

LOCATIONS below to find out where to obtain the FAQ article.

If you want to understand how the JPEG code works, we suggest reading one or more of

the REFERENCES, then looking at the documentation files (in roughly the order listed)

before diving into the code.

OVERVIEW

This package contains C software to implement JPEG image compression and

decompression. JPEG (pronounced "jay-peg") is a standardized compression method for

full-color and gray-scale images. JPEG is intended for compressing "real-world" scenes;

line drawings, cartoons and other non-realistic images are not its strong suit. JPEG is

lossy, meaning that the output image is not exactly identical to the input image. Hence

you must not use JPEG if you have to have identical output bits. However, on typical

photographic images, very good compression levels can be obtained with no visible

change, and remarkably high compression levels are possible if you can tolerate a low-

quality image. For more details, see the references, or just experiment with various

compression settings.

This software implements JPEG baseline, extended-sequential, and progressive

compression processes. Provision is made for supporting all variants of these processes,

although some uncommon parameter settings aren't implemented yet. For legal reasons,

we are not distributing code for the arithmetic-coding variants of JPEG; see LEGAL

ISSUES. We have made no provision for supporting the hierarchical or lossless

processes defined in the standard.

We provide a set of library routines for reading and writing JPEG image files, plus two

sample applications "cjpeg" and "djpeg", which use the library to perform conversion

between JPEG and some other popular image file formats. The library is intended to be

reused in other applications.

In order to support file conversion and viewing software, we have included considerable

functionality beyond the bare JPEG coding/decoding capability; for example, the color

quantization modules are not strictly part of JPEG decoding, but they are essential for

output to colormapped file formats or colormapped displays. These extra functions can

be compiled out of the library if not required for a particular application. We have also

included "jpegtran", a utility for lossless transcoding between different JPEG processes,

and "rdjpgcom" and "wrjpgcom", two simple applications for inserting and extracting

textual comments in JFIF files.

The emphasis in designing this software has been on achieving portability and

flexibility, while also making it fast enough to be useful. In particular, the software is not

intended to be read as a tutorial on JPEG. (See the REFERENCES section for

introductory material.) Rather, it is intended to be reliable, portable, industrial-strength

code. We do not claim to have achieved that goal in every aspect of the software, but we

strive for it.

We welcome the use of this software as a component of commercial products. No

royalty is required, but we do ask for an acknowledgement in product documentation, as

described under LEGAL ISSUES.

LEGAL ISSUES

In plain English:

1. We don't promise that this software works. (But if you find any bugs, please let us

know!)

2. You can use this software for whatever you want. You don't have to pay us.

3. You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it in a program, you

must acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that you've used the IJG

code.

In legalese:

The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation, either express or implied, with

respect to this software, its quality, accuracy, merchantability, or fitness for a particular

purpose. This software is provided "AS IS", and you, its user, assume the entire risk as

to its quality and accuracy.

Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software (or

portions thereof) for any purpose, without fee, subject to these conditions:

(1) If any part of the source code for this software is distributed, then this README file

must be included, with this copyright and no-warranty notice unaltered; and any

additions, deletions, or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in

accompanying documentation.

(2) If only executable code is distributed, then the accompanying documentation must

state that "this software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG

Group".

(3) Permission for use of this software is granted only if the user accepts full

responsibility for any undesirable consequences; the authors accept NO LIABILITY

for damages of any kind.

These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the IJG code, not just

to the unmodified library. If you use our work, you ought to acknowledge us.

Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG author's name or company name in

advertising or publicity relating to this software or products derived from it. This

software may be referred to only as "the Independent JPEG Group's software".

We specifically permit and encourage the use of this software as the basis of commercial

products, provided that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the product

vendor.

ansi2knr.c is included in this distribution by permission of L. Peter Deutsch, sole

proprietor of its copyright holder, Aladdin Enterprises of Menlo Park, CA.

ansi2knr.c is NOT covered by the above copyright and conditions, but instead by the

usual distribution terms of the Free Software Foundation; principally, that you must

include source code if you redistribute it. (See the file ansi2knr.c for full details.)

However, since ansi2knr.c is not needed as part of any program generated from the IJG

code, this does not limit you more than the foregoing paragraphs do.

The Unix configuration script "configure" was produced with GNU Autoconf. It is

for its supporting scripts (config.guess, config.sub, ltconfig, ltmain.sh). Another support

script, install-sh, is copyright by M.I.T. but is also freely distributable.

It appears that the arithmetic coding option of the JPEG spec is covered by patents

owned by IBM, AT&T, and Mitsubishi. Hence arithmetic coding cannot legally be used

without obtaining one or more licenses. For this reason, support for arithmetic coding

has been removed from the free JPEG software. (Since arithmetic coding provides only

a marginal gain over the unpatented Huffman mode, it is unlikely that very many

implementations will support it.) So far as we are aware, there are no patent restrictions

on the remaining code.

The IJG distribution formerly included code to read and write GIF files. To avoid

entanglement with the Unisys LZW patent, GIF reading support has been removed

altogether, and the GIF writer has been simplified to produce "uncompressed GIFs".

This technique does not use the LZW algorithm; the resulting GIF files are larger than

usual, but are readable by all standard GIF decoders.

We are required to state that

"The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the Copyright property of CompuServe

Incorporated. GIF(sm) is a Service Mark property of CompuServe Incorporated."

REFERENCES

We highly recommend reading one or more of these references before trying to

understand the innards of the JPEG software.

The best short technical introduction to the JPEG compression algorithm is

Wallace, Gregory K. "The JPEG Still Picture Compression Standard",

Communications of the ACM, April 1991 (vol. 34 no. 4), pp. 30-44.

(Adjacent articles in that issue discuss MPEG motion picture compression, applications

of JPEG, and related topics.) If you don't have the CACM issue handy, a PostScript file

containing a revised version of Wallace's article is available at ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/

jpeg/wallace.ps.gz. The file (actually a preprint for an article that appeared in IEEE

Trans. Consumer Electronics) omits the sample images that appeared in CACM, but it

includes corrections and some added material. Note: the Wallace article is copyright

ACM and IEEE, and it may not be used for commercial purposes.

A somewhat less technical, more leisurely introduction to JPEG can be found in "The

Data Compression Book" by Mark Nelson and Jean-loup Gailly, published by M&T

Books (New York), 2nd ed. 1996, ISBN 1-55851-434-1. This book provides good

explanations and example C code for a multitude of compression methods including

JPEG. It is an excellent source if you are comfortable reading C code but don't know

much about data compression in general. The book's JPEG sample code is far from

industrial-strength, but when you are ready to look at a full implementation, you've got

one here...

The best full description of JPEG is the textbook "JPEG Still Image Data Compression

Standard" by William B. Pennebaker and Joan L. Mitchell, published by Van Nostrand

Reinhold, 1993, ISBN 0-442-01272-1. Price US$59.95, 638 pp.

The book includes the complete text of the ISO JPEG standards (DIS 10918-1 and draft

DIS 10918-2). This is by far the most complete exposition of JPEG in existence, and we

highly recommend it.

The JPEG standard itself is not available electronically; you must order a paper copy

through ISO or ITU. (Unless you feel a need to own a certified official copy, we

recommend buying the Pennebaker and Mitchell book instead; it's much cheaper and

includes a great deal of useful explanatory material.)

In the USA, copies of the standard may be ordered from ANSI Sales at (212)642-4900,

or from Global Engineering Documents at (800) 854-7179. (ANSI doesn't take credit

card orders, but Global does.) It's not cheap: as of 1992, ANSI was charging $95 for Part

1 and $47 for Part 2, plus 7% shipping/handling. The standard is divided into two parts,

Part 1 being the actual specification, while Part 2 covers compliance testing methods.

Part 1 is titled "Digital Compression and Coding of Continuous-tone Still Images, Part

1: Requirements and guidelines" and has document numbers ISO/IEC IS 10918-1, ITU-

T T.81. Part 2 is titled "Digital Compression and Coding of Continuous-tone Still

Images, Part 2: Compliance testing" and has document numbers ISO/IEC IS 10918-2,

ITU-T T.83.

Some extensions to the original JPEG standard are defined in JPEG Part 3, a newer ISO

standard numbered ISO/IEC IS 10918-3 and ITU-T T.84. IJG currently does not support

any Part 3 extensions.

The JPEG standard does not specify all details of an interchangeable file format. For the

omitted details we follow the "JFIF" conventions, revision 1.02. A copy of the JFIF spec

is available from:

Literature Department

C-Cube Microsystems, Inc.

1778 McCarthy Blvd.

Milpitas, CA 95035

phone (408) 944-6300, fax (408) 944-6314

A PostScript version of this document is available by FTP at

ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jfif.ps.gz. There is also a plain text version at

ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jfif.txt.gz, but it is missing the figures.

The TIFF 6.0 file format specification can be obtained by FTP from ftp://ftp.sgi.com/

graphics/tiff/TIFF6.ps.gz. The JPEG incorporation scheme found in the TIFF 6.0 spec

of 3-June-92 has a number of serious problems. IJG does not recommend use of the

TIFF 6.0 design (TIFF Compression tag 6). Instead, we recommend the JPEG design

proposed by TIFF Technical Note #2 (Compression tag 7). Copies of this Note can be

obtained from ftp.sgi.com or from ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/. It is expected that the

next revision of the TIFF spec will replace the 6.0 JPEG design with the Note's design.

Although IJG's own code does not support TIFF/JPEG, the free libtiff library uses our

library to implement TIFF/JPEG per the Note. libtiff is available from

ftp://ftp.sgi.com/graphics/tiff/.

ARCHIVE LOCATIONS

The "official" archive site for this software is ftp.uu.net (Internet address 192.48.96.9).

The most recent released version can always be found there in directory graphics/jpeg.

This particular version will be archived as

ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jpegsrc.v6b.tar.gz. If you don't have direct Internet access,

UUNET's archives are also available via UUCP; contact [email protected] for

information on retrieving files that way.

Numerous Internet sites maintain copies of the UUNET files. However, only ftp.uu.net

is guaranteed to have the latest official version.

You can also obtain this software in DOS-compatible "zip" archive format from the

SimTel archives (ftp://ftp.simtel.net/pub/simtelnet/msdos/graphics/), or on CompuServe

in the Graphics Support forum (GO CIS:GRAPHSUP), library 12 "JPEG Tools". Again,

these versions may sometimes lag behind the ftp.uu.net release.

The JPEG FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) article is a useful source of general

information about JPEG. It is updated constantly and therefore is not included in this

distribution. The FAQ is posted every two weeks to Usenet newsgroups

comp.graphics.misc, news.answers, and other groups. It is available on the World Wide

Web at http://www.faqs.org/faqs/jpeg-faq/ and other news.answers archive sites,

including the official news.answers archive at rtfm.mit.edu: ftp://rtfm.mit.edu/pub/

usenet/news.answers/jpeg-faq/.

If you don't have Web or FTP access, send e-mail to [email protected] with

body

xii

APPENDIX

send usenet/news.answers/jpeg-faq/part1

send usenet/news.answers/jpeg-faq/part2

RELATED SOFTWARE

Numerous viewing and image manipulation programs now support JPEG. (Quite a few

of them use this library to do so.) The JPEG FAQ described above lists some of the more

popular free and shareware viewers, and tells where to obtain them on Internet.

If you are on a Unix machine, we highly recommend Jef Poskanzer's free PBMPLUS

software, which provides many useful operations on PPM-format image files. In

particular, it can convert PPM images to and from a wide range of other formats, thus

making cjpeg/djpeg considerably more useful. The latest version is distributed by the

NetPBM group, and is available from numerous sites, notably ftp://wuarchive.wustl.edu/

graphics/graphics/packages/NetPBM/.

Unfortunately PBMPLUS/NETPBM is not nearly as portable as the IJG software is; you

are likely to have difficulty making it work on any non-Unix machine.

A different free JPEG implementation, written by the PVRG group at Stanford, is

available from ftp://havefun.stanford.edu/pub/jpeg/. This program is designed for

research and experimentation rather than production use; it is slower, harder to use, and

less portable than the IJG code, but it is easier to read and modify. Also, the PVRG code

supports lossless JPEG, which we do not. (On the other hand, it doesn't do progressive

JPEG.)

FILE FORMAT WARS

Some JPEG programs produce files that are not compatible with our library. The root of

the problem is that the ISO JPEG committee failed to specify a concrete file format.

Some vendors "filled in the blanks" on their own, creating proprietary formats that no

one else could read. (For example, none of the early commercial JPEG implementations

for the Macintosh were able to exchange compressed files.)

The file format we have adopted is called JFIF (see REFERENCES). This format has

been agreed to by a number of major commercial JPEG vendors, and it has become the

de facto standard. JFIF is a minimal or "low end" representation. We recommend the use

of TIFF/JPEG (TIFF revision 6.0 as modified by TIFF Technical Note #2) for "high

end" applications that need to record a lot of additional data about an image. TIFF/JPEG

is fairly new and not yet widely supported, unfortunately.

The upcoming JPEG Part 3 standard defines a file format called SPIFF. SPIFF is

interoperable with JFIF, in the sense that most JFIF decoders should be able to read the

most common variant of SPIFF. SPIFF has some technical advantages over JFIF, but its

major claim to fame is simply that it is an official standard rather than an informal one.

At this point it is unclear whether SPIFF will supersede JFIF or whether JFIF will

remain the de-facto standard. IJG intends to support SPIFF once the standard is frozen,

but we have not decided whether it should become our default output format or not. (In

any case, our decoder will remain capable of reading JFIF indefinitely.)

Various proprietary file formats incorporating JPEG compression also exist. We have

little or no sympathy for the existence of these formats. Indeed, one of the original

reasons for developing this free software was to help force convergence on common,

open format standards for JPEG files. Don't use a proprietary file format!

TO DO

The major thrust for v7 will probably be improvement of visual quality. The current

method for scaling the quantization tables is known not to be very good at low Q values.

We also intend to investigate block boundary smoothing, "poor man's variable

quantization", and other means of improving quality-vs-file-size performance without

sacrificing compatibility.

In future versions, we are considering supporting some of the upcoming JPEG Part 3

extensions --- principally, variable quantization and the SPIFF file format.

As always, speeding things up is of great interest.

Please send bug reports, offers of help, etc. to [email protected].

■ About PNG Reference Library

libpng versions 1.2.6, August 15, 2004, through 1.2.29, May 8, 2008, are Copyright (c)

2004, 2006-2008 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same

disclaimer and license as libpng-1.2.5 with the following individual added to the list of

Contributing Authors

Cosmin Truta

libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 - October 3, 2002, are Copyright (c)

2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer

and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following individuals added to the list of

Contributing Authors

Simon-Pierre Cadieux

Eric S. Raymond

Gilles Vollant

and with the following additions to the disclaimer:

There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or

against infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts or the library will

fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. This library is provided with all

faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort

is with the user.

libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c)

1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same

disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, with the following individuals added to the list of

Contributing Authors:

Tom Lane

Glenn Randers-Pehrson

Willem van Schaik

Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88,

with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors:

John Bowler

Kevin Bracey

Sam Bushell

Magnus Holmgren

Greg Roelofs

Tom Tanner

1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.

For the purposes of this copyright and license, “Contributing Authors” is defined as the

following set of individuals:

Andreas Dilger

Dave Martindale

Guy Eric Schalnat

Paul Schmidt

Tim Wegner

The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The Contributing Authors and Group

42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied, including, without limitation, the

warranties of merchantability and of fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors

and Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary,

or consequential damages, which may result from the use of the PNG Reference Library,

even if advised of the possibility of such damage.

Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this source code, or

portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee, subject to the following restrictions:

1. The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented.

2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented

as being the original source.

3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any source or altered

source distribution.

The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically permit, without fee, and

encourage the use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format

in commercial products. If you use this source code in a product, acknowledgment is

not required but would be appreciated.

■ About zlib Library

This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event

will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.

Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including

commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following

restrictions:

1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that

you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an

acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not

required.

2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be

misrepresented as being the original software.

3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.

Jean-loup Gailly Mark Adler

[email protected] [email protected]

If you use the zlib library in a product, we would appreciate *not* receiving lengthy

legal documents to sign. The sources are provided for free but without warranty of any

kind. The library has been entirely written by Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler; it does

not include third-party code.

If you redistribute modified sources, we would appreciate that you include in the file

ChangeLog history information documenting your changes. Please read the FAQ for

more information on the distribution of modified source versions.

Printed in Malaysia WP55260

RX-V3900

AV R e c e i ve r

OWNER’S MANUAL

RX-V3900_U-cv.fm Page 1 Friday, August 8, 2008 3:06 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual.

Les nombres et lettres dans un cercle correspondent à ceux du mode d’emploi.

■ Front panel / Face avant

RX-V3900

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

INFO

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MULTI ZONE

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO

PHONES

BAND

CATEGORYPRESET/TUNING/CH MONO

STEREO/

MODE

MEMORY

STRAIGHT

MENUREC OUT

AUDIO SELECT/

CONTROL

TONE

ENTER

ON/OFF

USB

CB LA KJHFEDGI

POMN

■ Remote control / Boîtier de télécommande

WP55370

Printed in Malaysia

ZONE

SETUP ID

MACRO

MODE

DVD CD

V-AUX DOCKMULTI

PHONO

POWER

TV DVR VCR

SIRIUSTUNER

HD DVD

CD-R

USB

NET

CBL

SAT

SRCH MODE

BAND

TITLE

STATUS

MEMORY

SUBMENU

RETURN

PLAY INFO

DISPLAY

MUTE

SYSTEM MEMORY

3D DSP

STANDBY

POWER

SELECT

VOLUME

PRESET/CH

ENTER

CAT.

A-E

PRG SELECTTAG

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

ENT

AUDIO SEL

AUDIO

SLEEP

MUTE

INPUT

9 0

HDMI OUT

LEVEL

TV CH

INFO

TV VOL

EXTD SUR.

REC

AMP

SOURCE

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

HDMI OUT

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

SR t

Documenttranscriptie

RX-V3900_U-cv.fm Page 1 Friday, August 8, 2008 3:06 PM U RX-V3900 RX-V3900 AV Receiver OWNER’S MANUAL © 2008 Yamaha Corporation All rights reserved. Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI Printed in Malaysia WP55260 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. 10 11 12 13 14 Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Caution-i En Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. Caution: Read this before operating your unit. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cable. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit during a lightning storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. 17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press A MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, the main room, Zone 2 and Zone 3 and then disconnect the AC power plug from the AC wall outlet. 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are: ................................AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz 20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or like. 21 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss. 22 When replacing the batteries, be sure to use batteries of the same type. Danger of explosion may happen if batteries are incorrectly replaced. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet, it is not disconnected from the AC power source even if you turn off this unit by A MASTER ON/OFF. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. Caution-ii En Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s: 5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. iPodTM “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. This receiver supports network connections. “HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. This product is manufactured under license from Neural Audio Corporation and THX Ltd. YAMAHA CORPORATION hereby grants the user a non-exclusive, non-transferable, limited right of use to this product under U.S.A. and foreign patent, patent pending and other technology or trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation and THX Ltd. “Neural Surround”, “Neural Audio”, “Neural” and “NRL” are trademarks and logos owned by Neural Audio Corporation. THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. ©2006 SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. “SIRIUS”, “SiriusConnect”, the SIRIUS dog logo, channel names and logos are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. HD Radio™ Technology Manufactured Under License From iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD Radio logo are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. Rhapsody and the Rhapsody logo are registered trademarks of RealNetworks, Inc. “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. Circle Surround II, Dialog Clarity, TruBass, SRS and the symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. Circle Surround II, Dialog Clarity and TruBass technologies are incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows Media Audio, Windows Media Connect and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft corporation in the United States and/or other countries. x.v.Color™ The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc. Caution-iii En Contents Features ................................................................... 3 Using iPod™ ..........................................................66 iPod menu tree ......................................................... 66 Controlling iPod™................................................... 67 Using USB and network features.........................68 USB and network menu tree.................................... 68 Navigating USB and network menus ...................... 69 Using a USB storage device or a USB portable audio player ......................................................... 69 Using a PC server or Yamaha MCX-2000........................................................... 70 Using the Internet Radio.......................................... 71 Using the Rhapsody® service (U.S.A. model only) ............................................ 71 Using shortcut buttons ............................................. 72 L PREPARATION Connections ............................................................. 9 Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room.................................................... 30 BASIC OPERATION Playback ................................................................ 36 Sound field programs ........................................... 40 Using audio features ............................................. 47 Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 47 Adjusting the tonal quality....................................... 47 Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 47 Selecting the recording source................................. 47 FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 48 GUI menu overview ................................................ 78 GUI menu operations............................................... 79 Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory) ............................................101 Controlling this unit by using the Web browser (Web Control Center) ......................105 Remote control features......................................106 Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components .......................................... 106 Customizing the remote control ............................ 108 Setting the backlight mode of the remote control................................................................ 109 Setting remote control codes ................................. 109 Programming codes from other remote controls ... 111 Changing source names in the display window..... 112 Macro programming features ................................ 113 Clearing configurations ......................................... 115 Simplified remote control ...................................... 116 Using HD Radio™ features (U.S.A. model only)........................................... 51 Using multi-zone configuration..........................117 Selecting HD Radio™ audio programs ................... 51 Using the iTunes Tagging feature............................ 51 Displaying HD Radio™ information....................... 52 Advanced setup....................................................121 XM® Satellite Radio tuning ................................. 53 Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ............... 53 Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 54 XM Satellite Radio operations................................. 54 Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels ...... 55 Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information...... 56 Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner .................... 58 Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ subscription ......................................................... 59 SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations ...................... 59 Setting the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ preset channels .................................................... 61 Setting the Parental Lock......................................... 62 Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ information .......................................................... 63 Using Bluetooth™ components ........................... 64 Music Content menu ............................................ 65 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Troubleshooting...................................................124 Resetting the system............................................138 Operation modes of front panel controls ..........139 Glossary................................................................140 Sound field program information......................143 Parametric equalizer information .....................144 Specifications .......................................................145 Index .....................................................................147 APPENDIX (at the end of this manual) Front panel................................................................i Remote control ....................................................... ii Sound output in each sound field program......... iii List of remote control codes ...................................v Music Content menu operations .............................. 65 1 En English Pairing the Bluetooth™ receiver and your Bluetooth component .......................................... 64 Playback of the Bluetooth™ component ................. 64 Using the advanced setup menu ............................ 121 APPENDIX SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning......................... 58 Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components ... 117 Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3 ................................ 119 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Overview.................................................................. 48 FM/AM tuning operations ....................................... 48 Preset FM/AM stations ............................................ 49 Selecting decoders ................................................... 74 Graphical user interface (GUI) menu .................76 ADVANCED OPERATION Selecting sound field programs ............................... 40 Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode............................... 46 Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 46 Advanced sound configurations...........................74 BASIC OPERATION Basic procedure ....................................................... 36 Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT)...... 37 Selecting the multi-channel input component ......... 37 Selecting the HDMI OUT jack ................................ 37 Using your headphones............................................ 38 Muting the audio output........................................... 38 Displaying the input source information ................. 38 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 39 ADVANCED OPERATION PREPARATION Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 Getting started ........................................................ 4 Quick start guide .................................................... 5 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION What you can do with the GUI menu By configuring the parameters in the GUI menu of this unit, you can adjust a variety of system settings suited for your listening environment. The following is a brief description of some of the useful menus you can configure in the GUI menu. For more detailed information, see “Graphical user interface (GUI) menu” (page 76). Fine adjusting the speaker settings In case speaker settings configured by automatic setup does not match your listening environment, you can configure them manually. Setup → Speaker (page 87) Specifying the muting type In case you do not want to fully mute audio when you receive a call while watching your favorite TV program, you can use this menu to specify the muting level. Setup → Volume → Muting Type (page 90) Specifying the initial volume level By adjusting this parameter, you can automatically control the initial volume level regardless of the recording level of the audio source. Setup → Volume → Initial Volume (page 90) Adjusting the dynamic range The dynamic range is the difference between the minimum and maximum amplitude. The higher the dynamic range, the more accurate the sound reproduction for bitstream signals. You can adjust the dynamic range for speakers and headphones individually. Also, you can use the adaptive dynamic range control feature to adjust the dynamic range automatically in conjunction with the volume level. Setup → Sound → Dynamic Range (page 90) Setup → Volume → Adaptive DRC (page 89) Adjusting the audio and video synchronization Sometimes, depending on your video source component, video is delayed relative to audio due to processing problems. In this case, you need to manually adjust the audio delay to keep it synchronized with the video. If you connect the video source component to this unit using an HDMI connection and your component supports the LIPSYNC feature, you can adjust the audio/video synchronization automatically. Setup → Sound → Lipsync (page 92) Changing input/output assignment In case the initial input/output assignments do not correspond to your needs, you can rearrange them according to your component to be connected to this unit. You can also edit the input name to be displayed in the front panel or in the GUI screen as necessary. Setup → Option → I/O Assignment (page 98) Setup → Option → Input Rename (page 98) 2 En Fixing the volume difference between input sources The sound output level may vary depending on the audio source components connected to this unit. In this case, you can reduce or increase the output level of each input source using this feature. Input Select → (input source) → (submenu) → Volume Trim (page 85) Setting the background video for discrete multichannel input If you want to enjoy video images in combination with discrete multi-channel audio input, configure this setting to specify the video input source. For example, to view DVD video images while listening to the music sources from a multi-format player or an external decoder, set this setting to “DVD”. Input Select → MULTI CH → (submenu) → BGV (page 86) Adjusting the brightness of the front panel display You can make the front panel display darker or brighter by configuring this setting. Setup → Option → Display Set → Front Panel Display → Dimmer (page 98) Turning on or off the short message display Each time you operate this unit using controls on the front panel or remote control keys, this unit displays short messages on the video monitor. If you want to turn off the short message display, select “Off” in this setting (Initial factory setting is “On”). Setup → Option → Display Set → Short Message (page 98) Setting the amount of time to display GUI screen information You can set the amount of time to display playback information in the GUI screen after you perform a certain operation. Setup → Option → Display Set → Playback Screen (page 98) Protecting the setup values After you have configured the sound field program parameters and other system settings, you can use this feature to prevent accidental changes to those setup values. Setup → Option → Memory Guard (page 97) FEATURES Features ◆ Minimum RMS output power (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω) Front: 140 W + 140 W Center: 140 W Surround: 140 W + 140 W Surround back: 140 W + 140 W Various input/output connectors ◆ HDMI (IN x 4, OUT x 2), Component video (IN x 3, OUT x 1), Svideo (IN x 6, OUT x 3), Composite video (IN x 6, OUT x 5), Coaxial digital audio (IN x 3), Optical digital audio (IN x 5, OUT x 2), Analog audio (IN x 10, OUT x 3) ◆ Speaker out (7-channel), Pre out (7-channel), Subwoofer out, Presence out, Zone 2/Zone 3 out ◆ Discrete multi-channel input (6 or 8-channel) Sound field programs ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound fields CINEMA DSP 3D Compressed Music Enhancer mode Virtual CINEMA DSP SILENT CINEMA Digital audio decoders ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus decoder DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio decoder Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS 96/24 decoder Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder DTS NEO:6 decoder Neural-THX Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ◆ SRS Circle Surround II decoder (U.S.A. model only) Radio tuners ◆ FM/AM tuning capability, 40-station preset tuning ◆ HD Radio™ digital broadcast reception capability (U.S.A. model only) ◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock, sold separately) ◆ SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning capability (using SiriusConnect tuner, sold separately) HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) ◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio based on HDMI version 1.3a (HDMI is licensed by HDMI Licensing, LLC.) – Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync) information capability – Deep Color video signal (30/36 bit) transmission capability – “x.v.Color” video signal transmission capability – High refresh rate and high resolution video signals capability – High definition digital audio format signals capability ◆ HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System) licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC. ◆ Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion (composite video ↔ S-video ↔ component video → HDMI digital video) capability for monitor out ◆ Analog and HDMI video up-scaling: 480i(576i) → 480p(576p)/ 720p/1080i/1080p, 480p(576p) → 720p/1080i/1080p, 720p → 1080i/1080p, 1080i → 720p/1080p INTRODUCTION Built-in 7-channel power amplifier DOCK terminal ◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) USB and network features ◆ USB port to connect a USB storage device, USB Hard disc drive, or USB portable audio player ◆ NETWORK port to connect a PC and Yamaha MCX-2000 or access the Internet Radio and Rhapsody® (U.S.A. model only) via LAN ◆ DHCP automatic or manual network configuration ◆ Web control capability of this unit by using a Web browser Automatic speaker setup features ◆ Advanced YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) for automatic speaker setup ◆ Multi-point measurement feature for multiple listening positions ◆ Parametric equalizer select feature Other features ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ GUI (graphic user interface) menus that allow you to optimize this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system ◆ Music Content menu that allows you to easily navigate music content menus of your iPod, USB component, Internet Radio, etc. ◆ PURE DIRECT mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources ◆ Adaptive dynamic range controlling capability ◆ Adaptive DSP effect level controlling capability ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes, learning and macro capability ◆ ZONE 2/ZONE 3 custom installation facility ◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and ZONE 2/ZONE 3 using ZONE CONTROLS ◆ System Memory capability for saving and recalling multiple system parameter settings ◆ Sleep timer for each zone Supplied accessories Check that you received all of the following parts. Remote control Simplified remote control Batteries (4) (AAA, LR03, UM-4) Power cable (Two for Asia model) ❏ Optimizer microphone ❏ AM loop antenna ❏ Indoor FM antenna English ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ 3 En GETTING STARTED Getting started About this manual Notes • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. • “A MASTER ON/OFF” or “3 DVD” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for the information about each position of the parts. • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following conditions: – the operation range of the remote control decreases. – the transmit indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. ■ Installing batteries in the remote control 1 3 2 ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) Caution 1 Take off the battery compartment cover. 2 Insert the four supplied batteries (AAA, LR03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire hazard. Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or counterclockwise to the correct position using a straight slot screwdriver. Voltages are as follows: ........................AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz VOLTAGE SELECTOR Snap the battery compartment cover back into place. 4 En 230240V Voltage indication QUICK START GUIDE Quick start guide Video monitor Front right speaker Front left speaker INTRODUCTION The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy DVD movie playback in your home theater. Preparation: Check the items Subwoofer Surround right speaker In these steps, you need the following supplied accessories. ❏ Power cable The following items are not included in the package of this unit. Center speaker Surround back right speaker DVD player Surround back left speaker Surround left speaker Step 1: Set up your speakers ☞ P. 6 Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components ☞ P. 7 ❏ Speakers ❏ Front speaker ......................................x 2 ❏ Center speaker ...................................x 1 ❏ Surround speaker ...............................x 4 Select magnetically shielded speakers. The minimum required speakers are two front speakers. The priority of the requirement of other speakers is as follows: 1. Two surround speakers 2. One center speaker 3. One (or two) surround back speaker(s) ❏ Active subwoofer ....................................x 1 Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA input jack. ❏ Speaker cable ..........................................x 7 ❏ Subwoofer cable .....................................x 1 Select a monaural RCA cable. ❏ DVD player ...............................................x 1 Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital audio output jack and composite video output jack. ❏ Video monitor...........................................x 1 Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector equipped with a composite video input jack. Step 3: Turn on the power and start playback ❏ Video cable ..............................................x 2 Select RCA composite video cables. ❏ Digital coaxial audio cable .....................x 1 ☞ P. 8 Enjoy DVD playback! English 5 En Quick start guide Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. Step 1: Set up your speakers Front speakers and center speaker Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this unit. Loosen HDMI IN4 VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT BD/HD DVD DVD CBL/SAT A B C Y Y PB PB PR PR DVR BD/HD DVD DVD CBL/SAT Insert Tighten NETWORK DVR IN VCR OUT IN OUT MONITOR OUT S VIDEO ANTENNA FM GND AC IN AM VIDEO IN3 75Ω UNBAL. SPEAKERS CBL/ SAT IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) IN2 REMOTE IN 1 SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP L R PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3 L SP1 R + + L OUT IN CD TV 2 OUT CENTER + MD/CD-R R DVD GND PHONO IN1 L BD/ HD DVD R CENTER FRONT(6CH) SURROUND CENTER FRONT SURROUND SINGLE(SB) ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE VIDEO AC OUTLETS SWITCHED SINGLE FRONT DOCK AUDIO XM SUR.BACK (8CH) SUB WOOFER MULTI CH INPUT DIGITAL INPUT + SUR.BACK/ PRESENCE PRE OUT 1 CD 2 DVD 3 DVR L R R + ZONE 2/ZONE 3 SP2 L + ZONE OUT DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL COAXIAL OUT 1 SURROUND L R SUB WOOFER OUT 2 4 TV 5 HDBD/ DVD 6 DVD 7 CBL/ SAT MD/ 8 CD-R 9 DVR SIRIUS 1 2 TRIGGER OUT RS-232C SUBWOOFER PRE OUT Speaker terminals 1 Place your speakers and subwoofer in the room. 2 Connect speaker cables to each speaker. To the front right speaker To the front left speaker To the center speaker Surround and surround back speakers 3 Connect each speaker cable to the corresponding speaker terminal of this unit. 1 2 3 4 To the surround back right speaker To the surround left speaker To the surround back left speaker 4 1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables together to prevent short circuits. 3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other. 4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal part of this unit. To the surround right speaker Connect the subwoofer cable to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack of this unit and the input jack of the subwoofer. Subwoofer AV receiver Input jack Subwoofer cable SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack 6 En Quick start guide Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components Connect the video cable to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit and the video input jack of your video monitor. VIDEO MONITOR OUT Video monitor HDMI IN4 VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT Y DVR BD/HD DVD DVD CBL/SAT A B C BD/HD DVD DVD CBL/SAT AV receiver NETWORK DVR IN VCR OUT IN OUT MONITOR OUT S VIDEO Y ANTENNA FM GND AC IN AM VIDEO IN3 PB PB PR PR 75Ω UNBAL. CBL/ SAT IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) IN 1 OUT IN CD TV 2 OUT SPEAKERS 2/ZONE 3 PRESENCE/ZONE SP1 R + L IN2 REMOTE SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP L R CENTER L + + MD/CD-R R DVD GND IN1 PHONO CENTER FRONT(6CH) SURROUND CENTER FRONT SURROUND SINGLE(SB) ZONE 2 ZONE 3 INTRODUCTION DVD VIDEO 3 ZONE VIDEO L AC OUTLETS SWITCHED SINGLE BD/ HD DVD FRONT R DOCK AUDIO XM SUR.BACK (8CH) SUB WOOFER + SUR.BACK/ PRESENCE PRE OUT MULTI CH INPUT DIGITAL INPUT 1 CD 2 DVD 3 DVR L R + R ZONE 2/ZONE 3 SP2 L + ZONE OUT DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL COAXIAL OUT 1 SURROUND L R SUB WOOFER OUT 2 4 TV 5 HDBD/ DVD 6 DVD 7 CBL/ SAT MD/ 8 CD-R 9 DVR SIRIUS 1 2 TRIGGER OUT RS-232C Video input jack DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL 4 Make sure that this unit and the DVD player are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. Video cable VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack Connect the supplied power cable to this unit and then plug of the power cable and other components into the AC wall outlet. y For details about connecting the power cable, see page 25. ■ For other connections 1 Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD player and the DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack of this unit. DVD player Digital coaxial audio output jack 2 AV receiver Digital coaxial audio cable DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack Connect the video cable to the composite video output jack of your DVD player and DVD VIDEO jack of this unit. • Other speaker combinations ☞ P. 12 • Information on jacks and cable plugs ☞ P. 15 • Information on HDMI™ ☞ P. 16 • TV monitor or projector ☞ P. 18 • Other components ☞ P. 19 • External amplifier ☞ P. 21 • Multi-format player or external decoder ☞ P. 22 • Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver ☞ P. 22 • FM/AM antennas ☞ P. 24 • XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ☞ P. 53 • SiriusConnect tuner ☞ P. 58 • Network ☞ P. 23 • USB device ☞ P. 23 AV receiver DVD player English DVD VIDEO jack Composite video output jack Video cable 7 En Quick start guide Step 3: Turn on the power and start playback 6 To set this unit to the standby mode, press BMAIN ZONE ON/OFF. Check the type of the connected speakers. If the speakers are 6-ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (page 26). You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers (page 121). 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press AMASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position on the front panel. y For details about turning on/off this unit and the standby mode, see page 26. ■ For other operations 3 Rotate the C INPUT selector to set the input source to “DVD”. 4 Start playback of the desired DVD on your player. 5 Rotate P VOLUME to adjust the volume. 8 En • Optimizing the speaker parameters automatically ☞ P. 30 • Basic playback operations ☞ P. 36 • Sound field programs ☞ P. 40 • Pure high-fidelity sounds ☞ P. 47 • FM/AM radio tuning ☞ P. 48 • XM Satellite Radio tuning ☞ P. 53 • SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning ☞ P. 58 • Bluetooth component playback ☞ P. 64 • iPod playback ☞ P. 66 • Playback via USB or network ☞ P. 68 Connections Rear panel 1 2 HDMI IN4 3 4 BD/HD DVD DVD CBL/SAT A B C Y PB PB DVR BD/HD DVD DVD CBL/SAT 7 8 NETWORK DVR VCR IN OUT IN OUT MONITOR OUT S VIDEO ANTENNA FM GND PREPARATION Y 6 VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 5 AC IN AM VIDEO IN3 75Ω UNBAL. CBL/ SAT IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) PR PR IN 1 + + L IN2 REMOTE SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP L R SPEAKERS PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3 L SP1 R OUT IN 2 CENTER + MD/CD-R OUT R DVD GND PHONO IN1 L BD/ HD DVD R CD CENTER FRONT(6CH) SURROUND TV CENTER FRONT SURROUND SINGLE(SB) ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE VIDEO AC OUTLETS SWITCHED SINGLE FRONT SUB WOOFER OUT 2 DOCK AUDIO XM SUR.BACK (8CH) SUB WOOFER MULTI CH INPUT DIGITAL INPUT + SUR.BACK/ PRESENCE PRE OUT 1 CD 2 DVD 3 DVR R ZONE 2/ZONE 3 SP2 + L + OPTICAL 4 TV 5 HDBD/ DVD 6 DVD 7 CBL/ SAT MD/ 8 CD-R 9 DVR SIRIUS 2 1 9 0 A TRIGGER OUT RS-232C B C Name D Name Page D Page MULTI CH INPUT jacks 22 15 PRE OUT jacks 21 15 ZONE OUT jacks 117 Speaker terminals 12 1 HDMI jacks 16 2 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks 3 Audio component jacks REMOTE IN/OUT jacks 22, 117 4 Video component jacks 15 5 ANTENNA terminals 24 6 NETWORK port 23 7 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) 25 8 L R ZONE OUT DIGITAL OUTPUT COAXIAL OUT 1 SURROUND L R 25 25 9 DOCK terminal 22 0 XM jack (U.S.A. and Canada models only) 53 SIRIUS jack (U.S.A. and Canada models only) 58 A DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jacks 15 B TRIGGER OUT jacks 119 C RS-232C terminal — The RS-232C terminal is a control expansion terminal for factory use only. Consult your dealer for details. English AC IN AC OUTLET(S) Note 9 En Connections Placing speakers The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. y • 7.1-channel speaker layout is highly recommended for playback of the high definition digital audio sources (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, etc.) with sound field programs. • We recommend that you add the presence speakers for the effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program. 7.1-channel speaker layout C FR FL FR 30˚ SW FL SR C SL SR SL 60˚ 80˚ SL SR SBL SBR SBR SBL 30 cm (12 in) or more 6.1-channel speaker layout C FR FL FR 30˚ SW FL SR C SL SR SL 60˚ SL 80˚ SR SB SB 5.1-channel speaker layout C FR FL FR 30˚ SW FL C SL SR SR 60˚ SL 80˚ SR SL 10 En Connections ■ Speaker types Front left and right speakers (FL and FR) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the sound field programs (page 40). We recommend that you use the presence speakers especially for the CINEMA DSP sound field programs. To use the presence speakers, connect the speakers to SP1 speaker terminals and then set “Front Presence” to “Yes” (page 88). 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) PL Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. For 5.1-channel speaker layout, place these speakers farther back compared with the placement in the 7.1channel speaker layout. 1.8 m (6 ft) PR FL FR 1.8 m (6 ft) C PREPARATION Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. ■ Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR) Surround back left and right speakers (SBL and SBR) /Surround back speaker (SB) The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back transitions. For 6.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and right channel signals are mixed down and output at the single surround back speaker by configuring the “Surround Back” setting (page 88). For 5.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and right channel signals are output at the surround left and right speakers by configuring the “Surround Back” setting (page 88). Subwoofer (SW) The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the high fidelity sound of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in bitstreams and multi-channel PCM sources. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. For other speaker combinations You can enjoy multi-channel sources with sound field programs by using a speaker combination other than the 7.1/6.1/5.1-channel speaker combinations. Use the automatic setup feature (page 30) or set the “Speaker” parameters (page 87). to output the surround sounds at the connected speakers. English 11 En Connections Connecting speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately. Caution • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (page 26). • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. • If you are to use 6-ohm speakers, be sure to set “SPEAKER IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (page 26). You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers (page 121). Notes • A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. • You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, however they do not output sound simultaneously. This unit automatically switches the presence speakers and surround back speakers depending on the input sources and the selected sound field programs. ■ 7.1-channel speaker connection Surround back speakers Right Left Presence speakers (page 11) or Zone 2/Zone 3 speakers Center speaker (page 117) Subwoofer SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP L R SPEAKERS 2/ZONE 3 PRESENCE/ZONE SP1 R + CENTER L + + SINGLE FRONT SURROUND L R + SUB WOOFER L R + R ZONE 2/ZONE 3 SP2 L + Zone 2/Zone 3 speakers (page 117) Left Right Front speakers 12 En Left Right Surround speakers Connections ■ 6.1-channel speaker connection Surround back speaker Subwoofer Presence speakers (page 11) or Zone 2/Zone 3 speakers (page 117) Center speaker SPEAKERS L PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3 L SP1 R + CENTER + + PREPARATION SINGLE FRONT SURROUND L R L R + SUB WOOFER R ZONE 2/ZONE 3 SP2 + L + Zone 2/Zone 3 speakers (page 117) Left Right Front speakers Left Right Surround speakers ■ 5.1-channel speaker connection Subwoofer Presence speakers (page 11) or Zone 2/Zone 3 speakers (page 117) Front speakers for the bi-amplification connections (page 14) Center speaker SPEAKERS SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP L R PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3 L SP1 R + + CENTER + SINGLE FRONT + SUB WOOFER SURROUND L R K L R + R ZONE 2/ZONE 3 SP2 L + Zone 2/Zone 3 speakers (page 117) English Right Left Front speakers Left Right Surround speakers 13 En Connections ■ Connecting the speaker cable 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of insulation from the end of each speaker cable and then twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. ■ Using bi-amplification connections Caution Remove the shorting bars or bridges of your speakers to separate the LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter) crossovers. You can make bi-amplification connections to one speaker system which supports bi-amplification connection as shown below. To activate the connections, configure the “BI-AMP” setting (page 122). 10 mm (0.4 in) This unit 2 Loosen the knob, insert one bare wire into the hole and then tighten the knob. Loosen Insert SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP L R + Tighten SINGLE FRONT L R + ■ Connecting the banana plug (Except U.K., Europe, Asia and Korea models) Tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug into the end of the terminal. Banana plug Right Left Front speakers Note When you make the conventional connection with the speakers, make sure that the shorting bars are put into the terminals of the speakers appropriately. Refer to the instruction manuals of the speakers for details. 14 En Connections Information on jacks and cable plugs This unit has three types of audio jacks, three types of video jacks and HDMI jacks. You can choose the connection method depending on the component to be connected. ■ Audio jacks ■ Video jacks DIGITAL R COAXIAL OPTICAL (White) (Red) (Orange) L R AUDIO Left and right analog audio cable plugs C Coaxial digital audio cable plug VIDEO S VIDEO (Yellow) O V S Optical digital audio cable plug Composite video cable plug S-video cable plug AUDIO jacks For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. COAXIAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital audio cables. COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR (Green) (Blue) (Red) Y PB PR Component video cable plugs VIDEO jacks For conventional composite video signals transmitted via composite video cables. S VIDEO jacks For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate wires of S-video cables. OPTICAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital audio cables. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals transmitted on separate wires of component video cables. Note y You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with up to 96-kHz sampling digital signals. PREPARATION DIGITAL L This unit is equipped with the video conversion function. (page 17) English 15 En Connections Information on HDMI™ This unit has four HDMI input jacks and two HDMI output jacks for digital audio and video signal input/output. ■ HDMI jack and cable plug HDMI HDMI cable plug connections: – multi-channel analog audio input (page 22) – DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL (or COAXIAL) • Refer to the instruction manuals of the input source component, and set the component appropriately. Notes y • We recommend that you use a commercially available HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it. • Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit to other DVI components. • You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection (page 38). • If you set “Mode” in “Standby Through” to “Last” or “Fix”, this unit allows the HDMI signals input at an HDMI IN jack to pass through this unit and output at an HDMI OUT jack (page 94). • This unit is equipped with two HDMI OUT jacks. You can select the active HDMI OUT jack(s) (page 37). • This unit is equipped with the video conversion function (page 17). Notes • Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jacks of this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise. • The HDMI OUT jacks output the audio signals input at the HDMI input jacks only. • If you turn off the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jacks via a DVI connection, the connection may fail. ■ HDMI signal compatibility with this unit Audio signals Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible media 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc. Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, etc. DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz,1 bit SA-CD, etc. Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc. Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc. y • If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio sources with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the following 16 En • When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player. • This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components. • To decode the audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source component appropriately so that the component outputs the audio bitstream signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the component). • This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not play back the audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD contents. Video signals This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: – 480i/60 Hz – 576i/50 Hz – 480p/60 Hz – 576p/50 Hz – 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz – 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz – 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24Hz Compatibility with Deep Color and x.v.Color video signals This unit accepts Deep Color (30 or 36-bit) and x.v.Color video signals. To output those video signals from the HDMI OUT jacks without any processing, set “HDMI ` HDMI” (page 94)” to “Through”. Note If the video monitor is not compatible with Deep Color or x.v.Color video signals, the video source may not be played back correctly. ■ Default input assignment of HDMI input jacks HDMI input jack Assigned input source IN1 BD/HD DVD IN2 DVD IN3 CBL/SAT IN4 DVR Connections Audio and video signal flow ■ Audio signal flow Input ■ Video signal flow Input Output Output HDMI HDMI DIGITAL AUDIO (COAXIAL) PREPARATION COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) S VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO Digital Analog Note Only the HDMI input jacks support DSD, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio and DTS-HD High Resolution Audio signal inputs. Through Video conversion y • Analog-to-HDMI video conversion is always possible unless video signals are being input at the HDMI input jacks or 1080presolution analog video signals are being input. • To set the analog-to-analog video conversion or change the other video settings, configure the “Video” parameters (page 93). • If different analog video signals are input concurrently, the following priority order will be applied: (1) COMPONENT VIDEO, (2) S VIDEO, (3) VIDEO English 17 En Connections Connecting a TV monitor or projector y To select the types of the audio signals output at the HDMI OUT jacks, configure the “Audio Output” setting (page 95). Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. Note If you turn off the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jacks via a DVI connection, the connection may fail. In this case, the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly. Projector HDMI in HDMI VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT S VIDEO MONITOR OUT Y VIDEO PB PR TV OUT 2 AUDIO DIGITAL INPUT 4 TV OUT 1 L R Y PB O PR Component video in Recommended connections 18 En S Optical out Audio out HDMI in V Video in S-video in TV Alternative connections Connections Connecting other components ■ Connecting audio and video components This unit has three types of audio jacks, three types of video jacks and HDMI jacks. You can choose the connection method depending on the component to be connected. y HDMI can transmit both digital audio and video over a single HDMI cable. COMPONENT VIDEO Video jacks S VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO IN4 PREPARATION HDMI VIDEO BD/HD DVD DVD CBL/SAT A B C BD/HD DVD DVD CBL/SAT DVR IN VCR OUT IN OUT Y DVR IN3 PB CBL/ SAT IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) PR L IN2 HDMI jacks MD/CD-R R DVD GND PHONO IN1 L BD/ HD DVD R CD TV OPTICAL COAXIAL 1 CD AUDIO Audio jacks 2 DVD 3 DVR 4 TV 5 HDBD/ DVD 6 DVD COAXIAL 7 CBL/ SAT MD/ 8 CD-R 9 DVR OPTICAL Connection example (connecting a DVD player) DVD player HDMI out Optical out Coaxial out Audio out Component out S-video out C HDMI Y PB PR Video out L V S R O VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO DVD DVD B Recommended connections Y PB PR L IN2 R DVD Alternative connections DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL COAXIAL 2 DVD 6 DVD English 19 En Connections Jacks used for audio and video connections Recommended connections are indicated by boldface. When connecting a recording component, you need to make additional connections for recording (signal transmission from this unit to the recording component). Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. y You can also use the VIDEO AUX jacks (page 24) on the front panel to connect an additional component. Jacks to connect Component Signal type On component Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD player HDMI out HDMI IN1 (BD/HD DVD) Audio Optical out OPTICAL (BD/HD DVD) Audio out (analog) AUDIO (BD/HD DVD) Component out COMPONENT VIDEO (BD/HD DVD) S-video out S VIDEO (BD/HD DVD) Video out (composite) VIDEO (BD/HD DVD) Audio/Video HDMI out HDMI IN2 (DVD) Audio Optical out OPTICAL (DVD) Video DVD player Coaxial out COAXIAL (DVD) Audio out (analog) AUDIO (DVD) Component out COMPONENT VIDEO (DVD) S-video out S VIDEO (DVD) Video out (composite) VIDEO (DVD) Audio/Video HDMI out HDMI IN3 (CBL/SAT) Audio Optical out OPTICAL (CBL/SAT) Audio out (analog) AUDIO (CBL/SAT) Video Set-top box Video DVD recorder Component out COMPONENT VIDEO (CBL/SAT) S-video out S VIDEO (CBL/SAT) Video out (composite) VIDEO (CBL/SAT) Audio/Video HDMI out HDMI IN4 (DVR) Audio Coaxial out COAXIAL (DVR) Audio out (analog) AUDIO (DVR IN) S-video out S VIDEO (DVR IN) Video out (composite) VIDEO (DVR IN) Optical in OPTICAL (DVR) Audio in (analog) AUDIO (DVR OUT) S-video in S VIDEO (DVR OUT) Video in (composite) VIDEO (DVR OUT) Video Audio recording Video recording 20 En On this unit Audio/Video Connections Jacks to connect Component Signal type On component VCR MD or CD recorder Turntable Audio Audio out (analog) AUDIO (VCR IN) Video S-video out S VIDEO (VCR IN) Video out (composite) VIDEO (VCR IN) Audio recording Audio in (analog) AUDIO (VCR OUT) Video recording S-video in S VIDEO (VCR OUT) Video in (composite) VIDEO (VCR OUT) Coaxial out COAXIAL (CD) Audio out (analog) AUDIO (CD) Audio Audio out (analog) AUDIO (MD/CD-R IN) Audio recording Optical in OPTICAL (MD/CD-R) Audio in (analog) AUDIO (MD/CD-R OUT) Audio out (analog) AUDIO (PHONO) Audio Audio PREPARATION CD player On this unit Notes • Be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV if the video conversion is disabled. For example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect other components to the VIDEO jacks. • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. • If you connect your DVD player to both the OPTICAL and COAXIAL jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the COAXIAL jack. • GUI signals are not output at the DVR OUT and VCR OUT jacks and cannot be recorded. • To make a digital connection to a component other than the default one assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, configure the “I/O Assignment” setting (page 98). • When connecting a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge to the PHONO jack, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier. • Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal. ■ Connecting an external amplifier This unit has more than enough power for any home use. However, if you want to add more power to the speaker output or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. [1] [2] CENTER FRONT [3] [4] SURROUND SINGLE(SB) L R Notes SUR.BACK/ SUB PRESENCE WOOFER • When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make any connections to the SPEAKERS terminals. • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. PRE OUT [5] [1] CENTER PRE OUT jack Center channel output jack. [2] FRONT PRE OUT jacks Front channel output jacks. English [3] SURROUND PRE OUT jacks Surround channel output jacks. 21 En Connections [4] SUR.BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks Surround back or presence channel output jacks. When you only connect one external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to the SINGLE (SB) jack. y • To output surround back channel signals at these jacks, set “Front Presence” to “None” and “Surround Back” to any parameter except “None” (page 88). • To output presence channel signals at these jacks, set “Front Presence” to “Yes” and “Surround Back” to “None” (page 88). ■ Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately). Connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth receiver to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its dedicated cable. [5] SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier. ■ Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, etc. If you set “Input Channels” to “8ch” (page 86), the analog audio input jacks assigned as “Front Input” can be used as the front channel input jacks. Notes • When you select “MULTI CH” as the input source, the digital sound field processor is automatically disabled. • Since this unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers, connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system when using this feature. ( ) ( C) MD/ L TAPE * CENTER SUB WOOFER R DOCK Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver ■ Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks When the components are the Yamaha products and have the capability of the transmission of the remote control signals, connect the REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT jacks to the remote control input and output jack with the monaural analog mini cable as follows. FRONT(6CH) SURROUND SUR.BACK (8CH) SUB MULTI CH INPUT R L R Front out (8ch) L Surround out R Front out (6ch) Surround back out (8ch) Center out Subwoofer out L Multi-format player/ External decoder * The analog audio input jacks assigned as “Front Input” in “MULTI CH” (page 86). REMOTE IN Remote control out 1 OUT IN 2 OUT Remote control in * Infrared signal receiver or Yamaha component Yamaha component (CD or DVD player, etc.) * You can connect another set of infrared signal receiver and Yamaha component to the REMOTE IN/OUT 2 jacks same as the REMOTE IN/OUT 1 jacks. 22 En Connections ■ Connecting to the network To connect this unit to your network, plug one end of a network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable) into the NETWORK port of this unit, and plug the other end into one of the LAN ports on your router that supports the DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server function. The following diagram shows a connection example where this unit is connected to one of the LAN ports on a 4-port router. To enjoy music files saved on your PC and Yamaha MCX2000, access the Internet Radio, or control this unit by using your PC, each device must be connected properly in the network. Notes Internet PREPARATION • You must use an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable (commercially available) to connect a network hub or router and this unit. • If the DHCP server function on your router is disabled, you need to configure the network settings manually (page 95). • Yamaha MCX-2000, MCX-A10 and MCX-C15 may not be for sale in some locations. Yamaha MCX-2000 Yamaha MCX-C15 WAN Yamaha MCX-A10 (with optional speakers) PC LAN Modem Router Network cable NETWORK ■ Connecting a USB storage device Connect a USB memory device or USB portable audio player to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. For information about the USB storage devices supported by this unit, see page 69. INFO S USB English USB memory device or USB portable audio player 23 En Connections Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game console or a video camera to this unit. To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select “V-AUX” as the input source. Connecting the FM and AM antennas Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Notes Caution Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other components before making connections. PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT/ REC OUT MENU TONE CONTROL ENTER PRESET/TUNING/CH MEMORY SEARCH MODE STEREO/ MONO CATEGORY INFO BAND INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX PHONES USB ON OFF • The types of the supplied antennas and the FM antenna terminal of this unit are different depending on the models. • (Asia and General models only) Be sure to set the tuner frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area (page 122). • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • If you experience poor reception quality, install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. MASTER Indoor FM antenna (supplied) VIDEO S VIDEO L AUDIO R AM loop antenna (supplied) OPTICAL ANTENNA FM GND AM 75Ω UNBAL. V S L R O Optical output Audio output Video output S-Video output Outdoor AM antenna Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 33 ft) vinyl-covered wire extended outdoors from a window. Ground (GND terminal) Game console or video camera For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. Assembling the supplied AM loop antenna 24 En Connections (U.S.A. model) Connecting the power cable ■ Connecting the AC power cable Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC inlet after all other connections are complete, then plug the AC power cable into an AC wall outlet. AC IN AC OUTLETS SWITCHED Press and hold Insert Release PREPARATION To the AC wall outlet Connecting the wire of the AM loop antenna y The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity and you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND terminal. Note (Asia model only) Select one of the supplied power cables suitable for the type of AC wall outlet in your location before plugging this unit into the AC wall outlet. ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) U.K. and Australia models ..................................... 1 outlet Korea model ............................................................... None Other models ......................................................... 2 outlets Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected components. Connect the power cable of your other components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to these outlet(s) is cut off when this unit is turned off. For information on the maximum power or the total power consumption of the components that can be connected to these outlet(s), see “Specifications” (page 145). y The rated power of the component (such as a subwoofer) connected to these outlet(s) cannot exceed the maximum power supplied by this unit. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, the stored data will be lost in case the power cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the power supply is cut off for more than one week. English 25 En Connections Setting the speaker impedance and GUI language Caution If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. You can also use 4 ohm speakers as the front speakers (page 121). 1 Make sure this unit is turned off. 2 Press and hold NSTRAIGHT on the front panel and then press A MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. STRAIGHT EFFECT While holding down Turning this unit on and off ■ Turning on this unit Press A MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel inward to the ON position. When you turn on this unit by pressing A MASTER ON/ OFF, the main zone is turned on. ■ Turning off this unit Press A MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel again to release it outward to the OFF position. ■ Set the main zone to the standby mode Press B MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or D STANDBY). ■ Turning on the main zone from the standby mode Press B MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or E POWER). MASTER y 3 Rotate the M PROGRAM selector to select “SPEAKER IMP.”. 4 Press N STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “6Ω MIN”. 5 Rotate the MPROGRAM selector to select “LANGUAGE”. 6 Press N STRAIGHT to select desired language setting for the GUI screen in the video monitor. Choices: ENGLISH (English), JAPANESE, (Japanese), FRENCH (French), GERMAN (German), SPANISH (Spanish), RUSSIAN (Russian) Notes • For details about the display language, see “Language” (page 123) • You can also select the display language with the GUI menu (page 100). 7 Press A MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off this unit. Note The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit. 26 En • Basically, we recommend that you use the standby mode to turn off this unit. In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. • BMAIN ZONE ON/OFF, DSTANDBY and EPOWER are operational only when AMASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. • When you turn on this unit, there will be a delay for a few seconds before this unit can reproduce sound. If there are some problems... • First, turn off and then turn on this unit again. • If problems persist, initialize the parameters of this unit (page 138). Connections Front panel display a b c neural CS DSD PCM WMA MP3 USB NET V-AUX VCR DVR CBL/SAT DVD BD/HD DVD MD/CD-R TV CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER XM HD TAG TUNED STEREO AUTO MEMORY CATEGORY ALL HOLD 3 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 VIRTUAL ADAPTIVE DRC ENHANCER DISCRETE MATRIX q DIGITAL PLUS HD 96 24 q PL x q EX q TRUE HD MASTER AUDIO SILENT CINEMA g h DOCK YPAO PRESET SIRIUS dB VOLUME L C R SLEEP ZONE2 SL LFE SR ZONE3 SBL SB SBR YPAO PRESET 3 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 VIRTUAL ADAPTIVE DRC ENHANCER DISCRETE MATRIX q DIGITAL PLUS HD 96 24 q PL x q EX q TRUE HD MASTER AUDIO i j k l m f n o HD TAG TUNED STEREO AUTO MEMORY CATEGORY ALL HOLD q dB VOLUME L C R SLEEP ZONE2 SL LFE SR ZONE3 SBL SB SBR r p s a CSII indicator (U.S.A. model only) Lights up when the SRS Circle Surround II decoder is active (page 74). h ENHANCER indicator Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on (page 45). b neural indicator (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Lights up when the Neural-THX Surround decoder is active (page 74). i YPAO indicator Lights up when you run the automatic setup and when the speaker settings configured by the automatic setup are used without any modifications (page 30). c Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected (page 38). j PRESET indicator Lights up while this unit is in the preset tuning mode. d Input source indicators The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently selected input source. k DSP indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the sound field programs are selected. Notes • The XM and SIRIUS indicators are only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models. • The NET indicator also lights up when “Network Standby” (page 96) is set to “On” and this unit is in the standby mode. e Input signal indicators The respective indicator lights up when this unit is reproducing DSD (Direct Stream Digital), PCM (Pulse Code Modulation), WMA (Windows Media Audio) or, MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3) audio signals. f Multi-information display Shows the name of the current sound field program and other information when adjusting or changing settings. g HDMI indicator OUT 1/OUT 2 indicator The respective indicator lights up when the HDMI signal is output at the HDMI OUT jacks. (page 16). SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (page 45). CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (page 40). 3D indicator Lights up when the CINEMA DSP 3D mode is turned on (page 46). VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 45). l ADAPTIVE DRC indicator Lights up when the adaptive dynamic range control feature is turned on (page 89). m Decoder indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the decoders of this unit function. English IN indicator Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is input at one of the HDMI input jacks (page 16). PREPARATION e SILENT CINEMA d 27 En Connections n Tuner indicators Light up when this unit is in the FM, AM, XM Satellite Radio, or SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning mode. Note Using the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation. The HD and TAG indicators are only applicable to the U.S.A. model and used when this unit is tuned into the HD Radio reception band. Remote control sensor o Menu browsing indicator Lights up if any items exist under the current item during menu browsing for iPod, etc. p SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on (page 39). Approximately 6 m (20 ft) 30 30 q VOLUME level indicator • Indicates the current volume level. • Flashes while the mute function is on (page 38). r Input channel and speaker indicators Presence speaker indicators L C R SL LFE SR SBL SB SBR Input channel indicators Input channel indicators • Indicate the channel components of the current digital input signal. • Light up or flash according to the settings of the speakers when this unit is in the automatic setup procedure (page 30). Presence speaker indicators Light up according to setting for “Front Presence” (page 88) in “Configuration” when this unit is in the auto setup procedure (page 30) or the speaker level setting procedure in the “Level” (page 89). s ZONE2/ZONE3 indicators Lights up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned on (page 119). 6LIGHT Lights up the remote control buttons and the display window (4). Display window (4) [1] [2] MAIN ZONE 2 ZONE 3 [3] ID 1 ID 2 [4] [1] ID1/ID2 indicator Indicates the currently selected remote control ID (page 121). [2] Transmit indicator Appears while the remote control is sending infrared signals. [3] Zone indicators Indicates the currently controlling zone (page 119). [4] Information display Shows the name of the selected input source that you can control. Infrared window (1) Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. 28 En Connections Operation mode selector (F) The function of some buttons depends on the operation mode selector position. AMP Operates the amplifier function of this unit. SOURCE Operates the component selected with an input selector button (page 107). PREPARATION TV Operates the TV (page 106). Notes • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places • To set the remote control codes for other components, see page 109. Opening and closing the front panel door When you want to use the controls behind the front panel door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these controls. English 29 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment. This unit is equipped with various automatic setup features. You can select the automatic setup features according to your preference. Quick automatic setup (page 30) Use this feature to carry out the automatic setup without using the GUI screen. Basic automatic setup (page 31) Use this feature to optimize the setup of this unit for one listening position. You can also select the parameters to be optimized by the automatic setup. Advanced automatic setup (page 33) Use this feature to optimize the setup of this unit for multiple listening positions. You can also select the parameters to be optimized by the automatic setup. Before starting the automatic setup Make sure of the following check points before starting the automatic setup operations. ❏ Speakers are connected appropriately. ❏ Headphones are disconnected from this unit. ❏ This unit is turned on. ❏ The connected subwoofer is turned on and the volume level is set to about half way (or slightly less). ❏ The crossover frequency controls of the connected subwoofer is set to the maximum. VOLUME MIN MAX Quick automatic setup Use this feature to carry out the automatic setup without using the GUI screen. 1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. AUDIO SELECT/ REC OUT MENU TONE CONTROL PRESET/TUNING/CH MEMORY SEARCH MODE STEREO/ MONO CATEGORY INFO BAND ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO PROGRAM CROSSOVER HIGH CUT MIN ENTER OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX USB Omni-directional microphone The following screen appears in the front panel display. MAX Controls of a subwoofer (example) ❏ ❏ The room is sufficiently quiet. Set the operation mode selector on the remote control to FAMP. AUTO SETUP ENTER TO START Notes • Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the automatic setup procedure. • To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible while the automatic setup procedure is in progress. If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. 30 En Note “View GUI Menu” appears if the GUI menu screen is turned on. In this case, press IMENU to turn off the GUI menu screen or follow “Basic automatic setup” (page 31). 2 Place the optimizer microphone at your normal listening position on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone heading upward. Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room Optimizer microphone 4 Disconnect the optimizer microphone to complete the automatic setup. y You can check the results of the measurements by using the GUI screen (page 34). Basic automatic setup y It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. You can use the attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the optimizer microphone to the tripod (etc.). 1 Turn on the video monitor and then follow steps 1 and 2 in “Quick automatic setup” (page 30). 2 Press IMENU on the remote control. The following screen (GUI menu) appears in the video monitor. Before proceeding next operation Once you perform the next operation, this unit starts the automatic setup procedure in 10 seconds. During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any operation on this unit. For more accurate measurements, we recommended that you get out of the room or move to the wall where speakers are not around during the measurement. It takes approximately 3 minutes. Information Setup Menu Start PREPARATION Use this feature to optimize the setup of this unit this unit for one listening position. You can also select the parameters to be optimized in the automatic setup. NOTICE Loud test tones are output. Please keep quiet or leave the room. Start:ENTER 3 Press 9ENTER to start the measurement. This unit starts to count down from 10 seconds. y 3 • To start the measurement immediately, press 9ENTER again. • To cancel the automatic setup and return to the previous screen, press 0RETURN. y Loud test tones are output from each speaker during the measurement. Once all items are measured, “COMPLETED” appears. COMPLETED PLS UNPLUG MIC Note If an error or warning message appears, see “Automatic setup” (page 136). ERROR: E-01 PRESS ENTER To select the parameters to be optimized, press 9k to select “Setup Menu” and then press 9h. When you do not need to select the parameters to be optimized, skip to step 6. If you do not select the parameters to be optimized, this unit will optimize the parameters you selected last time. All the parameters are selected by the initial factory settings. 4 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the parameter and then press 9ENTER to check or uncheck the box. Check the boxes for the parameters to be optimized. Parameter Descriptions You can optimize the setup of this unit for multiple listening positions. For details, see “Advanced automatic setup” (page 33). In the basic automatic setup, leave this setting to the default. Wiring (Speaker wiring) This unit checks and adjusts which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker. 31 En English Multi Measure (Multiple point measurement) Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room Parameter Descriptions Distance (Speaker distance) This unit checks and adjusts the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the timing of each channel. Size (Speaker size) This unit checks and adjusts the frequency response of each speaker and sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each channel. Equalizing (Speaker equalizing) Parametric equalizer adjusts the level of the specified frequency bands. This unit automatically selects the crucial frequency bands for the listening room and adjusts the level of the selected frequency bands to create a cohesive sound field in the room. Level (Speaker level) 5 Pre Check If you have finished the settings, press 9l to return to the previous menu level and then press 9n to select “Start”. Once you perform the next operation, this unit starts the automatic setup procedure in 10 seconds. During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any operation on this unit. For more accurate measurements, we recommended that you get out of the room or move to the wall where speakers are not around during the measurement. It takes approximately 3 minutes. Press 9ENTER to start the measurement. This unit starts to count down from 10 seconds. y • To start the measurement immediately, press 9ENTER again. • To cancel the automatic setup and return to the previous screen, press 0RETURN. Detail E09:User Cancel Main Check Wiring 7 Press 9ENTER to exit from the “Result” screen. y • To view the measurement results in detail, press 9h. Press 9k / n repeatedly to toggle between parameters (page 35). Press 9l to return to the “Result” screen. • To retry the measurement from step 4, press 9k. This unit checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker. Before proceeding next operation 6 Retry Exit 8 Press 9l to save the measurement results or 9h to discard them. 9 Press IMENU to turn off the GUI menu and disconnect the optimizer microphone. ■ Error and warning messages If an error or warning message appears during the automatic setup procedure, carry out one of the following operations. For details on each message, see “Automatic setup” (page 113). • To view the details on the error and warning messages, press 9h. Press 9k / n to display the previous/next page (if available). Press 9l to return to the previous menu level. • To return to the GUI menu, press 9l. • To retry the measurement, press 9k. • To ignore the message and continue the process, press 9n. Note Loud test tones are output from each speaker during the measurement. Once all items are measured, “Measurement Completed Successful” appears. Equalizing Level Measurement Completed Sucessful Result Detail:[ ] Exit:ENTER Note If an error or warning message appears, see “Error and warning messages” (page 32). 32 En Some operations cannot be performed depending on the type of error (or warning). Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room Advanced automatic setup 6 Use this feature to optimize the setup of this unit for multiple listening positions. You can also select the parameters to be optimized by the automatic setup. 1 Press 9k / n repeatedly to set the number of listening positions and press 9l. Choices: 1 (default), 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 Turn on the video monitor and then connect the optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. Information Setup Menu Multi Measure Start Wiring 7 Distance Place the optimizer microphone at the first listening position. The following illustration shows how to place the optimizer microphone in order to optimize the setup of this unit for seven listening positions for example. 7 To select the parameters to be optimized, press 9k / n to select the parameter and then press 9ENTER to check or uncheck the box. When you do not need to select the parameters to be optimized, skip to step 8. PREPARATION 2 y 1 2 34 5 If you do not select the parameters to be optimized, this unit will optimize the parameters you selected last time. All the parameters are selected by the initial factory settings. 7 6 8 Press 9l to return to the previous menu level and then press 9n to select “Start”. Before proceeding next operation 1/2/3/4/5/6/7: Listening positions 3 Press IMENU on the remote control. The GUI menu appears in the video monitor. 4 Press 9k to select “Setup Menu” and then press 9h. 5 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Multi Measure” and then press 9h. Once you perform the next operation, this unit starts the automatic setup procedure in 10 seconds. During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any operation on this unit. For more accurate measurements, we recommended that you get out of the room or move to the wall where speakers are not around during the measurement. 9 Press 9ENTER to start the measurement. This unit starts to count down from 10 seconds. y • To start the measurement immediately, press 9ENTER again. • To cancel the automatic setup and return to the previous screen, press 0RETURN. Information Setup Menu Multi Measure Start Wiring Distance 1 Loud test tones are output from each speaker during the measurement. Once all items for the first listening position are measured, the following message appears. Pre Check Wiring Put the microphone at 2nd listening position English Main Check Next:ENTER Skip:[ ] Distance 33 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room Note If an error or warning message appears, see “Error and warning messages” (page 32). 10 Move the optimizer microphone to the second listening position and then press 9ENTER to start the measurement. y To skip the measurements at the remaining listening positions, press 9n. 11 12 Repeat step 10 until the measurement at all listening positions are made. If you have made the measurement at all listening positions or skipped the measurement at the remaining listening positions, “Measurement Completed Successful” appears. Reviewing and reloading the automatic setup parameters Use this feature to review the result of the automatic setup. You can also reload the automatic setup parameters in case you are not satisfied with the speaker setup and sound adjustments you have configured manually. Note If you reload the automatic setup parameters, the settings you have configured manually are cleared. To save the settings before reloading the automatic setup parameters, see “System Memory” (page 101). 1 y If the menu directory other than “Top Menu” (page 79) is displayed, press and hold IMENU to display the top GUI menu. Follow steps 7 to 9 in “Basic automatic setup” (page 31) to view the measurement results and turn off the GUI menu. 34 En Set the operation mode selector to FAMP and then press IMENU. The GUI menu appears in the video monitor. 2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Setup” and then press 9h. 3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Auto Setup” and then press 9h. 4 Press 9k to select “Information” and then press 9h. 5 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the parameter of which you want to check the setting. Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room Parameter Descriptions Displays the number of listening position actually measured. Wiring (Speaker wiring) Displays the polarity of each connected speaker. – “NRM” appears when the polarity of the connected speaker is normal. – “REV” appears when the polarity of the connected speaker is reversed. – “DET” appears when this unit detects the subwoofer is connected. – “–––” appears when no speaker is connected to the corresponding speaker channel. Distance (Speaker distance) Displays the speaker distance from the listening position. Press 9h repeatedly to switch the unit to display the value of the each speaker distance. Size (Speaker size) Displays the size of the connected speakers and the bass cross over frequency (“Cross”). – “LRG” appears when the connected speaker has the ability to reproduce the low-frequency signals effectively. – “SML” appears when the connected speaker does not have the ability to reproduce the low-frequency signals effectively. Equalizing (Speaker equalizing) Displays the result of the adjustment of the frequency responses of each connected speaker. You can switch the parametric equalizer type that appears in the result display by pressing 9h repeatedly in the “Equalizing” result display. To apply the result that is displayed in the display, press 9ENTER. Choices: Natural, Flat, Front – Select “Natural” to average out the frequency response of all speakers with higher frequencies being less emphasized. Recommended if the “Flat” setting sounds a little harsh. – Select “Flat” to average the frequency response of all speakers. Recommended if all of your speakers are of similar quality. – Select “Front” to adjust the frequency response of each speaker in accordance with the sound of your front speakers. Recommended if your front speakers are of much higher quality than your other speakers. Level (Speaker level) Displays the result of the adjustment of each connected speaker output level. You can display the result of the adjustment of the speaker level for each parametric equalizer type (see above) by pressing 9h repeatedly. Select “Through” to display the result when this unit does not use the parametric equalizer. Notes • “–––” appears when no speaker is connected to the corresponding speaker channel or this unit does not measure the corresponding speaker channel yet. • If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening environment, run the automatic setup again to recalibrate your system. • The distances displayed in the “Distance” results may be longer than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your subwoofer or external amplifiers if you connect them. • In the “Equalizing” results, different values may be set for the same band to provide finer adjustments. 6 To reload the displayed parameter, press 9ENTER. 7 Press IMENU to turn off the GUI menu. PREPARATION Multi Measure (Multiple point measurement) y • You can also set the parametric equalizer type with “PEQ Select” (page 91). • You can set the phase of the connected subwoofer with “Phase” (page 88). English y The results of the measurement that are the causes of the warning message(s) appear in yellow or pink. 35 En Playback Caution Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS. 3 Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. • Refer to the instruction manuals for the source component. • FM/AM radio tuning (page 48) • XM Satellite Radio tuning (page 53) • SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning (page 58) • Bluetooth component playback (page 64) • iPod playback (page 66) • Playback via USB or network (page 68) 4 Rotate P VOLUME (or press J VOLUME +/–) to adjust the volume to the desired output level. y To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio connection, set “Decoder Mode” in “Input Select” to “DTS” before the playback (page 85). Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to FAMP. y To adjust the level of each speaker, see page 47. Basic procedure 1 5 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Rotate the M PROGRAM selector (or press one of the sound field program selector buttons (Q) repeatedly) to select the desired sound field program. For details about sound field program, see page 40. y Selected sound field program category • If you connect two video monitors to the HDMI OUT jacks of this unit, press RHDMI OUT repeatedly to select the active video monitor(s). See page 37 for details. • You can operate this unit by using the graphical user interface (GUI) screen (page 76). • You can configure the display settings with “Video” (page 93) and “Display Set” (page 98). 2 Rotate the C INPUT selector (or press one of the input selector buttons (3)) The name of the selected input source appears for a few seconds. Available input sources USB NET DOCK V-AUX VCR DVR CBL/SAT DVD BD/HD DVD MD/CD-R TV CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER XM DVD Selected input source 36 En SIRIUS Movie Sci-Fi Selected sound field program y To switch the information (current input source, current sound field program, etc) displayed in the front panel display, press KINFO (or set the operation mode selector to FAMP and then press CINFO) repeatedly. Playback Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT) Selecting the multi-channel input component Use this feature (audio input jack select) to switch the input jack assigned to an input source when more than one jacks are assigned to an input source. 1 2 Rotate the C INPUT selector (or press one of the input selector buttons (3)) to select the desired input source. Press D AUDIO SELECT and then rotate M PROGRAM selector (or set the operation mode to FAMP and then press FAUDIO SEL repeatedly) to select the desired audio input jack select setting. V-AUX VCR DVR CBL/SAT DVD BD/HD DVD A.SEL: MD/CD-R TV CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER XM SIRIUS AUTO Selected audio input jack select setting AUTO You can configure the multi channel input settings with “MULTI CH” (page 85). Note Sound field programs cannot be selected when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source. Use this feature to select the HDMI OUT jack(s) to output the input signals. Set the operation mode selector to FAMP and then press RHDMI OUT on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired setting. The HDMI output setting changes as follows. Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) HDMI (2) Digital signals (3) Analog signals HDMI Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI signals are not input, no sound is output. COAX/OPT Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL jack. (2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL jack. When no signals are input, no sound is output. ANALOG y OUT1+2 OFF y You can configure the default audio input jack select setting with “Audio Select” (page 85). OUT1 OUT2 OUT 1+2 Outputs the signals at both the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks simultaneously. OUT 1 Outputs the signals at the HDMI OUT 1 jack. OUT 2 Outputs the signals at the HDMI OUT 2 jack. OFF Does not output any signals at the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks. Select this setting when you do not use the video monitor connected to one of the HDMI OUT jacks. Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. BASIC OPERATION DOCK Rotate the C INPUT selector on the front panel to select “MULTI CH” (or press 3 MULTI). Selecting the HDMI OUT jack Available input sources USB NET Use this feature to select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks (page 22) as the input source. y You can select the HDMI OUT jack at which HDMI control signals are output with “Control Monitor” (page 95). Note This feature is not available if no digital input jack is assigned to the selected input source in “I/O Assignment” (page 98). “HDMI” is available only when an HDMI input jack is assigned. English 37 En Playback Using your headphones Displaying the input source information Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on the front panel. You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel, bit rate and flag data of the current input signal. 1 Set the operation mode selector to FAMP and then press 8STATUS on the remote control. The input source information screen appears in the GUI screen. 2 Press 9l / h to toggle between the audio and video information. 3 Press 8STATUS on the remote control again to exit from the input source information screen. PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT/ REC OUT MENU TONE CONTROL ENTER PRESET/TUNING/CH MEMORY SEARCH MODE STEREO/ MONO INFO CATEGORY BAND INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO VIDEO AUX OPTICAL USB ON OFF MASTER y When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode activates automatically (page 45). ■ Audio information Format Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a digital signal, it automatically switches to analog input. Sampling The number of samples per second taken from a continuous signal to make a discrete signal. Channel The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”. Bitrate The number of bits passing a given point per second. Dialogue The dialogue normalization level preset to the current input bitstream signal. Flag1/Flag2 Flag data encoded in the bitstream, or PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. Notes • When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker terminals. • All digital multi-channel audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. • When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, only the signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT FRONT jacks are output. Muting the audio output Press L MUTE on the remote control to mute the audio output. Press L MUTE again to resume the audio output. y • The VOLUME level indicator flashes while the mute function is on. • You can configure the muting level with “Muting Type” (page 90). 38 En Notes • “–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding information. • Some high definition audio bitstream contents may not include the discrete surround back left and right channel signals but are encoded at the bitrate of 192 kHz. • Even if you make settings to output bitstreams directly, some players convert the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus bitstreams to the Dolby Digital bitstreams, while converting the DTS-HD Master Audio or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio bitstreams to the DTS bitstreams. Playback ■ Video information HDMI signal Type of the source video signals and the video signals output at the HDMI OUT jacks of this unit. HDMI Resolution Resolution of the input signal (analog or HDMI) and the output signal (HDMI). Analog Resolution Resolution of the source video signals and the analog video signals output at the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT jacks of this unit. HDMI Error Error message for HDMI sources or connected HDMI devices. Using the sleep timer Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to the AC OUTLET(S) (page 25). Set the operation mode selector to FAMP and then press CSLEEP on the remote control repeatedly to set the amount of time. The sleep timer setting changes as shown below. HDMI error message 120min. The number of the connected HDMI components is over the limit. HDCP Error (HDMI Message) HDCP authentication failed. Out Of Resolution Out of resolution. The connected monitor is not compatible with the resolution of the input video signal. OFF 90min. 30min. 60min. Once the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. To cancel the sleep timer Set the operation mode selector to FAMP and then press CSLEEP on the remote control repeatedly to select “SLEEP OFF”. BASIC OPERATION Device Over y If you set the main zone to the standby mode, the sleep timer is automatically canceled. English 39 En Sound field programs This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. y The Yamaha CINEMA DSP sound field programs are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Surround, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio sources. Selecting sound field programs Rotate the M PROGRAM selector (or set the operation mode selector to FAMP and then press one of the sound field selector buttons (Q) repeatedly). The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the short message display. y • You can select the desired sound field program and setting the parameters by using the GUI menu (page 80). • Available sound field parameters and the created sound field differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit. 40 En Notes • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (page 37) or when this unit is in the PURE DIRECT mode (page 47). • When you play back DTS 96/24 sources with any sound field program, this unit applies the selected program without activating the DTS 96/24 decoder. • Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz are sampled down to 48 kHz or lower and then sound field programs are applied. Sound field programs Descriptions of the characteristics of the sound field programs Following indexes indicates the characteristics and trends of each sound field program. Note The characteristics of the sound field programs may differ depending on the settings of the listening room, etc. Size of sound field space (Size) Small Sound field atmosphere (Atmosphere) Large Simple Complex Indicates the size of the sound field to be generated. If the value for this item is small, the sound is that of a small space, while if the value is large, the sound is that of a vast space. whether it is nearer to one or the other of the following; Calm: An overall composed, moderate effect, stressing the overall quality of the atmosphere without aiming at any Front Rear extreme effects. This suits almost all contents relatively A CINEMA DSP sound field processing expressing well, but provides little showiness or powerfulness. whether the effect is stronger towards the front or rear. Powerful: Designed with specific contents in mind When the effect is stronger towards the front, the listener (expressing vast spaces, feverish excitement, etc.). This is senses a feeling of openness and depth towards the screen, extremely effective for the right contents, but is suited for a while when the effect is stronger towards the rear, the smaller range of contents. listener gets a sense of envelopment and movement. Suits basically all types of contents for programs with a good front/rear balance, and is effective when selected appropriately for programs in which the balance is more towards either the front or rear. BASIC OPERATION The sound field to be generated is evaluated according to whether it is nearer to one or the other of the following; Simple: Sounds that fade straight-forwardly, with a light, gentle impression, depending on the program. This suits almost all contents relatively well, but provides little brilliance or powerfulness. Vertical/horizontal balance (V/H balance) Complex: Sounds transform in complex ways as they fade out, with a rich, brilliant impression, depending on the Vertical Horizontal Indicates the balance of the vertical (height) and horizontal program. directions for the sound field to be generated. If this item is This is extremely effective for the right contents, but is suited for a smaller range of contents. more in the horizontal direction, the sound is that of a space with strong reflections from the walls, while if it is more in the vertical direction, the sound is that of a space Calm Powerful with strong reflections from the ceiling. The sound field to be generated is evaluated according to Front/rear balance (F/R balance) ■ For audio music sources y For audio music sources, we also recommend using the PURE DIRECT mode (page 47), STRAIGHT mode (page 46), or surround decode mode (page 74). CLASSICAL 1 CLASSICAL Hall in Munich Size This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Large V/H balance Vertical Horizontal Atmosphere Simple Complex Size Small Large V/H balance Vertical Horizontal Atmosphere Simple Complex 41 En English Hall in Vienna Small Sound field programs Hall in Amsterdam The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2200 around the circle stage. Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely. Size Small Large V/H balance Vertical Horizontal Atmosphere Simple Complex Size Small Church in Freiburg Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself reproduces the atmosphere of the church. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. LIVE/CLUB 2 Large V/H balance Vertical Horizontal Atmosphere Simple Complex Size Small Large V/H balance Vertical Horizontal Atmosphere Simple Complex Size Small LIVE/CLUB Village Vanguard The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in the corner. Warehouse Loft The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy. Cellar Club This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, that was a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. 42 En Large V/H balance Vertical Horizontal Atmosphere Simple Complex Size Small Large V/H balance Vertical Horizontal Atmosphere Simple Complex Size Small Large V/H balance Vertical Horizontal Atmosphere Simple Complex Size Small Large V/H balance Vertical Horizontal Atmosphere Simple Complex Size Small Large V/H balance Vertical Horizontal Atmosphere Simple Complex Sound field programs ■ For various sources ENTERTAIN 3 ENTERTAIN Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly on the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium. Size Small Large V/H balance Vertical F/R balance Front Rear Atmosphere Calm Powerful Size Small Large Horizontal ■ For game programs ENTERTAIN 3 ENTERTAIN Action Game Roleplaying Game This sound field is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field design used with “Action Game” to represent the depth and spatial feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game. V/H balance Vertical F/R balance Front Rear Atmosphere Calm Powerful Small Large Size V/H balance Vertical Horizontal BASIC OPERATION This sound field is suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of directions. Horizontal F/R balance Front Rear Atmosphere Calm Powerful Size Small Large ■ For visual sources of music ENTERTAIN 3 ENTERTAIN Music Video This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. V/H balance Vertical F/R balance Front Rear Atmosphere Calm Powerful Size Small Large Horizontal Recital/Opera This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices. “Recital/Opera” offers the reverberations of an orchestra box in front of the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment. V/H balance Vertical F/R balance Front Rear Atmosphere Calm Powerful Horizontal English 43 En Sound field programs ■ For movie sources y You can select the desired decoder (page 74) used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”). MOVIE 4 MOVIE Standard This program create a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear. Spectacle This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions. It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound. Size Small V/H balance Vertical Large Horizontal F/R balance Front Rear Atmosphere Calm Powerful Size Small Large V/H balance Vertical Horizontal F/R balance Front Rear Atmosphere Calm Powerful Size Small Large V/H balance Vertical Horizontal F/R balance Front Rear Atmosphere Calm Powerful Size Small Large V/H balance Vertical F/R balance Front Rear Atmosphere Calm Powerful Small Large Horizontal Drama This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum spatial feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing. Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound depth. 44 En Size V/H balance Vertical F/R balance Front Rear Atmosphere Calm Powerful Size Small Large Horizontal V/H balance Vertical F/R balance Front Rear Atmosphere Calm Powerful Horizontal Sound field programs ■ Stereo playback STEREO 5 STEREO 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. 7ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the source to 2 channels, and then output the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. ■ For compression artifacts (Compressed Music Enhancer mode) ENHANCER Straight Enhancer Use this program to improve the sound enhancer nearest to the original depth and width of the 2-channel or multi-channel compression artifacts. 7ch Enhancer Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7channel stereo. Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP sound field programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field. When you set “Surround” to “None” (page 87), Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (page 40). Note Virtual CINEMA DSP does not activate in the following cases: – “MULTI CH“ is selected as the input source (page 37). – headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. – the unit is in the “7ch Stereo” mode (page 45). ■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and sound field programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP sound field programs (page 40). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION ENHANCER 6 ■ Using sound field programs without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) Note SILENT CINEMA does not activate in the following cases: – “MULTI CH“ is selected as the input source (page 37). – the unit is in the “2ch Stereo” (page 45), STRAIGHT (page 46) or “PURE DIRECT” (page 47) mode. ■ Surround decoder mode SUR. DECODE 7 SUR. DECODE Surround Decoder Use this program to play back sources with using the desired surround decoders (page 74). English 45 En Sound field programs Before performing the following operation, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to FAMP. Before performing the following operation, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to FAMP. Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode Enjoying unprocessed input sources CINEMA DSP 3D mode creates the intensive and accurate stereoscopic sound field in the listening room. You can activate and deactivate the CINEMA DSP 3D mode. Press P 3D DSP repeatedly to turn on or off the CINEMA DSP 3D mode. While this unit is in the CINEMA DSP 3D mode, the 3D indicator lights up. Note CINEMA DSP 3D does not activate (“3D:--“ appears) in the following cases: – the “Front Presence” setting is set to “None” (page 88). – no CINEMA DSP is selected. – headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. 46 En When this unit is in the STRAIGHT mode, 2-channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. Press N STRAIGHT (or T STRAIGHT) to select “STRAIGHT”. The names of the audio signal format of the input source and the active decoder appear in the front panel display. To deactivate the STRAIGHT mode Press NSTRAIGHT (or TSTRAIGHT) again or select another sound field program (page 40). Using audio features Before performing the following operation, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to FAMP. Before performing the following operation, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to FAMP. Enjoying pure hi-fi sound Adjusting the speaker level Use the PURE DIRECT mode to enjoy the pure fidelity sound of the selected source. When the PURE DIRECT mode is activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry. You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Note Press LPURE DIRECT (or N PURE DIRECT) to turn on or off the PURE DIRECT mode. The L PURE DIRECT button on the front panel lights up and the front panel display automatically turns off while this unit is in the PURE DIRECT mode. This operation will override the level adjustments made in the automatic setup (page 30) and “Level” (page 89). 1 Press C LEVEL and then 9k / n repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. Display • The following operations are not possible when this unit is in the PURE DIRECT mode: – switching the sound field program – displaying the GUI menu • The PURE DIRECT mode is automatically canceled whenever this unit is turned off. Adjusted speaker FRONT L Front left speaker FRONT R Front right speaker CENTER Center speaker SUR.L Surround left speaker To make this unit output video signals during the PURE DIRECT mode, configure the “Pure Direct” setting (page 93). SUR.R Surround right speaker SB L Surround back left speaker Adjusting the tonal quality SB R Surround back right speaker FP L Presence left speaker FP R Presence right speaker SWFR Subwoofer y Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for the front L/R and center speaker channels and the subwoofer channel. 1 2 Press D TONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency response (BASS). Rotate the M PROGRAM selector to adjust the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency response (BASS). Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB BASIC OPERATION Notes y The available speaker channels differ depending on the speaker settings. 2 Press 9l / h on the remote control to adjust the speaker output level. Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Selecting the recording source Use this feature to select a source component from which you want to record. Notes 1 Press and hold D REC OUT until “REC OUT” appears in the front panel display. 2 Rotate M PROGRAM to select the source component. y To record the input source currently selected, select “SOURCE”. 47 En English • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match that of the front L/R and center speakers and the subwoofer. • TONE CONTROL is not effective when the PURE DIRECT mode is activated, or when “MULTI CH“ is selected as the input source. FM/AM tuning Overview Note If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, search the station manually or enter the frequency directly (page 48). You can use two tuning modes to tune into the desired FM/AM station: Frequency tuning mode You can search or specify the frequency of the desired FM/AM station automatically or manually (see “FM/AM tuning operations” on this page). y • When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up. • To switch the information (current input source, current sound field program, etc) displayed in the front panel display, press KINFO (or set the operation mode to FAMP and then press CINFO) repeatedly. • To switch between stereo or monaural FM reception, press ISTEREO/MONO (or OAUDIO). • (U.S.A. model only) If this unit is tuned into an HD Radio station (page 51), the HD indicator lights up in the front panel display. Preset tuning mode You can preset the desired FM/AM station in advance, and then recall the station by specifying the preset group and number (see “Recalling a preset station” on page 50). Note Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception. Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE and then press 3TUNER. ■ Direct frequency tuning Use this feature tune into the desired station directly by entering the frequency. 1 Follow steps 1 and 2 in “FM/AM tuning operations” (page 48) to select the desired reception band. 2 Enter the frequency of the desired station by pressing the numeric buttons (B). Example: To tune into 103.7 MHz FM/AM tuning operations 1 Press JBAND (or 8BAND) to select the desired reception band. 2 If the PRESET indicator in the front panel lights up, press HSEARCH MODE (or ISRCH MODE) to turn it off. 1 0 3 7 y FM 88.9MHz PRESET turns off 3 To search the station automatically, press and hold FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or press 9PRESET/CH k / n) for about 2 seconds. To search the station manually, press FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h repeatedly. • To tune into a higher frequency, press Fh (or 9k). • To tune into a lower frequency, press Fl (or 9n). 48 En If the entered frequency is out of the range of the FM/AM tuning, “WRONG STATION!” appears in the front panel display. FM/AM tuning Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE and then press 3TUNER. • (U.S.A. model only) When this unit stores the FM HD Radio stations with this feature, this unit stores only the main audio program of the stations (HD1). When you want to store the sub-audio programs of the FM HD Radio stations, preset the stations manually. Preset FM/AM stations ■ Manual station preset Use this feature to store up to 40 stations FM/AM stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups). Preset the desired stations to this unit by using the automatic or manual station preset. Use this feature to store the FM or AM stations manually. ■ Automatic station preset (U.S.A. model only) You can store the analog FM/AM radio stations and FM/ AM HD Radio stations manually, and you can also store the sub-audio programs of FM HD Radio station. You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up to 40 FM stations with strong signals in order. 1 (U.S.A. model only) You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up to 40 AM HD Radio, FM HD Radio, and analog FM radio stations with strong signals. Tune into a station. See page 48 for tuning instructions. y (U.S.A. model only) 1 Press JBAND (or 8BAND) to select the desired reception band. This unit searches the stations in the selected band and then another band. 2 Press and hold JBAND (or 8BAND) for more than 3 seconds. The MEMORY indicator flashes and “AUTO MEMORY” appears in the front panel display. After approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current frequency and proceeds toward higher frequencies. 2 Press GMEMORY (or 0MEMORY). The PRESET indicator lights up in the front panel and this unit automatically selects an empty preset number. BASIC OPERATION (U.S.A. model only) To store a sub-audio program of the HD Radio station (HD2 to HD8), press APRG SELECT b / a repeatedly to select the desired audio program (page 51). Lights up PRESET y • To store the selected station under an empty preset number automatically, press and hold GMEMORY (or 0MEMORY) for more than 2 seconds instead of step 2. In this case, the following steps are unnecessary. • To cancel the manual station preset, press GMEMORY (or 0MEMORY) again. Flashes A1 FM 88.9MHz AUTO MEMORY MEMORY Flashes When automatic preset tuning is completed, the MEMORY indicator disappears. y • To specify the preset group and number from which this unit stores stations, press FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 9CAT./A-E l / h and 9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly after you perform step 2. • To cancel the automatic station preset, press JBAND (or 8BAND) again. 3 To select the preset group and number (A1 to E8), press FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 9CAT./A-E l / h and 9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly. • To select a higher preset station group and number, press Fh (or 9k). • To select a lower preset station group and number, press Fl (or 9n). Preset station group and number Notes PRESET MEMORY C2 FM 88.9MHz English • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8), automatic preset tuning automatically stops after searching for all the available stations. MEMORY A1 FM 88.9MHz 49 En FM/AM tuning y • You can also select a preset number (1 to 8) by pressing the numeric buttons (B). • If you select a preset number being used (“*” appears next to the preset number), the current preset station will be overwritten. 4 Press EENTER (or 9ENTER). The preset station is set and the PRESET indicator disappears. Note The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. Notes • (U.S.A. model only) When you recall one of the sub-audio program (HD2 to HD8) of an FM HD Radio station, it takes a few seconds for this unit to recall the desired program. While this unit recalls the subaudio program, this unit outputs the sound of the analog service of the station. • (U.S.A. model only) If the selected sub-audio program is currently not available, this unit is tuned into the main audio program, and if the main audio program is also not available, this unit is tuned into the analog service. ■ Clearing preset stations ■ Recalling a preset station You can clear the assignments of preset stations. y 1 Select the preset station you want to clear. For details, see “Recalling a preset station” (page 50). 2 Press and hold HSEARCH MODE (or ISRCH MODE) until “CLEAR?” appears in the front panel display. (U.S.A. model only) You can search for preset HD Radio stations by specifying a keyword (station name) with “Station Search” (page 86). 1 If the PRESET indicator in the front panel turns off, press HSEARCH MODE (or ISRCH MODE) to turn it on. PRESET A FM 88.9MHz Lights up You cannot enter the preset tuning mode if no preset station is set in advance. Press FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to select the desired preset station group and number (A1 to E8). PRESET A5 FM 89.5MHz Preset station group and number y • Empty preset numbers are skipped. • You can also select a preset station group (A to E) by pressing 9CAT./A-E l / h and number (1 to 8) by pressing the numeric buttons (B), 50 En 3 Press EENTER (or 9ENTER) to clear the preset station. y Note 2 A1 CLEAR?[ENT] FM 88.9MHz To cancel the operation, press HSEARCH MODE (or ISRCH MODE) again. Using HD Radio™ features (U.S.A. model only) HD Radio technology is a new technology that enables FM and AM radio stations to broadcast programs digitally. Digital broadcasting provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and reception as well as new data services. Furthermore, supplemental program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio programs multicast on a single FM HD Radio channel. For further information on HD Radio technology, visit “http://www.ibiquity.com/”. This unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM stereo quality AM broadcasts. In addition, this unit can receive both audio and data (such as song titles, artist names, program types, and comments) from supplemental program services (HD1 to HD8). Notes • The tuning method for HD Radio stations are same as analog FM/AM radio stations; however, you cannot tune into a hybrid HD Radio station while this unit is in the monaural tuning mode (page 48). • This unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital HD Radio station signals. However, this unit may not automatically receive all-digital FM station signals and the automatic tuning operation may stop. In this case, enter the frequency of the desired all-digital FM HD Radio station directly by using the numeric buttons (A) (page 48). Selecting HD Radio™ audio programs • Some audio programs may not contain data programs depending on the broadcasting station and the time period. • For the best reception, adjust the orientation of the antenna so that “ ” or “ ” is displayed. Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE and then press 3TUNER. Use this feature to select one of the 8 HD Radio audio programs (HD1 to HD8) when the unit is in the tuner mode. Each audio program contains data programs. When the selected FM HD Radio station provides some audio programs, currently selected audio program number appears in the front panel display as follows. BASIC OPERATION Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE and then press 3TUNER. Using the iTunes Tagging feature This unit is equipped with the iTunes Tagging feature that enables HD Radio listeners to “tag” songs for subsequent preview and purchase on iTunes. For details on the iTunes Tagging feature, visit “http://www.ibiquity.com/”. Audio program 1 FM 88.9MHz1 WXYZ-FM <1/3> HD Press 0PRG SELECT b / a on the remote control repeatedly to toggle between HD Radio audio programs. Lights up FM 88.9MHz1 WXYZ-FM <1/3> y You can also select the desired HD Radio audio program by pressing the numeric key. While this unit is in the automatic or manual tuning mode, press a numeric button (1-8) (A) and then MENT. Notes 2 HD TAG While a song you want to tag is being played back, press ATAG. The song is tagged and “TAG OK” appears in the front panel display and GUI screen. English • Only 1 HD Radio audio program (HD1) is available for AM broadcasts, while up to 8 audio programs (HD1 to HD8) are available for FM broadcasts. The audio programs from HD2 to HD8 can be selected only when they contain data programs. • When reception for an audio program ceases, the HD indicator disappears from the front panel display and HD1 is automatically selected after approximately 20 seconds. Tune into an HD Radio station and select HD Radio audio program (if available). If the selected station supports the iTunes Tagging feature, the TAG indicator lights up in the front panel display and “TAG” appears in the GUI screen. 51 En Using HD Radio™ features (U.S.A. model only) Notes TAG INFO • “Not Available’ appears in the front panel display and GUI screen if tagging is not available. • If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel display or in the GUI screen, see “iTunes Tagging” (page 129) The number of iTunes Tagging information files stored in the internal memory, iTunes Tagging message y • This unit transmits the iTunes Tagging information to the iPod if an iPod that supports iTunes Tagging feature is stationed in the Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. Otherwise, this unit stores the information in the internal memory and will transmit it next time your iPod is stationed. Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to FAMP. ANTENNA INFO Antenna reception level DSP PROG. INFO Sound field program INPUT INFO Input source Displaying HD Radio™ information Use this feature to display the HD Radio information in the front panel display or in the GUI screen. y • You can configure the display settings with “Display Set” (page 98). • To hold or release the displayed information, set the operation mode selector to FSOURCE and then press 9ENTER. While it is held, the HOLD indicator flashes in the front panel. Back to “STATION INFO” ■ GUI screen Press KDISPLAY on the remote control to turn on or off the information display. The following information is displayed in the GUI screen. ■ Front panel display Press KINFO (or CINFO) repeatedly to toggle between the following HD Radio information displays. STATION INFO Station information such as station name, audio program (only when multiple audio programs are available) and frequency [6] A1 [1] [2] [3] [4] FM 88.9MHZ 1 WXYZ-FM : Classic Rock : Frankie Zipper STEREO HD<1/2> [TAG] [7] [8] [9] : Road to India [5] : Made-to-order Play Information Hold:ENTER [1] Preset station group and number, frequency, station name [2] Program category [3] Artist name CATEGORY INFO [4] Song title Program category [5] Album title [6] Antenna reception level SONG INFO [7] Stereo/mono Artist name, song title [8] “TAG” (only when tagging is available) ALBUM INFO Album title 52 En [9] Audio program number (currently selected/ total) XM® Satellite Radio tuning XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news, talk and entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior digital audio from coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from classical to hip hop, XM has something for every music fan. XM Satellite Radio online information For U.S. customers: http://www.xmradio.com/ For Canadian customers: http://www.xmradio.ca/ Note The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada. XM READY legal disclaimer ■ Enjoying XM HD Surround content BASIC OPERATION XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock required (each sold separately) to receive XM service. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System. Installation costs and other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800-XMRADIO (U.S. residents) and 1-877-GETXMSR (Canadian residents). XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada. ©2008 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. This unit is equipped with the Neural-THX and Neural-THX Music decoders that play back the XM HD surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience (page 74). Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock Connect XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see the operating instructions provided with the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock. XM y To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals, the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock must be placed at or near a southerly facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors. Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information in the front panel or in the GUI screen (page 56) to check the antenna reception level and adjust the orientation of the antenna. Notes • If “CHECK ANTENNA” or “CHECK XM TUNER” appears in the front panel display, the connection and setting of the antenna, XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, or XM Mini-Tuner may not be correct. • If “UPGRADE XM TUNER” appears in the front panel display, the connected XM Mini-Tuner is incompatible with this unit. XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock (sold separately) English 53 En XM® Satellite Radio tuning Activating XM Satellite Radio 2 Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM MiniTuner Home Dock to your XM Ready® home audio system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There are three places to find your eight character XM Radio ID: On the XM Mini-Tuner, on the XM Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0. Record the XM Radio ID in the following eight squares for reference. Search for a channel by using one of the XM Satellite Radio search modes. • To select a channel from the all channel list, see “All Channel Search mode” (page 54). • To select a channel by category, see “Category Search mode” (page 54). • To select a channel from the preset channels, see “Preset Search mode” (page 55). • To select the desired channel directly by entering the channel number, see “Direct number access mode” (page 55). y Note The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”. Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at http://activate.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800967-2346). Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in Canada online at https://activate.xmradio.ca/ or call 1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677). You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal from the satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during peak busy periods you may need to keep your XM Ready home audio system on for up to an hour. When you can access the full lineup on your XM Ready home audio system you are done. • You can use the Neural Surround decoder to enjoy the XM HD surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels (page 74). • You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (page 55). • You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display or in the GUI screen (page 56). ■ All Channel Search mode 1 Press HSEARCH MODE (or ISRCH MODE) repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH”. 2 Press FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a channel within all channels. Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE. y You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 9PRESET/CH k / n). XM Satellite Radio operations 1 ■ Category Search mode Rotate the CINPUT selector (or press 3XM) to select “XM” as the input source. The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title) for the currently selected channel appears in the front panel display. Lights up USB NET DOCK V-AUX VCR DVR CBL/SAT DVD BD/HD DVD MD/CD-R TV CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER XM 1 Press HSEARCH MODE (or ISRCH MODE) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”. 2 Press JCATEGORY (or 9A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly to change the channel category. 3 Press FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a channel within the selected channel category. SIRIUS 001 Preview y y When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit automatically recalls the previously selected channel. Notes • The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the analog AUDIO OUT jacks. • If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel display or in the GUI screen, see “XM Satellite Radio” (page 130) 54 En You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 9PRESET/CH k / n). XM® Satellite Radio tuning ■ Preset Search mode Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For details, see “Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels” (page 55). 1 Press HSEARCH MODE (or ISRCH MODE) repeatedly to select “PRESET SEARCH”. 2 Press JCATEGORY (or 9A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly to change the preset channel group (A to E). 3 Press FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to change the preset channel number (1 to 8). Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE and then press 3XM. Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel group and number as described in “Preset Search mode” (page 55). 1 You can also select the preset channel number directly by pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) (B). ■ Direct number access mode 1 2 043 XMU Press ISRCH MODE on the remote control repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”. Press the numeric buttons (B) to enter the desired three-digit channel number. For example, to enter the number 123, press the numeric buttons (B) as shown below. BASIC OPERATION y Search for a channel you want to set as a preset channel by using one of the XM Satellite Radio search modes. For details, see “XM Satellite Radio operations” (page 54). Channel number 2 Press GMEMORY (or 0MEMORY). The PRESET indicator lights up in the front panel and this unit automatically selects an empty preset number. Lights up 1 2 3 PRESET y • To display the XM Radio ID number in the front panel display, select channel “0”. • To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the numeric buttons (B) on the remote control and then press NENT to confirm the input number. • Instead of pressing NENT to tune into the channel immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel number. • Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons (B) or NENT cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure. MEMORY A1 043 XMU y • To store the selected channel under an empty preset number automatically, press and hold GMEMORY (or 0MEMORY) for more than 2 seconds instead of step 2. In this case, the following steps are unnecessary. • To cancel the preset operation, press GMEMORY (or 0MEMORY) again. 3 55 En English To select the preset channel group and number (A1 to E8), press FPRESET/ TUNING/CH l / h (or 9CAT./A-E l / h and 9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly. • To select a higher preset channel group and number, press Fh (or 9k). • To select a lower preset channel group and number, press Fl (or 9n). XM® Satellite Radio tuning y • You can also select a preset number (1 to 8) by pressing the numeric buttons (B). • If you select a preset number being used (“*” appears next to the preset number), the current preset channel will be overwritten. 4 Press EENTER (or 9ENTER). The preset channel is set and the PRESET indicator disappears. ■ Clearing preset channels You can clear the assignments of preset XM Satellite Radio channels. 1 Select the preset XM Satellite Radio channel to clear. For details, see “Preset Search mode” (page 55). 2 Press and hold HSEARCH MODE (or ISRCH MODE) until “CLEAR?” appears in the front panel display. 3 Press EENTER (or 9ENTER) to clear the preset channel. To cancel the operation, press HSEARCH MODE (or ISRCH MODE). Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to FAMP. Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information Use this feature to display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display or in the GUI screen. y • You can configure the display settings with “Display Set” (page 98). • You can hold or release the displayed information by pressing 9ENTER. While it is held, the HOLD indicator flashes in the front panel. Notes • If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel display or GUI screen, see “XM Satellite Radio” (page 130). • The current XM Satellite Radio reception level appears on the top of the XM Satellite Radio information screen. For the best reception, adjust the orientation of the antenna of Home Dock so that “ ” or “ ” is displayed here. “ ” is displayed if the antenna cannot receive the signals correctly. In this case, adjust the orientation of the antenna (page 53). ■ Front panel display Press KINFO (or CINFO) repeatedly to toggle between the following XM Satellite Radio information display modes. CATEGORY INFO Channel category, channel number, channel name SONG INFO Artist name, song title, channel number, channel name ANTENNA INFO Antenna reception level, channel number, channel name DSP PROG. INFO Sound field program INPUT INFO Input source, channel number, channel name 56 En XM® Satellite Radio tuning Back to “CATEGORY INFO” y • If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a space. • When the antenna of the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock cannot receive the signals, “NO SIGNAL” appears in the front panel display. ■ GUI screen Press KDISPLAY on the remote control to turn on or off the information display. The following information is displayed in the GUI screen. [6] [1] [2] [3] [4] Category Search BASIC OPERATION 043 : XMU : Rock : Cold Play : Speed of sound [5] Play Information Hold:ENTER [1] Search mode (page 54) [2] Channel number, channel name [3] Channel category [4] Artist name [5] Song title [6] Antenna reception level English 57 En SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning SIRIUS Satellite Radio provides over 130 channels of exclusive entertainment and 100% commercial-free music. Only SIRIUS has more than 65 original music channels, from today’s hits to R&B, oldies, and classical masterpieces. From authentic country and real bluegrass to cool jazz, hot latin, reggae, rock and many more. Best of all, it’s all 100% commercial-free. SIRIUS also has more than 55 channels of world-class sports, news and entertainment. Included as part of your subscription, you get up to 16 NFL games a week, up to 40 NBA games a week and up to 40 NHL games a week. (Games are broadcast during their respective seasons.) Coupled with great sports news from ESPN, the SIRIUS sports offering is unrivaled. And don't forget a host of other great news and entertainment, like NPR, CNBC, Fox News, Radio Disney and E! Entertainment Radio. For more information, visit http://www.sirius.com/. SIRIUS Satellite Radio legal disclaimer SIRIUS is available in the U.S.A. for subscribers with addresses in the continental U.S.A. and is available in Canada for subscribers with a Canadian address. To Get SIRIUS Satellite Radio a subscription and compatible tuner and antenna are required and sold separately. Visit sirius.com for the most complete and up-to-date channel lineup and information. “SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo and related marks are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner Connect the SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) to the SIRIUS jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see the operating instructions provided with the SiriusConnect tuner. y • To ensure optimal reception of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals, the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner must be placed at or near a window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. The orientation of the antenna for the best reception differs depending on the area. Refer to the instruction manuals supplied with the SiriusConnect tuner for the installation of the antenna.You can mount it indoors or outdoors. • Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information in the front panel or in the GUI screen (page 63) to check the antenna reception level and adjust the orientation of the antenna. • You need to connect the SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall outlet. Notes SIRIUS T AN DC 58 En 5V • If “CHECK SR TUNER” or “ANTENNA ERROR” appears in the front panel display, the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner or antenna is incorrect. In such cases, check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and the antenna. • If “NOT SUPPORTED” appears in the front panel display, this unit does not support the connected SiriusConnect tuner. SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ subscription Before using the SIRIUS Satellite Radio feature, you need to activate your SIRIUS Satellite Radio subscription. To activate the subscription you need the Sirius ID which is uniquely assigned to the SiriusConnect tuner. Sirius ID is 12-digit number and it appears on the package of the SiriusConnect tuner, on the label of the SiriusConnect tuner, and when you tune into the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel “0” (see below). Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE. SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations 1 ■ Displaying the Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner 1 Set the operation mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE and then press 3SIRIUS. Rotate the CINPUT selector (or press 3SIRIUS) to select “SIRIUS” as the input source. The cursor on the left of the SIRIUS indicator lights up in the front panel display and the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title) for the currently selected channel appears in the front panel display. Lights up 2 Press B0 and then NENT to display the Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner. “000 Sirius IDxxxxxxxxxxxx” (“xxxxxxxxxxxx” indicates the 12-digit Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner) appears in the front panel display. VCR DVR CBL/SAT DVD BD/HD DVD MD/CD-R TV CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER XM SIRIUS 184 SIRIUS Wea When you select “SIRIUS” as the input source, this unit automatically recalls the previously selected channel. Notes • The SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the analog AUDIO OUT jacks. • When you have not activated your subscription yet, you can only select channel “184” or “000”. • If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel display or in the GUI screen, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (page 131). ID: Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to activate your subscription. SIRIUS Satellite Radio online information Contact for activation URL: https//activate.siriusradio.com/ Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474) V-AUX y Write the Sirius ID below. 3 DOCK BASIC OPERATION USB NET 2 y Status messages appear in the front panel display or GUI screen during the activation. For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (page 131). Once the activation is finished, “SUB UPDATED” appears. Search for a channel by using one of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio search modes. • To select a channel from the all channel list, see “All Channel Search mode” (page 60). • To select a channel by category, see “Category Search mode” (page 60). • To select a channel from the preset channels, see “Preset Search mode” (page 60). • To select the desired channel directly by entering the channel number, see “Direct number access mode” (page 60). y 59 En English • If you tune into a channel that you do not subscribe, “CALL 888-539-SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE” appears in the front panel display. • You can set the SIRIUS Satellite Radio preset channels (page 61). • You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information in the front panel display or in the GUI screen (page 63). SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning ■ All Channel Search mode 1 Press HSEARCH MODE (or ISRCH MODE) repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH”. 2 Press FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a channel within all channels. y • You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 9PRESET/CH k / n). • You can skip channels to the previous or next category by pressing JCATEGORY (or 9A-E/CAT. l / h). ■ Category Search mode 1 2 3 ■ Preset Search mode Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search mode, you must preset SIRIUS channels. For details, see “Setting the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ preset channels” (page 61). 1 Press HSEARCH MODE (or ISRCH MODE) repeatedly to select “PRESET SEARCH”. 2 Press JCATEGORY (or 9A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly to change the preset channel group (A to E). 3 Press FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to change the preset channel number (1 to 8). Press HSEARCH MODE (or ISRCH MODE) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”. Press JCATEGORY (or 9A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly to change the channel category. Press FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a channel within the selected channel category. y y You can also select the preset channel number directly by pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) (B). ■ Direct number access mode 1 Press ISRCH MODE on the remote control repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”. 2 Press the numeric buttons (B) to enter the desired three-digit channel number. For example, to enter the number 123, press the numeric buttons (B) as shown below. You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding FPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 9PRESET/CH k / n). Note This unit skips the channels when this unit is in the All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode in the following cases (it is not malfunction of this unit): – the channel is locked (page 62). – the channel is out of service. – you do not subscribe to the channel. 1 2 3 y • To display the Sirius ID number displayed in the front panel display, select channel “0”. • To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the numeric buttons (B) on the remote control and then press NENT to confirm the input number. • Instead of pressing NENT to tune into the channel immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel number. • If no button is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms the entered channel number. • If the selected channel is locked, “PIN:____” appears in the front panel display. Enter the four-digit Parental Lock code number by using the numeric buttons (B) or press NENT to cancel (page 62). 60 En SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning y Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE and then press 3SIRIUS. Setting the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ preset channels You can use this feature to store up to 40 SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel group and number as described in “Preset Search mode” (page 60). 1 001 SIRIUS Hit Channel number 2 4 Press EENTER (or 9ENTER). The preset channel is set and the PRESET indicator disappears. ■ Clearing preset channels You can clear the assignments of preset SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels. 1 Select the preset SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel to clear. For details, see “Preset Search mode” (page 60). 2 Press and hold HSEARCH MODE (or ISRCH MODE) until “CLEAR?” appears in the front panel display. 3 Press EENTER (or 9ENTER) to clear the preset channel. To cancel the operation, press HSEARCH MODE (or ISRCH MODE). BASIC OPERATION Search for a channel you want to set as a preset channel by using one of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio search modes. For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations” (page 59). • You can also select a preset number (1 to 8) by pressing the numeric buttons (B). • If you select a preset number being used (“*” appears next to the preset number), the current preset channel will be overwritten. Press GMEMORY (or 0MEMORY). The PRESET indicator lights up in the front panel and this unit automatically selects an empty preset number. Lights up PRESET MEMORY A1 001 SIRIUS HIT y • To store the selected channel under an empty preset number automatically, press and hold GMEMORY (or 0MEMORY) for more than 2 seconds instead of step 2. In this case, the following steps are unnecessary. • To cancel the preset operation, press GMEMORY (or 0MEMORY) again. 3 English To select the preset channel group and number (A1 to E8), press FPRESET/ TUNING/CH l / h (or 9CAT./A-E l / h and 9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly. • To select a higher preset channel group and number, press Fh (or 9k). • To select a lower preset channel group and number, press Fl (or 9n). 61 En SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning Setting the Parental Lock You can use the Parental Lock feature to limit the access to the desired SIRIUS Satellite channels. This unit automatically skips the locked channels when this unit is in the All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode and you search a channel by pressing FPRESET/ TUNING/CH l / h (or 9PRESET/CH k / n). 6 Press 9ENTER to confirm the code number. The SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list screen appears. 7 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired channel category and then press 9ENTER. The SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list screen appears. ■ Setting the code number and the locking channels Note Use this feature to set the Parental Lock code number (PIN) and select the channels to be locked. 1 Set the operation mode selector to FAMP on the remote control and then press IMENU to display the GUI menu. In the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list screen, this unit outputs the sound of the selected channel even if the channel is locked. 8 y If the menu directory other than “Top Menu” (page 79) is displayed, press and hold IMENU to display the top GUI menu. 2 3 4 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Input Select” and then press 9h. y When you select the locked channel and press 9ENTER, this unit unlocks the selected channel. 9 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the SIRIUS Satellite Radio icon and then press 0SUBMENU. Press 9n to select “Parental Lock” and then 9ENTER. The following screen appears. Repeat steps 7 and 8 to lock or unlock another channel. y To switch between the category list screen and channel list screen, press 9k/n/l/h to select “CAT” or “CHAN” and then press 9ENTER. 10 Press 9k / n / l / h to select “EXIT” and then press 9ENTER. 11 Press IMENU to turn off the GUI menu. This unit is tuned into the last channel you select in the “Parental Lock” screen. If the channel is locked, this unit is tuned into “184 SIRIUS Weather & Emergency” or “000 Sirius ID”. NEW PIN Parental Lock Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the channel you want to lock and then press 9ENTER. Check mark appears before the locked channel. 0000 Apply:ENTEWR y y If the Parental Lock code number is already set, “PIN ----” appears instead of “NEW PIN 0000”. 5 Use 9k / n / l / h to enter the desired 4digit code number. • To select a number, press 9k / n. • To move the digit position, press 9l / h. y If the Parental Lock code number is already set, enter it. 62 En • If you forget or want to change the Parental lock code number, use “SIRIUS PIN” (page 122) to reset the Parental Lock code number. • Selecting “ALL” in “INITIALIZE” (page 122) will cancel all parental locks. ■ Tuning into the locked channels You can tune into the locked channels by the Direct number access mode or preset tuning mode. When you tune into the locked channel, following message appears in the front panel display. Enter the code number you set for the Parental Lock feature by using the numeric buttons (B) or press NENT to cancel the tuning. SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning Channel number 018 LOCKED PIN:____ Antenna reception level, channel number, channel name DSP PROG. INFO Sound field program Note If the entered code number is incorrect, “Wrong” appears in the front panel display and this unit is tuned into the previously selected channel. INPUT INFO Input source, channel number, channel name Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to FAMP. Back to “CATEGORY INFO” Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ information y • You can configure the display settings with “Display Set” (page 98). • You can hold or release the displayed information by pressing 9ENTER. While it is held, the HOLD indicator flashes in the front panel. • If the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information contains a character that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a space. • When the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner cannot receive the signals, “ACQUIRING” appears in the front panel display. • When an information is unavailable, “––––” appears. ■ GUI screen Press KDISPLAY on the remote control to turn on or off the information display. The following information is displayed in the GUI screen. [7] Note If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel display or GUI screen, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (page 131). ■ Front panel display [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] ALL CHANNEL SEARCH 008 : Big ’80s : Pop : Sanumemo : Road to India : Frankie Zipper [6] Play Information Press KINFO (or CINFO) repeatedly to toggle between the following SIRIUS Satellite Radio information display modes. CATEGORY INFO Channel category, channel number, channel name BASIC OPERATION Use this feature to display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information in the front panel display or in the GUI screen. y Hold:ENTER [1] Search mode (page 59) [2] Channel number/name [3] Channel category [4] Artist name [5] Song title SONG INFO [6] Composer name Artist name, song title, channel number, channel name [7] Antenna reception level COMPOSER INFO Composer name, channel number, channel name English ANTENNA INFO 63 En Using Bluetooth™ components You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of this unit and enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without wiring between this unit and the Bluetooth component. You need to perform “pairing” the connected Bluetooth receiver and your Bluetooth component in advance. For details about status messages displayed in the front panel display and in the GUI screen, see “Bluetooth” (page 135). Note This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Bluetooth profile. While the Bluetooth receiver is in the pairing mode, DOCK indicator flashes in the front panel display. Pairing the Bluetooth™ receiver and your Bluetooth component y To cancel the pairing, press EENTER (or 9ENTER) again. Pairing must be performed when using a Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth receiver connected to this unit for the first time or if the pairing data has been deleted. “Pairing” refers to the operation of registering a Bluetooth component for Bluetooth communications. 4 Check that the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth receiver. If the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth receiver, “YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in the Bluetooth device list. 5 Select the Bluetooth receiver in the Bluetooth device list and then enter the pass key “0000” on the Bluetooth component. When the pairing procedure is successful, “Completed” appears in the front panel display. y • You need the pairing operation only for the first time when you use the Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth receiver. • Pairing requires operations on this unit and on the other component with which Bluetooth communications are to be established. If necessary, refer to the other component’s operating instructions. There are two pairing methods: pairing by using “Pairing” in the GUI menu and quick pairing. ■ Pairing by using the GUI menu Use this feature to perform pairing with the GUI screen. For details, see “Pairing” (page 86). ■ Quick pairing To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully understand all the instructions before starting. 1 Rotate the CINPUT selector (or set the operation mode selector to FSOURCE and then press 3DOCK) to select “DOCK” as the input source. 2 Turn on your Bluetooth component and then set the Bluetooth component to the pairing mode. For details about how to operate the Bluetooth component, refer to the manual for it. 3 Press and hold EENTER (or 9ENTER) until “Searching” appears in the front panel display. 64 En Note The Yamaha Bluetooth receiver can be paired with up to eight Bluetooth components. When pairing is conducted successfully with a ninth component and the pairing data is registered, the pairing data for the least recently used other component is cleared. Playback of the Bluetooth™ component 1 Rotate the CINPUT selector (or set the operation mode selector to FSOURCE and then press 3DOCK) to select “DOCK” as the input source. 2 Start playback of your Bluetooth component. When the connected Bluetooth receiver detects the Bluetooth component, “BT Connected” appears in the front panel display. y • When you press 9ENTER on the remote control, the connected Bluetooth receiver searches and connect to the last connected Bluetooth component. If the Bluetooth receiver cannot find the Bluetooth component, “Not found” appears in the front panel display. • To disconnect the Bluetooth receiver from the Bluetooth component, press 9ENTER. Music Content menu In “Music Content” menu of the GUI menu, you can browse the music contents of iPod, USB component, PC/ MusicCAST, Internet radio, and Rhapsody® (U.S.A. model only). You can also use the playback control feature or configure the playback style setting for the selected sub input source. Music Content menu operations 1 Navigate the menu of the selected sub input source. For details about the menu items and operation procedure for each sub input source, see the following pages. • iPod (page 66) • USB (page 68) • PC/MCX (page 68) • NET RADIO (page 68) • Rhapsody (page 68) 5 Press IMENU to turn off the GUI menu. Set the operation mode selector to FAMP on the remote control and then press IMENU to display the GUI menu. y If the menu directory other than “Top Menu” (page 79) is displayed, press and hold IMENU to display the top GUI menu. 2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Music Content” and then press 9h. iPod USB PC/MCX BASIC OPERATION 4 Select:ENTER NET RADIO 3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired sub input source and then press 9ENTER. The menu of the selected sub input source appears in the GUI screen. The following screen shows the iPod menu for example. Music Videos Settings "Simple Remote Mode" 1/4 Note If the selected sub input source is not available, “Not Available” appears. English 65 En Using iPod™ Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (page 22), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to enhance the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (page 45). Notes • This unit supports iPod touch, iPod (Click Wheel, including iPod classic), iPod nano and iPod mini. • Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod. • Some features may not be compatible depending on the model of your Yamaha iPod universal dock. The following description is based on using YDS-11. y • Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod Connected” appears in the front panel display. • For details about status messages displayed in the front panel display and in the GUI screen, see “iPod” (page 135). • You can select whether or not this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod when this unit is in the standby mode by configuring the “Standby Charge” setting (page 99). iPod menu tree The following diagram shows the construction of the iPod menu. For information on how to display the iPod menu, see “Music Content menu operations” (page 65). iPod Music Playlists Artists Albums Songs Genres Composers playlists artist list album list song list genre list composer list song list album list song list song list artist list album list album list song list Videos * Settings Repeat Shuffle “Simple Remote Mode” Note * “Videos” does not appear unless your iPod and Yamaha iPod universal dock support the video browsing feature. Also, the folder structure under “Videos” varies depending on the video contents stored on your iPod. 66 En song list Using iPod™ You control your iPod with the following remote control buttons. • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random order. • Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in random order. ■ GUI menu operation y To navigate the iPod menu using the GUI screen, set the operation mode selector to FAMP. • To toggle between setting parameters, press 9ENTER repeatedly. • When “Repeat” is set to “One” or “All”, “ ” or “ ” appears in the GUI screen. • When “Shuffle” is on, “ ” appears in the GUI screen. Controlling iPod™ Button 9 ENTER Function Subsequent menu/Play k Menu up n ■ Simple Remote Mode Menu down l Previous menu h Subsequent menu If you select “Simple Remote Mode” in the iPod menu, this unit turns off the GUI screen and allows you to operate your iPod with the remote control of this unit or controls on your iPod. Turns on/off the submenu when the play information screen is displayed I MENU Turns on/off the GUI menu when the play information screen is not displayed K DISPLAY Turns on/off the play information screen y You can also select the Simple Remote Mode by holding down KDISPLAY for 3 seconds when the operation mode selector is set to FAMP. ■ Play information screen Note [4] You can control your iPod by using the zone OSD. However, the design and available functions may be different from the iPod menu displayed in the GUI screen in the main zone. [1] Frankie Zipper [5] Made-to-order [6] Road to India ■ Playback control operation [2] To operate your iPod using the following remote control buttons, set the operation mode selector to FSOURCE and then press 3DOCK. [3] [7] 1/12 0:51 Play Information BASIC OPERATION 0 SUBMENU -7:44 SUBMENU [8] [9] [1] Album art (if available) Button A ll Function Search backward (Press and hold) [2] Track number/total tracks hh Search forward (Press and hold) [3] Elapsed time a Skip forward [4] b Skip backward s Stop e Pause [5] Shuffle and repeat icons p Play [6] Artist name, album title, song title (playback), (pausing), forward) or (search backward) ■ Playback style settings [7] Progress bar To change the following playback style settings, select “Settings” in the iPod menu. [8] Remaining time Repeat (Repeat) Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a sequence of songs. Choices: Off, One, All • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song. • Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of songs. [9] Submenu icon Submenu items Play Control (Playback control) Select the desired playback control item and then press (or press and hold) 9ENTER to control your iPod. Play Style (Playback style) Select the desired playback style setting and then press 9ENTER repeatedly to toggle between setting parameters. For details on the playback style settings, see “Playback style settings” (page 67). 67 En English Shuffle (Shuffle) Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in random order. Choices: Off, Songs, Albums (search Using USB and network features This unit is equipped with USB and network features that allow you to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, and WMA files saved on your USB storage device, USB portable audio player, PC and Yamaha MCX-2000 or access the Internet Radio. You can also access the Rhapsody® streaming service (U.S.A. model only). Notes • Yamaha MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations. • For further details about networking, refer to the operation manuals supplied with your network devices. Also refer to technical reference books, if needed. • Some WAV, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, and WMA files may not be playable or may be noisy when played. y For details about status messages displayed in the front panel display and in the GUI screen, see “USB and Network” (page 133). USB and network menu tree The following diagram shows the construction of the USB, PC/MCX, NET RADIO and Rhapsody menus. For information on how to display these menus, see “Music Content menu operations” (page 65). USB *1 folder list file list PC/MCX PC server list *2 MusicCAST *2 NET RADIO Bookmarks Locations Genres station list location list *3 genre list New Stations Popular stations Podcasts Help station list station list Podcast list help item list My Library Artists Albums Tracks Playlists Channels Rhapsody *4 Search *5 Rhapsody Music Guide *6 Channels Rhapsody Channels station list Podcast list artist list album list track list playlists channel list album list track list genre list channel list track list track list Notes *1The directory hierarchy of the USB menu varies depending on the folder structure of the connected USB component. *2Only the available PC servers and MCX-2000 are displayed. *3The folder structure under the location list varies depending on your region. *4The account setup screen appears if you have not entered your account information yet. For details, see “Account setup for Rhapsody®” (page 71). *5You can search contents by keyword. *6You can search contents by category provided by Rhapsody®. 68 En Using USB and network features Navigating USB and network menus You can navigate the USB and network menus with the following remote control buttons. ■ Play information screen The following screen shows the play information screen displayed for USB content playback for example. Available information and functions vary depending on the selected sub input source. [3] ■ GUI menu operation [4] To navigate the USB and network menus using the GUI screen, set the operation mode selector to FAMP. Button 9 ENTER Frankie Zipper [1] Made-to-order Road to India Function Subsequent menu/Play [2] 0:51 Play Information SUBMENU k Menu up n Menu down [1] Artist name, album title, song title l Previous menu [2] Elapsed time h Subsequent menu 0 SUBMENU I MENU Turns on/off the GUI menu when the play information screen is not displayed K DISPLAY Turns on/off the play information screen Note You can navigate the USB and network menus by using the zone OSD. However, the design and available functions may be different from the menus displayed in the GUI screen in the main zone. ■ Playback control operation To operate your USB or network component using the following remote control buttons, set the operation mode selector to FSOURCE and then press 3USB/NET. Button A a Function Skip forward (except “NET RADIO”) b Skip backward (except “NET RADIO”) s Stop e Pause/Play (“Rhapsody” only) p Play (Menu browse mode) Play/Pause (Simple remote mode) [3] (playback) [4] Shuffle and repeat icons BASIC OPERATION Turns on/off the submenu when any submenu items are available (submenu icon appears on the bottom right corner of the GUI menu screen) [5] [5] Submenu icon Submenu items Play Control (Playback control) Select the desired playback control item and then press (or press and hold) 9ENTER to control the playback. Play Style (Playback style) Select the desired playback style setting and then press 9ENTER repeatedly to toggle between setting parameters. For details on the playback style settings, see “Playback style settings” (page 67). y To turn on the shuffle feature, set “Shuffle” to “On”. Using a USB storage device or a USB portable audio player Use this feature to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA and MPEG-4 AAC files saved on your USB storage device or USB portable audio player connected to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. Notes Notes • Some button operations do not work depending on the selected sub input source. • (U.S.A. model only) Ae and Ab do not work during Rhapsody channel playback. Aa works up to 30 times every 3 hours. 69 En English • This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT 16 or FAT 32 format) or USB MTP devices. • Only the first partition is displayed in the GUI menu. You cannot select files in other partitions. • Up to 8 levels of directory hierarchy and 500 music files per directory are recognized. • Some devices may not work properly even if they meet the requirements. • Some WAV, MP3, WMA and MPEG-4 AAC files may not be playable or may be noisy when played. • When you connect your USB storage device or USB portable audio player, there may be an about 10 seconds delay. Using USB and network features Using a PC server or Yamaha MCX-2000 Use this feature to enjoy music files saved on your PC or Yamaha MCX-2000. MCX-2000 is a music server that enhances the concept of Yamaha exclusive MusicCAST, a digital music delivery method over a personal network. 1 Install Windows Media Player 11 on your PC, or register this unit on your Yamaha MCX2000. • Refer to “Installing Windows Media Player 11 on your PC” and “Registering this unit on the Yamaha MCX-2000” (page 70). • This procedure is needed only for the first time. • (PC only) You may need to make some settings of Windows Media Player 11 to start the contents sharing. Refer to the attached documents of Windows Media Player 11. 2 Turn on your PC and then share a folder on the PC. The shared folder is added to the PC server list in the top “PC/MCX” menu screen. Notes • If the operating system (OS) of your PC is Windows Vista, Windows Media Player 11 is pre-installed (except some products). • Some security software installed on your PC (anti-virus software, firewall software, etc.) may block the access of this unit to your PC. In such cases, configure the security software appropriately. ■ Registering this unit on the Yamaha MCX-2000 You must register this unit on your Yamaha MCX-2000 so that this unit can be recognized by your Yamaha MCX2000. For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with your Yamaha MCX-2000. 2 Turn on your PC or MCX-2000. 1 Turn off this unit. 3 Select “PC/MCX” in the “Music Contens” menu and then select the desired server or “MusicCAST” to begin playback. 2 Set your Yamaha MCX-2000 to the “Auto Config” mode. 3 Turn on this unit. • “MusicCAST” appears in the top “PC/MCX” menu screen. • if the client ID for this unit appears in the OSD of your Yamaha MCX-2000 (shown as “CLXXXXX”), the automatic configuration is complete. Notes • Yamaha MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations. • You can connect this unit to up to 15 PC servers and 1 MCX2000, and each server must be connected to the same subnet as this unit. • Some WAV, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, and WMA files on your PC may not be playable or may be noisy when played. • (MCX-2000 only) Files marked with an asterisk (*) have not been converted to MP3 format. You cannot play back such files immediately unless you set the “Receive PCM Stream” setting of this unit to “ON” on MCX-2000. For details, refer to the instruction manual of MCX-2000. ■ Installing Windows Media Player 11 on your PC With Windows Media Player 11, you can play back the audio files on your PC. For details refer to the documents of Windows Media Player 11. y You can also play back the audio files on your PC with Windows Media Connect 2.0 installed. 1 Install Windows Media Player 11 on your PC. You can download the installer of Windows Media Player 11 from the Microsoft website, or use the upgrade function of the installed Microsoft Windows Media Player. 70 En Notes • The latter part of the client ID for this unit is same as the last 5 digits of the MAC address of this unit. • To clear the registered client ID of this unit, use the “Manual Config” mode of your Yamaha MCX-2000 (refer to the instruction manual of MCX-2000) and then select “NETWORK” in “ADVANCED SETUP” on this unit (page 122). • The client control functions of MusicCAST over this unit other than “View Play Info”, “Receive PCM Stream” and “Edit Client title” are not available. Avoid using these functions as it will stop the playback on this unit. Using USB and network features Using the Internet Radio Use this feature to listen to Internet Radio stations. This unit uses the vTuner Internet Radio station database service particularly customized for this unit, providing over 2000 radio station database. Further, you can store your favorite stations with bookmarks. Notes • This service may be discontinued without notice. • Some Internet Radio stations may not be played. • To listen to the Internet Radio, connect this unit to your network (page 23). • A narrowband Internet connection (i.e. 56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory results, and a broadband connection is strongly recommended (i.e. a cable modem, an xDSL modem, etc.). For detailed information, consult with your ISP. y ■ Storing your favorite Internet Radio stations with bookmarks Use this feature to select your favorite Internet Radio stations quickly. Prohibition You may not modify, reproduce, reverse-engineer or create derivative works based upon the software or any portion thereof. The Rhapsody® service is the power behind the Rhapsody® Media Player (the Rhapsody® player software that you can download to your computer). Rhapsody® service supplies the music, keeps My Library up to date, provides you with Rhapsody® channels, the Playlist Central online community, and manages your downloads. Your software connects to Rhapsody® service through the internet. Because your account information and Rhapsody® content are on servers instead of any individual computer, your music is infinitely portable. Much of what you see in the Display area comes from Rhapsody® service. What you can do with Rhapsody® service depends on your subscription. You can use Rhapsody® service for free, or get even more from a paid membership. The Rhapsody® service also brings you Rhapsody® Online, a streamlined, internet version of Rhapsody® that you can access from almost anywhere. Just sign in to your Rhapsody® account to start letting the Rhapsody® service work for you. For more information, http://www.rhapsody-free.com/. BASIC OPERATION • “Podcast” is a type of the Internet Radio service, and there are a number of Podcast services available on the Internet. The Podcast is not a continuous service. That is, this unit stops playback when an episode of the Podcast ends. • Some security devices (such as firewall) may block the access of this unit to Internet Radio stations. In such cases, configure the security settings appropriately. Using the Rhapsody® service (U.S.A. model only) ■ Account setup for Rhapsody® Set the operation mode to FSOURCE and then press and hold 8 TITLE while the selected Internet Radio station service is being broadcast. The stored Internet Radio station is added to the “Bookmarks” list (page 68). When you select “Rhapsody” as a sub input source for the first time, the account setup screen appears in the “Rhapsody” menu screen. Follow the procedure below to set up your account for the Rhapsody® service. 1 y • To remove the stored station from the list, select the station under “Bookmarks” and then press and hold 8TITLE. • You can also register your favorite Internet Radio stations to this unit by accessing the following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this feature, you need the MAC address of this unit as the ID number and your e-mail address to create your personal account. Use “Information” in the “Network” menu to display the MAC address of this unit (page 96). For details, refer to the help information on the website. URL: http://yradio.vtuner.com/ Press 9l / h to select “Formal registration” or “Trial registration” and then press 9ENTER. y If you select “Trial registration”, the URL for the content of the trial service appears. If you proceed, press 9l / h to select “OK” and then press 9ENTER to enter the Rhapsody menu. Press 9l / h to select “OK” and then press 9ENTER. 3 Use 9k / n / l / h and 9ENTER to input your user name (up to 64 characters), select “OK” and then press 9ENTER. 4 Press 9l / h to select “OK” and then press 9ENTER. 71 En English 2 Using USB and network features 5 ■ Submenu items in the “Rhapsody” menu Use 9k / n / l / h and 9ENTER to input your password (up to 64 characters), select “OK” and then press 9ENTER. “Please wait...” appears and then top “Rhapsody” menu screen appears. Note If registration failed, the error message appears. In this case, start all over again. ■ Editing/deleting your account or checking trial information 1 2 In the top “Rhapsody” menu screen, press 0SUBMENU. The submenu screen appears. Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Upgrade account”, “Remove account” or “Show trial info” and then press 9ENTER. • If you selected “Upgrade account”, follow steps 2 to 5 in “Account setup for Rhapsody®”. • If you selected “Remove account”, press 9l / h to select “OK” and then press 9ENTER to delete your account. • If you selected “Show trial info”, check the trial information and then press 9ENTER. y “Show trial info” appears only when you are using the trial service. ■ Searching contents by keyword Use this feature to search Rhapsody® music contents by artist, album name, or track name. 1 2 3 In the “Rhapsody” menu, the following submenu items are also available in addition to “Play Control” and “Play Style” (page 69). Add to My Library Select this item to add the track or album currently selected to “My Library”. Add Album to My Library Select this item to add the album currently selected to “My Library”. Remove from My Library Select this item to remove the track or album currently selected from “My Library”. Play Select this item to start playback of the item currently selected. y Available submenu items vary depending on the screen where you press 0SUBMENU. Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE and then press 3USB/NET. Using shortcut buttons Use this feature to access the desired music sources (WAV, MP3 and WMA files on the connected PC, MCX-2000 or USB storage devices, Internet Radio Stations, and Rhapsody® music contents) directly. You can preset 8 items for each sub input source. ■ Assigning the items to the numeric button (1-8) (B) In the top “Rhapsody” menu screen, press 9k / n to select “Search” and then press 9h. 1 Select a desired content you want to assign to a numeric button (1-8) (B), and then play back the content. Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the category you want to search and then press 9ENTER. 2 Press G MEMORY (or 0 MEMORY). The PRESET indicator lights up in the front panel and this unit automatically selects an empty preset number. Use 9k / n / l / h and 9ENTER to input the desired keyword, select “OK” and then press 9ENTER. The list of the contents that match the specified keyword is displayed. y “No match data” appears if no content matches the specified keyword. 72 En Lights up PRESET MEMORY 1 SONG Using USB and network features y • To store the selected content under an empty preset number automatically, press and hold GMEMORY (or 0MEMORY) for more than 2 seconds instead of step 2. In this case, the following steps are unnecessary. • To cancel the preset, press GMEMORY (or 0MEMORY) again. • When you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the memory preset mode is automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 2. 3 Press a numeric button (1-8) (B) that you want to assign. Preset number PRESET USB storage devices Create eight directories which contain the desired items in a directory beside the directory which contains all music files, and then preset the top item of each directory to the numeric buttons (1-8) (B). When you change the items which are preset to the numeric buttons (1-8) (B), replace the items in the directory to the desired items without deleting the directory. PC server/MCX-2000 Create eight playlists which contain the desired items, and then preset the top item of each playlist to the numeric buttons (1-8) (B). When you change the items which are preset to the numeric buttons (1-8) (B), replace the registered items in the playlist with the desired items without deleting the playlist. MEMORY 7 SONG BASIC OPERATION y If you select a preset number being used (“*” appears next to the preset number), the current preset number will be overwritten. 4 Press EENTER (or 9ENTER). The preset content is set and the PRESET indicator disappears. ■ Select an item by using numeric buttons (1-8) (B) Press one of the numeric button (1-8) (B) to which the desired item is assigned to select the item as the input source. This unit starts the playback of the source assigned to the selected numeric button. Notes • “Empty Memory!” appears in the front panel display and the short message display when you press the numeric button (1-8) (B) to which no items are assigned. • This unit does not recall the correct item assigned to the selected numeric button (1-8) (B) in the following cases: – the connected USB device is incorrect. – the PC or MCX-2000 which stores the selected item is turned off or disconnected from the network. – the selected Internet Radio station or Rhapsody® service is temporary unavailable or out of service. – the directory of the selected item has been changed. y English This unit stores the relative position of the preset items in a directory or playlist, and does not recall the correct item by using numeric buttons (1-8) (B) if you add or delete music files to or from the same directory or playlist as the preset items. In such cases, preset the desired item to the numeric buttons (1-8) (B) again. We recommend the following methods: 73 En Advanced sound configurations Selecting decoders PLIIx Game PLII Game ■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel sources (surround decode mode) Use this feature to play back sources with selected decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multichannels. Set the operation mode selector to FAMP and then press S SUR. DECODE repeatedly on the remote control to select the surround decode mode. You can select desired surround decoder modes depending on the type of source you are playing and your personal preference. y You can change the decoder parameter settings in “Stereo/ Surround” (page 80). ■ Decoder descriptions Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround Back” (page 88) is set to “None” or using headphones. Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie sources. Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music sources. CSII Cinema (U.S.A. model only) SRS Circle Surround II processing for movie sources. CSII Music (U.S.A. model only) Name of the decoder (Decoder Type) SRS Circle Surround II processing for music sources. PLIIx Music PLII Music NRL-THX (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround Back” (page 88) is set to “None” or using headphones. Neural-THX Surround processing for any sources. The Neural-THX Surround decoder is especially suitable for the XM HD Surround program of XM Satellite Radio. Decoder description Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources. PLIIx Movie PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround Back” (page 88) is set to “None” or using headphones. PLIIx Music PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround Back” (page 88) is set to “None” or using headphones. 74 En NRL-THX Music (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Neural-THX Surround processing for music sources. The Neural-THX Surround decoder is especially suitable for the XM HD Surround music program of XM Satellite Radio. y When you select the surround decode mode for the multichannel digital sources, this unit automatically selects the corresponding decoder for each source. ■ Selecting decoders used with MOVIE sound field programs You can select one of the following decoder types for use with the MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono Movie”). For details about the MOVIE sound field programs, see “For movie sources” (page 44). For details on how to select the decoder type, see “Sound field parameter descriptions” (page 81). Choices: PLIIx Movie (PLII Movie), Neo:6 Cinema Advanced sound configurations ■ Selecting decoders for multi-channel sources If you connected surround back speakers, use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES, or Neural-THX decoders. Set the operation mode selector to FAMP and then press MEXTD SUR. on the remote control repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1channel playback. Choice Functions AUTO Activates the optimum decoder to play back signals in 6.1/7.1 channels when this unit recognizes a signal flag being input. Decoders (PLIIx Movie, PLIIx Music, EX/ES, Neural-THX) Use this feature to activate the desired decoders for the playback of multi-channel sources manually. OFF Does not use any decoders to create 6.1/7.1 channels. y ADVANCED OPERATION Use this feature to activate the desired decoder manually when this unit cannot detect the signal flag encoded to the input sources correctly. Notes • The available decoders vary depending on the setting of the speakers and the input sources. • 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible in the following cases: – when “Surround” (page 87) or “Surround Back” (page 88) is set to “None”. – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is being played. – when the source being played does not contain surround left and right channel signals. – when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – when this unit is in the stereo playback, 7ch Enhancer (page 45) or PURE DIRECT (page 47) mode. – when “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” (page 122). • If “EXTD Surround” is set to “Auto” (page 99), the decoder mode is automatically set to “AUTO” every time this unit is turned off. • “Neural-THX” is only available on the U.S.A. and Canada models. English 75 En Graphical user interface (GUI) menu ■ GUI menu tree Stereo/Surround (page 80) Input Select (page 85) SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO (U.S.A. and Canada models only) XM (U.S.A. and Canada models only) TUNER MULTI CH PHONO CD TV MD/CD-R BD/HD DVD DVD CBL/SAT DVR VCR VIDEO AUX DOCK* USB PC/MCX NET RADIO Rhapsody (U.S.A. model only) Music Content (page 87) iPod USB PC/MCX NET RADIO Rhapsody (U.S.A. model only) Setup Auto Setup (page 30) Speaker (page 87) Configuration Front Center Surround Surround Back Front Presence Subwoofer Distance Level Test Tone Volume (page 89) Adaptive DRC Adaptive DSP Level Max Volume Initial Volume Muting Type Sound (page 90) LFE Level Dynamic Range Parametric EQ Tone Control Lipsync Pure Direct Channel Mute 76 En Speaker Headphone Speaker Headphone Control Bass Treble Auto Bypass Mode Auto Manual Phase Bass Out Graphical user interface (GUI) menu Video (page 93) HDMI (page 94) Analog ` Analog Analog ` HDMI HDMI ` HDMI Processing Standby Through Audio Output Control Monitor Monitor Info. System Memory (page 101) Main Zone2 Zone3 Network (page 95) Configuration Network Standby Information Multi Zone (page 96) Zone SP Assign Zone2 Set Zone OSD Zone Rename Option (page 97) HDMI OUT1 HDMI OUT2 Main Load Main Save Main Rename Zone2 Load Zone2 Save Zone2 Rename Zone3 Load Zone3 Save Zone3 Rename Zone2 Volume Zone2 Max Vol. Zone2 Initial Vol. Zone2 Balance Zone2 Tone Control Zone2 Muting Type Zone3 Volume Zone3 Max Vol. Zone3 Initial Vol. Zone3 Balance Zone3 Tone Control Zone3 Muting Type Main Zone2 Zone3 Memory Guard I/O Assignment Input Rename Display Set Front Panel Display iPod Short Message Playback Screen Position Wall Paper Standby Charge Initial Set Trigger Output Dimmer Scroll Audio Select Decoder Mode EXTD Surround Trigger1 Trigger2 English Language (page 100) Mode Input Output ADVANCED OPERATION Zone3 Set Resolution Aspect Prog. Re-Processing Note * “iPod” appears when an iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK terminal. “Bluetooth” appears when a Yamaha Bluetooth receiver is connected to the DOCK terminal. 77 En Graphical user interface (GUI) menu GUI menu overview This unit features a sophisticated graphical user interface (GUI) menu that helps you to control the amplifier function of this unit. With the GUI menu, you can view the information of the signals being input and the status of this unit. y • Refer to “GUI menu tree” (page 76) for the complete menu structure. • Refer to “GUI menu operations” (page 79) for details about the basic operations in the GUI menu. Input Select Sound Music Content Video Setup HDMI Language System Memory Stereo/Surround Network ■ Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu) Use this feature to select the sound field programs and customize the program parameter settings (page 80). ■ Input Select (Input select menu) Use this feature to select the input source and customize the parameters of each input source (page 85). ■ Music Content (Music content menu) Use this feature to browse the music contents of iPod, USB component, PC/MusicCAST, Internet radio, and Rhapsody® (U.S.A. model only) (page 87). ■ Setup (Setup menu) Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters. Auto Setup (Automatic setup menu) Use this feature to run the automatic setup and specify which speaker parameters to be adjusted (page 30). Speaker (Speaker menu) See page 87 for details. Volume (Volume menu) See page 89 for details. Sound (Sound menu) See page 90 for details. Video (Video menu) See page 93 for details. HDMI (HDMI menu) See page 94 for details. System Memory (System memory menu) See page 101 for details. Network (Network menu) See page 95 for details. Multi Zone (Multi-zone menu) See page 96 for details. Option (Option menu) See page 97 for details. ■ Language (Display language menu) Use this feature to select the language that appears in the front panel display or in the GUI menu of this unit (page 100). 78 En Graphical user interface (GUI) menu GUI menu operations This unit features a sophisticated graphical user interface (GUI) menu that helps you to control the amplifier function of this unit. With the GUI menu, you can view the information of the signals being input and the status of this unit. You can also set up this unit using the GUI menu. ■ Items in the GUI menu Decoder Input source qPLIIx Movie DVD Menu item Sound field program Sci-Fi Input Select Sound Music Content Video Setup HDMI Language System Memory Stereo/Surround Network DVD qPLIIx Movie Sci-Fi MD/CD-R BD/HD DVD Menu area DVD Input Select [ENTER] CBL/SAT DVR SUBMENU Top Menu -40.0dB Menu directory -40.0dB Submenu icon Volume level y Set the operation mode selector to FAMP when you operate the GUI menu using the remote control. Function 9k / n Selects the item in the current menu level. 9h Selects the currently selected menu item and moves to the next menu level. 9l Returns to the previous menu level. 9ENTER Selects the currently selected menu item and moves to the next menu level. 0SUBMENU Turns on or off the submenu. (The submenu icon appears when any submenu items exist under the menu currently selected.) IMENU Turns on or off the GUI menu. Press and hold IMENU to display the top GUI menu (Top Menu). ■ Front panel control operation Control Function DMENU Turns on of off the GUI menu. Dh Selects the currently selected menu item and moves to the next menu level. Dl Returns to the previous menu level. EENTER Selects the currently selected menu item and moves to the next menu level. MPROGRAM Selects the item in the current menu level. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Remote control operation Button Input Select Note If you simply press IMENU, the menu directory displayed before you turned off the GUI menu appears. To display the top GUI menu (Top Menu), press and hold IMENU. English 79 En Graphical user interface (GUI) menu Stereo/Surround You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory settings. Although you do not have to change the initial factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. y To customize the program parameter settings, press 0SUBMENU to turn on the submenu after you select the desired program. The ideal dialogue position If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video monitor screen, increase the value of “Dialogue Lift”. ■ Basic configuration of sound field programs Each sound field program has some parameters defining the characteristics of the program. To customize the selected sound field program, adjust “DSP Level” and/or “Dialogue Lift” first, and then try other parameters. Adjusting the effect sound level of the sound field programs (DSP Level) Sound field programs add effect sounds (DSP effect sounds) to the original source sound to create sound field in the listening room. Use the “DSP Level” parameter to adjust the level of the effect sounds. Move up to the ideal dialogue position Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 “0” (initial setting) is the lowest position, and “5” is the highest position. Notes • “Dialogue Lift” is available when “Front Presence” is set to “Yes” (page 88) and headphones are not connected. • You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial dialogue position. The DSP effect sound level is low The DSP effect sound level is high Adjust “DSP Level” as follows: Increase the value of “DSP Level” when • the effect sound of the selected sound field program is too weak. • you cannot recognize any difference between the sound field programs. Decrease the value of “DSP Level” when • the sound is vague. • you feel that the additional sound effect is excessive. Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB Adjusting the vertical dialogue position (Dialogue Lift) Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is at the center of the video monitor screen. 80 En Graphical user interface (GUI) menu ■ Sound field parameter descriptions You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. Sound field parameter Features Decode Type Decoder type. Select the decoder used with the selected sound field program. The decoder parameters for “Surround Decoder” vary depending on the selected decoder type. See page 84 for details. Init. Delay Sur. Init.Delay SB. Init. Delay Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field initial delay. Changes the apparent size of the sound field by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the smaller the sound field seems to the listener. y When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the corresponding room size parameters likewise. Control range: 1 to 99 ms (Init. Delay) 1 to 49 ms (Sur. Init. Delay and SB Init. Delay) Source sound Level Level Level Early reflections Time Time Time Delay Delay Delay Sound source Reflection face Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room. y When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the corresponding initial delay parameters likewise. Control range: 0.1 to 2.0 Time Early reflections Time Level Level Source sound Level Room Size Sur. Room Size SB. Room Size Large value = 99 ms ADVANCED OPERATION Small value = 1 ms Time Sound source Large value = 2.0 English Small value = 0.1 81 En Graphical user interface (GUI) menu Sound field parameter Liveness Sur. Liveness SB. Liveness Features Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room. Control range: 0 to 10 Source sound Level Level Dead Level Live Time Time Large reflected sound Small reflected sound Small value = 0 Rev. Time Time Large value = 10 Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time to get more sustaining reverberation sound, and set a shorter time to get articulate sound. Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s Reverberation Source sound Reverberation Early reflections 60 dB Rev. Time Sound source Short reverberation Small value = 1.0 s 82 En 60 dB Rev. Time 60 dB Rev. Time Long reverberation Large value = 5.0 s Graphical user interface (GUI) menu Sound field parameter Rev. Delay Features Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment. Level Control range: 0 to 250 ms Source sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time Rev. Delay Rev. Level Rev. Time Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Level Control range: 0 to 100% Source sound ADVANCED OPERATION Rev. Level Time ■ Stereo program parameter descriptions Sound field parameter Direct (“2ch Stereo” only) Features 2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources. Choices: Auto, Off y • Select “Auto” to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to “BYPASS” (page 47). • Select “Off” not to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to “BYPASS”. • When multi-channel signals are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers. • The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are redirected to the subwoofer in the following cases: – “Bass Out” is set to “Front + SWFR” (page 88). – “Front” is set to “Small” (page 87) and “Bass Out” is set to “SWFR” (page 88). 7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence right levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode. The available parameters differ depending on the speaker settings. Control range: 0 to 100% English Center Level Surround L Level Surround R Level Sur.Back L Level Sur.Back R Level F.PRNS L Level F.PRNS R Level (“7ch Stereo” only) 83 En Graphical user interface (GUI) menu ■ Compressed Music Enhancer mode parameter descriptions The Compressed Music Enhancer mode Level (“Straight Enhancer” and “7ch Enhancer” only) Features Straight enhancer or 7-channel enhancer effect level. Select “High” or “Low” to adjust the effect for the highfrequency. Choices: High, Low ■ Decoder parameter descriptions Decoder parameter Panorama (“PLIIx Music” and “PLII Music” only) Center Width (“PLIIx Music” and “PLII Music” only) Features Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. Choices: Off, On Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center channel output towards the front left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) Initial setting: 3 Dimension (“PLIIx Music” and “PLII Music” only) Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front) Initial setting: STD (standard) Center Image (“Neo:6 Music” only) DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary. Control range: 0.0 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) to 1.0 (center channel sound output only from the center speaker) Initial setting: 0.3 FOCUS (“CSII Cinema” and “CSII Music” only) SRS Circle Surround II Cinema and SRS Circle Surround II Music focus. Adjusts the clearness of a sound image by elevating the perception of the sound image to compensate for non-optimally placed speakers from a lower location. A larger value makes speakers sound as if they are positioned at ear level. Control range: 0 (lower location) to 8 (higher location) TruBass (“CSII Cinema” and “CSII Music” only) SRS Circle Surround II Cinema and SRS Circle Surround II Music TruBass. Adjusts the lower register by producing the perception of improved low frequency performance. A larger value improves bass even without a subwoofer and provides deeper, richer bass in the presence of a subwoofer. Control range: 0 (standard low-frequency performance) to 8 (enhanced low-frequency performance) ■ Initialize (Parameter initialization) Use this feature to initialize the parameter of the selected sound field program. Choices: No, Yes • Select “Yes” and then press 9ENTER to set the program parameters to the factory default settings. • Select “No” (or press 9l) to cancel the program parameter initialization. y Use “DSP PARAM” of “INITIALIZE” in “Advanced setup” to initialize the parameters of all sound field programs (page 122). 84 En Graphical user interface (GUI) menu ■ Audio Select (Audio input jack selection) Input Select Use this menu to adjust the parameters of each input source. y Use this feature to select the type of the input jack you want to use. Choice Auto Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) HDMI (2) Digital signals (3) Analog signals HDMI Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI signals are not input, no sound is output. Coax/Opt Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL jack. (2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL jack. When no signals are input, no sound is output. Analog Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. To customize the input source settings, press 0SUBMENU to turn on the submenu after you select the input source. Input source Functions Parameter SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Volume Trim Parental Lock XM (U.S.A. and Canada models only) iPod USB PC/MCX NET RADIO Rhapsody (U.S.A. model only) Volume Trim TUNER Volume Trim Station Search (U.S.A. model only) • You can also select the audio input jack by pressing DAUDIO SELECT (or OAUDIO SEL) (page 37). • You can set the default audio input jack select of this unit by using “Audio Select” in “Initial Set” (page 99). MULTI CH Volume Trim Multi CH Assign BGV Note y Audio Select Decoder Mode Volume Trim Bluetooth Volume Trim Pairing Connect This feature is not available if no digital input jack is assigned to the selected input source in “I/O Assignment” (page 98). “HDMI” is available only when an HDMI input jack is assigned. ADVANCED OPERATION PHONO CD TV MD/CD-R BD/HD DVD DVD CBL/SAT DVR VCR VIDEO AUX ■ Decoder Mode (Decoder mode) Use this feature to switch the decoder mode. Choice Functions Auto Automatically detects digital audio signal input types and selects the appropriate decoder. DTS Activates the DTS decoder when digital audio signals are input. Note “Decoder Mode” is available only when the digital audio input jacks (HDMI, OPTICAL and/or COAXIAL) are assigned to the selected input source. ■ Volume Trim (Volume trimming) y This parameter also affects the signals output at the ZONE OUT jacks. 85 En English Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at each input source. This feature is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB Graphical user interface (GUI) menu ■ Parental Lock (SIRIUS Satellite Radio parental lock) Use this feature to set the code number for locking the desired SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels. Refer to “Setting the Parental Lock” (page 62) for details. ■ Station Search (Station search) (U.S.A. model only) You can search for preset HD Radio stations by specifying a keyword (station name). 1 2 Press 9k / n / l / h to select a character or function and then press 9ENTER to confirm the selection. Repeat step 1 until you input a keyword you want to use. Press 9k / n / l / h to select “OK” and then press 9ENTER. The search result is displayed. y If your keyword does not match the any station, “Not Found” appears. Press 9l to return to the previous screen. 3 Press 9k / n to select the preset HD Radio station you want to listen to and then press 9ENTER. ■ Multi CH Assign (Multi channel assignment) Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Input Channels (Input channels) Use this setting to select the number of channels input from an external decoder (page 22). Choice Front Input (Front channel input jacks) If you selected “8ch” in “Input Channels”, you can select analog jacks at which front left and right channel signals from an external decoder will be input. Choices: CD, TV, MD/CD-R, BD/HD DVD, DVD, CBL/SAT, DVR, VCR, VIDEO AUX Note If you have renamed an input source in “Input Rename” (page 98), the name of the input source appears in the choices of this parameter. ■ BGV (Back ground video) Use this feature to select the video source played in the background of the sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Choice BD/HD DVD, DVD, CBL/SAT, DVR, VCR, VIDEO AUX Selects the corresponding input source as the background video source. Off Does not play the video source in the background. Note If you have renamed an input source in “Input Rename” (page 98), the name of the input source appears in the choices of this parameter. ■ Pairing (Bluetooth pairing) Use this feature to start pairing the connected Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) with your Bluetooth component. For details about the pairing, refer to “Pairing the Bluetooth™ receiver and your Bluetooth component” (page 64). To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully understand all the instructions before starting. Description 6ch Select “6ch” the connected component outputs discrete 6-channel audio signals. 8ch Select “8ch” the connected component outputs discrete 8-channel audio signals. Also set “Front Input” (see below) to the analog audio jacks at which the front left and right channel signals output from the connected component are input. 1 Press 9ENTER to start pairing. The connected Bluetooth receiver starts searching Bluetooth components. 2 Check that the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth receiver. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the Bluetooth component. 3 Select the Bluetooth receiver in the Bluetooth device list and then enter the pass key “0000” on the Bluetooth component. Once this unit completes the pairing successfully, “Completed” appears. Note Depending on the settings of the zone configuration, no sound is output at the surround back speakers even if you set “Input Channels” to “8ch”. In this case, select “6ch” and set the audio output setting of the source component to 6 channels. 86 En Functions Graphical user interface (GUI) menu 4 Press 9l to return to the previous menu level. Note If the connected Bluetooth receiver cannot find any Bluetooth components, “Not found” appears. ■ Connect (Bluetooth connection) Use this feature to establish a connection between the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA10, sold separately) and your Bluetooth component. Note Pairing must be performed when using a Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth receiver connected to this unit for the first time of if the pairing data has been deleted. Press 9ENTER to establish a connection. The connected Bluetooth receiver starts searching Bluetooth components. Once the connection is established successfully, “BT Connected” appears. Note If the connected Bluetooth receiver cannot find any Bluetooth components, “Not found” appears. Setup (Speaker) Use this feature to manually adjust the basic speaker settings. Most of the “Speaker” parameters are set automatically when you run the automatic setup. y • Set “Test Tone” to “On” to output the test tone for the “Configuration”, “Distance” and “Level” settings. • If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum. ■ Configuration (Speaker configurations) Measure for the speaker size The woofer section of a speaker is – 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large – smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small Front (Front speakers) Choice Descriptions Large Select this setting when the front speakers are large. Small Select this setting when the front speakers are small. y Music Content Use this feature to browse the music contents of iPod, USB component, PC/MusicCAST, Internet radio and Rhapsody® (U.S.A. model only). See the following pages for details. • iPod (page 66) • USB (page 68) • PC/MCX (page 68) Note When “Bass Out” is set to “Front” (page 88), you can select only “Large” in “Front”. If the value of “Front” is set to other than “Large” in advance, this unit change the value to “Large” automatically. ADVANCED OPERATION To terminate the connection, press 9ENTER again. Center (Center speaker) Choice Descriptions Large Select this setting when the center speaker is large. Small Select this setting when the center speaker is small. None Select this setting when you do not use the center speaker. The center channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. • NET RADIO (page 68) • Rhapsody (page 68) Surround (Surround left/right speakers) Choice Descriptions Select this setting when the surround speakers are large. Small Select this setting when the surround speakers are small. None Select this setting when you do not use the surround speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (page 45), and “Surround Back” is automatically set to “None”. 87 En English Large Graphical user interface (GUI) menu Surround Back (Surround back left/right speakers) Choice Descriptions Large x1 Select this setting when the single surround back speaker is large. Small x1 Select this setting when the single surround back speaker is small. Small x2 Select this setting when the surround back left and right speakers are small. Large x2 Select this setting when the surround back left and right speakers are Large. None Select this setting when you do not use the surround back speakers. The surround back channel signals are directed to the surround left and right speakers. Bass Out (Bass out) Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals. LFE signals output Subwoofer and speakers Choice Subwoofers Front speakers Other speakers Front + SWFR Output No output No output SWFR Output No output No output Front No output Output No output Low-frequency signals output Subwoofer and speakers Note Choice If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to the SUR.BACK SINGLE jack, and configure the “Surround Back L” settings under “Distance” and “Level”. Cross Over (Cross over) Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of the speaker(s) that is set to “Small”. All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to the speakers set to “Large” in “Configuration”. Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz Front Presence (Front presence speakers) Use this feature if you want to use the front presence speakers connected to this unit. Choice Descriptions Yes Select this setting when you use the front presence speakers. None Select this setting when you do not use the front presence speakers. Subwoofer (Subwoofer) Phase (Subwoofer phase) Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear. Choice Functions Normal Does not change the phase of your subwoofer. Reverse Sets the phase of the subwoofer to reverse. 88 En Subwoofers Front speakers Other speakers Front + SWFR *1 *2 *3 SWFR *4 *3 *3 Front No output *1 *3 *1 Output(s) the low-frequency signals of the front channels and other speakers set to “Small”. *2 Always output the low-frequency signals of the front channels. *3 Output the low-frequency signals if the speakers are set to “Large”. *4 Outputs the low-frequency signals of the speakers set to “Small”. ■ Distance (Speaker distance) Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. Unit (Unit) Selects the unit for displaying the values of “Distance” parameter. Initial setting: Feet (U.S.A. and Canada models) Meter (Other models) Choice Functions Meter (m) Adjusts speaker distances in meters. Feet (ft) Adjusts speaker distances in feet. Graphical user interface (GUI) menu Adjusted speaker Front L Front left speaker Front R Front right speaker Center Center speaker Surround L Surround left speaker Surround R Surround right speaker Surround Back L Surround back left speaker Surround Back R Surround back right speaker Front Presence L Front presence left speaker Front Presence R Front presence right speaker Subwoofer Subwoofer Use this menu to manually adjust the various volume settings. Adaptive DRC (Adaptive dynamic range control) Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume level. This feature is useful when you are listening at lower volumes or at night. When “Adaptive DRC” is set to “Auto”, this unit controls the dynamic range as follows: – If the VOLUME setting is low: the dynamic range is narrow – If the VOLUME setting is high: the dynamic range is wide Output level Distance Setup (Volume) Output level Speaker distances Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft) Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) Control step: 0.05 m (0.2 ft) Auto Off Note Input level ■ Level (Speaker level) Level Adjusted speaker Front L Front left speaker Front R Front right speaker Center Center speaker Surround L Surround left speaker Surround R Surround right speaker Surround Back L Surround back left speaker Surround Back R Surround back right speaker Front Presence L Front presence left speaker Front Presence R Front presence right speaker Subwoofer Subwoofer y Functions Auto Adjusts the dynamic range automatically. Off Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically. y • You can also adjust the dynamic range of the bitstream signal sources by using “Dynamic Range” in “Sound” (page 90). • This function is also useful for listening with your headphones. Note The adaptive dynamic range control feature does not function when this unit is in the PURE DIRECT mode (page 47). Adaptive DSP Level (Adaptive DSP effect level) Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the DSP effect level (page 80) automatically in conjunction with the volume level. Choice Functions Auto Adjusts the DSP effect level in conjunction with the volume level. Off Does not adjust the DSP effect level automatically. Note Even if you set “Adaptive DSP Level” to “Auto”, this unit does not change but fine-tunes the specified value of “DSP Level” (page 80). English If you use a handheld sound pressure level meter, hold at arm’s length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each speaker to 75 dB. VOLUME: high ADVANCED OPERATION Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels between the front left or surround left speakers and each speaker selected in “Configuration” (page 87). Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Choice Off Input level VOLUME: low The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. Auto Note The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. 89 En Graphical user interface (GUI) menu Max Volume (Maximum volume) Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the main zone. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected loud sound by mistake. For example, the original volume range is –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB. However, when “Max Volume” is set to –5.0 dB, the volume range becomes –80.0 dB to –5.0 dB. Control range: –30.0 dB to +15.0 dB, +16.5 dB Control step: 5.0 dB ■ Dynamic Range (Dynamic range) Initial Volume (Initial volume) Use this feature to set the volume level of the main zone when the power of this unit is turned on. Choices: Off, Mute, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Headphone (Headphone dynamic range) Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the headphones. Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding bitstream signals. Speaker (Speaker dynamic range) Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the speakers. Choice MAX Preserves the greatest amount of dynamic range. STD Adjusts the dynamic range to medium. When this unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range control is always active regardless of the instruction of the input source signals. MIN/AUTO • MIN: Adjusts the dynamic range to narrow when this unit is decoding bitstream signals (except Dolby TrueHD). • AUTO: Adjusts the dynamic range according to the instruction of the input source signals when this unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD signals. Notes • When this unit is in the auto setup procedure, the volume level is automatically set to 0 dB regardless of the current “Max Volume” setting. • The “Max Volume” setting takes priority over the initial volume setting. Muting Type (Muting type) Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume (page 38). Choice Functions Full Mutes all the audio output. –20dB Reduces the current volume by 20 dB. –40dB Reduces the current volume by 40 dB. Setup (Sound) Use this menu to adjust the sound parameters. ■ LFE Level (Low-frequency effect level) Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes bitstream signals. Control range: –20.0 to 0.0 dB Control step: 1.0 dB Speaker (Speaker low-frequency effect level) Select to adjust the speaker LFE level. Headphone (Headphone low-frequency effect level) Select to adjust the headphone LFE level. Note Depending on the settings of “Bass Out” (page 88), some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks. 90 En Functions ■ Parametric EQ (Parametric equalizer) Use this feature to adjust the parametric equalizer of each speaker. PEQ Data Copy (Parametric equalizer data copy) Use this feature to copy the result data of the automatic setup to the manual configuration area. You can select the parametric equalizer type applied to the copied result data of the automatic setup. See page 35 for the descriptions of each parametric equalizer type. Choice Descriptions Flat h Manual Copies the result of the automatic setup that the “Flat” type parametric equalizer is applied to. Front h Manual Manual Copies the result of the automatic setup that the “Front” type parametric equalizer is applied to. Natural h Manual Copies the result of the automatic setup that the “Natural” type parametric equalizer is applied to. Graphical user interface (GUI) menu Test Tone Use this feature to select whether to turn on or off the test tone output while you are adjusting the tonal quality of each speaker. PEQ Select (Parametric equalizer type select) Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer type that applied to the results of the automatic setup. page 35 for the descriptions of each parametric equalizer type. Choice Descriptions Choice Functions Manual Applies the manually configured parametric equalizer in “Setup”. Flat Applies the “Flat” type parametric equalizer. Front Applies the “Front” type parametric equalizer. Natural Applies the “Natural” type parametric equalizer. PEQ Data Copy Does not use the parametric equalizer. PEQ Select Through 2 On Outputs the test tone. Off Does not output the test tone. Press 9 h to access the settings window. PARAM RESET EDIT EXIT Band / Gain Front L Notes Front R • When you carry out the automatic setup, this unit automatically set “PEQ Select” to “Natural”. • “Level” settings (page 89) also change corresponding to the setting of “PEQ Select”. • This unit does not change the configurations of “Manual” even if you perform the automatic setup. 1 Press 9 k / n / l / h to select “Test Tone” or the speaker you want to adjust. Choice Front L 3 Press 9 k / n / l / h to select “PARAM” and then press 9 ENTER repeatedly to select a parameter from “Band” (band), “Freq.” (frequency) or “Q” (Q factor). y You can adjust “Gain” (gain) with any parameter. 4 Press 9 n to select “EDIT” and press 9 ENTER to access the edit window. For more information on the parametric equalizer and each parameter, see page 144. ADVANCED OPERATION Manual parametric equalizer configuration of each speaker Use this feature to adjust the tonal quality of each speaker. You can copy the results of the automatic setup for the base of the manual configuration by using “PEQ Data Copy”. Set “PEQ Select” to “Manual” in advance. Center Adjusted speaker PEQ Data Copy Front left speaker PEQ Select Front R Front right speaker Front L Center Center speaker Front R Surround L Surround left speaker Surround R Surround right speaker Surround Back L Surround back left speaker Surround Back R Surround back right speaker Front Presence L Front presence left speaker Front Presence R Front presence right speaker Subwoofer Subwoofer Band Gain Freq Q #1 0.0dB 62.5Hz 1.000 Center Exit:ENTER The parameter selected in “PARAM” is highlighted. • Press 9 l / h to adjust the parameter. • Press 9 k / n to adjust the “Gain”. • Press 9 ENTER to exit the edit window. y 91 En English • When you select “Band” in step 3, you can use this menu as a graphic equalizer. • “Band #5”, “Band #6”, and “Band #7” can adjust the frequencies of above 500 Hz. • When you select “Subwoofer” in step 1 and “Band” in step 3, you can adjust “Band #1”, “Band #2”, “Band #3” and “Band #4” only. In this case, “Band #1”, “Band #2”, “Band #3” and “Band #4” adjust the frequencies of below 200 Hz. Graphical user interface (GUI) menu 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you are satisfied with the results. y If you want to reset all “Parametric EQ” parameter settings for the selected speaker, select “RESET” and press 9ENTER. 6 Select “EXIT” and press 9 ENTER to exit from the settings window. ■ Tone Control (Tone control) Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble output to your speakers or headphones. Note ■ Lipsync (Audio and video synchronization) Mode (HDMI automatic lip sync mode) If the video monitor is connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit and compatible with the automatic audio and video synchronization function (automatic lip sync), this unit adjusts the audio and video synchronization automatically. Use this feature to activate or deactivate the automatic lip sync. Choice Descriptions Auto Select this setting if the connected video monitor is compatible with the automatic lip sync. Use “Auto” to fine adjust the audio and video synchronization. Manual Select this setting if the video monitor is not compatible with the automatic lip sync or you do not want to use the automatic lip sync. Use “Manual” to adjust the audio and video synchronization. Tone Control is not effective when: – the PURE DIRECT mode (page 47) is selected. – MULTI CH is selected as the input source. Control (Control mode) Choice Functions Speaker Adjust the bass/treble balance of your speakers. Headphone Adjust the bass/treble balance of your headphones. y “Speaker” and “Headphone” adjustments are stored independently. The adjustments for “Speaker” affects the front left/right, center, presence left/right speaker channels and Subwoofer channel. Bass (Bass control) Use this feature to adjust low-frequencies output to your speakers or headphones. Choices: 125 Hz, 350 Hz, 500 Hz Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB Treble (Treble control) Use this feature to adjust high-frequencies output to your speakers or headphones. Choices: 2.5 kHz, 3.5 kHz, 8.0 kHz Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB Auto Bypass (Auto bypass) Use this feature to select whether the audio output bypasses the tone control circuitry when “Treble” and “Bass” are set to 0 dB. Choice Functions Auto Automatically bypasses the tone control circuitry to provide the purest signal possible when “Treble” and “Bass” are set to 0 dB. Off Does not bypass the tone control circuitry. 92 En Note When “HDMI OUT SEL” is set to “OUT 1+2” and video monitors are connected to both the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks, the automatic lip sync function does not work even if “Auto” is selected. Auto (Automatic audio delay adjustment) Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the audio and video synchronization when you set “Mode” to “Auto”. Control range: 0 to 240 ms Control step: 1 ms y “Offset” indicates the difference between the value of the audio delay that this unit sets automatically and the value of the audio delay that you set in “Mode”. This unit stores the value of “Offset” and applies the value to other automatic lip sync compatible video monitors. Manual (Manual audio delay adjustment) Use this feature to adjust the delay of the sound output manually to synchronize audio with video images when you set “Mode” to “Manual”. Control range: 0 to 240 ms Control step: 1 ms Graphical user interface (GUI) menu ■ Pure Direct (Pure Direct) Use this feature to select whether this unit outputs the video signals when this unit is in the PURE DIRECT mode. Choice Functions Audio Does not output video signals. Audio + Video Outputs video signals. For the better sound quality, this unit only activates the limited video features. Note You cannot use the GUI menu while this unit is in the PURE DIRECT mode even if “Pure Direct” is set to “Audio + Video”. ■ Channel Mute (Channel mute) Use this feature to mute specific speaker channels. Mode (Mode) Use this feature to activate or deactivate the “Channel Mute” setting for each speaker. Setup (Video) Use this menu to adjust the video parameters. y You can reset the all parameters in “Video” to the initial factory settings by using “VIDEO” of “INITIALIZE” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (page 122). ■ Analog ` Analog (Analog-to-analog video conversion) Use this feature to enable or disable the video conversion among the analog video jacks (VIDEO, S VIDEO, and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks). Choice Functions Through Disables the video conversion among the analog video jacks. Conversion Enables the video conversion among the analog video jacks. Notes Choice Functions Disable Deactivates the “Channel Mute” function. Enable Activates the “Channel Mute” function. Channel Mute Speaker channel Front L Front left Front R Front right Center Center Surround L Surround left Surround R Surround right Surround Back L Surround back left Surround Back R Surround back right Front Presence L Front presence left speaker Front Presence R Front presence right speaker Subwoofer Subwoofer Choice ■ Analog ` HDMI (Analog-to-HDMI video signal processing) Use this feature to select whether this unit processes the analog-to-HDMI video signals (input at VIDEO, S VIDEO, or COMPONENT VIDEO input jacks and output at HDMI OUT jacks). Choice Mutes the selected speaker channel. Mute Off Does not mute the selected speaker channel. Functions Through Select this setting when you do not want this unit to process the analog-to-HDMI video signals. Processing Select this setting when you want this unit to apply the video processing configured in “Processing” to the analog-to-HDMI video signals. Functions Mute On ADVANCED OPERATION Each speaker settings Select whether this unit mutes each speaker channel when you set “Mode” to “Enable”. • Analog-to-HDMI video conversion is always possible unless video signals are being input at the HDMI input jacks or 1080presolution analog video signals are being input. • This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line video signals interchangeably. • 480p-, 576p-, 1080i- and 720p-resolution video signals cannot be output at the S VIDEO and VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. • The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component. • When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are converted into component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. • Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such cases, set “Analog ` Analog” to “Through”. English 93 En Graphical user interface (GUI) menu ■ HDMI ` HDMI (HDMI-to-HDMI video signal processing) Use this feature to select whether this unit processes the HDMI-to-HDMI video signals (input at HDMI input jacks and output at HDMI OUT jacks). Choice Functions Through Select this setting when you do not want this unit to process the HDMI-to-HDMI video signals. Processing Select this setting when you want this unit to apply the video processing configured in “Processing” to the HDMI-to-HDMI video signals. ■ Processing (HDMI video signal processing) Use this feature to configure the resolution, aspect, and progressive re-processing settings for the video signals output at the HDMI OUT jacks. Note This feature is available only when “Analog ` HDMI” or “HDMI ` HDMI” is set to “Processing”. Resolution (HDMI video signal resolution) Use this feature to enable or disable the upscaling of the analog-to-HDMI video signals and/or HDMI-to-HDMI video signals. This unit up-scales the video signals as follows: • 480i(576i) → 480p(576p)/720p/1080i/1080p • 480p(576p) → 720p/1080i/1080p • 720p → 1080i/1080p • 1080i → 720p/1080p Choice Functions Through Does not up-scale any video signals. 480p (or 576p), 1080i, 720p, 1080p Up-scales video signals to 480p or 576p, 1080i, 720p, or 1080p of resolution. Aspect (HDMI aspect ratio) Use this feature to select whether this unit converts the aspect ratio of the analog-to-HDMI video signals and/or HDMI-to-HDMI video signals. Choice Does not make any adjustments to the aspect ratio for the HDMI video signal sources. 16:9 Normal Displays video images with the aspect ratio of 4:3 on your video monitor with the aspect ratio of 16:9. Black stripes appear on the right and left sides as a result. 94 En • If the aspect ratio of the input video source is other than 4:3, this unit automatically ignores the setting of “Aspect”. • When “Aspect” is set to “Smart Zoom”, the video images of the edge of the video monitor are rather stretched. Prog. Re-Processing (Progressive re-processing) Use this feature to enable or disable the progressive reprocessing of the analog-to-HDMI video signals and/or HDMI-to-HDMI video signals. Choice Fits video images with the aspect ratio of 4:3 to your video monitor with the aspect ratio of 16:9. Functions Off Disables the progressive re-processing of the HDMI video signals. On Enables the progressive re-processing of the HDMI video signals. Note This setting is effective only for video signals of which resolution is 480p(576p), 720p, or 1080p. Setup (HDMI) Use this feature to set the HDMI functions or check the information about the video monitors connected to the HDMI OUT jacks. ■ Standby Through (Standby through) Mode (Standby through mode) Use this feature whether this unit allows the HDMI signals input at the HDMI IN jacks to pass thorough this unit when this unit is in the standby mode. You can also designate an HDMI IN jack and HDMI OUT jack(s) that accept the signals when “Mode” is set to “Fix” and this unit is in the standby mode. Choice Functions Off Disables the HDMI standby through feature. HDMI signals do not pass through this unit if this unit is in the standby mode. Last HDMI signals pass through this unit (only from the HDMI IN jack to the HDMI OUT jack(s) used when this unit is set to the standby mode) even when this unit is in the standby mode. Fix HDMI signals pass through this unit (from the HDMI IN jack specified in “Input” to the HDMI OUT jack(s) specified in “Output”) even when this unit is in the standby mode. Functions Through Smart Zoom Notes Note When “Mode” is set to “Last” or “Fix”, the amount of power consumption in the standby mode increases. Graphical user interface (GUI) menu Input (HDMI IN jack select) Use this feature to select an HDMI IN jack that accepts HDMI signals when this unit is in the standby mode. Note This setting is available only when “Mode” is set to “Fix”. Choice HDMI IN jack IN1 HDMI IN1 (BD/HD DVD) jack IN2 HDMI IN2 (DVD) jack IN3 HDMI IN3 (CBL/SAT) jack IN4 HDMI IN4 (DVR) jack Output (HDMI OUT jack select) Use this feature to select HDMI OUT jack(s) that output HDMI signals when this unit is in the standby mode. Note Use this feature to check the information (interface and frequency for each video resolution) about the video monitors connected to the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks of this unit. y Press 9h repeatedly to toggle between “OUT1” (information about the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack ) and “OUT2” (information about the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT 2 jack ). Setup (Network) Use this menu to adjust the network parameters. Note In case you changed your network configuration, you may need to reconfigure the network settings. y This setting is available only when “Mode” is set to “Fix”. Choice ■ Monitor Info. (Monitor information) HDMI IN jack You can reset the all parameters in “Network” to the initial factory settings by using “NETWORK” of “INITIALIZE” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (page 122). OUT1 + 2 HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks ■ Configuration (Network configurations) OUT1 HDMI OUT 1 jack Use this feature to view the network parameters (IP address, etc.) or to change them manually. OUT2 HDMI OUT 2 jack Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit. Choice Functions Amp Outputs HDMI audio signals at the speakers connected to this unit. TV Outputs HDMI audio signals at the speakers of the TV connected to this unit. Amp + TV Outputs HDMI audio signals at the speakers connected to this unit and speakers of the TV connected to this unit. y If “Audio Output” is set to “TV” or “Amp + TV”, available audio signals vary depending on the specification of the connected video monitor. ■ Control Monitor (Control monitor) Use this feature to select the HDMI OUT jack at which HDMI control signals are output. Choice Functions Outputs HDMI control signals at the HDMI OUT 1 jack. HDMI OUT2 Outputs HDMI control signals at the HDMI OUT 2 jack. Choice Descriptions On Select this setting when this unit can obtain the network parameters from the DHCP server of the connected network. Off Select this setting when you set the network parameters manually. IP Address (IP address) Use this parameter to specify an IP address assigned to this unit. This value must not duplicate the one used for other devices in the target network. Subnet Mask (Subnet mask) Use this parameter to specify the subnet mask value assigned to this unit. y For most of the cases, the subnet mask value can be set as “255.255.255.0”. Default Gateway (Default gateway) Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the default gateway. English HDMI OUT1 DHCP (DHCP setting) Use this feature to select whether this unit can obtain the network parameters (IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, primary DNS server and secondary DNS server) from the DHCP server of the connected network. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Audio Output (HDMI audio output) 95 En Graphical user interface (GUI) menu DNS Server (P) (Primary DNS server) DNS Server (S) (Secondary DNS server) Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the primary and secondary DNS (Domain Name System) servers. Note If you have only one DNS address, enter the DNS address in “DNS Server (P)”. If you have two or more DNS addresses, enter one of them in “DNS Server (P)” and another in “DNS Server (S)”. ■ Network Standby (Network standby) Setup (Multi Zone) Use this menu to set the functions of the multi-zone configuration. ■ Zone SP Assign (Zone speaker assignment) Use this feature to assign the speaker terminals for Zone 2 and Zone 3. 1 Use this feature to select whether this unit accepts the commands via LAN network when this unit is in the standby mode. Choice Off Press 9k / n to select the speaker terminal and then press 9l / h repeatedly to select the desired zone of which you want to use the speakers. Descriptions Does not accept the operations via LAN network when this unit is in the standby mode. Zone SP Assign On M 2 3 – 2 3 SP1 Accepts the operations via LAN network when this unit is in the standby mode. Zone2 Set Zone3 Set SP2 OK CANCEL Zone : SP Terminal : Note M : Main zone 2 : Zone 2 3 : Zone 3 When “Network Standby” is set to “On”, the amount of power consumption in the standby mode increases. ■ Information (Network information) Use this feature to display the network system information. MAC Address (MAC (Media Access Control) address) This information displays the MAC address that is assigned to this unit. Status (Network status) This information displays the current link status of the network. Display status: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, No Link, Full Duplex, Half Duplex Note “No Link” appears when network connection is not made. System (System ID) This information displays the system ID that is assigned to this unit. 96 En 2 Press 9k / n to select “OK” and then press 9 ENTER to confirm the setting. y To return to the previous menu level without change, select “CANCEL” in step 2. ■ Zone2 Set/Zone3 Set (Zone 2/Zone 3 settings) Zone2 Volume/Zone3 Volume (Zone 2/Zone 3 volume) Use this menu to select whether this unit controls the volume level of the audio signals output at the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks. Choice Descriptions Fixed Select this setting when you want to control the volume level of the selected zone on the external amplifier. This unit fixes the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) volume level to a standard line level. Variable Select this setting when you want to control the volume level of the selected zone on this unit. You can adjust the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) volume level simultaneously with JVOLUME +/– on the remote control. Graphical user interface (GUI) menu ■ Zone OSD (Zone on-screen display) Note When “Zone2 Volume” or “Zone3 Volume” is set to “Fixed”, you cannot select the following parameters: – Zone2 Max Vol./Zone3 Max Vol. – Zone2 Initial Vol./Zone3 Initial Vol. Zone2 Max Vol./Zone3 Max Vol. (Zone 2/Zone 3 Maximum volume setting) Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the Zone 2 or Zone 3. Control range: –30.0 dB to +15 .0 dB, +16.5 dB Control step: 5.0 dB Note The “Zone2 Max Vol.” or “Zone3 Max Vol.” setting takes priority over the “Zone2 Initial Vol.” or “Zone3 Initial Vol.” setting. Zone2 Initial Vol./Zone3 Initial Vol. (Zone 2/Zone 3 initial volume setting) Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3 when the power of each zone is turned on. Control range: Off, Mute, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Use this feature to display the operational status of Zone 2 and Zone 3 on the Zone 2 video monitor connected to the ZONE VIDEO jacks on the rear panel of this unit. Choice Off Zone2 Displays the operational status of Zone 2 only. All Displays the operational status of Zone 2 and Zone 3. ■ Zone Rename (Zone Rename) Main/Zone2/Zone3 (Main/ Zone 2/ Zone 3 rename) Use this feature to edit the name of the selected zone. 1 Press 9 k / n / l / h to select a character or function and then press 9ENTER to confirm the selection. Repeat step 1 until you input a name you want to use. 2 Press 9 k / n / l / h to select “OK” and then press 9ENTER. Note y The “Zone2 Max Vol.” or “Zone3 Max Vol.” setting takes priority over the “Zone2 Initial Vol.” or “Zone3 Initial Vol.” setting. Zone2 Tone Control/Zone3 Tone Control (Zone 2/Zone 3 tone control) Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble output to the selected zone. Choices: Bass (Bass control), Treble (Treble control) Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB Zone2 Muting Type/Zone3 Muting Type (Zone 2/Zone 3 muting type) Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume of the selected zone. Choice Functions Full Mutes all the audio output. –20dB Reduces the current volume by 20 dB. –40dB Reduces the current volume by 40 dB. • To reset the name, select “RESET” and then press 9ENTER. • To cancel the operation without change, select “CANCEL” and then press 9ENTER. ADVANCED OPERATION Zone2 Balance/Zone3 Balance (Zone 2/Zone 3 balance) Use this feature to adjust the balance of the volume of the left and right channels in each zone. Choices: L10 to L1, 0, R1 to R10 Functions Turns off the zone on-screen display feature. Setup (Option) This menu adjusts the optional system settings. ■ Memory Guard (Memory guard) Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to sound field program parameter values and other system settings. Choice Functions Off Turns off the “Memory Guard” feature. On Protects the following parameters: – sound field program parameters – GUI menu parameters – speaker levels settings y When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, “ ” appears on the left side of the name of a parameter being protected. English 97 En Graphical user interface (GUI) menu ■ I/O Assignment (Input/output assignment) y Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the parameter to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using the CINPUT selector (or the input selector buttons (3)). Example: Assigning the CD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack to “MD/CD-R”. 1 Press 9ENTER to display the “I/O Assignment” screen. • To reset the name, select “RESET” and then press 9ENTER. • To cancel the operation without change, select “CANCEL” and then press 9ENTER. ■ Display Set (Display settings) Front Panel Display (Front panel display setting) Dimmer (Dimmer) Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: –4 to 0 Scroll (Front panel display message scroll) Use this feature to set the front panel display message scroll pattern. Choice Coax Opt In In PHONO CD TV MD/CD-R BD/HD DVD DVD 2 Opt Comp HDMI Out In In Continue Continuous mode. Select this to display the operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner. Once Scroll-once mode. Select this to display the operation status in the front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once. 1 EXIT 4 8 2 5 A IN 1 6 B IN 2 Press 9k / n /l / h to select the cell in row “MD/CD-R”, column “Coax In” and then press 9ENTER. Short Message (Short message display) Use this feature to activate or deactivate the short message display displayed in the GUI screen in the main zone. Choice 3 On Activates the short message display function. Off Deactivates the short message display function. y Note Press 9k / n /l / h to select “EXIT” and then press 9ENTER. The short message display (except some status messages) does not appear when the component video signals with 720p, 1080i or 1080p resolutions are input. Playback Screen (Playback screen display time) Use this feature to set the playback screen display time. y You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. Choice Use this feature to change the name of the input source that appears in the GUI screen and in the front panel display. 2 Press 9k / n /l / h to select a character or function and then press 9ENTER to confirm the selection. Repeat step 1 until you input a name you want to use. Press 9k / n /l / h to select “OK” and then press 9ENTER. 98 En Functions Always Displays the menu unceasingly during an operation. 10sec Turns off the menu 10 seconds after you perform a certain operation. 30sec Turns off the menu 30 seconds after you perform a certain operation. ■ Input Rename (Input rename) 1 Functions Press 9l / h to select “1” and then press 9ENTER. Select “None” to clear the existing assignment. To return to the previous screen without change, press 9k. 4 Functions y This setting is applied to the GUI screen in the main zone and OSD in Zone 2 or Zone 3. Graphical user interface (GUI) menu Position (GUI screen position) Use this feature to adjust the vertical and horizontal position of the GUI screen. Control range: –5 (downward/left) to +5 (upward/right) Button Moving direction of the GUI display 9 k Up 9 n Down 9 h Right 9 l Left Functions Does not display any background in your video monitor. Piano Displays a background image (the photograph of a piano) in your monitor when there is no video signal being input. Horn Displays a background image (the photograph of a horn) in your monitor when there is no video signal being input. Electric Guitar Displays a background image (the photograph of an electric guitar) in your monitor when there is no video signal being input. Gray Display a gray background in your monitor when there is no video signal being input. ■ iPod (iPod settings) Auto Automatically detects the type of audio input signals and selects the appropriate audio input jack select setting. Last Automatically selects the last audio input jack select setting used for the connected input source. Decoder Mode (Default decoder mode) Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode (page 74) for the input sources when you turn on the power of this unit. Choice Functions Auto Automatically detects the type of input signals and select the appropriate decoder mode setting. Last Automatically selects the last decoder mode setting used for the connected input source. EXTD Surround (Default extended surround decoder mode setting) Use this feature to designate the extended surround decoder mode (page 75) for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. Choice Standby Charge (iPod charge on the standby mode) Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode. Functions ADVANCED OPERATION None Choice Audio Select (Default audio input jack select) Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack select setting (page 37) for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. Choice Wall Paper (Wall paper) Use this feature to display the wall paper or gray background in your video monitor when there is no video signal being input. Choice ■ Initial Set (Initial settings) Functions Auto Automatically detects the input digital audio signals and activates the appropriate decoder. Last Selects the last selected extended surround decoder mode. Functions Auto Charges the battery of the stationed iPod when this unit is turned on and in the standby mode. Off Charges the battery of the stationed iPod only when this unit is turned on. English 99 En Graphical user interface (GUI) menu ■ Trigger Output (Trigger output) Manual Test (Manual test) Use this feature to select the functions of each TRIGGER OUT jack of this unit. Note Choice Trigger1 Trigger2 Function This setting is available only when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Manual”. Sets the functions for the TRIGGER OUT 1 jack. Sets the functions for the TRIGGER OUT 2 jack. Choice Functions High Sends the voltage signals. Low Stops sending the voltage signals. Trigger Mode (Trigger mode) Choice Descriptions Power Select this setting to send the voltage signals at the selected TRIGGER OUT jack while the selected zone is turned on. Source Select this setting to send the voltage signals at the selected TRIGGER OUT jack while the selected input source is selected. Manual Select this setting to send the voltage signals manually. Language Use this feature to select the language of the menu items and messages. (Japanese), Choices: English (English), Français (French), Deutsch (German), Español (Spanish), Русский (Russian) y Target Zone (Target zone) You can also select the display language with the “LANGUAGE” parameter in “ADVANCED SETUP” (page 123). Note Language This setting is not available when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Manual”. Choice Zone OSD — Target zone Main zone (Japanese) Zone2 Zone 2 Other languages Zone3 Zone 3 All Main zone, Zone 2, and Zone 3 Input Level (Input level) Select the input source and then set the input level applied to the selected input source. Note This setting is available only when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”. Descriptions High Sends the voltage when the input source is selected. Low Stops sending the voltage when the input source is selected. 100 En Front panel display Русский (Russian) Main Choice GUI menu — — ··· The selected language is displayed. — ··· The selected language is not displayed. The menu items and messages are displayed in English. Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory) Use this feature to save and recall up to six of your favorite setting for the main zone. You can also save up to four of your favorite settings for Zone 2 or Zone 3. Saving the system settings ■ Saving by the 7SYSTEM MEMORY buttons You can save the system settings stored in “Memory1” to “Memory4” by pressing the corresponding 7 SYSTEM MEMORY buttons. 4 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired zone and then press 9h. 5 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “xxx Save” and then press 9h. “xxx” indicates the zone you selected in step 4. 6 Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select the desired memory number and then press 9ENTER. The list of the parameter groups to be saved appears. Available parameter groups vary depending on the selected zone. Press and hold one of the 7SYSTEM MEMORY buttons on the remote control for 4 seconds. “Memory1 SAVE” (example) appears in the front panel display, and then this unit saves the current system setting to the corresponding memory number. Main Save Input/HDMI Out Audio Volume SP Config Video/Display Set Others SYSTEM MEMORY 1 2 3 4 • If system settings are already stored in the selected memory number, this unit overwrites the old settings. • To save the system settings for Zone 2 or Zone 3, press HZONE on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired zone and then press and hold one of the 7SYSTEM MEMORY buttons for 4 seconds. To save the system settings for the selected zone, the zone should be turned on. • This unit saves the parameters in the groups you select by using the GUI menu when you save the parameters by using the 7SYSTEM MEMORY buttons. y • If system settings are already stored in the selected memory number, this unit overwrites the old settings. • To load the system settings with the 7SYSTEM MEMORY button operation, use one of “Memory1” to “Memory4”. 7 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the parameter group and then press 9ENTER to check or uncheck the box. Check the boxes for the parameter groups to be saved. For details on parameters to be saved, see “Parameters to be saved” (page 102). 8 Press 9k / n / l / h repeatedly to select “SAVE” and then press 9ENTER to save the current system settings to the selected memory number. ■ Saving by the GUI menu operation You can save the current system settings stored in “Memory1” to “Memory6” by using the “System Memory” menu in the GUI menu. 1 Set the operation mode selector on the remote control to FAMP and then press IMENU. y If the menu directory other than “Top Menu” (page 79) is displayed, press and hold IMENU to display the top GUI menu. Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Setup” and then press 9h. 3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “System Memory” and then press 9h. y To cancel the operation, select “CANCEL” and then press 9ENTER. 9 Press IMENU to turn off the GUI menu. English 2 ADVANCED OPERATION y SAVE CANEL 101 En Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory) ■ Renaming the stored settings 1 2 3 4 5 Group Follow steps 1 to 4 in “Saving by the GUI menu operation” (page 101). Audio 80 PURE DIRECT on/off 47 EXTD SUR. setting 75 Adaptive DRC 89 Adaptive DSP Level 89 LFE Level 90 Dynamic Range 90 Tone Control 92 Pure Direct 93 CINEMA DSP 3D mode on/off 46 Volume Volume level 36 SP Config Parametric EQ 90 Configuration 87 Distance 88 Level 89 Information (Auto Setup) 34 Setup Menu (Auto Setup) 30 Analog ` Analog 93 Analog ` HDMI 93 HDMI ` HDMI 94 Processing 94 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired memory number and then press 9h. Press 9k / n / l / h to select “OK” and then press 9ENTER. y • To reset the name, select “RESET” and then press 9ENTER. • To cancel the operation without change, select “CANCEL” and then press 9ENTER. 6 Press IMENU to turn off the GUI menu. Page Stereo/Surround Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “xxx Rename” and then press 9h. “xxx” indicates the zone you selected in step 1. Press 9k / n / l / h to select a character or function and then press 9ENTER to confirm the selection. Repeat step 4 until you input a name you want to use. Parameters Video/ Display Set Note If you change the language setting (page 100 or 123), names of the memory settings will be automatically reset. Short Message 98 ■ Parameters to be saved Playback Screen 98 The parameter groups indicated in bold are selected by default. Position 99 Wall Paper 99 Lipsync 92 Front Panel Display 98 Audio Output 95 Main zone parameters Others Group Input/HDMI Out 102 En Parameters Page Audio Select 85 Decoder Mode 85 Input source 36 HDMI OUT SEL 37 Zone 2 and Zone 3 parameters Parameter Descriptions Page Input Input source 120 Volume Volume level 120 Tone Control Tone control settings 120 Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory) Loading the system settings ■ Example 1: Comparing the results of the automatic setup and manual setup Note If you load the system settings, the settings currently configured are overwritten. If you do not want to erase the current settings, save the settings using the System Memory feature in advance. ■ Loading by the 7 SYSTEM MEMORY buttons You can recall the system settings stored in “Memory1” to “Memory4” by pressing the corresponding 7SYSTEM MEMORY buttons. 1 Using examples This unit is equipped with three types of parametric equalizer settings (page 91), and you can also make your customized configuration of the sound settings of this unit by using the “Speaker” parameters (page 87). To compare the results of the automatic setup or your manual configuration, use the 7SYSTEM MEMORY buttons. SYSTEM MEMORY 1 Results of the automatic setup (PEQ Select: Natural) SYSTEM MEMORY 2 Results of the automatic setup (PEQ Select: Front) Press one of the 7SYSTEM MEMORY buttons on the remote control to select the desired memory number. “Memory1 LOAD” (example) appears in the front panel display. SYSTEM MEMORY 1 2 3 4 SYSTEM MEMORY 1 2 3 4 SYSTEM MEMORY 3 Settings configured manually y “Empty” appears in the menu screen if no system settings are stored in the selected memory number. Press the selected 7 SYSTEM MEMORY button once more to confirm the selection. This unit loads the settings stored in the selected memory number. 1 Perform the automatic setup (page 30). 2 Press and hold 7 SYSTEM MEMORY 1 for 4 seconds. This unit stores the results of the automatic setup (PEQ Select: Natural) to “Memory1”. 3 Set “PEQ Select” to “Front” (page 91). 4 Press and hold 7SYSTEM MEMORY 2 for 4 seconds. This unit stores the results of the automatic setup (PEQ Select: Front) to “Memory2”. 5 Configure the parameters of “Speaker” (page 87) and parametric equalizer configuration of each speaker manually (page 91). 6 Press and hold 7SYSTEM MEMORY 3 for 4 seconds. This unit stores the settings configured manually to “Memory3”. ■ Loading by the GUI menu operation 1 Follow steps 1 to 4 in “Saving by the GUI menu operation” (page 101). 2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “xxx Load” and then press 9h. “xxx” indicates the zone you selected in step 1. 3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired memory number and then press 9h. y If the memory number you selected is empty, “Memory Empty” appears. 4 Press 9 ENTER to load the settings stored in the selected memory number. y 5 English To cancel the operation and return to the previous menu level, press 9l. ADVANCED OPERATION 2 Saving each setting Press I MENU to turn off the GUI menu. 103 En Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory) ■ Example 2: Switching the settings for different room environments The tonal characteristics of the listening room may vary depending on the situations of the room (for example, whether the curtains are open or closed), and the settings of this unit should be arranged for each situation of the room. You can switch between the settings of this unit easily by using 7SYSTEM MEMORY buttons. SYSTEM MEMORY 1 The settings when the curtains of the listening room are closed SYSTEM MEMORY 1 2 3 4 SYSTEM MEMORY 2 The settings when the curtains of the listening room are open Saving each setting 1 Close the curtains of the listening room and then perform the automatic setup (page 30). 2 Press and hold 7 SYSTEM MEMORY 1 for 4 seconds. This unit stores the settings for the current room situation (i.e. the curtains are closed) to “Memory1”. 3 Open the curtains of the listening room and the perform the automatic setup. 4 Press and hold 7SYSTEM MEMORY 2 for 4 seconds. This unit stores the current room situation (i.e. the curtains are open) to “Memory2”. 104 En Controlling this unit by using the Web browser (Web Control Center) You can operate this unit by using a Web browser. You can select the input source and sound field program, browse the iPod or USB/network contents, select the preset items, and adjust the parameters of this unit by using the graphical user interface (Web Control Center) that appears in the Web browser. Check the IP address of this unit by using “IP Address” in “Network” menu (page 95) in advance, and then enter the IP address to the Web browser to access this unit to control it. PC Web browser Control Controlling USB/ Network features Adjusting the system parameters Power on/off ADVANCED OPERATION Selecting the input source And many other features... y • To use this feature, this unit and your PC must be connected properly in the network (page 23). • We recommend that you use Windows Internet Explorer 6 or 7 that is installed on Windows XP or Windows Vista PC to access this unit. • You can select whether this unit accepts the controls by using the Web browser when this unit is in the standby mode (page 96). • You can register the MAC address of the PCs you want to use to control this unit and limit the PCs that can control this unit by using the Web browser. You can select that this unit allows the access to this unit by the PCs whose MAC addresses are registered to this unit or allows the access by any PCs by using “MAC FILTER” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (page 122) English 105 En Remote control features In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code for each input source (page 109). Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components ■ Controlling this unit Set the operation mode selector to FAMP to control this unit. POWER POWER TV AV MULTI BD HD DVD STANDBY POWER V-AUX PHONO DOCK DVD CD MD CD-R CBL SAT TV DVR VCR XM SIRIUS USB NET AMP SETUP If no code has been set for the TV operation mode, the remote control operates the component that is set to the TV control area (page 109). *1 Set to AMP TV SOURCE SELECT Set the operation mode selector to F TV to control your TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code for the TV operation mode in advance (page 109). y *1 TUNER ■ Controlling a TV MACRO ID MODE 2 STATUS TITLE BAND PRESET/CH *2 4 3 VOLUME MENU SRCH MODE V-AUX PHONO DOCK DVD CD MD CD-R CBL SAT TV DVR VCR TUNER XM SIRIUS USB NET AV MULTI BD HD DVD *1 CAT. A-E ENTER POWER POWER TV ZONE SYSTEM MEMORY 1 STANDBY POWER AMP Set to TV TV PLAY INFO DISPLAY SUBMENU RETURN MEMORY SOURCE SELECT MUTE ZONE SYSTEM MEMORY TAG STEREO 5 MACRO ID MODE REC CLASSICAL 1 SETUP LIVE/CLUB 2 PRG SELECT ENTERTAIN 3 MOVIE 4 ENHANCER SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT 6 7 8 9 HDMI OUT 0 INFO LEVEL SLEEP MUTE AUDIO SEL AUDIO TV VOL TV CH TV 3D DSP 1 2 STATUS TITLE BAND PRESET/CH *2 *2 CAT. A-E ENTER PLAY INFO DISPLAY SUBMENU RETURN MEMORY EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT ENT 10 4 3 VOLUME MENU SRCH MODE MUTE REC INPUT TAG CLASSICAL 1 STEREO 5 *3 LIVE/CLUB 2 PRG SELECT ENTERTAIN 3 MOVIE 4 ENHANCER SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT 6 7 8 9 HDMI OUT 0 INFO LEVEL TV VOL TV CH *2 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT ENT 10 SLEEP MUTE AUDIO SEL AUDIO TV 3D DSP INPUT Notes *1 These buttons always control this unit regardless of the operation mode selector position. *2 These buttons control this unit only when the component operation mode selector is set to FAMP. Notes *1 2TV POWER can always turn on or off the power of the TV regardless of the operation mode selector position. *2 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode selector is set to F TV. For details, see the “TV” column on page 107. *3 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode selector is set to F TV or F SOURCE. Remote control 106 En Functions TV VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. TV CH +/– Changes the TV channel. TV MUTE Mutes the audio output. TV INPUT Changes the input source. Remote control features ■ Controlling other components Set the operation mode selector to FSOURCE to control other components selected with the input selector buttons (3). You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source in advance (page 109). The following table shows the function of each control button used to control other components assigned to each input selector button (3). Be advised that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. [1] POWER POWER TV AV MULTI V-AUX STANDBY POWER [2] PHONO DOCK [3] BD HD DVD DVD CD MD CD-R CBL SAT TV DVR VCR TUNER XM SIRIUS USB NET [4] STATUS TITLE BAND TAG CLASSICAL 1 MACRO MODE [6] ZONE SYSTEM MEMORY y 1 2 3 STATUS TITLE PRESET/CH MENU The remote control has 16 modes (input areas) to control components so that the remote control can operate up to 16 different components. [8] MUTE [5] TV ID PLAY INFO DISPLAY REC AMP SETUP STEREO 5 4 VOLUME LIVE/CLUB 2 PRG SELECT ENTERTAIN 3 MOVIE 4 ENHANCER SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT 6 7 8 9 HDMI OUT 0 INFO LEVEL EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT ENT 10 SLEEP MUTE AUDIO SEL AUDIO TV VOL TV CH TV 3D DSP INPUT DVD recorder/ Digital video recorder VCR TV Cable TV/ Satellite tuner CD player MD recorder/ CD recorder Tape deck Tuner Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 DVR power Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 AV POWER [2] TITLE, BAND Title Title Title [3] PRESET/ CH k Menu up Menu up Menu up Channel up Channel down Power *1 PRESET/ CH n Menu down Menu down Menu down CAT. A-E l Menu left Menu left Menu left [9] [10] Set to SOURCE Blu-ray Disc/ HD DVD DVD player LD player player/ recorder [1] [7] CAT. A-E ENTER SUBMENU RETURN MEMORY SOURCE SELECT VOLUME MENU SRCH MODE PRESET/CH *2 Title Power *1 Band Menu up Channel up Menu up Menu down Channel down Menu down Menu left Menu left Menu right Menu right Menu right Menu right ENTER Menu enter Menu enter Menu enter Menu enter Menu enter Return Return Return Return Memory Record Record DVR record DVR record Disc skip *2 *2 DVR pause DVR pause *2 *2 [4] RETURN, MEMORY [5] REC Record (recorder) Disc skip Record Menu right Record e Pause Pause Pause Pause Pause Pause Pause p Play Play Play Play Play DVR play *2 DVR play *2 Play Play Play s Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop DVR stop *2 DVR stop *2 Stop Stop Stop ll Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward DVR search DVR search Search backward *2 backward *2 backward Search backward Search backward hh Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward DVR search DVR search Search forward forward *2 forward *2 Search forward Search forward b Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward DVR skip DVR skip Skip backward *2 backward *2 backward Skip backward Audio Direction A program down *3 a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward DVR skip forward *2 DVR skip forward *2 Skip forward Skip forward Audio Direction B program up [6] 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons [7] MENU, SRCH MODE Menu Menu [8] DISPLAY Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display [9] ENT Index Index Chapter/ time Index Enter Enter Enter Index Index Enter Audio Audio Audio Audio [10] AUDIO Menu Pause ADVANCED OPERATION Direction A/B CAT. A-E h *3 Numeric buttons Search mode Menu Notes 107 En English *1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a power button. *2 These buttons operate your video recorder (DVD recorder, etc.) only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (page 109). *3 These functions are used for selecting HD Radio audio programs (U.S.A. model only). Remote control features ■ Selecting a component to be controlled You can select a component to be controlled independently of the input source selected with the input selector buttons (3). Press 5 SELECT l / h repeatedly to select the desired component. The name of the component to be controlled appears in the display window (4) on the remote control. DVD Customizing the remote control Use the setup mode of the remote control to customize the remote control. 1 Press GSETUP on the remote control using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “SETUP” appears in the display window on the remote control. 2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired setup mode. ■ Controlling optional components (Option mode) Setup mode “OPTN1” and “OPTN2” are optional component control areas that can be programmed with remote control functions independently from any input source. These areas are useful for programming commands that are to be used only as a part of a macro function or for components that do not have a valid remote control code. To select the option mode, press 5 SELECT l / h repeatedly until “OPTN1” or “OPTN2” appears in the display window (4) on the remote control. OPTN1 or OPTN2 Note You cannot set a remote control code for the optional areas. See page 111 to program buttons operated within this component control area. 3 Descriptions Page SETUP Top setup mode menu. — LEARN Learning mode. Use this feature to program codes from other remote controls. 111 P-SET Preset mode. Use this feature to change the remote control code of each control area. 109 RNAME Renaming mode.Use this feature to change the name of each control area. 112 MACRO Macro programming mode.Use this feature to set the macro program. 113 CLEAR Clearing mode. Use this feature to clear the configurations of this unit. 115 ERASE Erase mode. Use this feature to erase the learned functions of each button. 115 EX-IR Extended IR code mode. This feature is for the authorized custom installers only. — LIGHT Backlight mode. Use this feature to set the light up mode of the remote control. 109 After the configurations, press GSETUP again to exit from the setup menu. Note If you do not complete each of the operations within 30 seconds, this unit automatically exits from the setup menu. 108 En Remote control features Setting the backlight mode of the remote control 1 2 Press GSETUP on the remote control using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “SETUP” appears in the display window (4) on the remote control. Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “LIGHT” and then press 9ENTER. “LIGHT” and the current “LIGHT” setting appears in the display window (4) alternately. Setting remote control codes You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for each input area. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. The following table shows the default component (Library: component category) and the remote control code for each control area. Remote control code default settings LIGHT 3 Press 9k / n to select the desired setting and then press 9ENTER. Choice ON OFF Lights up the backlight when a button is pressed. Lights up the backlight only when 6LIGHT is pressed. Press GSETUP again to exit from the setup mode. Library (component category) Manufacturer Default code MULTI DVD Yamaha 04306 V-AUX — — — PHONO — — — DOCK SOURCE Yamaha 00012 BD HD DVD BD Yamaha 04706 DVD DVD Yamaha 04306 CD CD Yamaha 01205 MD CD-R CD-R Yamaha 01405 CBL SAT — — — TV — — — DVR DVR Yamaha 00707 VCR — — — TUNER SOURCE Yamaha 00012 XM SOURCE Yamaha 00012 SIRIUS SOURCE Yamaha 00012 USB NET SOURCE Yamaha 00012 ADVANCED OPERATION 4 Descriptions Control area Note You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case, try setting another Yamaha remote control code. Check the remote control code for your component in advance. For a complete list of available remote control codes, see “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 2 Set the operation mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE. If you want to set the remote control code for “TV”, set the operation mode selector to FTV. 109 En English 1 Remote control features 3 Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “SETUP” appears in the display window (4) on the remote control. SETUP 4 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “P-SET” and then press 9ENTER. The remote control enters the preset mode. “P-SET” and name of the currently selected control area appears in the display window (4) alternately. P-SET 5 Press an input selector button (3) or 5SELECT l / h repeatedly to select the control area you want to customize. If you selected “TV” in step 2, skip this step. DVD 6 Press 9ENTER. The current code setting appears. 04306 7 Press the numeric buttons (B) to enter the five-digit remote control code for your component. 8 Press 9ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window (4) if setting was successful. “NG” appears in the display window (4) if the setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 5. OK y If you continuously want to set up another code for another control area, repeat steps 5 through 8. 9 Press G SETUP again to exit from the setup menu. 110 En 10 Press 2 AV POWER or A p to confirm whether you can control your component using the remote control. y • If operation is not possible and the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. • If you set “00012” as the remote control code of the selected control area, you can operate the currently selected internal source (DOCK, TUNER, XM, SIRIUS, or USB/NET). Notes • “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) on the remote control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes for commercially available audio and video components (including Yamaha components). If operation is not possible with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote control function using the learning feature (page 111) or use the remote control supplied with the component. • Functions programmed using the learning mode take priority over remote control code functions. Remote control features Programming codes from other remote controls Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other and then press 9ENTER. “L–KEY” appears in the display window (4). Other remote control MUTE 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) TAG CLASSICAL 1 STEREO 5 2 PRESET/CH 4 3 VOLUME MENU SRCH MODE LIVE/CLUB 2 PRG SELECT ENTERTAIN 3 MOVIE 4 ENHANCER SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT 6 7 8 9 HDMI OUT 0 INFO LEVEL TV VOL TV CH SYSTEM MEMORY 1 STATUS TITLE BAND 5 Press the button for which you want to program the new function. “START” appears in the display window (4). EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT ENT 10 SLEEP MUTE AUDIO SEL AUDIO TV 3D DSP INPUT ENTER SUBMENU RETURN MEMORY CAT. A-E PLAY INFO DISPLAY TV POWER V-AUX AV POWER DVR CD PHONO STANDBY VCR MD CD-R DOCK POWER ADVANCED OPERATION MULTI TV USB NET DVD SIRIUS TV AMP ZONE SOURCE CBL SAT XM MODE MACRO BD HD DVD TUNER ID BD HD DVD MULTI TV POWER TV DVD V-AUX AV POWER DVR CD PHONO STANDBY VCR MD CD-R DOCK POWER USB NET CBL SAT AMP ZONE TV SOURCE 4 SIRIUS MODE MACRO XM 3 TUNER ID OK y When you want to program another function, repeat steps 4 througn 6. English Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “LEARN” and then press 9ENTER. SETUP SETUP VOLUME MENU SRCH MODE SYSTEM MEMORY 2 PRESET/CH 3 SELECT SELECT 1 STATUS TITLE BAND Other remote control Make sure that the operation mode selector is set to F SOURCE or FTV. When you set the operation mode selector to FAMP and program a remote control codes from other remote controls, the programmed key cannot operate the amplifier function of this unit. Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “SETUP” appears in the display window (4). 4 Press and hold the button you want to program on the other remote control until “OK” appears in the display window (4). “NG” appears in the display window (4) if learning was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4. Note 2 3 6 2 VOLUME MENU SRCH MODE CAT. A-E Set the operation mode selector to FSOURCE and then press an input selector button (3) to select the desired control area. If you want to program the remote control code for “TV”, set the operation mode selector to FTV. PLAY INFO DISPLAY • The remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. • You cannot program the desired remote control code even if you select the buttons in the highlighted area in the above illustration depending on the selected control area and the assigned library. SYSTEM MEMORY PRESET/CH ENTER Notes 1 STATUS TITLE BAND SUBMENU RETURN MUTE REC 1 POWER ZONE MODE STANDBY DOCK MACRO ID POWER PHONO VCR MD CD-R SETUP POWER CD TV SOURCE SELECT Set to SOURCE AV V-AUX DVR PLAY INFO DISPLAY REC AMP TV MULTI TV DVD USB NET CBL SAT SIRIUS BD HD DVD XM USB NET TUNER SIRIUS TV XM AMP VCR TUNER ZONE MD CD-R SOURCE DVR MODE CD TV MACRO DVD CBL SAT ID BD HD DVD SETUP CAT. A-E ENTER SUBMENU RETURN MEMORY SELECT VOLUME MENU SRCH MODE 4 DOCK PRESET/CH 3 PHONO STATUS TITLE BAND 2 V-AUX POWER SYSTEM MEMORY MULTI STANDBY VOLUME MENU SRCH MODE AV CAT. A-E PLAY INFO DISPLAY POWER TV PRESET/CH ENTER POWER 1 STATUS TITLE BAND SUBMENU RETURN You can program remote control codes from other remote controls. Use the learning feature if you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control code is not available. You can program the function of other remote control to the buttons in the highlighted areas in the following illustration. The buttons can be programmed independently for each control area. 4 111 En Remote control features 7 Press G SETUP again to exit from the setup menu. 5 Edit the name of the control area. To locate the position to edit , press 9l / h. To select a character, press 9k / n. Notes • “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) on the remote control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions. However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room for further learning (page 115). • Learning may not be possible in the following cases: – when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other components are weak. – when the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight. – when the function to be programmed is continuous or uncommon. BD/HD y Press 9k to change the character in the following order, or press 9n to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, symbols (–, +, /, :). 6 Press 9ENTER to set the new name. “OK” appears in the display window (4) on the remote control if renaming was successful. y When you want to rename the another control area, press the input selector button (3) or 5SELECT l / h repeatedly to select the desired control area and then press 9ENTER and then carry out the operations of steps 4 through 6. Changing source names in the display window You can change the name of the control area (input source) that appears in the display window (4) on the remote control. 7 1 Note Set the operation mode selector to FSOURCE and then press an input selector button (3) to select the desired control area. 2 Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “SETUP” appears in the display window. 3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “RNAME” and then press 9ENTER. 4 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select 3-letter name or 5-letterd name you want to edit and then press 9ENTER. Each control area has both 3-letter name and 5-letter name. You can rename the 3-letter name and 5-letter name independently. 3-letter name BD 112 En 5-letter name BD/HD Press G SETUP again to exit from the setup menu. “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) on the remote control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. Remote control features Macro programming features The macro programming feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example, when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The macro programming feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros (page 114). ■ Recalling programmed macrooperations STANDBY POWER V-AUX PHONO DOCK DVD CD MD CD-R POWER POWER TV AV MULTI BD HD DVD CBL SAT TV DVR VCR TUNER XM SIRIUS USB NET Macro buttons ■ Default macro functions Pressing macro button STANDBY To automatically transmit these signals in order First Second STANDBY — POWER POWER (*1) TV MULTI MULTI V-AUX V-AUX PHONO PHONO DOCK DOCK BD HD DVD BD HD DVD DVD DVD CD CD AMP TV SOURCE SELECT SETUP MACRO ID MODE ZONE MACRO SYSTEM MEMORY 1 3 4 Press HMACRO on the remote control. MACRO 2 3 Press the desired macro button. “M:the 3-letter name of the selected control area” (for example, “M:DVD”) appears in the display window (4), and this unit transmits the programmed functions. When you press DSTANDBY or EPOWER, “M:STB” or “M:PWR” appears in the display window (4), and this unit transmits the programmed functions. Press HMACRO again to exit from the macro-operation mode. Notes • While the remote control is running a macro program (the transmission indicator flashes), it does not accept any other operation. • Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro is operating until the macro operation is complete. • If you do not complete each of the operations within 30 seconds, this unit automatically exits from the macro-operation mode. MD CD-R POWER MD CD-R CBL SAT CBL SAT TV TV DVR DVR VCR VCR TUNER TUNER (*2) XM XM (*2) SIRIUS SIRIUS (*2) USB NET USB NET ADVANCED OPERATION 1 2 (*2) *1 Set the appropriate remote control code for TV in advance (page 109). *2 This unit plays the last received station or selected contents before the unit was set in the standby mode. English 113 En Remote control features ■ Programming macro operations You can program your own macro to transmit several remote control commands in sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote control codes or perform learning operations before programming the macro. 4 Press the buttons for the functions you want to include in the macro operation in sequence. Example Set the input source to DVD → Turn on the DVD player → Turn on the video monitor Notes • The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again when the programmed macro is cleared. • It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents. • We do not recommend that you program continuous operations (for example, volume control) in a macro. Step 1 (“MCR1”): Press DVD. Step 2 (“MCR2”): Press AV POWER. Step 3 (“MCR3”): Press TV POWER. POWER POWER TV 1 2 3 Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “SETUP” appears in the display window (4). POWER 2 MULTI V-AUX PHONO DOCK BD HD DVD DVD CD MD CD-R 1 CBL SAT TV DVR VCR TUNER XM SIRIUS USB NET Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “MACRO” and then press 9ENTER. MCR 1 Press the desired macro button you want to assign the macro program to and then press 9ENTER. “M:the three-letter name of the selected macro button” (for example, “M:DVD”) and the name of the currently selected control area appears in the display window (4) alternately. When you press DSTANDBY or EPOWER, “M:STB” or “M:PWR” and the name of the currently selected control area appears in the display window (4) alternately. STANDBY AV 3 M:DVD Indicates the number of macro steps entered (Selected macro button) Flashes alternately so you can set the next step DVD (Selected control area) Notes • To change the selected input area, press 5 SELECT l / h. Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step, whereas 5 SELECT l / h only changes the selected input area. • The position of the operation mode selector (AMP/TV/ SOURCE) affects the assigned function. When the operation mode selector is set to FAMP or FTV, the input source selectors do not function. 5 Press HMACRO to confirm the program. You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote control automatically exits from the macro programming mode. 6 Press GSETUP again to exit from the setup menu. Note “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) if you press more than one button simultaneously. 114 En Remote control features Clearing configurations 4 You can clear all changes made in each function set, such as learned functions, macros, renamed control area names and setup remote control ID. ■ Clearing function sets 1 Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “SETUP” appears in the display window (4). 2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “CLEAR” and then press 9ENTER. 3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired clear mode. Clear mode L:DVD (etc.) L:AMP Notes • “NG” appears in the display window (4) if clearing was unsuccessful. • “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. 5 1 Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “SETUP” appears in the display window (4). 2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “ERASE” and then press 9ENTER. 3 Set the operation mode selector to F SOURCE and then press an input selector button (3). If you want to erase the function learned in the AMP or TV control area, set the operation mode selector to FAMP or F TV. L:TV Clears all learned functions for TV control area. Set the operation mode selector to FTV to select this clear mode. L:ALL Clears all learned functions. M:DVD (etc.) (M:Name of the selected macro button) Clears the macro programmed for the selected macro button (page 114). The assigned macro to the selected macro button reverts to the initial factory macro. Press the desired macro button if you want to change the macro button you want to clear the programmed functions of. 4 Press 9ENTER. “E-KEY” appears in the display window (4). 5 Press and hold the button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. If clearing is successful, “OK” appears in the display window (4). M:ALL Clears all programmed macros. The assigned macro to the selected macro button reverts to the initial factory macro. RNAME Set all the name of the control areas to the default settings. FCTRY Set all settings of the remote control to the initial factory settings. ADVANCED OPERATION Sets all learned functions for controlling the amplifier functions to the initial factory settings. Set the operation mode selector to FAMP to select this clear mode. Press GSETUP again to exit from the setup mode. ■ Clearing a learned function Descriptions (L:Three-digit name of the selected control area) Clears all learned functions the respective control area. You can change the control area to be cleared by pressing the desired input selector button (3) or 5SELECT l / h repeatedly. Press and hold 9ENTER for about 3 seconds. When the clearing is successful, “OK” appears in the display window (4). y • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 3 through 5. • Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). 6 Press GSETUP again to exit from the setup menu. Notes 115 En English • “NG” appears in the display window (4) on the remote control if clearing was unsuccessful. • “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) if you press more than one button simultaneously. Remote control features Simplified remote control Use the supplied simplified remote control to make basic controls of this unit. STANDBY Sets the selected zone to the standby mode. ☞ P. 26, 119 SYSTEM MEMORY Save or recall the system settings. ☞ P. 101 STANDBY POWER POWER Turn on the power. ☞ P. 26, 119 SYSTEM MEMORY 1 2 3 4 INPUTl / h Select the input source. ☞ P. 36 INPUT These buttons function as well as the following identical buttons on the main remote control (when the operation selector mode is set to FAMP). 8STATUS 9k / n / l / h 9ENTER 0RETURN, SUBMENU IMENU KDISPLAY VOLUME STATUS MENU VOLUME +/– Adjust the volume level. ☞ P. 36 ENTER RETURN DISPLAY SUBMENU MUTE MUTE Mutes the audio output. ☞ P. 38 Remove the insulation sheet before using the remote control. ■ Setting the controlling zone of the simplified remote control Use this feature to set the controlling zone (page 119) and remote control ID (page 121) of the simplified remote control. Setting the remote control ID • ID1: Press and hold l (left cursor) and 1 for 3 seconds. • ID2: Press and hold l (left cursor) and 2 for 3 seconds. Setting the controlling zone • Main zone: Press and hold h (right cursor) and 1 for 3 seconds. • Zone 2: Press and hold h (right cursor) and 2 for 3 seconds. • Zone 3: Press and hold h (right cursor) and 3 for 3 seconds. ■ Replacing the battery in the simplified remote control Change the battery when the operation range of the simplified remote control decreases. 116 En Use a straight pin to remove the cover. Replace the battery with a new CR2025 battery. Close the cover. Notes • Insert the battery according to the polarity markings (+ and –). • If the batteries run out, immediately remove them from the simplified remote control to prevent an explosion or acid leak. • If a battery starts leaking, dispose of it immediately. Be careful not to let the leaking battery acid touch your skin or clothing. • Before inserting new batteries, wipe the compartment clean. • Dispose of batteries according to your regional regulations. Using multi-zone configuration This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The multi-zone configuration feature enables you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main zone, second zone (Zone 2) and third zone (Zone 3). You can control this unit from the second or third zone using the supplied remote control. Only analog signals are sent to the second and third zones. Any source you want to listen to in the second zone and third zone must be connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit. Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in the second zone and/or third zone. • An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control via the infrared signal receiver in the second zone and/or third zone to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone. • An amplifier and speakers in the second zone and/or third zone. • A video monitor for the second room. y • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the Zone 2 and Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements. • Some Yamaha models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 Yamaha components can be connected as shown below. REMOTE REMOTE IN REMOTE IN OUT Yamaha component Yamaha component This unit REMOTE IN OUT ■ Using external amplifiers To use an external amplifier in the second zone and/or third zone, connect the external amplifier to ZONE OUT jacks with analog audio cables ADVANCED OPERATION Infrared signal receiver OUT From the ZONE OUT (ZONE 3) jacks From the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2) jacks Amplifier Amplifier Analog audio signals only This unit DVD player etc. Remote control Remote control Infrared signal receiver Infrared signal receiver MAIN ZONE 3 ZONE 2 Infrared signal emitter Main zone From the REMOTE OUT jack Second zone (Zone 2) Third zone (Zone 3) To the REMOTE IN jack To the REMOTE IN jack • To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT use the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. • Adjust the the second zone and/or third zone volume by using the amplifier in each zone when “Zone2 Volume” or “Zone3 Volume” is set to “Fixed” (page 96). 117 En English Notes Using multi-zone configuration ■ Using the internal amplifiers of this unit Important safety notice The speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than one loudspeaker per channel. Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage. Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This information is found on the back panel of your Receiver. If you want to use one internal amplifier (SP1 or SP2) of this unit Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals. If you want to use two internal amplifiers (SP1 and SP2) of this unit Connect the Zone 2 and Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 and SP2 speaker terminals. PRESENCE/ZONE SP1 R 2/ZONE 3 L R ZONE 2/ZONE 3 SP2 L + + Speakers (Zone 2) Speakers (Zone 3) This unit ■ Connecting zone video monitors Connect the video monitor(s) in Zone 2 and/or Zone 3 to the ZONE VIDEO jacks. If you connect the multiple zone video monitors to ZONE VIDEO jacks, the video monitors play back the same source simultaneously. ZONE VIDEO This unit Source component V Video In Video monitor (Zone2) 118 En V Video In Video monitor (Zone3) Using multi-zone configuration ■ Using TRIGGER OUT jacks for Zone 2 and Zone 3 This unit is equipped with two TRIGGER OUT jacks. You can turn on and off the component corresponding to the selection of the input source of the desired zone or turning on and off the desired zone by configuring the “Trigger Output” settings (page 100). This unit Trigger in Trigger in Power amplifier (etc.) Zone 2 (etc.) 2 1 TRIGGER OUT Projector (etc.) in the main zone y After the connections, turn on this unit and set the speaker terminal assignments with “Zone SP Assign” (page 96). Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3 You must complete this step within 10 seconds while the selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently selected zone mode is automatically canceled. 3 You can select the zone you want to control by using the control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. y Remote control operations Front panel operations 1 Press O ZONE 2 or O ZONE 3 on the front panel to individually turn on or off Zone 2 or Zone 3. 2 Press O ZONE CONTROLS on the front panel repeatedly to select the zone you want to control. Each time you press O ZONE CONTROLS, the front panel display changes as shown below, and the indicator for the currently selected zone flashes for approximately 10 seconds. However, no indicator flashes when the main zone is selected. ZONE3 1 Press H ZONE repeatedly to select the zone you want to control. “MAIN”, “ZONE 2”, or “ZONE 3” indicator appears in the display window (4) on the remote control. ZONE 2 ZONE 3 MAIN (Zone 2) (Zone 3) (Main zone) 2 Press EPOWER to turn on the selected zone. 3 Perform the desired operation in the selected zone (page 120). ADVANCED OPERATION To turn off the desired zone, press OZONE 2 or OZONE 3 again. ■ Basic operation ZONE2 Perform the desired operation in the selected zone (page 120). y To turn off the desired zone, press DSTANDBY. No indicator flashes when the main zone is selected. English ZONE2 Controls the Zone 2 amplifier or tuner functions. ZONE3 Controls the Zone 3 amplifier or tuner functions. 119 En Using multi-zone configuration ■ Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3 Rotate the CINPUT selector (or set the operation mode selector to FAMP and then press one of the input selector buttons (3)). • Select “TUNER” as the input source to use the FM/AM tuning features (page 48) in the selected zone. • Select “XM” as the input source to use the XM Satellite Radio features (page 53) in the selected zone. • Select “SIRIUS” as the input source to use the SIRIUS Satellite Radio features (page 58) in the selected zone. • Select “DOCK” as the input source to use the iPod features (page 66) or Bluetooth features (page 64) in the selected zone. • Select “USB/NET” as the input source to use the USB features (page 69) or network features (page 69) in the selected zone. Note The input sources are shared across all zones. ■ Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3 Rotate P VOLUME (or press J VOLUME +/–) . ■ Setting the sleep timer for Zone 2 or Zone 3 Use this feature to turn of the desired zone after a certain amount of time. Set the operation mode to FAMP and then press CSLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. The sleep timer setting changes as shown below. 120min. OFF Note When you use the external amplifiers in Zone 2 or Zone 3, J VOLUME +/– can be used only when “Zone2 Volume” or “Zone3 Volume” is set to “Variable” (page 96). ■ Adjusting the front speaker balance of Zone 2 or Zone 3 Press DTONE CONTROL repeatedly to select “BALANCE” and then rotate the MPROGRAM selector for adjustment. ■ Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3 Press DTONE CONTROL repeatedly to select the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency response (BASS) and then rotate the MPROGRAM selector for adjustment. Control range: -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB 120 En 30min. 60min. ■ Using the zone OSD You can display the FM/AM radio, XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only), or HD Radio information (U.S.A. model only) in the video monitor connected to the ZONE VIDEO jacks. You can also browse music contents (such as iPod contents) by using the zone OSD. 1 Set the operation mode selector to FSOURCE and then press the desired input selector button (3). 2 Press KDISPLAY to display the menu screen on the zone OSD. 3 Use 9k / n / l / h and 9ENTER to navigate the menu on the zone OSD. y Press L MUTE on the remote control to mute the sound output to the selected zone. 90min. Notes • The menu displayed in the zone OSD appears in English even if Japanese or Russian is selected. • There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are replaced with underscores “_”. y • You can select the zone(s) of which the operational status is displayed (page 97). • You can operate the zone OSD in the same way as GUI operations. Advanced setup This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. Notes • Only A MASTER ON/OFF, N STRAIGHT and the M PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu. • All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu. • The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display. Using the advanced setup menu 1 2 Press A MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. Press and hold N STRAIGHT and then press A MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and “ADVANCED SETUP” appears in the front panel display. ■ Remote sensor REMOTE SENSOR Use this feature to activate or deactivate the signalreceiving capability of the remote control sensor on the front panel of this unit. Choice Descriptions ON Select this setting if you want to activate the signal-receiving capability of the remote control sensor. OFF Select this setting if you want to deactivate the signal-receiving capability of the remote control sensor. Note EFFECT 3 4 5 While holding down We recommend setting the parameter to “ON” in most cases. ■ Wake on RS-232C access MASTER Rotate the MPROGRAM selector to select the parameter you want to adjust. Press N STRAIGHT repeatedly to change the selected parameter setting. Press A MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off this unit. y The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this unit. ■ Speaker impedance SPEAKER IMP. Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit so that it matches that of your speakers. Choice RS232C STANDBY Use this feature to set this unit to transmit data via the RS232C interface when this unit is in the standby mode. Choice YES NO Select this setting to set this unit not to transmit data via the RS-232C interface. Initial setting: [U.S.A. and Canada models]: YES [Other models]: NO ■ Remote control ID setting REMOTE CON AMP Use this feature to set the remote control ID of this unit for remote control recognition. Choice 6ΩMIN Select this setting to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω. The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher (front speakers only: 4 Ω or higher). Descriptions ID1 Select this setting when the ID of the remote control is set to “ID1” ID2 Select this setting when the ID of the remote control is set to “ID2” Setting remote control ID Use this feature to set the remote control ID. This feature is useful when you control multiple Yamaha AV receiver or amplifier with using the remote control. 121 En English Select this setting to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω. The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Functions Select this setting to set this unit to transmit data via the RS-232C interface. Descriptions 8ΩMIN ADVANCED OPERATION STRAIGHT Advanced setup Press GID repeatedly using a ballpoint pen or similar object on the remote control to select the desired remote control ID. Each time you press GID, the remote control ID indicator changes as shown below. ID1 ■ Recovery and backup of the system settings RECOV./BACKUP Use this feature to save and restore the settings of this unit. Choice RECOVERY Restoring the saved setting of this unit. BACKUP Saves the current settings of this unit. CANCEL Cancels the recovery or backup of the settings of this unit. ID ID2 y To set the remote control ID of the simplified remote control, see page 116 for details. ■ SIRIUS Satellite Radio Parental Lock code number reset SIRIUS PIN (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Use this feature to set the code number for the SIRIUS Satellite Radio Parental Lock feature to the initial factory setting. Descriptions Notes • This unit does not save the FM/AM preset stations, preset USB/ network items, and system memory settings. • If no settings are saved, you cannot select “RECOVERY”. ■ Parameter initialization INITIALIZE Use this feature to reset the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. You can select the category of parameters to be initialized. Choice Descriptions Descriptions DSP PARAM Select this setting to initialize all the parameters of the sound field parameters (page 80). RESET Sets the code number to the initial factory setting. VIDEO CANCEL Cancels the reset of the code number. Select this setting to initialize all the parameters in “Video” and “Display Set” (except “Short Message” and “Playback Screen”). NETWORK Select this setting to initialize all the parameters in “Network” and MusicCAST information stored in this unit. ALL Select this setting to initialize all the parameters of this unit. CANCEL Select this setting to cancel the initialization procedure. Choice ■ Tuner frequency step TUNER FRQ STEP (Asia and General models only) Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area. Choice Descriptions AM10/ FM100 Select this setting for North, Central and South America. AM9/FM50 Select this setting for all other countries. ■ Bi-amplifier mode BI-AMP Use this feature to activate or deactivate the bi-amplifier function. Choice Descriptions ON Select this setting if you want to activate the biamplifier function. OFF Select this setting if you want to deactivate the biamplifier function. Note When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, the SURROUND BACK terminals cannot be used to connect surround back speakers in that the terminals are already used for the bi-amplifier connection (page 14). 122 En y To initialize the parameters of each sound field program, use “Initialize” in “Stereo/Surround” (page 84). ■ MAC address filter MAC FILTER Use this feature to filter the access to this unit via LAN to control this unit by the MAC address of the accessing PC (page 105). Choice Descriptions ON Only allows to accept the access from the PC whose MAC address is registered to this unit. OFF Allows to accept the access from any PC. y You can register the MAC address that is allowed to access when “MAC FILTER” is set to “ON” by using the Web browser (page 105). Advanced setup ■ TV format TV FORMAT Use this feature to set the color encoding format of your television. Choices: NTSC, PAL Initial setting: [U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models]: NTSC [Other models]: PAL ■ Firmware update FIRM UPDATE Use this feature to update the firmware of this unit. For details on how to update the firmware, refer to information supplied with updates. Choice USB NETWORK Updates the firmware of this unit via network. y This setting is applied to the video monitor in the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3. ■ HDMI monitor check MONITOR CHECK Use this feature to activate or deactivate the monitor check function of this unit. Choice YES SKIP Descriptions Updates the firmware of this unit using a USB memory. y To start updating the firmware, rotate the MPROGRAM selector to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and then press DMENU. Notes Descriptions This unit receives the information of the available video signal resolutions from the video monitor connected via HDMI and you can only select the resolutions supported by the video monitor in “Resolution” (page 94). You can select any resolution in “Resolution” (page 94). • Do not use this feature unless you need to update the firmware. • Be sure to read information supplied with updates before performing firmware updates. ■ Firmware version VERSION Use this feature to check the version of the firmware currently installed on this unit. ■ Language ADVANCED OPERATION LANGUAGE Use this feature to select the language of your choice that appears in the GUI (graphical user interface) menu, OSD display in the zone monitor and the messages that appear in the front panel display. Choices: ENGLISH (English), JAPANESE (Japanese), FRENCH (French), GERMAN (German), SPANISH (Spanish), RUSSIAN (Russian) y You can also select the display language with the GUI menu (page 100). LANGUAGE GUI menu Front panel display RUSSIAN JAPANESE Zone OSD — — — Other languages ··· The selected language is displayed. — ··· The selected language is not displayed. The menu items and messages are displayed in English. English 123 En TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on or enters the standby mode soon after the power is turned on. No sound. 124 En Cause Remedy See page The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable firmly. — The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 26 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 12 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning or strong static electricity). Turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then use it normally. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 18-24 Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”, “COAX/OPT” or “ANALOG”. Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO”. 37 Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG” while the input source component outputs digital audio signals. Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO” or “COAX/OPT”. 37 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with the C INPUT selector (or the input selector buttons (3) ). Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 12 The volume is turned down or muted. Turn up the volume. — Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. — The HDMI components connected to this unit do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP copy protection standards. 16 36, 37 Troubleshooting Problem No picture. Cause Remedy See page Your video monitor is connected to one of the analog video output jacks of this unit and the picture is input at different types of video jacks. Set “Analog ` Analog” to “Conversion” or connect your source components in the same way as you connect your video monitor to this unit. 93 1080p-resolution analog video signals are only output at the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. Connect your video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR jacks. 18 480p-, 576p-, 1080i- and 720p-resolution video signals cannot be output at the S VIDEO and VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. Connect your video monitor to the HDMI OUT or COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. — This unit outputs the video signals not supported by the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Select “VIDEO” in “INITIALIZE” to reset the video parameters. 122 Set “MONITOR CHECK” to “YES”. 123 PURE DIRECT mode is active. Turn off the PURE DIRECT mode. 47 Set “Pure Direct” to “Audio + Video”. 93 98 Non-standard video signals are input. Short message displays do not appear on the video monitor. “Short Message” is set to “Off”. Set “Short Message” to “On”. The sound suddenly goes off. The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct. 26, 121 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again. — Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12 The speaker level settings are incorrect. Adjust “Level” settings. 89 Sound is heard from the speaker on one side only. No sound is heard from the center speaker. “Center” in “Configuration” is set to “None”. Set “Center” to “Small” or “Large”. 87 No sound is heard from the presence speakers. This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode. Press N STRAIGHT to turn off the “STRAIGHT” mode. 46 You are using a source or program combination that does not output sound from all channels. Try another sound field program. 36 “Surround” in “Configuration” is set to “None”. Set “Surround” to “Small” or “Large”. 87 This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode and a monaural source is being played back. Press N STRAIGHT to turn off the “STRAIGHT” mode. 46 The surround speakers are connected to the SURROUND BACK speaker terminals. Connect the surround speakers to the SURROUND speaker terminals. 46 No sound is heard from the surround speakers. English When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. 125 En Troubleshooting Problem No sound is heard from the subwoofer. Cause Remedy See page “Bass Out” in “Configuration” is set to “Front” when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Set “Bass Out” to “SWFR” or “Front + SWFR”. 88 “Bass Out” in “Configuration” is set to “SWFR” or “Front” when a 2-channel source is being played. Set “Bass Out” to “Front + SWFR”. 88 The source does not contain lowfrequency signals. No sound is heard from the surround back speakers. “Surround Back” in “Configuration” is set to “None”. The audio input sources cannot be played in the desired digital audio signal format (Desired input source indicator or decoder indicator in the front panel display does not light up). The connected component is not set to output the desired digital audio signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. — Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG”. Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO”. 37 A humming sound is heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cable of the turntable to the GND terminal of this unit. 21 The volume level is low while a record is being played. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. Connect your turntable to this unit through an MChead amplifier. 21 The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power of the component. — A source cannot be recorded by the recording component. The audio source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. A given input source is not output at the same output channel (e.g. DVR IN to DVR OUT). Connect the recording component to another channel that is not being used for connecting the source component. 20 You are trying to record a DTS source. (DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to record the DTS bitstream digitally will result in noise being recorded.) Make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from your DTS-compatible player and then connect the DTS-compatible player to the AUDIO IN jacks while the recording component is connected to the analog AUDIO OUT (DVR, VCR or MD/CD-R) jacks. 20 126 En Check whether “Surround” is set to “Small” or “Large” and configure “Surround Back” properly. 87, 88 While this unit is in the CINEMA DSP 3D mode, no sound is output at the surround back speakers. Troubleshooting See page Problem Cause Remedy An audio source cannot be recorded by the digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks. The audio source component is not connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. Connect the audio source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 20 You are trying to record an audio source input at the DOCK terminal by the digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks. Connect the recording component to the analog AUDIO OUT (DVR, VCR or MD/CD-R) jacks. 20 (U.S.A. model only) HD Radio signals are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks Connect the recording component to the analog AUDIO OUT (DVR, VCR or MD/CD-R) jacks. 20 An audio source cannot be recorded by the analog recording component connected to the analog AUDIO OUT (DVR, VCR or MD/ CD-R) jacks. The audio source component is not connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. Connect the audio source component to the AUDIO IN jacks. 20 Recorded materials sound differently. The settings made on this unit (such as tonal quality, volume level and sound field programs) do not affect recorded material. The sound field parameters and some other settings of this unit cannot be changed. “Memory Guard” is set to “On”. Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”. 97 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display. Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 12 There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. — Some components cannot records Dolby Digital or DTS sources. XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (DVR, VCR or MD/CD-R) jacks. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 127 En Troubleshooting ■ HDMI Problem No picture or sound. Cause Remedy See page The number of the connected HDMI components is over the limit. Reduce the number of the connected HDMI components. — HDCP authentication failed. Check that the connected HDMI components support the HDCP copy protection standards. — ■ Tuner (FM/AM) Problem Cause FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM Remedy The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. See page Check the antenna connections. 24 Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 48 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-path interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 48 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned into. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again. 49 The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for the best reception. 24 Use the manual tuning method. 48 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Supplied AM loop antenna is not connected. Connect the AM loop antenna correctly even if you use an outdoor antenna. 24 Noises can result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. 24 A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. — Remedy See page There are buzzing and whining noises. ■ HD Radio (U.S.A. model only) Problem Cause This unit cannot receive the HD Radio signals of the selected radio station. The radio station provides analog FM/ AM radio service only. Select other radio stations that provides the HD Radio service. 48 The signal is too weak. Adjust the antenna position. — Use a high-quality FM/AM antenna. — This unit cannot select other audio programs than the main program. The radio station provides an audio program only. HD Radio information does not appear. The radio station does not provide the information. 128 En Troubleshooting ■ iTunes Tagging (U.S.A. model only) Status message Cause Insufficient Data Tag data is not saved because of invalid data. Tag already saved Tag data for the same content has been already saved. Tag storage full Connect iPod Remedy See page The HD Radio station currently selected does not support the iTunes Tagging feature. — Tag data cannot be stored because the internal memory of this unit is full. Station your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 22 iPod full Tags cannot be stored Tag data cannot be stored on your iPod because the HDD space of your iPod is full. Delete unnecessary data from your iPod to make room and try again. — Transferring Failed Tag data cannot be transferred to your iPod. Check if the Yamaha iPod universal dock is connected to the DOCK terminal properly. Restation your iPod and try again. 22 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 129 En Troubleshooting ■ XM Satellite Radio If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies. Status message Cause Remedy See page CHECK XM TUNER The XM Mini-Tuner is not installed in the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock is not connected to this unit. Confirm the XM Mini-Tuner is fully seated in the dock and check the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock cable is connected to this unit. 53 CHECK ANTENNA The XM antenna is not connected to the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the XM antenna cable has become damaged. Check that the XM antenna is securely connected to the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock and check the antenna cable for damage. Replace the XM antenna if the cable is damaged. 53 LOADING The XM Mini-Tuner is acquiring audio or program information from the XM satellite signal. This message can also occur in weak XM signal conditions. Note that this unit may not respond to some operations while this message is displayed. This message should disappear in a few seconds in good signal conditions. If you see this message often, reposition the XM antenna to get better signal reception. Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information in the front panel display or “XM Information” screen in the video monitor to check the antenna reception level. 56 NO SIGNAL The XM Mini-Tuner is not receiving the XM satellite signal. Something may be blocking the XM antenna’s view of the satellites or the antenna is not properly aimed. Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the XM antenna to get better signal reception. Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information in the front panel display or “XM Information” screen in the video monitor to check the antenna reception level. See instructions supplied with the XM Mini-Tuner and Dock for antenna installation information. 56 CH OFF AIR The XM channel you selected is not currently broadcasting. Check back at a later time; in the meantime, select another channel. — CH UNAUTH You may be attempting to tune to an XM channel that is blocked or that you cannot receive with your XM subscription package. Consult the latest channel guide at http://www.xmradio.com/ (US residents) and http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian residents) for the current list of channels. For information on receiving this channel, visit http://www.xmradio.com/ (US residents) and http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian residents) or contact XM Satellite Radio at 1-800-967-2346 (US residents) and 1-877-438-9677 (Canadian residents). 53 CH UNAVAIL The selected channel is not available. The channel may have been reassigned to a different channel number. This message may occur initially with a new XM MiniTuner or an XM Mini-Tuner that has not received XM’s signal for an extended period. Consult the latest channel guide at http://www.xmradio.com/ (US residents) and http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian residents) for the current list of channels. For cases of a new XM MiniTuner or an XM Mini-Tuner that has not received XM’s signal for an extended period, allow the XM Mini-Tuner to receive the XM satellite signal for at least 5 minutes and then try to select the channel again. — UPGRADE XM TUNER The connected XM Mini-Tuner is incompatible with this unit. Use the XM Mini-Tuner compatible with the XM Rev 4x. — ---- No artist name or song title is available for this selection. No action required. — 130 En Troubleshooting ■ SIRIUS Satellite Radio If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies. Status message Cause Remedy See page ANTENNA ERROR The antenna is not connected to the SiriusConnect tuner properly. Check the connection of the antenna and SiriusConnect tuner. 58 CHECK SR TUNER The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected to the SIRIUS jack of this unit correctly. Check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and this unit. 58 The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected to the AC wall outlet. Connect the power cable of the SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall outlet. 58 NOT SUPPORTED This unit does not support the connected SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner. Connect the SiriusConnect tuner that this unit supports. 58 ACQUIRING The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner. Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information in the front panel display or “SIRIUS Information” screen in the video monitor to check the antenna reception level. 63 UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the channel list. Wait until the updating is complete. — The period of the subscription is end. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to renew the subscription. 59 F/W UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the firmware. Wait until the updating is complete. — CALL SIRIUS (CALL 888-539SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE) The selected channel is not subscribed. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to subscribe the selected channel. URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/ Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474) 59 Select another channel. 59 Select another channel. 59 The subscription information is updated. INVALID The selected channel is currently out of service. Not Available The operation you made is not available. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SUB UPDATED English 131 En Troubleshooting ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work or function properly. The remote control does not learn new functions. 132 En Cause Remedy See page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 28 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 4 The batteries do not last long and get quickly exhausted. Using alkaline batteries is strongly recommended. — Set the backlight mode to “OFF”. 109 The operation mode selector is set incorrectly. Set the operation mode selector correctly. When operating this unit, set it to the FAMP position. When operating the component selected by the input selector button, set it to the F SOURCE position. When operating the TV set in the 3 TV area, set it to the F TV position. — The control zone setting is incorrect. Select the zone you want to control. 119 The remote control code is not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 109 Try setting another code of the same manufacturer using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 109 The remote control ID of the remote control and this unit do not match. Match the remote control ID of this unit and the remote control. Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Program the necessary functions independently into the programmable buttons using the Learn feature. The batteries of this remote control and/or the other remote control are too weak. Replace the batteries. The distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little. Place the remote controls at the proper distance. 111 The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Learning is not possible. — Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for the new functions. 115 116, 121 111 4 Troubleshooting ■ USB and Network Problem Cause Remedy See page This unit recognized the USB storage device as an illegal device. Turn this unit off then on again. 26 The music files and directories in the USB device cannot be viewed. The music files and directories are placed in locations other than the FAT area. Place music files and directories in the FAT area. — You are attempting to browse directory hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory with more than 500 files. Modify the data structure on your USB device. — The IP address is not set properly. Set the DHCP server function of the router to ON. Alternately, perform manual configuration according to the current operating environment. 95 The network cable is not connected. Connect it properly. 23 The PC does not have Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Connect 2.0 installed in it. Install Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Connect 2.0 in the PC. — The music is recorded in a format that cannot be played on this unit. This unit cannot play music formats other than WMA, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, and WAV (PCM format). Also note that it cannot play certain music files even if these are recorded in the WMA, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, or WAV format. Play music recorded in a format that this unit is compatible with. — You are attempting to connect to MCX1000. The MusicCAST server that can be connected by this unit is MCX-2000. Use MCX-2000 or the PC server. — Auto Configuration is not executed. Set your Yamaha MCX-2000 to the “Auto Config” mode. 70 The firewall of the network device is activated. The Internet Radio can be played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number is variable depending on radio station. Check the firewall setting of the network device. — Connection to the Internet is disconnected. Check the configuration of the network device, and then contact the network connection provider. — The connected USB device is incorrect. Connect the USB device that stores the preset item. 23 The directory that stores the selected item is changed. Preset the desired item to the numeric button (1-8) again. 72 The USB device is not connected correctly. Connect the USB device properly. 23 The PC or MCX-2000 that stores the selected item is turned off. Turn on the PC or MCX-2000. — The selected Internet Radio station is temporary unavailable or out of service. Try again when the selected Internet Radio is providing the service. 73 Preset other Internet Radio stations. 72 The PC server/MCX2000/Internet Radio does not function properly. The music in the PC server cannot be played back. The MusicCAST server cannot be connected. The Internet Radio cannot be played. This unit does not recall the correct item by using numeric buttons (1-8). This unit does not recall the selected item by using numeric buttons (1-8). ADDITIONAL INFORMATION “No Device” is displayed even when a USB device is present. English 133 En Troubleshooting Status message Cause Remedy See page Please wait (Starting Server) This unit is in the middle of waking up MCX-2000 that has been set to the standby mode. Wait for approximately 20 seconds. — Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your network to this unit. Check the connection between this unit and the LAN port on your router or hub. 23 Make sure your router is properly connected and turned on. Also, make sure your modem is properly connected and turned on when you are attempting to listen to Internet Radio. 23 Your USB storage device or USB portable audio player has been disconnected from the USB port of this unit. Check the connection between this unit and your USB storage device or USB portable audio player. — The PC server or MCX-2000 previously connected to this unit no longer exists. Connect this unit to the available PC server or MCX2000. 23 There is a problem with the signal path from your USB storage device or USB portable audio player to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB storage device or USB portable audio player to the USB port of this unit. 23 Try resetting your USB storage device or USB portable audio player. — This unit cannot access your USB storage device or USB portable audio player. Try another USB storage device or USB portable audio player. — There is a problem with the signal path from your USB storage device or USB portable audio player to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB storage device or USB portable audio player to the USB port of this unit. 23 Try resetting your USB storage device or USB portable audio player. — Make sure Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Connect 2.0 is installed on your PC. — Check that the songs currently stored on your PC are playable (MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC, and WAV). — Store some other playable music files (MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC, and WAV) on your PC. — Try preparing a network exclusively for use with this unit to separate it from general network traffic. — Disconnected No Device Access error Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs currently stored on your PC. The network may be overloaded with heavy traffic, and playback is interrupted. List updated The list of the contents stored on your PC server or MCX-2000 has been updated. Bookmark ON The desired Internet Radio station has been added to the “Bookmarks” list. Bookmark OFF The stored Internet Radio station has been removed from the “Bookmarks” list. Empty Memory! No items are assigned to the selected numeric button. Assign the desired item to the numeric button. 72 Not found! This unit cannot find the assigned item for the selected numeric button. Connect the USB device that stores the preset item. — Turn on the PC or MCX-2000. — Try again when the selected Internet Radio is providing the service. 73 Preset the desired item to the numeric button (1-8) again. 72 Turn off this unit and then disconnect the USB device. If the message appears when you connect the USB device again, this unit may not compatible with the USB device. — USB Overloaded 134 En Over current passes through the connected USB device. Troubleshooting ■ iPod Note In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the panel display or in the GUI screen, check the connection of your iPod (page 22). Status message Loading... Cause Remedy See page This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your iPod. This unit is in the middle of acquiring song lists from your iPod. Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 22 Try resetting your iPod. — This unit supports iPod touch, iPod (Click Wheel, including iPod classic), iPod nano and iPod mini. — Unknown iPod The iPod being used is not supported by this unit. iPod Connected Your iPod is properly stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, and the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete. iPod Disconnected Your iPod was removed from a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. Station your iPod back in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 22 Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs currently stored on your iPod. Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod are playable. — Store some other playable music files on your iPod. — ■ Bluetooth Searching... Cause Remedy See page The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component is in the middle of the pairing. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Status message The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component is in the middle of establishing the connection. Completed The pairing is completed. Canceled The pairing is canceled. BT Connected The connection between the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) and the Bluetooth component is established. BT Disconnected The Bluetooth component is disconnected from the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately). English 135 En Troubleshooting ■ Automatic setup Before automatic setup Error message Cause Remedy See page Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 30 Unplug Phones! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones. — Select Setup Item! No check items are selected as the measurement items. Select the desired check items. 31 Memory Guard! The parameters of this unit are protected. Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”. 97 During automatic setup Error message Cause Remedy See page E01:No Front SP Front L/R channel signals are not detected. Check the front L/R speaker connections. 12 E02:No Sur. SP A surround channel signal is not detected. Check the surround speaker connections. 12 E03:No PRNS SP A presence channel signal is not detected. Check the presence speaker connections. 12 E04:SBR→SBL Only right surround back channel signal is detected. Connect the surround back speaker to the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) speaker terminal if you only have one surround back speaker. 12 E05:Noisy Background noise is too loud. Perform the automatic setup in a quiet environment. — Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners or move them away from the optimizer microphone. — E06:Check Sur. Surround back speakers are connected, though surround L/R speakers are not. Connect surround speakers when you use surround back speakers. 13 E07:No MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the “automatic setup” procedure. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 30 E08:No Signal The optimizer microphone does not detect test tones. Check the microphone setting. 30 Check the speaker connections and placement. 12 The optimizer microphone or OPTIMIZER MIC jack may be defective. Contact the nearest Yamaha dealer or service center. — E09:User Cancel The “automatic setup” procedure was cancelled due to user activity. Perform the automatic setup again. 30 E10:Internal Err. An internal error occurred. Perform the automatic setup again. 30 136 En Troubleshooting After automatic setup Warning message Cause Remedy See page W1:Out of Phase Speaker polarity is not correct. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when the speakers are connected correctly. Check the speaker connections for proper polarity (+ or –). 12 W2:Over Distance The distance between the speaker and the listening position is over 24 m (80 ft). Bring the speaker closer to the listening position. — W3:Level Error The difference of volume level among speakers is excessive. Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers are set in locations with similar conditions. — Check the speaker connections. 12 Use speakers of similar quality. — Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. 30 The result of “Wiring” checked by the automatic setup is different from the settings manually configured in “Configuration”. Manually configure the speaker settings in “Configuration”. 87 “Wiring” has not been checked. Manually configure the speaker settings in “Configuration”. 87 W4:SP Mismatch Notes • • • • If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run perform the automatic setup again. If warning message “W2” or “W3” appears, the adjustments are made, however the adjustment may not be optimal. Depending on the speakers, warning message “W1” may appears even if the speaker connections are correct. If error message “E10” occurs repeatedly, contact a qualified Yamaha service center. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 137 En RESETTING THE SYSTEM Resetting the system Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. Notes • This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “GUI menu” parameters. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. y To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press A MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position. 1 Press A MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. 2 Press and hold N STRAIGHT and then press A MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and “ADVANCED SETUP” appears in the front panel display. STRAIGHT EFFECT 3 While holding down MASTER Rotate the M PROGRAM selector to select “INITIALIZE”. INITIALIZE CANCEL 4 Press N STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “ALL”. INITIALIZE ALL y Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure without making any changes. 5 Press A MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to confirm your selection and turn off this unit. 138 En OPERATION MODES OF FRONT PANEL CONTROLS Operation modes of front panel controls If you perform a mode trigger operation using the front panel controls, this unit enters the following mode. In each mode, you can use the front panel controls as shown below. If no operation is performed for five seconds in each mode, this unit automatically returns to the default mode. Mode trigger button Mode to enter — Default mode Press DAUDIO SELECT/REC OUT Audio select mode Press and hold DAUDIO SELECT/REC OUT Rec out mode Press DMENU GUI menu mode Press DTONE CONTROL Sound adjust mode Press and hold EENTER BT pairing mode Available operations in each mode Mode DAUDIO SELECT/REC OUT DMENU DTONE CONTROL EENTER MPROGRAM selector Default to Audio select mode to GUI menu mode to Sound adjust mode — Select a sound field programs (page 40) Audio select to default mode to GUI menu mode to Sound adjust mode — Select an audio input jack (page 37) Rec out to Audio select mode to GUI menu mode to Sound adjust mode — Select a recording source (page 47) GUI menu to Audio select mode to default mode Sound adjust to Audio select mode to GUI menu mode BT pairing* to Audio select mode (the pairing process continues) to GUI menu mode (the pairing process continues) — — Menu up/down — Adjust parameters (page 47) to default mode (the pairing process continues) Select a sound field program ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Select a parameter for adjustment (page 47) Confirm the selection in the GUI menu (page 79) Note * In the BT pairing mode, this unit searches for Bluetooth components to be paired. This mode is available only when “DOCK” is selected as an input source and a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) is connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. English 139 En GLOSSARY Glossary ■ Audio and video synchronization (lip sync) Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term that involves both a problem and a capability of maintaining audio and video signals synchronized during post-production and transmission. Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization automatically and accurately without user interaction. ■ Bi-amplification connection A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high pass filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes frequencies below a cutoff and rejects frequencies above the cutoff frequency. Likewise, the HPF passes frequencies above its cutoff. ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. ■ Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ Deep Color Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification. This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other displays go from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent many times more shades of gray between black and white. Also Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. ■ Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over” and “fly-around” effects. ■ Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed for high-definition programming and media including HD broadcasts, HD DVD, and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio standard for HD DVD and as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby Digital Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby Digital Plus also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate Dolby Digital. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources. ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multichannel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources. 140 En Glossary ■ Dolby Surround ■ DTS Express Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. DTS Express is an advanced audio technology for the optional feature on Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD, which offers high-quality, low bit rate audio optimized for network streaming, and Internet applications. DTS Express is used for the Secondary Audio feature of Blu-ray Disc or the Sub Audio feature of HD DVD. These features deliver audio commentaries (for example, the additional commentaries made by the director of a film) on demand by the users via the Internet, etc. DTS Express signals are mixed down with the main audio stream on the player component, and the component sends the mixed audio stream to the AV receivers/amplifiers via digital coaxial, digital optical, or analog connections. ■ Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio standard for HD DVD and as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control. ■ DSD Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs. DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backwardcompatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video. ■ DTS Digital Surround ■ DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio standard for both HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps for HD DVD and up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/ amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. ■ HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or highdefinition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. 141 En English DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, front left and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an high resolution audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for both HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 3.0 Mbps for HD DVD and 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ DTS 96/24 ■ DTS-HD High Resolution Audio Glossary ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ MP3 One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It employs the irreversible compression method, which achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/11 (128 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD. ■ MPEG-4 AAC An MPEG-4 audio standard. As it allows compression of data at a bit rate lower than that of MPEG-2 AAC, it is used among others for mobile telephones, portable audio players and other lowcapacity devices requiring high sound quality. In addition to the above types of devices, MPEG-4 AAC is also used to distribute contents on the Internet, and as such is supported by computers, media servers and many other devices. ■ Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6- channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. ■ Neural-THX Surround “Neural-THX” Surround is taking surround sound to the next level. This revolutionary new technology delivers the rich envelopment and discrete image detail of surround sound in a format that is fully compatible with stereo. Neural-THX Surround reduces the bandwidth needed for broadcasters to deliver true, multi-channel surround presentations, and enables 7.1-channel support for gaming and movies. By unmasking the audio details, typically lost by other playback systems, audiences will experience the deep ambience and subtle details of movies, music and games. And with this technology being used by sound designers during content creation, as well as embedded into playback devices, Neural-THX Surround promises a listening experience that is true to the original mix. Neural-THX Surround has been chosen as the official surround sound broadcast format for XM Satellite Radio’s “XM HD Surround”, as well as other leading FM/HD radio stations worldwide. For additional information, please visit http://www.neuralsurround.com/. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. 142 En ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ■ SRS CS II (SRS Circle Surround II™) SRS CS II (SRS Circle Surround II) is a high-performance 6.1 channel matrix surround sound decoding system. It is the next-generation of the original SRS Circle Surround technology, incorporating powerful industry-first features including the dialog clarity enhancement technology and added cinema-like bass to the front channels and subwoofer. ■ S-video signal With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ■ WAV Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. It does not specify the compression (coding) method so a desired compression method can be used with it. By default, it is compatible with the PCM method (no compression) and some compression methods including the ADPCM method. ■ WMA An audio compression method developed by Microsoft Corporation. It employs the irreversible compression method, which achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD. ■ “x.v.Color” A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors that could not be expressed before. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is particularly effective for still pictures and computer graphics. SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION Sound field program information ■ Elements of a sound field ■ CINEMA DSP 3D What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. There are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument. The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room. Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling). Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (for example, from the walls, and/or the ceiling) so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberations taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ■ Compressed Music Enhancer The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of lowfrequency bass is compensated, providing improved performance of the overall sound system. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what Yamaha has done with the digital sound field processor. ■ SILENT CINEMA ■ CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home by using the Yamaha original sound field technology combined with various digital audio systems. English 143 En PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION Parametric equalizer information This unit employs Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology to optimize the frequency characteristics of its parametric equalizer to match your listening environment. YPAO uses a combination of the following three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) to provide highly precise adjustment of the frequency characteristics. ■ Q factor The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the values 0.5 and 10. ■ Frequency This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave increments between 32 Hz and 16 kHz. ■ Gain This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB between –20 and +6 dB. YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your listening requirements using a combination of the above three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit has 7 equalizer bands for each channel. The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2). This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as in Figure 1). Figure 1 Gain Frequency characteristic after correction Band 1 Frequency Original frequency characteristic Figure 2 Gain Frequency characteristic after correction Band 1 Frequency Band 2 144 En Original frequency characteristic SPECIFICATIONS Specifications AUDIO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 140 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) [U.S.A., Canada, General, Asia, China, Korea, and Australia models] Front L/R 8/6/4/2 Ω ....................................... 170/205/265/345 W • Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA) [Asia, General, China and Korea models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................ 185 W • Maximum Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ....................................................... 200 W • Dynamic Headroom 8 Ω .................................................................................... 0.84 dB • IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] Front L/R 1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 145 W • Damping Factor (IHF) Front L/R 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................ 150 or more • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Maximum Input Voltage PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ................................ 60 mV or more CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.4 V or more • Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance OUT (REC) ........................................................... 200 mV/900 Ω PRE OUT ................................................................... 1.0 V/500 Ω SUBWOOFER .......................................................... 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUT ............................................. 1.0 V/1.4 kΩ • Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 Ω) ............................... 150 mV/100 Ω • RIAA Equalization Deviation PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .......................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO to OUT (REC) (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ......................................... 0.02% or less CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 70 W, 8 Ω) ............................... 0.04% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R [Australia, U.K. and Europe models] .................... 81 dB or more [Other models] ....................................................... 86 dB or more CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R .......................... 100 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more CD, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R .... 60 dB/45 dB or more • Zone 2/Zone 3 Tone Control BASS Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................ 450 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/10 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency .......................................... 2.0 kHz • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back, Presence: Small) ................................................................................... 12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ........................................................ 24 dB/oct. VIDEO SECTION • Video Format [MONITOR OUT] (Wall Paper) [U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] ............ NTSC/PAL [U.K., Europe, Australia, Asia and China models] ................................................................................... PAL/NTSC • Video Format (Video Conversion) ..........................................................................................NTSC/PAL • Signal Level Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω S-video ................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 or 0.3 Vp-p/75 Ω (C) Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR) • Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off) ............................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more • Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off) .................................................................................... 60 dB or more • Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT] Component (Video Conversion Off) ............................................................. 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB • Video Format [ZONE OUT] (Gray Back) [U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] .................... NTSC [U.K., Europe, Australia, Asia and China models] ................ PAL FM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] ........ 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Frequency Response CD to Front L/R, Pure Direct .......... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB • Tone Control (Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer) BASS Boost/Cut ........................................................ ±6 dB/50 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................ 350 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency .......................................... 3.5 kHz • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF) Mono/Stereo ........................................ 2.0/25 µV (17.3/39.2 dBf) • Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ....................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • Selectivity (400 kHz) .............................................................. 70 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo .................................................................... 0.2/0.3% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) Stereo .....................................................................................42 dB • Frequency Response Stereo .............................................. 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB 145 En English • Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω Specifications AM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz [General and Asia models] ....................................... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz [China model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA [Other models] ................................................................... 500 W • Standby Power Consumption [General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ...................... 0.33 W or less [Other models] ......................................................... 0.1 W or less • Maximum Power Consumption [General model] 6ch, 10% THD ................................................................. 1100 W • AC Outlets [U.S.A. and Canada models] .... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum) [Asia and General models]..................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum) [China model] ...................................... 2 (Total 100 W maximum) [Australia model] ......................................... 1 (100 W maximum) [U.K. model] ...................................... 1 (100 W/0.4 A maximum) [Europe model] ......................... 2 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum) • Dimensions (W x H x D) ............................. 435 x 181 x 438.5 mm (17-1/8 x 7-1/8 x 17-1/4 in) • Weight [China model] .............................................. 19.0 kg (41 lbs 14 oz) [Other models] ............................................... 17.4 kg (38 lbs 6 oz) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. (U.S.A. model only) There is a HOT SURFACE label attached to the top surface of this unit. This label is required to be attached to a product of which the temperature of the top cover may rise 40°C or more during operation (ambient temperature: 25°C). COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE Responsible Party: Address: Yamaha Electronics Corporation, U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Avenue Buena Park, CA 90620 Telephone: 714-522-9105 Fax: 714-670-0108 Type of Equipment: AV Receiver Model Name: RX-V3900 • This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. • Operation is subject to the following conditions: – This device may not cause harmful interference. – This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See the “Troubleshooting” section at the end of this manual if interference to radio reception is suspected. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. 146 En Index ■ Numerics 2ch Stereo, sound field program .......... 45 3D indicator ......................................... 27 5.1-channel speaker connection ........... 13 5.1-channel speaker layout .................. 10 6.1-channel speaker connection ........... 13 6.1-channel speaker layout .................. 10 7.1-channel speaker connection ........... 12 7.1-channel speaker layout .................. 10 7ch Enhancer, sound field program ..... 45 7ch Stereo, sound field program .......... 45 ■ A ■ B Back ground video, GUI menu ............86 Banana plug connection .......................14 Bass Out, GUI menu ............................88 Bass, GUI menu ...................................92 BGV, GUI menu ..................................86 BI-AMP, advanced setup ...................122 Bi-amplification connections ...............14 Bi-amplifier mode, advanced setup ....122 Bitrate, input audio information ...........38 Bluetooth component playback ............64 Bluetooth connection, GUI menu ........87 Bluetooth pairing, GUI menu ...............86 Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connection ........................................22 Bluetooth, troubleshooting .................135 Blu-ray Disc player connection ............20 ■ C ■ D Decoder descriptions ........................... 74 Decoder indicators ............................... 27 Decoder Mode, GUI menu ............ 85, 99 Decoder selection ................................ 74 Decoder Type, sound field parameter ...................... 81 Default Gateway, GUI menu ............... 95 Device Over, HDMI error message ..... 39 DHCP, GUI menu ............................... 95 Dialogue Lift, sound field parameter ... 80 Dialogue, input audio information ...... 38 DIGITAL INPUT jacks ......................... 9 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks ..................... 9 Dimension, decoder parameter ............ 84 Dimmer, GUI menu ............................. 98 Direct frequency tuning, FM/AM tuning ................................ 48 Direct number access mode, Sirius Satellite Radio ....................... 60 147 En English Category Search mode, Sirius Satellite Radio ........................60 Category Search mode, XM Radio ......54 CD player connection ...........................21 CD recorder connection .......................21 Cellar Club, sound field program .........42 Center Image, decoder parameter ........84 CENTER jack .......................................22 Center Level, sound field parameter ....83 CENTER PRE OUT jack .....................21 Center speaker ......................................11 Center speaker, GUI menu ...................87 Center Width, decoder parameter ........84 Center, GUI menu ................................87 Chamber, sound field program .............42 Channel Mute, GUI menu ....................93 Channel, input audio information ........38 Church in Freiburg, sound field program .........................42 CINEMA DSP 3D mode ......................46 CINEMA DSP indicator ......................27 CLASSICAL, sound field program ......41 Clearing configurations, remote control ................................115 Clearing preset channel, Sirius Satellite Radio ........................61 Clearing preset channels, XM Radio ...56 Clearing preset stations, FM/AM tuning .................................50 COAXIAL jacks ...................................15 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ..............15 Compressed Music Enhancer mode .....45 Configuration, GUI menu ..............87, 95 Connect, GUI menu .............................87 Connecting AC power cable ................25 Connecting AM antenna ...................... 24 Connecting banana plug ...................... 14 Connecting Bluetooth receiver ............ 22 Connecting Blu-ray Disc player .......... 20 Connecting CD player ......................... 21 Connecting CD recorder ...................... 21 Connecting DVD player ...................... 20 Connecting DVD recorder ................... 20 Connecting FM antenna ...................... 24 Connecting HD DVD player ............... 20 Connecting iPod universal dock .......... 22 Connecting MD recorder ..................... 21 Connecting power cable ...................... 25 Connecting projector ........................... 18 Connecting set-top box ........................ 20 Connecting SiriusConnect tuner .......... 58 Connecting speaker cable .................... 14 Connecting speakers ............................ 12 Connecting turntable ........................... 21 Connecting TV monitor ....................... 18 Connecting VCR ................................. 21 Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ................................................ 53 Connecting YBA-10 ............................ 22 Connecting YDS-11 ............................ 22 Connecting Zone 2/3 components ..... 117 Connections ........................................... 9 Control Monitor, GUI menu ................ 95 Control, GUI menu .............................. 92 Controlling iPod .................................. 67 Controlling other components, remote control ............................... 107 Controlling TV, remote control ......... 106 Controlling Zone 2/3 ......................... 119 Cross Over, GUI menu ........................ 88 CSII Cinema, decoder ......................... 74 CSII indicator ...................................... 27 CSII Music, decoder ............................ 74 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AC OUTLET(S) .................................. 25 AC power cable connection ................. 25 Action Game, sound field program ...... 43 Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio subscription ...................................... 59 Activating XM Satellite Radio ............ 54 ADAPTIVE DRC indicator ................. 27 Adaptive DRC, GUI menu ................... 89 Adaptive DSP effect level, GUI menu ........................................ 89 Adaptive DSP Level, GUI menu ......... 89 Adaptive dynamic range control, GUI menu ........................................ 89 Advanced automatic setup ................... 33 Advanced setup .................................. 121 Advanced sound configuration ............ 74 Adventure, sound field program .......... 44 All Channel Search mode, Sirius Satellite Radio ....................... 60 All Channel Search mode, XM Radio ........................................ 54 AM antenna connection ....................... 24 AM tuner, toubleshooting .................. 128 AM tuning ............................................ 48 AM tuning operation ............................ 48 AMP, operation mode selector ............ 29 Analog ` Analog, GUI menu ............... 93 Analog ` HDMI, GUI menu ................ 93 Analog Resolution, input video information ................... 39 Analog-to-analog video conversion, GUI menu ........................................ 93 ANTENNA terminals ............................ 9 Aspect, GUI menu ............................... 94 Audio and video synchronization, GUI menu ........................................ 92 Audio input jack selection ................... 37 Audio input jack selection, GUI menu ........................................ 85 AUDIO jacks ....................................... 15 Audio jacks .......................................... 15 Audio Output, GUI menu .................... 95 AUDIO SELECT ................................. 37 Audio Select, GUI menu ................ 85, 99 Audio signal flow ................................. 17 Audio signals, HDMI ........................... 16 Auto Bypass, GUI menu ...................... 92 Automatic audio delay adjustment, GUI menu .........................................92 Automatic setup, toubleshooting ........136 Automatic station preset, FM/AM tuning .................................49 Index Direct number access mode, XM Radio ........................................ 55 Direct, sound field parameter ............... 83 Display information, Sirius Satellite Radio ....................... 63 Display language setting ...................... 26 Display Set, GUI menu ........................ 98 Display settings, GUI menu ................. 98 Display window, remote control .......... 28 Displaying information, HD Radio ...... 52 Displaying information, XM radio ...... 56 Displaying input source information 38, 40 Distance, automatic setup .................... 32 Distance, GUI menu ............................ 88 DNS Server (P), GUI menu ................. 96 DNS Server (S), GUI menu ................. 96 Drama, sound field program ................ 44 DSP indicators ..................................... 27 DSP Level, sound field parameter ....... 80 DVD player connection ....................... 20 DVD recorder connection .................... 20 Dynamic Range, GUI menu ................. 90 ■ E Effect sound level, sound field parameter ...................... 80 ENHANCER indicator ........................ 27 ENHANCER, sound field program ..... 45 ENTERTAIN, sound field program ..... 43 Equalizing, automatic setup ................. 32 EXTD Surround, GUI menu ................ 99 External amplifier connection .............. 21 ■ F F.PRNS L Level, sound field parameter ...................... 83 F.PRNS R Level, sound field parameter ...................... 83 FIRM UPDATE, advanced setup ...... 123 Flag1/Flag2, input audio information ................... 38 FM antenna connection ........................ 24 FM tuner, toubleshooting ................... 128 FM tuning ............................................ 48 FM tuning operation ............................ 48 FOCUS, decoder parameter ................. 84 Format, input audio information .......... 38 Front channel output jacks. .................. 21 Front Input, GUI menu ........................ 86 FRONT L/R jacks ................................ 22 Front left and right channels input jacks, GUI menu .............................. 86 Front left/right speaker ......................... 11 Front panel display message scroll, GUI menu ........................................ 98 Front panel door ................................... 29 FRONT PRE OUT jacks ...................... 21 Front presence speakers, GUI menu .... 88 Front Presence, GUI menu ................... 88 Front speakers, GUI menu ................... 87 Front, GUI menu .................................. 87 148 En ■ G GUI menu operation .............................79 GUI menu tree ......................................76 GUI screen position, GUI menu ..........99 ■ H Hall in Amsterdam, sound field program .........................42 Hall in Munich, sound field program ...41 Hall in Vienna, sound field program ....41 HD DVD player connection ................. 20 HD Radio .............................................51 HD Radio, toubleshooting ..................128 HDCP Error, HDMI error message ......39 HDMI ` HDMI, GUI menu ................. 94 HDMI aspect ratio, GUI menu .............94 HDMI automatic lip sync mode, GUI mode ........................................92 HDMI cable plug ................................. 16 HDMI error message ............................39 HDMI Error, input video information ...................39 HDMI IN jack select, GUI menu .........95 HDMI indicator .................................... 27 HDMI information ...............................16 HDMI jack ...........................................16 HDMI monitor check, advanced setup ............................... 123 HDMI OUT jack select, GUI menu .....95 HDMI OUT jack selection ...................37 HDMI Resolution, input video information ...................39 HDMI signal ........................................16 HDMI signal, input video information ...................39 HDMI video signal processing, GUI menu ........................................94 HDMI video signal resolution, GUI menu ........................................94 HDMI, GUI menu ................................94 HDMI, troubleshooting ......................128 Headphones indicator ...........................27 Headphones using ................................38 ■ I I/O Assignment, GUI menu ................. 98 ID1/ID2 indicator, remote control .......28 INFORMATION ................................144 Information display, HD Radio ............52 Information display, remote control .....28 Information display, XM radio ............56 Infrared window, remote control .........28 Init. Delay, sound field parameter ........81 Initial Set, GUI menu ...........................99 Initial Volume, GUI menu ...................90 INITIALIZE, advanced setup ............ 122 Input channel indicators .......................28 Input Channels, GUI menu ..................86 Input Level, GUI menu ......................100 Input Rename, GUI menu ....................98 Input Select, GUI menu .......................85 Input signal indicators ..........................27 Input source indicators .........................27 Input source information display ...38, 40 Input/output assignment, GUI menu ....98 IP Address, GUI menu .........................95 iPod charge on the standby mode, GUI menu .........................................99 iPod menu tree ......................................66 iPod playback .......................................66 iPod universal dock connection ............22 iPod, GUI menu ....................................99 iPod, troubleshooting ..........................135 iTunes tagging, HD radio .....................51 iTunes Tagging, toubleshooting .........129 ■ L LANGUAGE, advanced setup ...........123 Language, advanced setup ..................123 Language, GUI menu .........................100 Level, automatic setup ..........................32 Level, GUI menu ..................................89 Level, music enhancer parameter .........84 LFE Level, GUI menu ..........................90 Lipsync, GUI menu ..............................92 LIVE/CLUB, sound field program .......42 Liveness, sound field parameter ...........82 Loading system settings .....................103 Loading the system settings ...............103 Low-frequency effect level, GUI menu .........................................90 ■ M MAC address filter, advanced setup ...122 MAC Address, GUI menu ....................96 MAC FILTER, advanced setup ..........122 Macro programming, remote control .113 Manual audio delay adjustment, GUI menu .........................................92 Manual station preset, FM/AM tuning .................................49 Manual Test, GUI menu .....................100 Max Volume, GUI menu ......................90 MCX-2000 content playback ...............70 MD recorder connection .......................21 Media Access Control) address, GUI menu .........................................96 Menu browsing indicator ......................28 Menu tree, iPod ....................................66 Menu tree, network ...............................68 Menu tree, USB ....................................68 MONITOR CHECK, advanced setup ...............................123 Monitor Info., GUI menu .....................95 Monitor information, GUI menu ..........95 Mono Movie, sound field program .......44 MOVIE, sound field program ..............44 Multi CH Assign, GUI menu ...............86 MULTI CH INPUT jacks .......................9 Multi channel assignment, GUI menu .........................................86 Multi Measure, automatic setup ...........31 Multi Zone, GUI menu .........................96 Multi-channel input component selection ............................................37 Multi-channel sources with headphones .......................................45 Index Multiple point measurement, automatic setup ................................ 31 Multi-zone configuration ................... 117 Music Content menu ............................ 65 Music Content, GUI menu ................... 87 Music Video, sound field program ...... 43 Muting audio output ............................. 38 Muting Type, GUI menu ..................... 90 ■ N Neo:6 Cinema, decoder ........................ 74 Neo:6 Music, decoder .......................... 74 Network connection ............................. 23 Network Standby, GUI menu .............. 96 Network, GUI menu ............................ 95 Network, toubleshooting .................... 133 neural indicator .................................... 27 NRL-THX Music, decoder .................. 74 NRL-THX, decoder ............................. 74 ■ O Operation mode selector, remote control .................................. 29 OPTICAL jacks ................................... 15 Optimizing speaker setting .................. 30 Option, GUI menu ............................... 97 Out Of Resolution, HDMI error message ....................... 39 ■ P ■ R ■ S S VIDEO jacks .................................... 15 Sampling, input audio information ...... 38 Saving system settings ....................... 101 SB. Init. Delay, sound field parameter ...................... 81 SB. Liveness, sound field parameter ... 82 SB. Room Size, sound field parameter ...................... 81 Sci-Fi, sound field program ................. 44 Scroll, GUI menu ................................. 98 Secondary DNS server, GUI menu ..... 96 Selecting audio input jacks .................. 37 Selecting decoder ................................. 74 Selecting multi-channel input component ....................................... 37 Setting preset channels, XM Radio ..... 55 Setting remote control ID, remote control ID setting ............... 121 Set-top box connection ........................ 20 Setup, GUI menu ................................. 87 Short Message, GUI menu .................. 98 Shortcut button, Network content playback ............... 72 Shortcut button, USB content playback ..................... 72 Shuffle, iPod playback style ................ 67 Signal flow ........................................... 17 SIGNAL INFO .............................. 38, 40 SILENT CINEMA ............................... 45 SILENT CINEMA indicator ............... 27 Simple Remote Mode, iPod playback .................................. 67 Simplified remote control .................. 116 Sirius ID diaplay .................................. 59 SIRIUS PIN, advanced setup ............ 122 SIRIUS Satellite Radio operation ........ 59 SIRIUS Satellite Radio Parental Lock code number reset, advanced setup .............................. 122 SIRIUS Satellite Radio parental lock, GUI menu ........................................ 86 SIRIUS Satellite Radio subscription activation ......................................... 59 SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning ............. 58 SIRIUS Satellite Radio, troubleshooting .............................. 131 SiriusConnect tuner connection ........... 58 Size, automatic setup ........................... 32 SLEEP indicator .................................. 28 Sleep timer ........................................... 39 Sound field parameter .......................... 81 Sound field program information ...... 143 Sound field programs .......................... 40 Sound field programs with headphones ...................................... 45 Sound field programs without surround speaker ............................. 45 Sound, GUI menu ................................ 90 Source name change, remote control ............................... 112 149 En English Rear panel ...............................................9 Recalling a preset station, FM/AM tuning .................................50 Recital/Opera, sound field program .....43 RECOV./BACKUP, advanced setup .122 Recovery and backup of the system settings, advanced setup ...............................122 Reloading automatic setup parameter ..........................................34 REMOTE CON AMP, advanced setup ...............................121 Remote control ...................................106 Remote control code setting ...............109 Remote control customization ............108 Remote control ID setting, advanced setup ...............................121 Remote control using ...........................28 Remote control, installing batteries ........4 Remote control, troubleshooting ........132 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks ......................22 REMOTE SENSOR, advanced setup ...............................121 Remote sensor, advanced setup ..........121 Repeat, iPod playback style .................67 Resetting system .................................138 Resolution, GUI menu .........................94 Rev. Delay, sound field parameter .......83 Rev. Level, sound field parameter .......83 Rev. Time, sound field parameter ........82 Reviewing automatic setup parameter ..........................................34 Rhapsody® service ..............................71 Roleplaying Game, sound field program .........................43 Room Size, sound field parameter .......81 RS-232C STANDBY, advanced setup .............................. 121 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Pairing with Bluetooth component ...... 64 Pairing, GUI menu ............................... 86 Panorama, decoder parameter .............. 84 Parameter initialization, advanced setup ............................... 122 Parametric EQ, GUI menu ................... 90 Parametric equalizer data copy, GUI menu ........................................ 90 Parametric equalizer information ....... 144 Parametric equalizer type select, GUI menu ........................................ 91 Parametric equalizer, GUI menu ......... 90 Parental Lock, GUI menu .................... 86 Parental Lock, Sirius Satellite Radio ... 62 PC server content playback .................. 70 PEQ Data Copy, GUI menu ................. 90 PEQ Select, GUI menu ........................ 91 PHONES jack ...................................... 38 Placing speakers ................................... 10 Play information screen, iPod playback .................................. 67 Play information screen, USB content ..................................... 69 Playback screen display time, GUI menu ........................................ 98 Playback Screen, GUI menu ................ 98 Playback style, iPod ............................. 67 Playback, Bluetooth component .......... 64 PLII Game, decoder ............................. 74 PLII Movie, decoder ............................ 74 PLII Music, decoder ............................ 74 PLIIx Game, decoder ........................... 74 PLIIx Movie, decoder .......................... 74 PLIIx Music, decoder .......................... 74 Position, GUI menu ..............................99 Power cable connection ........................25 PRE OUT jacks ......................................9 Presence left / right speaker .................11 Presence speaker indicators ..................28 Preset channel clear, XM Radio ...........56 Preset channel setting, Sirius Satellite Radio ........................61 Preset channel setting, XM Radio ........55 PRESET indicator ................................27 Preset Search mode, Sirius Satellite Radio ........................60 Preset Search mode, XM Radio ...........55 Preset stations, FM/AM tuner ..............49 Primary DNS server, GUI menu ..........96 Pro Logic, decoder ...............................74 Processing, GUI menu .........................94 Prog. Re-Processing, GUI menu ..........94 Program selection, HD Radio ..............51 Programming other remote controls ...111 Progressive re-processing, GUI menu .........................................94 Projector connection .............................18 PURE DIRECT mode ..........................47 Pure Direct, GUI menu ........................93 Pure hi-fi sound listening .....................47 Index SOURCE, operation mode selector ..... 29 Speaker cable connection ..................... 14 Speaker configurations, GUI menu ..... 87 Speaker connection .............................. 12 Speaker distance, automatic setup ....... 32 Speaker distance, GUI menu ............... 88 Speaker equalizing, automatic setup .... 32 SPEAKER IMP., advanced setup ...... 121 Speaker impedance setting ................... 26 Speaker impedance, advanced setup ... 121 Speaker level adjustment ..................... 47 Speaker level, automatic setup ............. 32 Speaker level, GUI menu ..................... 89 Speaker placement ............................... 10 Speaker setting oprimization ............... 30 Speaker size, automatic setup .............. 32 Speaker terminals ................................... 9 Speaker wiring, automatic setup .......... 31 Speaker, GUI menu .............................. 87 Specifications ..................................... 145 Spectacle, sound field program ............ 44 Sports, sound field program ................. 43 Standard, sound field program ............. 44 Standby Charge, GUI menu ................. 99 Standby mode ...................................... 26 Standby Through, GUI menu ............... 94 Station Search, GUI menu ................... 86 Status, GUI menu ................................. 96 Stereo playback .................................... 45 STEREO, sound field program ............ 45 Stereo/Surround, GUI menu ................ 80 Straight Enhancer, sound field program ......................... 45 STRAIGHT mode ................................ 46 Subnet Mask, GUI menu ..................... 95 Subwoofer ............................................ 11 SUBWOOFER jack ............................. 22 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack ............ 22 Subwoofer, GUI menu ......................... 88 Supplied accessories .............................. 3 SUR. DECODE, sound field program ......................... 45 Sur. Init.Delay, sound field parameter ...................... 81 Sur. Liveness, sound field parameter ... 82 Sur. Room Size, sound field parameter ...................... 81 Sur.Back L Level, sound field parameter ...................... 83 Sur.Back R Level, sound field parameter ...................... 83 SUR.BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks ................................................. 22 Surround back left/right speaker .......... 11 Surround back left/right speakers, GUI menu ........................................ 88 Surround back speaker ......................... 11 Surround Back, GUI menu .................. 88 Surround Decode, sound field program ......................... 45 Surround decoder mode ....................... 45 Surround L Level, sound field parameter ...................... 83 SURROUND L/R jacks ....................... 22 150 En Surround left / right speaker ................. 11 Surround left/right speakers, GUI menu ........................................87 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks .............21 Surround R Level, sound field parameter .......................83 Surround, GUI menu ............................87 System ID, GUI menu ..........................96 System Memory .................................101 System reset .......................................138 System settings ...................................101 System, GUI menu ...............................96 ■ T Target Zone, GUI menu .....................100 The Bottom Line, sound field program .........................42 The Roxy Theatre, sound field program .........................42 Tonal quality adjustment ......................47 Tone Control, GUI menu .....................92 Treble, GUI menu ................................92 Trigger Mode, GUI menu ..................100 Trigger Output, GUI menu .................100 Troubleshooting .................................124 TruBass, decoder parameter ................. 84 Tuner frequency step, advanced setup ............................... 122 TUNER FRQ STEP, advanced setup ............................... 122 Tuner indicators ...................................28 Turning off ...........................................26 Turning on ............................................26 Turntable connection ............................21 TV FORMAT, advanced setup ..........123 TV format, advanced setup ................123 TV monitor connection ........................18 TV, operation mode selector ................29 ■ U Unit, GUI menu .................................... 88 Unprocessed input source listening ......46 USB content playback ..........................68 USB device that can be used ................69 USB storage device connection ........... 23 USB, toubleshooting ..........................133 ■ V VCR connection ...................................21 VERSION, advanced setup ................123 Vertical dialogue position, sound field parameter .......................80 VIDEO AUX jacks .............................. 24 Video conversion for analog-to-analog, GUI menu ........................................93 VIDEO jacks ........................................15 Video jacks ...........................................15 Video signal flow ................................. 17 Video signals, HDMI ...........................16 Video, GUI menu ................................. 93 Village Vanguard, sound field program .........................42 Virtual CINEMA DSP .........................45 VIRTUAL indicator .............................27 VOLTAGE SELECTOR ........................4 VOLUME level indicator .....................28 Volume Trim, GUI menu .....................85 Volume, GUI menu ..............................89 ■ W Wake on RS-232C access, advanced setup ...............................121 Wall Paper, GUI menu .........................99 Warehouse Loft, sound field program .........................42 Web browser controlling ....................105 Web Control Center ............................105 Wiring, automatic setup .......................31 ■ X XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock connection ........................................53 XM Satellite Radio activation ..............54 XM Satellite Radio operations .............54 XM Satellite Radio tuning ....................53 XM Satellite Radio, troubleshooting ...............................130 ■ Y YBA-10 connection ..............................22 YDS-11 connection ..............................22 YPAO ...................................................30 YPAO indicator ....................................27 ■ Z Zone 2/3 component connection ........117 Zone 2/3 control .................................119 Zone indicators, remote control ............28 Zone on-screen display, GUI menu ......97 Zone OSD, GUI menu ..........................97 ZONE OUT jacks ...................................9 Zone Rename, GUI menu .....................97 Zone SP Assign, GUI menu .................96 Zone speaker assignment, GUI menu .........................................96 Zone2 Balance, GUI menu ...................97 Zone2 Initial Vol., GUI menu ..............97 Zone2 Max Vol., GUI menu ................97 Zone2 Muting Type, GUI menu ...........97 Zone2 Set, GUI menu ...........................96 Zone2 Volume, GUI menu ...................96 ZONE2/ZONE3 indicators ...................28 Zone3 Balance, GUI menu ...................97 Zone3 Initial Vol., GUI menu ..............97 Zone3 Max Vol., GUI menu ................97 Zone3 Muting Type, GUI menu ...........97 Zone3 Set, GUI menu ...........................96 Zone3 Tone Control, GUI menu ..........97 Zone3 Volume, GUI menu ...................96 “AMASTER ON/OFF” or “3DVD” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for the information about each position of the parts. ■ Front panel A B C L PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT/ REC OUT MENU TONE CONTROL ENTER PRESET/TUNING/CH MEMORY SEARCH MODE STEREO/ MONO CATEGORY INFO BAND INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX PHONES USB ON OFF MASTER P D AUDIO SELECT/ REC OUT MENU TONE CONTROL E F G H I J K ENTER PRESET/TUNING/CH MEMORY SEARCH MODE STEREO/ MONO CATEGORY INFO BAND ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO PROGRAM M i OPTIMIZER MIC N SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO VIDEO AUX PHONES O OPTICAL USB ■ Remote control 1 D 2 3 STANDBY POWER V-AUX PHONO DOCK BD HD DVD DVD CD MD CD-R CBL SAT TV DVR VCR TUNER XM SIRIUS USB NET POWER POWER TV AV MULTI AMP 4 TV SOURCE 5 6 7 8 SELECT MACRO ID ZONE MODE F G H SYSTEM MEMORY 1 STATUS TITLE BAND 9 0 SETUP E 2 PRESET/CH VOLUME I MENU SRCH MODE J CAT. A-E ENTER SUBMENU RETURN MEMORY 4 3 PLAY INFO DISPLAY MUTE K L Q REC A CLASSICAL 1 TAG CLASSICAL 1 B ENTERTAIN 3 STEREO 5 MOVIE 4 ENHANCER SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT 6 7 8 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT ENT 10 MOVIE 4 ENHANCER SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT 6 7 8 HDMI OUT 0 M N 9 HDMI OUT 0 INFO LEVEL SLEEP MUTE AUDIO SEL AUDIO O TV VOL TV CH TV 3D DSP P INPUT ENTERTAIN 3 R S t APPENDIX C STEREO 5 LIVE/CLUB 2 PRG SELECT LIVE/CLUB 2 ii Sound output in each sound field program L Front left speaker SL Surround left speaker SBR Surround back right speaker C Center speaker SR Surround right speaker PL Presence left speaker R Front right speaker SBL Surround back left speaker PR Presence right speaker Speaker from which no sound is being output Speaker from which sound is being output Speaker settings 7-channel PL Speaker settings 5-channel 7-channel PL PR C L L R C R 5-channel PR C L R L SR SL C R 5 1 SL SL SR SBL SBR PL SL SR PL PR C L SBL SBR R L C PR C L R SR R L SR SL C R 6 2 SL SR SBL SBR PL SL SL SR PL PR C L SBL SBR R L C PR C L R SR R L SR SL C R 7 3 SL SL SR SBL SBR PL SL SR PL PR C L SBL SBR R L C PR C L R SR R L SR SL C R 8 4 SL SL SR SBL SBR SL SR SBL SBR *1 EX / PL x / / neural : OFF *2 EX / PL x / / neural : ON or discrete 6.1/7.1-channel audio signals are input. SR Input audio source Program CLASSICAL Hall in Munich Hall in Vienna Hall in Amsterdam Church in Freiburg Chamber LIVE/CLUB Village Vanguard Warehouse Loft Cellar Club The Roxy Theatre The Bottom Line iii 3D ON 2-channel (monaural) 2-channel (stereo) 5.1-channel*1 6.1/7.1-channel*2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 4 OFF Input audio source Program 3D 2-channel (monaural) 2-channel (stereo) 5.1-channel*1 6.1/7.1-channel*2 2 2 2 2 7 4 2 4 ENTERTAINMENT Sports Action Game Roleplaying Game Music Video Recital/Opera MOVIE Standard Spectacle Sci-Fi Adventure Drama ON MOVIE Mono Movie ON 2 2 2 2 OFF 3 2 2 4 STEREO 2ch Stereo –– 5 5 5 5 STEREO 7ch Stereo MUSIC ENHANCER 7ch Enhancer –– 4 4 4 4 SUR.DECODE Surround Decoder (Pro Logic) (PLII Movie) (PLII Game) –– 6 7 7 4 SUR.DECODE Surround Decoder (PLII Music) –– 8 7 7 4 SUR.DECODE Surround Decoder (PLIIx Movie) (PLIIx Game) (Neo:6 Cinema) (CSII Cinema) (NRL-THX) –– 6 4 7 4 SUR.DECODE Surround Decoder (PLIIx Music) (Neo:6 Music) (CSII Music) (NRL-THX Music) –– 8 4 7 4 STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT MUSIC ENHANCER Straight Enhancer –– 5 5 7 4 OFF APPENDIX iv List of remote control codes TV ACURA ADDISON 00101 01201, 01601, 08401 ADMIRAL 01301, 02201, 05801 ADVENT 09601 AGB 06801 AIKO 01201 AKAI 00101, 00301, 02901, 04601, 06801, 08901, 10501 AKURA 03701 ALBA 00101, 00401, 04801, 08501 AMERICA ACTION 02701 AMPRO 09401 AMSTRAD 00101, 00401, 02501, 04801, 05101, 05301, 06801 ANAM 00101, 02701, 03401 ANAM NATIONAL 03401, 08301 ANITECH 00101 AOC 00101, 00301, 00901, 01201, 01301, 01601, 02601, 02701, 05601 APEX DIGITAL09301, 09701, 09901 ASA 01401 AUDIOSONIC 00401, 01701 AWA 00101 BANG & OLUFSEN 07201 BASIC 00101 BAUR 00401, 04601, 06701 BAYSONIC 02701 BEAUMARK 02601 BEKO 04701, 06201, 09001, 09101 BELL & HOWELL 02001 BEON 00401 BLAUPUNKT 02801 BLUE SKY 08501, 11401 BONDSTEC 03301 BRADFORD 02701 BRANDT 01701, 04201 BROKSONIC 03101, 05801 BUSH 00101, 00101, 00401, 04801, 04901, 08501, 11401 BYDESIGN 14301, 14401, 14501, 14601 CANDLE 00301 CARNIVALE 00301 CARVER 00801, 02401 CASCADE 00101 CATHAY 00401 CCE 00401 CELEBRITY 00001 CELERA 09701 v CENTURION 00401 CGE 03301 CHANGHONG 09701 CHING TAI 00101, 01201 CHUN YUN 00001, 00101, 01201, 02701 CHUNG HSIN 00701, 01601, 02701 CIMLINE 00101 CINERAL 01201, 05601 CITIZEN 00301, 00901, 01201 CLARION 02701 CLARIVOX 00401 CLATRONIC 03301, 04701 CONDOR 04101, 04701 CONRAC 10301 CONTEC 00101, 02701 CRAIG 02701 CROSLEY 00801 CROWN 00101, 00401, 02701, 04701, 05201 CTC 03301 CURTIS MATHES 00301, 00501, 00801, 00901, 01301, 01801, 02001, 02301, 05601, 08901, 11801, 12201 CXC 02701 DAEWOO 00101, 00301, 00401, 01201, 01601, 02001, 02401, 02601, 02701, 04901, 05601, 07901, 08201, 13101 DANSAI 00401 DAYTON 00101 DE GRAAF 02901, 06901 DECCA 00401, 06801 DENON 01801 DIGATRON 00401 DIXI 00101, 00401 DUMONT 00201 DWIN 09201, 10101 ECE 00401 ELBE 03501 ELECTROBAND 00001 ELIN 00401, 06901 ELITE 04101 ELTA 00101 EMERSON 02001, 02601, 02701, 03101, 04601, 05801, 07901 ENVISION 00301, 10601 EPSON 11001 ERRES 00401 ETHER 00101, 00301 ETRON 00101 EUROPHON 06801 FERGUSON 00401, 01001, 01701, 03201, 03801, 04201, 07101 FIDELITY 04601 FINLANDIA 02901, 04401 FINLUX 00401, 01401, 01501, 04401, 06801 FIRSTAR 00101, 03101 FIRSTLINE 00101, 03301, 08501 FISHER 01401, 02001, 02901, 04701 FLINT 05701 FORMENTI 00401, 04101 FORTRESS 01301 FRONTECH 02201, 03301, 03701 FUJITSU 08701, 10401 FUNAI 02501, 02701, 03701 FUTURETECH 02701 GATEWAY 13301, 13401 GE 00301, 00501, 00601, 01201, 02601, 02701, 05601, 07101, 11801, 12201, 12601 GEC 00401, 06801 GELOSO 00101 GENEXXA 02201 GIBRALTER 00201, 00301 GOLDSTAR 00301, 00401, 01701, 02001, 02601, 05001 GOODMANS 00401, 04801, 04901, 08201 GOREMJE 04701 GRADIENTE 00701, 02401 GRAETZ 02201, 04601 GRANADA 00401, 02901, 04301, 06801 GRANDIN 07701 GRUNDIG 00401, 02801, 06301, 07001, 07401 GRUNPY 02701 HALLMARK 02601 HANKOOK 00301, 02601, 02701 HANSEATIC 00401, 04101, 04601, 05201, 07001 HANTAREX 06801 HARMAN/KARDON 00801 HARVARD 02701 HAVERMY 01301 HCM 00101, 05101 HELLO KITTY 05601 HINARI 00101, 00401 HISAWA 05701 HITACHI 00101, 00301, 01201, 01501, 01701, 01801, 02201, 02601, 03001, 04501, 06101, 06901, 07301, 11701, 12101 HUA TUN 00101 HUANYU 04901 HYPSON 00401, 03701 ICE 03701, 04801 IMPERIAL 03301, 04701, 05201 INDIANA 00401 INFINITY 00801 INGELEN 02201 INNO HIT 06801 INNOVA 00401 INTEQ 00201 INTERFUNK 00401, 02201, 03301, 04601, 06701 INTERVISION 00401, 03701, 05001 ITS 04801 ITT 02201, 04601, 06901 JBL 00801 JCB 00001 JEAN 00101, 00601, 01201, 02101, 03101 JENSEN 09601 JVC 00701, 04801, 05801, 08401, 08701 KAISUI 00101 KAPSCH 02201 KARCHER 07701 KATHREIN 07001 KEC 02701 KENDO 00401 KENWOOD 00301 KNEISSEL 03501, 05401 KOLIN 00701, 01601, 02701 KORPEL 00401 KOYODA 00101 KTV 00301, 02701 L&S ELECTRONIC 10301 LEYCO 00401, 03701 LG 00301, 00401, 00901, 01601, 02601, 09001 LIESENK & TTER 00401 LOEWE 06701 LUXOR 04501, 04601 LXI 00501, 00801, 02001, 02101, 02601 M ELECTRONIC 00101, 00401, 01401, 01501, 01701, 02201, 03801, 04401, 04901, 06001 MAGNADYNE 03301, 06801 MAGNAFON 06801 MAGNAVOX 00301, 00801, 12001, 12601 MANESTH 03701, 04101 MARANTZ 00301, 00401, 00801, 07001 MARK 00401 MATSUI 00101, 00401, 02901, 04801, 06301, 06801 MATSUSHITA 03401, 08301 MEDIATOR 00401 MEDION PENNEY 00301, 00501, 00601, 00901, 02101, 02601, 12201 PERDIO 04101 PHILCO 00301, 00401, 00801, 01801, 02601, 02701, 03301, 05801, 13101 PHILIPS 00001, 00301, 00401, 00601, 00801, 01201, 01601, 02601, 04901, 07001, 08801, 12601 PHONOLA 00401 PILOT 00301 PIONEER 01701, 02201, 02301, 03801, 08601, 09501, 11301 PORTLAND 01201 PRANDONI-PRINCE 06801 PRIMA 09601 PRISM 00601 PROFEX 00101, 04601 PROSCAN 00501 PROTECH 00101, 00401, 03301, 03701, 05201, 08501 PROTON 00101, 00301, 02601 PULSAR 00201 QUASAR 00601, 03401, 08301 QUELLE 00401, 01401, 04601, 06701 RADIOLA 00401 RADIOMARELLI 06801 RADIOSHACK 00301, 00501, 02001, 02601, 02701 RCA 00001, 00301, 00501, 01101, 01201, 02601, 08601, 11501, 11801, 13901, 12201, 12501, 12601, 12801 REALISTIC 00301, 02001, 02601, 02701 REDIFFUSION 04601 REOC 09001 REVOX 00401 REX 02201, 03501, 03701 RFT 05201 R-LINE 00401 ROADSTAR 00101, 03701, 05201 RUNCO 00201, 00301, 06501, 07501 SABA 01701, 02201, 03801, 04201 SACCS 03201 SAGEM 07701 SAISHO 00101, 03701, 06801 SALORA 02201, 04601, 06901 SAMBERS 06801 SAMPO 00101, 00301, 01201, 01301, 02001, 02501, 02601, 08301, 13301 SAMSUNG 00101, 00301, 00401, 00901, 01101, 01201, 02001, 02601, 03701, 04701, 07001, 07401, 07801, 08901, 09801, 10501, 10701 SANSEI 05601 SANSUI 05801 SANYO 01401, 02001, 02701, 02901, 04301, 10201 SBR 00401 SCHAUB LORENZ 04601 SCHNEIDER 00401, 03301, 04801, 08501 SCOTCH 02601 SCOTT 02601, 02701, 03101 SEARS 00501, 00801, 02001, 02101, 02501, 02601 SEG 03701, 08501 SEI 06801 SELECO 02201, 03501 SEMIVOX 02701 SEMP 02101 SHARP 00301, 01301, 08301 SHEN YING 00101, 01201 SHENG CHIA 00101, 01301, 03101 SIAREM 06801 SIEMENS 00401, 02801 SINUDYNE 06801 SKANTIC 04501 SKY 00401 SKYGIANT 02701 SKYWORTH 00401 SOLAVOX 02201 SONITRON 02901 SONOKO 00101, 00401 SONOLOR 02201, 02901 SONTEC 00401 SONY 00001, 08301, 11101, 11601, 12701, 12901 SOUNDESIGN 02601, 02701 SOUNDWAVE 00401, 05201 SOWA 00601, 00901, 01201, 02101, 02601 SQUAREVIEW 02501 SSS 02701 STANDARD 00101 STARLITE 02701 STERN 02201, 03501 SUPREME 00001 SYLVANIA 00301, 00801, 02501 SYMPHONIC 02501, 02701 SYNCO 00001, 00901, 01201, 01301, 02601, 05601 SYSLINE 00401 T+A 05501 TACICO 00101, 01201, 02601 TAI YI 00101 TANDY 01301, 02201 TASHIKO 01201, 08301 TATUNG 00101, 00401, 00601, 00801, 00901, 02001, 02101, 06801 TCM 10301 TEAC 00101, 00401, 03701, 05101, 05201, 05701, 08501, 11401 TEC 03301 TECHNEMA 04101 TECHNICS 00601, 03401, 08301 TECHWOOD 00601 TECO 00101, 00601, 01201, 01301, 02601, 03701, 08401 TEKNIKA 00801, 00901, 01201, 01901, 02701 TELEFUNKEN 01701, 03601, 04201, 08001, 08901 TELEMEISTER04101 TELETECH 00101 TENSAI 04101 TERA 00301 THOMSON 01701, 03801, 07101, 08001, 12501 THORN 00401, 01401, 04601, 06701 TMK 02601 TNCI 00201 TOSHIBA 00901, 02001, 02101, 06601, 07801, 08301, 10901, 12101, 12301, 13001, 13201 TRIUMPH 06801 TUNTEX 00101, 00301, 01201 TVS 05801 UHER 04101 UNIVERSUM 00401, 01401, 01501, 03701, 04401, 04701, 06401 VECTOR RESEARCH 00301 VESTEL 00401 VICTOR 00701, 03401, 08301, 08401 VIDEOSAT 03301 VIDIKRON 00801 VIDTECH 02601 VIEWSONIC 13301 VISION 04101 VOXSON 02201 WALTHAM 04501 WARDS 00301, 00801, 02601, 11301 WATSON 00401, 04101 WAYCON 02101 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 00401, 04101, 05801, 07901 APPENDIX 08501, 10301, 11401 MEGATRON 01801, 02601 MEMOREX 00101, 01901, 02001, 02601, 03401, 05801, 11401 METZ 05501 MGA 00301, 01901, 02601 MICROMAXX 10301 MICROSTAR 10301 MIDLAND 00201, 00501, 00601 MINERVA 06301 MINOKA 05101 MITSUBISHI 00301, 01301, 01601, 01901, 02001, 02601, 02701, 03101, 03401, 06701, 11201, 11901 MIVAR 03901, 04001, 06801, 07601 MOTOROLA 01301 MTC 00301, 00901, 06701 MULTITECH 00101, 02701 MYRYAD 07001 NAD 02101, 02601, 04601, 11301 NEC 00101, 00301, 00601, 02001, 02101, 02401, 02601, 05701, 06501, 13201 NECKERMANN 00401, 07001 NEI 00401 NETSAT 00401 NEWAVE 00101, 01201, 01301, 02601 NIKKAI 00401, 03701 NIKKO 00301, 01201, 02601 NOKIA 04601, 05901, 06001, 06901, 08101 NORCENT 09301, 10801 NORDMENDE 01701, 03801, 07101 NTC 01201 OCEANIC 02201, 04601 ONWA 02701, 05301 OPTIMUS 02001, 02301, 03401, 08301 OPTONICA 01301 ORION 00401, 03101, 04101, 05801, 06801 OSAKI 03701, 05101 OTTO VERSAND 00401, 04101, 06701, 07001 PALLADIUM 04701, 05201 PANAMA 03701 PANASONIC 00401, 00601, 00801, 02201, 03401, 08301, 12401 PATHE CINEMA 03201, 04101 PAUSA 00101 vi YAMAHA YAPSHE YOKO ZENITH 00301, 01801, 08301, 10001, 11001, 13501, 13601, 13701, 13801, 14001, 14101, 14201 03401 00401, 03701 00201, 01201, 02601, 05801 VCR ADMIRAL ADVENTURA AIKO AIWA 01102 00002 02102 00002, 00402, 02202, 02602, 02702 AKAI 00602, 02302 AKIBA 01402 ALBA 01402, 02102, 02302, 02702 AMERICA ACTION 02102 AMERICAN HIGH 00302 AMSTRAD 00002 ANAM 00402, 01902, 02002, 02102, 02902 ANAM NATIONAL 01902, 04502 ANITECH 01402 ASA 00402, 01502 ASHA 02002 ASUKA 00402 AUDIOVOX 00402, 02102 BAIRD 00002, 00602, 01602 BASIC LINE 01402, 02102 BEAUMARK 02002 BELL & HOWELL 01602 BLAUPUNKT 01902 BRANDT 02402 BRANDT ELECTRONIC 00602 BROKSONIC 01702, 02602, 04402 BUSH 01402, 02102, 02702 CALIX 00402 CANON 00302 CARVER 01502 CCE 01402, 02102 CGE 00002 CIMLINE 01402 CINERAL 02102 CITIZEN 00402, 02102, 04302 COLT 01402 COMBITECH 02702 CRAIG 00402, 01002, 01402, 02002 CROWN 01402, 02102 CURTIS MATHES 00302, 00602, 01202, 03702 CYBERNEX 02002 CYRUS 01502 DAEWOO 00902, 01602, 02102, 03402, 04302 DANSAI 01402 vii DE GRAAF DECCA DENON DUAL DUMONT 00702 00002, 01502 00702 00602 00002, 01502, 01602 DYNATECH 00002 ELCATECH 01402 ELECTROHOME 00402 ELECTROPHONIC 00402 EMEREX 00102 EMERSON 00002, 00302, 00402, 00802, 00902, 01702, 02002, 02102, 04302, 04402 ESC 02002, 02102 FERGUSON 00602, 02402 FIDELITY 00002 FINLANDIA 01502, 01602 FINLUX 00002, 00702, 01502, 01602 FIRSTLINE 00402, 00802, 00902, 01402 FISHER 01002, 01602 FUJI 00202, 00302 FUJITSU 00002, 00902 FUNAI 00002 GARRARD 00002 GE 00302, 01202, 02002, 03502, 03702, 03802 GEC 01502 GENERAL 00902 GO VIDEO 02802 GOLDHAND 01402 GOLDSTAR 00402, 01802, 02902, 04202 GOODMANS 00002, 00402, 01402, 02102 GRADIENTE 00002 GRAETZ 00602, 01602, 02002 GRANADA 01502, 01602 GRANDIN 00002, 00402, 01402 GRUNDIG 01402, 01502, 01902, 02502 HANSEATIC 00402 HARLEY DAVIDSON 00002 HARMAN/KARDON 01502 HARWOOD 01402 HCM 01402 HINARI 01402, 02002, 02702 HI-Q 01002 HITACHI 00002, 00402, 00602, 00702, 02002 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 00702 HYPSON 01402 IMPERIAL 00002 INTERFUNK 01502 ITT 00602, 01602, 02002 ITV 00402, 02102 JENSEN 00602 JVC 00602, 00902, 01302 KAISUI 01402 KEC KENWOOD KLH KODAK KOLIN KORPEL LENCO LEYCO LG 00402, 02102 00602, 01302 01402 00302, 00402 00602, 00802 01402 02102 01402 00402, 00702, 00902, 02902 LLOYD’S 00002 LOEWE 00402, 01502, 04502 LOGIK 01402, 02002 LUXOR 00802, 01102, 01602 LXI 00402 M ELECTRONIC 00002 MAGNASONIC04302 MAGNAVOX 00002, 00302, 00502, 01502 MAGNIN 02002 MANESTH 00902, 01402 MARANTZ 00302, 01502 MARTA 00402 MATSUI 02602, 02702 MATSUSHITA 00302 MEDION 02602 MEI 00302 MEMOREX 00002, 00302, 00402, 00502, 01002, 01102, 01602, 02002, 02202, 02602, 04202 MEMPHIS 01402 METZ 00402, 02502, 04502 MGA 00802, 02002 MGN TECHNOLOGY 02002 MINOLTA 00702 MITSUBISHI 00602, 00802, 01302, 01502, 03502 MOTOROLA 00302, 01102 MTC 00002, 02002 MULTITECH 00002, 01402 MURPHY 00002 MYRYAD 01502 NAD 01602 NATIONAL 01902 NEC 00302, 00402, 00602, 01102, 01302, 01602 NECKERMANN 01502 NESCO 01402 NEWAVE 00402 NIKKO 00402 NOBLEX 02002 NOKIA 00602, 01602, 02002 NORDMENDE 00602, 02402 OCEANIC 00002, 00602 OKANO 02302, 02602 OLYMPUS 00302, 01902 OPTIMUS 00402, 01102, 01602, 02802 ORION 01702, 02602, 02702, 04402 OSAKI 00002, 00402, 01402 OTTO VERSAND 01502 PALLADIUM 00402, 00602, 01402 PANASONIC 00302, 01802, 01902, 03102, 03702, 04502 PATHE MARCONI 00602 PENNEY 00302, 00402, 00702, 02002, 03702, 04202 PENTAX 00702 PERDIO 00002 PHILCO 00302 PHILIPS 00302, 01502, 03202, 03902, 04002 PHONOLA 01502 PILOT 00402 PIONEER 00702, 01302, 01502 POLK AUDIO 01502 PROFITRONIC 02002 PROLINE 00002 PROSCAN 01202, 03802 PROTEC 01402 PULSAR 00502 PYE 01502 QUASAR 00302, 03702 QUELLE 01502 RADIOLA 01502 RADIOSHACK 00002 RADIX 00402 RANDEX 00402 RCA 00302, 00702, 01202, 02002, 03502, 03702, 03802 REALISTIC 00002, 00302, 00402, 01002, 01102, 01602 REOC 02602 REPLAYTV 03002, 03102 REX 00602 ROADSTAR 00402, 01402, 02002, 02102 RUNCO 00502 SABA 00602, 02402 SALORA 00802 SAMPO 00402, 01102 SAMSUNG 00902, 02002, 02802 SANKY 00502, 01102 SANSUI 00002, 00602, 01302, 04402 SANYO 01002, 01602, 02002 SAVILLE 02702 SBR 01502 SCHAUB LORENZ 00002, 00602, 01602 SCHNEIDER 00002, 01402, 01502 SCOTT 00802, 00902, 01702 SEARS 00002, 00302, 00402, 00702, 01002, 01602, 04202 SEG 02002 SEI 01502 SELECO 00602 SEMP 00902 SHARP SHINTOM SIEMENS CABLE ABC 00103, 00203 AMERICAST 02003 BELL SOUTH 02003 BIRMINGHAM CABLE COMMUNICATIONS 00803 BRITISH TELECOM 00103 DAERYUNG 00203, 01403, 01903 DIRECTOR 01303 FILMNET 01203 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 00103, 00803, 01303, 01703 GOLDSTAR 00503 HAMLIN 00303, 00703 JERROLD 00103, 00803, 01303, 01703 LG 00503 MEMOREX 00003 MNET 01203 MOTOROLA 00803, 01303, 01703, 02303 NOOS 01803 PACE 00603, 02203 PANASONIC 00003, 00203, 00403 PARAGON 00003 PHILIPS 01003, 01103 PIONEER 00503, 01603, 01903 PULSAR 00003 PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX 00103 QUASAR 00003 RCA 02403, 02503 REGAL 00703, 00903 RUNCO 00003 SAGEM 01803 SAMSUNG 00003, 00503 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 00203, 01403, 01903 SONY 02103 STARCOM 00103 SUPERCABLE 00803 TELE+1 01203 TORX 00103 TOSHIBA 00003 TRANS PX 00803 TS 00103 UNITED CABLE 00103 ZENITH 00003, 01503, 02003 SATELLITE TUNER @SAT 06404 ABSAT 00104 ALBA 01404 ALPHASTAR 02504 AMSTRAD 03004 ASTON 00304, 05004 ASTRO 00604 ATSAT 06404 AVALON 01304 BLAUPUNKT 00604 BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING 03004, 05204 CANAL DIGITAL 03104 CANAL SATELLITE 03104 CANAL+ 03104 CHAPARRAL 00804 CITYCOM 05304 CONNEXIONS 01304 CROSSDIGITAL 04604 CYRUS 00704 DAERYUNG 01304 DAEWOO 06304 D-BOX 02104, 04904 DIGENIUS 01104 DIRECTV 00904, 01204, 01504, 01704, 02204, 02304, 02804, 04104, 04604, 05104, 06904 DISH NETWORK SYSTEM 02604, 03704 DISHPRO 02604, 03704 DISTRATEL 00004 DMT 04004 DNT 00704, 01304 DREAM MULTIMEDIA 05804 ECHOSTAR 00504, 01304, 01604, 02604, 03104, 03604, 03704, 04304 ENGEL 03804 EXPRESSVU 02604 FINLUX 01404 FOXTEL 07004, 07104, 07204, 07304, 07404 FRACARRO 03604 FTE 03404 FUBA 01304 GALAXIS 03404, 04704 GE 01504 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 03504 GOI 02604 GOLD BOX 03104 GRUNDIG 00604, 03004 HIRSCHMANN00604, 01304 HITACHI 01404, 02804 HTS 02604 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM 02304, 05104, 06904 HUMAX 03404, 05304 INVIDEO 03604 JVC 02604 KATHREIN 00104, 00604, 00704, 01004, 01804, 05604 KREISELMEYER 00604 LABGEAR 06304 LOGIX 03804 LORENZEN 01104 MAGNAVOX 02004, 02204 MANHATTAN 01404, 03804, 04204 MARANTZ 00704 MEDIASAT 03104 MEMOREX 02204 METRONIC 00004 MITSUBISHI 02304 MOTOROLA 03504 MYRYAD 00704 NEXT LEVEL 03504 NOKIA 01404, 02104, 02404, 04904, 05704, 06804 OCTALTV 03704 ORBITECH 04504 PACE 01404, 03004, 05204, 06604 PANASONIC 00904, 01904, 03004, 06504 PANDA 01404 PAYSAT 02204 PHILIPS 00204, 00704, 01404, 02004, 02204, 02304, 03104, 04104, 05104, 06904 PIONEER 03104 PROMAX 01404 PROSCAN 01204, 01504 RADIOLA 00704 RADIOSHACK 03504 RADIX 01304 RCA 00404, 01204, 01504, 03204 RFT 00704 SABRE 01404 SAGEM 02904, 04804, 05904 SAMSUNG 03804, 04604, 06004, 06204 SAT CONTROL06404 SATSTATION 04204 SCHWAIGER 04704 SEEMANN 01304 SIEMENS 00604 SKY 03004, 03304, 05204 SM ELECTRONIC 05404 SONY 01704, 03004, 06704 STAR CHOICE 03504 STRONG 06404 TANTEC 01404 TECHNISAT 04404, 04504 TELESTAR 04504 THOMSON 01404, 03104, 03904, 06104 TOPFIELD 05504 TOSHIBA 02304, 02704, 06904 TPS 02904, 05904 ULTIMATETV 01204, 01704 UNIDEN 02004, 02204 UNIVERSUM 00604 VENTANA 00704 WISI 00604, 01304, 01404 XSAT 00104 ZEHNDER 04004 ZENITH 03304 CD PLAYER AIWA 00605 ARCAM 00605 AUDIO RESEARCH 00605 AUDIO TON 00605 AUDIOLAB 00605 AUDIOMECA 00605 CAIRN 00605 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS 00205 CARVER 00605, 00805 viii APPENDIX 01102, 03502 01402, 01602 00402, 01502, 01602 SILVA 00402 SINGER 00902, 01402 SINUDYNE 01502 SONIC BLUE 03002, 03102 SONTEC 00402 SONY 00002, 00102, 00202, 00302, 03302, 04102 STS 00702 SUNKAI 02602 SUNSTAR 00002 SUNTRONIC 00002 SYLVANIA 00002, 00302, 00802, 01502 SYMPHONIC 00002 TANDY 00002, 01602 TASHIKO 00002, 00402 TATUNG 00002, 00602, 00902, 01302, 01502 TEAC 00002, 00602, 02102, 02202, 03402 TECHNICS 00302, 01902 TECO 00302, 00402, 00602, 01102 TEKNIKA 00002, 00302, 00402 TELEAVIA 00602 TELEFUNKEN 00602, 02402 TENOSAL 01402 TENSAI 00002 THOMAS 00002 THOMSON 00602, 01202, 01302, 02402 THORN 00602, 01602 TIVO 03202, 03302 TMK 02002 TOSHIBA 00602, 00802, 00902, 01302, 01502, 03602 TOTEVISION 00402, 02002 UHER 02002 UNITECH 02002 UNIVERSUM 00002, 00402, 01502, 02002 VECTOR 00902 VICTOR 00602, 01302 VIDEO CONCEPTS 00902 VIDEOMAGIC 00402 VIDEOSONIC 02002 VILLAIN 00002 WARDS 00002, 00302, 00702, 01002, 01102, 01202, 01402, 01502, 02002 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 01402 XR-1000 00002, 00302, 01402 YAMAHA 00602 YAMISHI 01402 YOKAN 01402 YOKO 02002 ZENITH 00002, 00202, 00502, 04402 CYRUS 00605 DENON 01005 DKK 00005 DMX ELECTRONICS 00605 DYNAMIC BASS 00805 EMERSON 00905 FISHER 00805 GENEXXA 00305, 00905 GOODMANS 00905 GRUNDIG 00605 HARMAN/KARDON 00605, 00705 HITACHI 00305 JVC 00505 KENWOOD 00105, 00405 KRELL 00605 LINN 00605 LXI 00905 MAGNAVOX 00605, 00905 MARANTZ 00205, 00605 MATSUI 00605 MCS 00205 MEMOREX 00905 MERIDIAN 00605 MICROMEGA 00605 MIRO 00005 MISSION 00605 MYRYAD 00605 NAD 00005 NAIM 00605 NSM 00605 OPTIMUS 00005, 00305, 00405, 00805, 00905 PANASONIC 00205 PHILIPS 00605 PIONEER 00305, 00905 POLK AUDIO 00605 PROTON 00605 QED 00605 QUAD 00605 QUASAR 00205 RCA 00305, 00805, 00905 REALISTIC 00805 REVOX 00605 ROTEL 00605 SAE 00605 SANSUI 00605, 00905 SANYO 00805 SCOTT 00905 SEARS 00905 SHARP 00405 SIMAUDIO 00605 SONIC FRONTIERS 00605 SONY 00005 SYMPHONIC 00905 TAG MCLAREN 00605 TANDY 00305 TECHNICS 00205 THORENS 00605 THULE 00605 UNIVERSUM 00605 VICTOR 00505 WARDS 00605 YAMAHA 01105, 01205 CD RECORDER KENWOOD MARANTZ ix 01305 01305 PHILIPS YAMAHA 01305 01405 BLU-RAY/DVD PLAYER ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 02806 ALBA 02606 AMSTRAD 02306 APEX DIGITAL02106, 02606, 03006, 03506, 03606, 03706, 04106 BLAUPINKT 02606 BLUE PARADE01006 BUSH 02306 CENTREX 02106 CLATRONIC 03406 CYBERHOME 02406 DAEWOO 03206, 03306 DANSAI 03206 DECCA 03206 DENON 00006 DIAMOND 03106 DIGITREX 02106 DVD2000 00206 EMERSON 01206 ENTERPRISE 01206 FISHER 02006 GE 00306, 02606 GO VIDEO 02506 GOLDSTAR 02906, 04906 GRADIENTE 01806 GREENHILL 02606 GRUNDIG 00706 HITACHI 01106, 01507, 01906 HITEKER 02106 JVC 00906, 01306 KENWOOD 00006, 00606 KLH 02606 KOSS 01806 LG 02906 LIMIT 03106 MAGNAVOX 00106, 02206 MARANTZ 00706 MEMOREX 03806 MICO 02706 MICROSOFT 00306 MINTEK 02606 MITSUBISHI 00206 MUSTEK 02806 NESA 02606 ONKYO 00106, 04806 ORITRON 01806 PALSONIC 02106 PANASONIC 00006, 00007, 00107, 00207, 01606, 04206, 05006 PHILIPS 00106, 00706, 00807, 01706, 03906, 05206 PIONEER 00406, 00407, 00507, 00607, 01006, 01506, 01606, 05306 POLK AUDIO 00706 PROSCAN 00306 QWESTAR 01806 RCA 00306, 01006, 02606, 04806 ROTEL 01306 SAMSUNG 01106, 04506 SANYO 02006 SHARP 01207, 01307, 01406 SHERWOOD 03206 SHINSONIC 00506 SLIM ART 03306 SM ELECTRONIC 02806 SONY 00506, 00907, 01007, 01107, 04006, 05106 SYLVANIA 02206 TATUNG 03206 TEAC 01006, 02606 TECHNICS 00006 THETA DIGITAL 01006 THOMSON 00306 TOSHIBA 00106, 00307, 04606, 04806, 05406 URBAN CONCEPTS 00106 VICTOR 01407 XBOX 00306 YAMAHA 00006, 00706, 00707, 00806, 04306, 04406, 04706 ZENITH 00106, 01206, 02906 ZEUS 03306 LD PLAYER CARVER 00108 DENON 00008 MARANTZ 00108 MITSUBISHI 00008 NAD 00008 NAGSMI 00008 OPTIMUS 00008 PHILIPS 00108 PIONEER 00008 SALORA 00108 SONY 00208 TELEFUNKEN 00008 YAMAHA 00308 MD RECORDER KENWOOD ONKYO SHARP SONY YAMAHA 00109 00309 00209 00009 00409, 00509, 00609 RECEIVER (TUNER) ADC AIWA 00710 00410, 01210, 03610, 03910, 04410 ALCO 03810 ANAM 04310 APEX DIGITAL01810 AUDIOLAB 01510 AUDIOTRONIC01510 AUDIOVOX 03810 BOSE 01610 CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS 03310 CAPETRONIC 00710 CARVER 01210, 01510 CENTREX 01810 DENON 03210 FERGUSON 00710 FINE ARTS 01510 GRUNDIG 01510 HARMAN/KARDON 00210, 02610 INTEGRA 00310, 02510 JBL 00210, 02710 JVC 00110, 00710, 03410, 04110 KENWOOD 01010, 03010 KLH 03810, 04010 MAGNAVOX 00710, 01210, 01510, 02110 MARANTZ 00010, 01210, 01510, 02410 MCS 00010 MICROMEGA 01510 MUSICMAGIC 01210 MYRYAD 01510 NAD 00610 NORCENT 03710 ONKYO 00310, 00810, 02510 OPTIMUS 00710, 00910 PANASONIC 00010, 02310, 04210, 04710 PHILIPS 01210, 01510, 01910, 02010, 02110, 02210, 02410 PIONEER 00710, 00910, 03510 POLK AUDIO 02410 PROSCAN 01710 QUASAR 00010 RCA 00710, 00910, 01710, 03810, 04310 SABA 00710 SANSUI 01210 SCHNEIDER 00710 SONY 00410, 01110, 01310, 04510, 04610 STEREOPHONICS 00910 SUNFIRE 03010 TEAC 03810 TECHNICS 00010, 02810, 02910, 04210 TELEFUNKEN 00710 THOMSON 01710 THORENS 01510 UHER 00710 VENTURER 03810 VICTOR 00110 WARDS 00410 YAMAHA 00510, 01410, 03110, 04810, 05510, 05610, 05710, 05810, 05910, 06010 YAMAHA (iPOD) 05310 YAMAHA (NET) 05410 YAMAHA (TUNER ID1) 04910 YAMAHA (TUNER ID2) 05010 YAMAHA (XM ID1) 05110 YAMAHA (XM ID2) 05210 TAPE DECK AIWA 00111 CARVER 00111 GRUNDIG 00111 HARMAN/KARDON 00111 MAGNAVOX 00111 MARANTZ 00111 MYRYAD 00111 OPTIMUS 00011 PHILIPS 00111 PIONEER 00011 POLK AUDIO 00111 RCA 00011 REVOX 00111 SANSUI 00111 SONY 00211 THORENS 00111 WARDS 00011 YAMAHA 00311, 00411 Information about software This product uses the following software. For information (copyright, etc) about each software, read the original sentences stated below. ■ About The Independent JPEG Group's JPEG software The Independent JPEG Group's JPEG software README for release 6b of 27-Mar-1998 This distribution contains the sixth public release of the Independent JPEG Group's free JPEG software. You are welcome to redistribute this software and to use it for any purpose, subject to the conditions under LEGAL ISSUES, below. Serious users of this software (particularly those incorporating it into larger programs) should contact IJG at [email protected] to be added to our electronic mailing list. Mailing list members are notified of updates and have a chance to participate in technical discussions, etc. This software is the work of Tom Lane, Philip Gladstone, Jim Boucher, Lee Crocker, Julian Minguillon, Luis Ortiz, George Phillips, Davide Rossi, Guido Vollbeding, Ge' Weijers, and other members of the Independent JPEG Group. IJG is not affiliated with the official ISO JPEG standards committee. DOCUMENTATION ROADMAP This file contains the following sections: General description of JPEG and the IJG software. Copyright, lack of warranty, terms of distribution. Where to learn more about JPEG. Where to find newer versions of this software. Other stuff you should get. Software *not* to get. Plans for future IJG releases. Other documentation files in the distribution are: User documentation: install.doc usage.doc *.1 wizard.doc change.log How to configure and install the IJG software. Usage instructions for cjpeg, djpeg, jpegtran, rdjpgcom, and wrjpgcom. Unix-style man pages for programs (same info as usage.doc). Advanced usage instructions for JPEG wizards only. Version-to-version change highlights. libjpeg.doc example.c structure.doc filelist.doc coderules.doc How to use the JPEG library in your own programs. Sample code for calling the JPEG library. Overview of the JPEG library's internal structure. Road map of IJG files. Coding style rules --- please read if you contribute code. Please read at least the files install.doc and usage.doc. Useful information can also be found in the JPEG FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) article. See ARCHIVE LOCATIONS below to find out where to obtain the FAQ article. If you want to understand how the JPEG code works, we suggest reading one or more of the REFERENCES, then looking at the documentation files (in roughly the order listed) before diving into the code. OVERVIEW This package contains C software to implement JPEG image compression and decompression. JPEG (pronounced "jay-peg") is a standardized compression method for full-color and gray-scale images. JPEG is intended for compressing "real-world" scenes; line drawings, cartoons and other non-realistic images are not its strong suit. JPEG is lossy, meaning that the output image is not exactly identical to the input image. Hence you must not use JPEG if you have to have identical output bits. However, on typical photographic images, very good compression levels can be obtained with no visible change, and remarkably high compression levels are possible if you can tolerate a lowquality image. For more details, see the references, or just experiment with various compression settings. This software implements JPEG baseline, extended-sequential, and progressive compression processes. Provision is made for supporting all variants of these processes, although some uncommon parameter settings aren't implemented yet. For legal reasons, we are not distributing code for the arithmetic-coding variants of JPEG; see LEGAL ISSUES. We have made no provision for supporting the hierarchical or lossless processes defined in the standard. We provide a set of library routines for reading and writing JPEG image files, plus two sample applications "cjpeg" and "djpeg", which use the library to perform conversion between JPEG and some other popular image file formats. The library is intended to be reused in other applications. In order to support file conversion and viewing software, we have included considerable functionality beyond the bare JPEG coding/decoding capability; for example, the color quantization modules are not strictly part of JPEG decoding, but they are essential for output to colormapped file formats or colormapped displays. These extra functions can be compiled out of the library if not required for a particular application. We have also included "jpegtran", a utility for lossless transcoding between different JPEG processes, and "rdjpgcom" and "wrjpgcom", two simple applications for inserting and extracting textual comments in JFIF files. x APPENDIX OVERVIEW LEGAL ISSUES REFERENCES ARCHIVE LOCATIONS RELATED SOFTWARE FILE FORMAT WARS TO DO Programmer and internal documentation: The emphasis in designing this software has been on achieving portability and flexibility, while also making it fast enough to be useful. In particular, the software is not intended to be read as a tutorial on JPEG. (See the REFERENCES section for introductory material.) Rather, it is intended to be reliable, portable, industrial-strength code. We do not claim to have achieved that goal in every aspect of the software, but we strive for it. We welcome the use of this software as a component of commercial products. No royalty is required, but we do ask for an acknowledgement in product documentation, as described under LEGAL ISSUES. LEGAL ISSUES In plain English: 1. We don't promise that this software works. (But if you find any bugs, please let us know!) 2. You can use this software for whatever you want. You don't have to pay us. 3. You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it in a program, you must acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that you've used the IJG code. (Adjacent articles in that issue discuss MPEG motion picture compression, applications of JPEG, and related topics.) If you don't have the CACM issue handy, a PostScript file containing a revised version of Wallace's article is available at ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/ jpeg/wallace.ps.gz. The file (actually a preprint for an article that appeared in IEEE Trans. Consumer Electronics) omits the sample images that appeared in CACM, but it includes corrections and some added material. Note: the Wallace article is copyright ACM and IEEE, and it may not be used for commercial purposes. A somewhat less technical, more leisurely introduction to JPEG can be found in "The Data Compression Book" by Mark Nelson and Jean-loup Gailly, published by M&T Books (New York), 2nd ed. 1996, ISBN 1-55851-434-1. This book provides good explanations and example C code for a multitude of compression methods including JPEG. It is an excellent source if you are comfortable reading C code but don't know much about data compression in general. The book's JPEG sample code is far from industrial-strength, but when you are ready to look at a full implementation, you've got one here... In legalese: The best full description of JPEG is the textbook "JPEG Still Image Data Compression Standard" by William B. Pennebaker and Joan L. Mitchell, published by Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1993, ISBN 0-442-01272-1. Price US$59.95, 638 pp. The book includes the complete text of the ISO JPEG standards (DIS 10918-1 and draft DIS 10918-2). This is by far the most complete exposition of JPEG in existence, and we highly recommend it. The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation, either express or implied, with respect to this software, its quality, accuracy, merchantability, or fitness for a particular purpose. This software is provided "AS IS", and you, its user, assume the entire risk as to its quality and accuracy. The JPEG standard itself is not available electronically; you must order a paper copy through ISO or ITU. (Unless you feel a need to own a certified official copy, we recommend buying the Pennebaker and Mitchell book instead; it's much cheaper and includes a great deal of useful explanatory material.) This software is copyright (C) 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane. All Rights Reserved except as specified below. In the USA, copies of the standard may be ordered from ANSI Sales at (212)642-4900, or from Global Engineering Documents at (800) 854-7179. (ANSI doesn't take credit card orders, but Global does.) It's not cheap: as of 1992, ANSI was charging $95 for Part 1 and $47 for Part 2, plus 7% shipping/handling. The standard is divided into two parts, Part 1 being the actual specification, while Part 2 covers compliance testing methods. Part 1 is titled "Digital Compression and Coding of Continuous-tone Still Images, Part 1: Requirements and guidelines" and has document numbers ISO/IEC IS 10918-1, ITUT T.81. Part 2 is titled "Digital Compression and Coding of Continuous-tone Still Images, Part 2: Compliance testing" and has document numbers ISO/IEC IS 10918-2, ITU-T T.83. Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software (or portions thereof) for any purpose, without fee, subject to these conditions: (1) If any part of the source code for this software is distributed, then this README file must be included, with this copyright and no-warranty notice unaltered; and any additions, deletions, or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. (2) If only executable code is distributed, then the accompanying documentation must state that "this software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group". (3) Permission for use of this software is granted only if the user accepts full responsibility for any undesirable consequences; the authors accept NO LIABILITY for damages of any kind. These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the IJG code, not just to the unmodified library. If you use our work, you ought to acknowledge us. Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG author's name or company name in advertising or publicity relating to this software or products derived from it. This software may be referred to only as "the Independent JPEG Group's software". We specifically permit and encourage the use of this software as the basis of commercial products, provided that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the product vendor. ansi2knr.c is included in this distribution by permission of L. Peter Deutsch, sole proprietor of its copyright holder, Aladdin Enterprises of Menlo Park, CA. ansi2knr.c is NOT covered by the above copyright and conditions, but instead by the usual distribution terms of the Free Software Foundation; principally, that you must include source code if you redistribute it. (See the file ansi2knr.c for full details.) However, since ansi2knr.c is not needed as part of any program generated from the IJG code, this does not limit you more than the foregoing paragraphs do. The Unix configuration script "configure" was produced with GNU Autoconf. It is copyright by the Free Software Foundation but is freely distributable. The same holds for its supporting scripts (config.guess, config.sub, ltconfig, ltmain.sh). Another support script, install-sh, is copyright by M.I.T. but is also freely distributable. It appears that the arithmetic coding option of the JPEG spec is covered by patents owned by IBM, AT&T, and Mitsubishi. Hence arithmetic coding cannot legally be used without obtaining one or more licenses. For this reason, support for arithmetic coding has been removed from the free JPEG software. (Since arithmetic coding provides only a marginal gain over the unpatented Huffman mode, it is unlikely that very many implementations will support it.) So far as we are aware, there are no patent restrictions on the remaining code. The IJG distribution formerly included code to read and write GIF files. To avoid entanglement with the Unisys LZW patent, GIF reading support has been removed altogether, and the GIF writer has been simplified to produce "uncompressed GIFs". This technique does not use the LZW algorithm; the resulting GIF files are larger than usual, but are readable by all standard GIF decoders. We are required to state that "The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the Copyright property of CompuServe Incorporated. GIF(sm) is a Service Mark property of CompuServe Incorporated." REFERENCES We highly recommend reading one or more of these references before trying to understand the innards of the JPEG software. The best short technical introduction to the JPEG compression algorithm is Wallace, Gregory K. "The JPEG Still Picture Compression Standard", Communications of the ACM, April 1991 (vol. 34 no. 4), pp. 30-44. xi Some extensions to the original JPEG standard are defined in JPEG Part 3, a newer ISO standard numbered ISO/IEC IS 10918-3 and ITU-T T.84. IJG currently does not support any Part 3 extensions. The JPEG standard does not specify all details of an interchangeable file format. For the omitted details we follow the "JFIF" conventions, revision 1.02. A copy of the JFIF spec is available from: Literature Department C-Cube Microsystems, Inc. 1778 McCarthy Blvd. Milpitas, CA 95035 phone (408) 944-6300, fax (408) 944-6314 A PostScript version of this document is available by FTP at ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jfif.ps.gz. There is also a plain text version at ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jfif.txt.gz, but it is missing the figures. The TIFF 6.0 file format specification can be obtained by FTP from ftp://ftp.sgi.com/ graphics/tiff/TIFF6.ps.gz. The JPEG incorporation scheme found in the TIFF 6.0 spec of 3-June-92 has a number of serious problems. IJG does not recommend use of the TIFF 6.0 design (TIFF Compression tag 6). Instead, we recommend the JPEG design proposed by TIFF Technical Note #2 (Compression tag 7). Copies of this Note can be obtained from ftp.sgi.com or from ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/. It is expected that the next revision of the TIFF spec will replace the 6.0 JPEG design with the Note's design. Although IJG's own code does not support TIFF/JPEG, the free libtiff library uses our library to implement TIFF/JPEG per the Note. libtiff is available from ftp://ftp.sgi.com/graphics/tiff/. ARCHIVE LOCATIONS The "official" archive site for this software is ftp.uu.net (Internet address 192.48.96.9). The most recent released version can always be found there in directory graphics/jpeg. This particular version will be archived as ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jpegsrc.v6b.tar.gz. If you don't have direct Internet access, UUNET's archives are also available via UUCP; contact [email protected] for information on retrieving files that way. Numerous Internet sites maintain copies of the UUNET files. However, only ftp.uu.net is guaranteed to have the latest official version. You can also obtain this software in DOS-compatible "zip" archive format from the SimTel archives (ftp://ftp.simtel.net/pub/simtelnet/msdos/graphics/), or on CompuServe in the Graphics Support forum (GO CIS:GRAPHSUP), library 12 "JPEG Tools". Again, these versions may sometimes lag behind the ftp.uu.net release. The JPEG FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) article is a useful source of general information about JPEG. It is updated constantly and therefore is not included in this distribution. The FAQ is posted every two weeks to Usenet newsgroups comp.graphics.misc, news.answers, and other groups. It is available on the World Wide Web at http://www.faqs.org/faqs/jpeg-faq/ and other news.answers archive sites, including the official news.answers archive at rtfm.mit.edu: ftp://rtfm.mit.edu/pub/ usenet/news.answers/jpeg-faq/. If you don't have Web or FTP access, send e-mail to [email protected] with body send usenet/news.answers/jpeg-faq/part1 send usenet/news.answers/jpeg-faq/part2 RELATED SOFTWARE Numerous viewing and image manipulation programs now support JPEG. (Quite a few of them use this library to do so.) The JPEG FAQ described above lists some of the more popular free and shareware viewers, and tells where to obtain them on Internet. If you are on a Unix machine, we highly recommend Jef Poskanzer's free PBMPLUS software, which provides many useful operations on PPM-format image files. In particular, it can convert PPM images to and from a wide range of other formats, thus making cjpeg/djpeg considerably more useful. The latest version is distributed by the NetPBM group, and is available from numerous sites, notably ftp://wuarchive.wustl.edu/ graphics/graphics/packages/NetPBM/. Unfortunately PBMPLUS/NETPBM is not nearly as portable as the IJG software is; you are likely to have difficulty making it work on any non-Unix machine. A different free JPEG implementation, written by the PVRG group at Stanford, is available from ftp://havefun.stanford.edu/pub/jpeg/. This program is designed for research and experimentation rather than production use; it is slower, harder to use, and less portable than the IJG code, but it is easier to read and modify. Also, the PVRG code supports lossless JPEG, which we do not. (On the other hand, it doesn't do progressive JPEG.) Tom Lane Glenn Randers-Pehrson Willem van Schaik libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors: John Bowler Kevin Bracey Sam Bushell Magnus Holmgren Greg Roelofs Tom Tanner libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc. For the purposes of this copyright and license, “Contributing Authors” is defined as the following set of individuals: Andreas Dilger Dave Martindale Guy Eric Schalnat Paul Schmidt Tim Wegner FILE FORMAT WARS Some JPEG programs produce files that are not compatible with our library. The root of the problem is that the ISO JPEG committee failed to specify a concrete file format. Some vendors "filled in the blanks" on their own, creating proprietary formats that no one else could read. (For example, none of the early commercial JPEG implementations for the Macintosh were able to exchange compressed files.) The file format we have adopted is called JFIF (see REFERENCES). This format has been agreed to by a number of major commercial JPEG vendors, and it has become the de facto standard. JFIF is a minimal or "low end" representation. We recommend the use of TIFF/JPEG (TIFF revision 6.0 as modified by TIFF Technical Note #2) for "high end" applications that need to record a lot of additional data about an image. TIFF/JPEG is fairly new and not yet widely supported, unfortunately. The upcoming JPEG Part 3 standard defines a file format called SPIFF. SPIFF is interoperable with JFIF, in the sense that most JFIF decoders should be able to read the most common variant of SPIFF. SPIFF has some technical advantages over JFIF, but its major claim to fame is simply that it is an official standard rather than an informal one. At this point it is unclear whether SPIFF will supersede JFIF or whether JFIF will remain the de-facto standard. IJG intends to support SPIFF once the standard is frozen, but we have not decided whether it should become our default output format or not. (In any case, our decoder will remain capable of reading JFIF indefinitely.) Various proprietary file formats incorporating JPEG compression also exist. We have little or no sympathy for the existence of these formats. Indeed, one of the original reasons for developing this free software was to help force convergence on common, open format standards for JPEG files. Don't use a proprietary file format! TO DO The major thrust for v7 will probably be improvement of visual quality. The current method for scaling the quantization tables is known not to be very good at low Q values. We also intend to investigate block boundary smoothing, "poor man's variable quantization", and other means of improving quality-vs-file-size performance without sacrificing compatibility. The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied, including, without limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages, which may result from the use of the PNG Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee, subject to the following restrictions: 1. The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented. 2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source. 3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any source or altered source distribution. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically permit, without fee, and encourage the use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products. If you use this source code in a product, acknowledgment is not required but would be appreciated. ■ About zlib Library Copyright notice: (C) 1995-2004 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software. Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions: 1. In future versions, we are considering supporting some of the upcoming JPEG Part 3 extensions --- principally, variable quantization and the SPIFF file format. As always, speeding things up is of great interest. Please send bug reports, offers of help, etc. to [email protected]. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required. 2. ■ Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software. 3. About PNG Reference Library libpng versions 1.2.6, August 15, 2004, through 1.2.29, May 8, 2008, are Copyright (c) 2004, 2006-2008 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.2.5 with the following individual added to the list of Contributing Authors libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 - October 3, 2002, are Copyright (c) 2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors Mark Adler [email protected] If you use the zlib library in a product, we would appreciate *not* receiving lengthy legal documents to sign. The sources are provided for free but without warranty of any kind. The library has been entirely written by Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler; it does not include third-party code. If you redistribute modified sources, we would appreciate that you include in the file ChangeLog history information documenting your changes. Please read the FAQ for more information on the distribution of modified source versions. Simon-Pierre Cadieux Eric S. Raymond Gilles Vollant and with the following additions to the disclaimer: There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or against infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. This library is provided with all faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user. libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors: xii APPENDIX Cosmin Truta This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution. Jean-loup Gailly [email protected] RX-V3900_U-cv.fm Page 1 Friday, August 8, 2008 3:06 PM U RX-V3900 RX-V3900 AV Receiver OWNER’S MANUAL © 2008 Yamaha Corporation All rights reserved. Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI Printed in Malaysia WP55260 UC RX-V3900 The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual. Les nombres et lettres dans un cercle correspondent à ceux du mode d’emploi. ■ Front panel / Face avant A B C D E F G H I J K L PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT/ REC OUT MENU TONE CONTROL ENTER PRESET/TUNING/CH MEMORY SEARCH MODE STEREO/ MONO CATEGORY INFO BAND INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO VIDEO AUX PHONES OPTICAL USB ON OFF MASTER M N O P ■ Remote control / Boîtier de télécommande 1 D 2 3 STANDBY POWER V-AUX PHONO DOCK BD HD DVD DVD CD MD CD-R CBL SAT TV DVR VCR TUNER XM SIRIUS USB NET POWER POWER TV AV MULTI AMP 4 TV SOURCE 5 6 7 8 SELECT MACRO ID ZONE MODE F G H SYSTEM MEMORY 1 STATUS TITLE BAND 9 0 SETUP E 2 PRESET/CH VOLUME I MENU SRCH MODE J CAT. A-E ENTER SUBMENU RETURN MEMORY 4 3 PLAY INFO DISPLAY MUTE K L Q REC A CLASSICAL 1 TAG CLASSICAL 1 B C STEREO 5 LIVE/CLUB 2 PRG SELECT ENTERTAIN 3 STEREO 5 MOVIE 4 ENHANCER SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT 6 7 8 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT ENT 10 ENTERTAIN 3 MOVIE 4 ENHANCER SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT 6 7 8 HDMI OUT 0 M N 9 HDMI OUT 0 INFO LEVEL SLEEP MUTE AUDIO SEL AUDIO O TV VOL TV CH TV 3D DSP P INPUT LIVE/CLUB 2 R S Printed in Malaysia t WP55370